Amrita Vishwa Vidyapeetham

School of Engineering

Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering

Branch: Electronics and Communication Engineering
Vision of the Department

To provide a value-based learning environment for producing engineers with a blend of technical skills, moral values and
leadership qualities in the field of Electronics, Communication and Computing channelized towards technological
advancement to cater to the needs of the industry and the society.

Mission of the Department

M1: Achieving excellence in teaching and learning with an emphasis on fundamental knowledge and hands-on exposure to
match the state-of-the-art in technology.

M2: Providing an environment for core competency development and enhancing quality research in emerging areas.

M3: Facilitating professional growth to the students for higher education and career in industry and academia.

M4: Imbibing the essence of human values, ethics and professional skills to sustain socio- economic development.

Program Educational Objectives (PEOs)

PEO1: To integrate fundamental knowledge of basic science, mathematics and engineering to work on complex problems
in the field of electronics and communication engineering.

PEO2: To promote independent research and continuous learning by providing hands-on exposure in electronics, signal
processing and communication domains.

PEO3: To provide a platform to explore and pursue interests in diversified fields for a successful career.

PEO4: To nurture team spirit and leadership qualities with a sense of social responsibility and produce engineers with an
ability to integrate engineering and society.

Program Objectives
To understand the

PO1: principles of Electronics & Electronic Devices

PO2: design, analysis & prototyping of Electronic Circuits & Systems

PO3: development of Large Scale Integrated Circuits

PO4: principles of Computing & Embedded Systems

PO5: principles and Techniques of Signal Processing

PO6: principles of Communication Engineering

PO7: principles, design & analysis of Modern Communication Systems

Program Specific Outcomes (PSO)

PSO1: To design, develop and prototype Electronic Systems

POS2: To design and develop VLSI & Embedded Systems

PSO3: To design and analyse the performance of Modern Communication Systems

Course Outcome (CO)

Statements that describe what students are expected to know, and are able to do at the end of each course. These relate to the
skills, knowledge and behavior that students acquire in their progress through the course.

Program Outcomes (POs)

Program Outcomes are statements that describe what students are expected to know and be able to do upon graduating from
the Program. These relate to the skills, knowledge, attitude and behavior that students acquire through the program. National
Board for Accreditation (NBA) has defined the program outcomes for each discipline.

Program Outcomes for Engineering

1. Engineering knowledge: Apply the knowledge of mathematics, science, engineering fundamentals, and an
engineering specialization to the solution of complex engineering problems.
2. Problem analysis: Identify, formulate, review research literature, and analyze complex engineering problems reaching
substantiated conclusions using first principles of mathematics, natural sciences, and engineering sciences.
3. Design/development of solutions: Design solutions for complex engineering problems and design system
components or processes that meet the specified needs with appropriate consideration for the public health and safety,
and the cultural, societal, and environmental considerations.
4. Conduct investigations of complex problems: Use research-based knowledge and research methods including
design of experiments, analysis and interpretation of data, and synthesis of the information to provide valid
conclusions.
5. Modern tool usage: Create, select, and apply appropriate techniques, resources, and modern engineering and IT tools
including prediction and modeling to complex engineering activities with an understanding of the limitations.
6. The engineer and society: Apply reasoning informed by the contextual knowledge to assess societal, health, safety,
legal and cultural issues and the consequent responsibilities relevant to the professional engineering practice.
7. Environment and sustainability: Understand the impact of the professional engineering solutions in societal and
environmental contexts, and demonstrate the knowledge of, and need for sustainable development.
8. Ethics: Apply ethical principles and commit to professional ethics and responsibilities and norms of the engineering
practice.
9. Individual and team work: Function effectively as an individual, and as a member or leader in diverse teams, and
in multidisciplinary settings.
10. Communication: Communicate effectively on complex engineering activities with the engineering community and
with society at large, such as, being able to comprehend and write effective reports and design documentation, make
effective presentations, and give and receive clear instructions.
11. Project management and finance: Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of the engineering and management
principles and apply these to one’s own work, as a member and leader in a team, to manage projects and in
multidisciplinary environments.
12. Life-long learning: Recognize the need for, and have the preparation and ability to engage in independent and life-
long learning in the broadest context of technological change.
 ABBREVIATIONS USED IN THE CURRICULUM

Cat - Category
L - Lecture
T - Tutorial
P - Practical
Cr - Credits
AES - Aerospace Engineering
AIE - Computer Science and Engineering - Artificial Intelligence
BIO - Biology
CCE - Computer and Communication Engineering
CHE - Chemical Engineering
CHY - Chemistry
CSE - Computer Science and Engineering
CVL - Civil Engineering
CUL - Cultural Education
EAC - Electronics for Computer Engineering
ECE - Electronics and Communication Engineering
EEE - Electrical and Electronics Engineering
ELC - Electrical and Computer Engineering
ENGG - Engineering Sciences (including General, Core and Electives)
HUM - Humanities (including Languages and others)
IC - Integrated Circuit
MAT - Mathematics
MEE - Mechanical Engineering
MAOM - Mastery over Mind
MIMO - Multiple Input and Multiple Output
PHY - Physics
PRJ - Project Work (including Seminars)
SCI - Basic Sciences (including Mathematics)
VLSI - Very Large Scale Integration
 CURRICULUM

Semester I
Cat. Code Title LTP Credit
SCI 23ECE101 Nature Inspired Engineering 300 3
SCI 23MAT124 Engineering Mathematics I 310 4
ENGG 23ECE102 Problem Solving and Algorithmic Thinking 103 2
ENGG 23ECE103 Fundamentals of Electrical Engineering 300 3
SCI 23ECE104 Physics of Semiconductors 300 3
ENGG 23ECE105 Computer Programming 300 3
ENGG 23ECE181 Electrical Engineering Laboratory 003 1
ENGG 23ECE182 Computer Programming Laboratory 003 1
HUM 22ADM101 Foundations of Indian Heritage 201 2
HUM 22AVP103 Mastery Over Mind (MAOM) 102 2
TOTAL 32 24
Semester II

Cat. Code Title LTP Credit

SCI 23MAT130 Engineering Mathematics II 310 4
ENGG 23ECE111 Electronic Devices and Circuits 300 3
SCI/ENGG 23ECE112 Signal Processing I 300 3
23MAT132 Transforms
23ECE113 Signals and Systems
SCI/ENGG 23ECE114 Network Analysis 300 3
23MAT127 Laplace Transforms
23ECE115 Circuit Analysis
ENGG 23ECE183 Signal Processing-I Laboratory 003 1
ENGG 23ECE184 Introduction to Internet of Things 003 1
ENGG 23ECE185 Electronic Devices & Circuits Laboratory 003 1
ENG 23ENG101 Technical Communication 203 3
HUM 22ADM111 Glimpses of Glorious India 201 2
TOTAL 29 21
Semester III

Cat. Code Title LTP Credit

ENGG 23ECE201 Digital Electronics 300 3
ENGG 23ECE202 Analog Electronics I 300 3
ENGG 23ECE203 Signal Processing II 300 3
ENGG 23ECE204 Electromagnetic Theory and Waves 310 4
SCI/ENGG 23ECE205 Foundations of Data Science 310 4
23MAT223 Probability and Statistics
23ECE206 Data Processing
ENGG 23ECE281 Digital Electronics Laboratory 003 1
ENGG 23ECE282 Analog Electronics Laboratory 003 1
ENGG 23ECE283 Digital Signal Processing Laboratory 003 1
HUM Amrita Value Programme-1 100 1
SCI 23CHY109 Engineering Chemistry B 210 3
SCI 23ENV300 Environmental Science P/F
HUM 23LSE201 Life Skills for Engineers I 102 P/F
TOTAL 33 24
 Semester IV

Cat. Code Title LTP Credit

ENGG 23ECE211 Microcontrollers & Interfacing 300 3
ENGG 23ECE212 Analog Electronics II 300 3
SCI/ENGG 23ECE213 Communication Theory
23MAT227 Random Variables and Processes 310 4
23ECE214 Analog Communication
ENGG 23ECE215 Control Systems 310 4
SCI/ENGG Machine Learning 300 3
23ECE216 23MAT218 Optimization Techniques
23ECE217 Machine Learning Models
ENGG 23ECE284 Microcontrollers & Interfacing Laboratory 003 1
ENGG 23ECE285 Machine Learning Laboratory 003 1
ENGG 23ECE286 Circuits and Communication Laboratory 003 1
HUM 23LSE211 Life Skills for Engineers II 102 2
HUM Amrita Value Program 2 100 1
HUM 23LAW300 Indian Constitution P/F
TOTAL 31 23
Semester V

Cat. Code Title

ENGG 23ECE301 Computer Systems and Architecture 300 3
ENGG 23ECE302 VLSI Design 300 3
ENGG 23ECE303 Radio Frequency and Microwave Engineering 300 3
ENGG 23ECE304 Digital Communication 310 4
ENGG Professional Elective I 300 3
PRJ 23ECE381 Open Laboratory I 003 1
ENGG 23ECE382 Radio Frequency and Microwave Laboratory 003 1
ENGG 23ECE383 VLSI Design Laboratory 003 1
ENGG 23ECE384 Communication Systems Laboratory 003 1
HUM 23LSE301 Life Skills for Engineers III 102 2
ENGG 23LIV390 Live-in - Lab I 3
TOTAL [+3] 32 22
Semester VI

Cat. Code Title

ENGG 23ECE311 Wireless Communication & Networks 300 3
ENGG 23ECE312 Computer Networks and Protocols 300 3
ENGG 23ECE313 Embedded Systems 300 3
ENGG Professional Elective II 300 3
ENGG Professional Elective III 300 3
PRJ 23ECE385 Open Laboratory II 006 2
ENGG 23ECE386 Wireless Communication and Networks Laboratory 003 1
ENGG 23ECE387 Embedded Systems Laboratory 003 1
HUM 23LSE311 Life Skills for Engineers IV 102 2
ENGG 23LIV490 Live-in –Lab II 3
TOTAL [+3] 31 21
 Semester VII

Cat. Code Title LTP Credit

ENGG Professional Elective IV 300 3
ENGG Professional Elective V 300 3
ENGG Professional Elective VI 300 3
PRJ 23ECE498 Project Phase I 0 0 24 8
Free Elective 200 2
ENGG 23ECE497 Technical Writing P/F
TOTAL 35 19

Semester VIII

Cat. Code Title LTP Credit

PRJ 23ECE499 Project Phase II 0 0 18 6
TOTAL 18 6

TOTAL CREDITS 160

PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVES
Wireless Communication

Cat. Code Title LTP Credit

ENGG 23ECE466 Cellular Mobile Communications 300 3
ENGG 23ECE321 MIMO and Multicarrier Systems 300 3
ENGG 23ECE467 Information Theory and Coding 300 3
ENGG 23ECE322 Modeling and Simulation of Communication Systems 300 3
ENGG 23ECE323 Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing 300 3
ENGG 23ECE468 Signal Estimation and Detection 300 3
ENGG 23ECE324 Satellite Communication 300 3
ENGG 23ECE325 Optical Communication 300 3
ENGG 23ECE469 Wireless Local Area Networks 300 3
ENGG 23ECE470 Performance Evaluation of Networks and Computing Systems 300 3
ENGG 23ECE326 Molecular Communications 300 3
ENGG 23ECE471 Quantum Information Theory 300 3
ENGG 23ECE327 5G Mobile Communication and Networks 300 3
VLSI

Cat. Code Title LTP Credit

ENGG 23ECE331 Analog IC Design 300 3
ENGG 23ECE332 Digital IC Design 300 3
ENGG 23ECE333 Functional Verification 300 3
ENGG 23ECE334 Physical Design of ICs 300 3
ENGG 23ECE335 Mixed Signal IC Design 300 3
ENGG 23ECE336 VLSI Testing and Testability 300 3
ENGG 23ECE337 System on Chip 300 3
ENGG 23ECE338 VLSI Fabrication Technology 300 3
ENGG 23ECE339 Semiconductor Memories 300 3
ENGG 23ECE340 FPGA based System Design 300 3
ENGG 23ECE341 Hardware Security and Trust 300 3
ENGG 23ECE342 VLSI System Design 300 3
Devices and Circuits

Cat. Code Title LTP Credit

ENGG 23ECE351 Design of ICs for Optical Communication 300 3
ENGG 23ECE352 Optoelectronic Integrated Circuit Design 300 3
ENGG 23ECE353 Optoelectronic Materials and Devices 300 3
ENGG 23ECE354 Radio Frequency Integrated Circuits 300 3
ENGG 23ECE362 Microwave Circuits for Wireless Communications 300 3
ENGG 23ECE363 Design of mmWave Circuits and Systems 300 3
ENGG 23ECE355 IC Design for Sensor Systems 300 3
ENGG 23ECE356 Microelectromechanical Devices 300 3
ENGG 23ECE357 Energy Harvesting Technologies and Circuits 300 3
ENGG 23ECE358 FinFET Technology 300 3
ENGG 23ECE359 Nanoelectronics 300 3
ENGG 23ECE360 Energy Materials 300 3
ENGG 23ECE361 Thin Electronics Films 300 3
Embedded Systems

Cat. Code Title LTP Credit

ENGG 23ECE431 Operating Systems 300 3

ENGG 23ECE432 Real Time Systems 300 3
ENGG 23ECE433 MIPS Architecture 300 3
ENGG 23ECE434 Parallel and Pipelined based Computer Architecture 300 3
ENGG 23ECE435 Parallel Computing 300 3
ENGG 23ECE436 Embedded Systems for Robotics 300 3
ENGG 23ECE437 Multicore Architecture 300 3
ENGG 23ECE438 Embedded Automotive Systems 300 3
ENGG 23ECE439 Real Time Operating Systems 300 3
ENGG 23ECE440 FPGA based Embedded Systems 300 3

Radio Frequency and Microwave Engineering

Cat. Code Title LTP Credit

ENGG 23ECE371 Smart Antenna and Adaptive Beamforming 300 3

ENGG 23ECE372 Computational Electromagnetics 300 3
ENGG 23ECE373 Radar Systems 300 3
ENGG 23ECE472 Remote Sensing Systems 300 3
ENGG 23ECE374 Biomedical Applications of RF Waves 300 3
ENGG 23ECE375 RFID Systems 300 3
ENGG 23ECE376 Software Defined Radio Architecture 300 3
ENGG 23ECE354 Radio Frequency Integrated Circuits 300 3

Signal Processing

Cat. Code Title LTP Credit

ENGG 23ECE441 Agent Based Modeling 300 3

ENGG 23ECE442 Computer Vision 300 3
ENGG 23ECE443 Biomedical Signal Processing 300 3
ENGG 23ECE444 Natural Language Processing 300 3
ENGG 23ECE445 AI in Speech Signal Processing 300 3
ENGG 23ECE446 Image Processing 300 3
ENGG 23ECE447 Multirate Signal Processing and Wavelets 300 3
ENGG 23ECE448 Statistical Signal Processing 300 3
ENGG 23ECE449 Adaptive Signal Processing 300 3
Common Electives

Cat. Code Title LTP Credit

ENGG 23ECE456 Sensor Networks 300 3

ENGG 23ECE450 Deep Learning 300 3
ENGG 23ECE451 Reinforcement Learning 300 3
ENGG 23ECE452 Internet of Things 300 3
ENGG 23ECE453 Blockchain Technology 300 3
ENGG 23ECE454 Understanding ICT Standardisation: Principles and Practices 300 3
ENGG 23ECE457 System Engineering 300 3

Other Electives

Cat. Code Title LTP Credit

ENGG 23ECE461 Software Defined Networks 300 3

ENGG 23ECE462 Information Security 300 3
ENGG 23ECE463 Neuroengineering 300 3
ENGG 23ECE474 Vehicular Communication and Networks 300 3
ENGG 23ECE475 Automotive Systems 300 3
ENGG 23ECE476 Electric Vehicles 300 3
ENGG 23ECE455 Robotic System Design 300 3
ENGG 23ECE477 Cyber Physical Systems 300 3
ENGG 23ECE473 Physical Chemistry of Materials and Processes 300 3

Evaluation Pattern
Assessment Component Weightage
Theory and Lab Integrated Theory Lab Courses (LTP: 0 0 X //1 0 X)
Courses
Continuous Assessment 30 40
Mid Term Exam 30 20
End Sem/Project 40 40

 Continuous assessment can be quiz/assignment/mix of quiz and assignment totaling up to four (4)
 List of courses in Amrita Value Programme I & II

Course Code Title L-T-P Credits

22ADM201 Strategic Lessons from Mahabharatha 1-0-0 1

22ADM211 Leadership from Ramayana 1-0-0 1
22AVP210 Kerala Mural Art and Painting 1-0-0 1
22AVP218 Yoga Therapy and Lessons 1-0-0 1
22AVP212 Introduction to Traditional Indian Systems of 1-0-0 1
Medicine
22AVP201 Amma’s Life and Message to the modern world 1-0-0 1

22AVP204 Lessons from the Upanishads 1-0-0 1

22AVP205 Message of the Bhagavad Gita 1-0-0 1
22AVP206 Life and Message of Swami Vivekananda 1-0-0 1
22AVP207 Life and Teachings of Spiritual Masters of India 1-0-0 1
22AVP208 Insights into Indian Arts and Literature 1-0-0 1
22AVP213 Traditional Fine Arts of India 1-0-0 1
22AVP214 Principles of Worship in India 1-0-0 1
22AVP215 Temple Mural Arts in Kerala 1-0-0 1
22AVP218 Insights into Indian Classical Music 1-0-0 1
22AVP219 Insights into Traditional Indian Painting 1-0-0 1
22AVP220 Insights into Indian Classical Dance 1-0-0 1
22AVP221 Indian Martial Arts and Self Defense 1-0-0 1
22AVP209 Yoga and Meditation 1-0-0 1

PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVES UNDER SCIENCE STREAM

CHEMISTRY
Cat. Course Code Title LTP Credit
SCI 23CHY240 Computational Chemistry and Molecular Modelling 300 3
SCI 23CHY241 Electrochemical Energy Systems and Processes 300 3
SCI 23CHY242 Fuels and Combustion 300 3
SCI 23CHY243 Green Chemistry and Technology 300 3
SCI 23CHY244 Instrumental Methods of Analysis 300 3
SCI 23CHY245 Batteries and Fuel Cells 300 3
SCI 23CHY246 Corrosion Science 300 3
PHYSICS
SCI 23PHY240 Advanced Classical Dynamics 300 3
SCI 23PHY241 Electrical Engineering Materials 300 3
SCI 23PHY242 Physics of Lasers and Applications 300 3
SCI 23PHY243 Concepts of Nanophysics and Nanotechnology 300 3
SCI 23PHY244 Physics of Semiconductor Devices 300 3
SCI 23PHY245 Astrophysics 300 3
Mathematics
SCI 23MAT240 Statistical Inference 300 3
SCI 23MAT241 Introduction to Game Theory 300 3
SCI 23MAT242 Numerical Methods and Optimization 300 3
FREE ELECTIVES
FREE ELECTIVES OFFERED UNDER MANAGEMENT STREAM
Cat. Course Code Title LTP Credit
HUM 23MNG331 Financial Management 300 3
HUM 23MNG332 Supply Chain Management 300 3
HUM 23MNG333 Marketing Management 300 3
HUM 23MNG334 Project Management 300 3
HUM 23MNG335 Enterprise Management 300 3
HUM 23MNG336 Operations Research 300 3
HUM 23MEE321 Industrial Engineering 300 3
HUM 23MEE322 Managerial Statistics 300 3
HUM 23MEE323 Total Quality Management 300 3
HUM 23MEE324 Lean Manufacturing 300 3
HUM 23CSE321 Software Project Management 300 3
HUM 23CSE322 Financial Engineering 300 3
HUM 23CSE323 Engineering Economic Analysis 300 3
HUM 23CSE324 Information Systems 300 3

FREE ELECTIVES OFFERED UNDER HUMANITIES / SOCIAL SCIENCE STREAMS

Cat. Course Code Title LTP Credit
HUM 23CUL230 Achieving Excellence in Life - An Indian Perspective 200 2
HUM 23CUL231 Excellence in Daily Life 200 2
HUM 23CUL232 Exploring Science and Technology in Ancient India 200 2
HUM 23CUL233 Yoga Psychology 200 2
HUM 23ENG230 Business Communication 103 2
HUM 23ENG231 Indian Thought through English 200 2
HUM 23ENG232 Insights into Life through English Literature 200 2
HUM 23ENG233 Technical Communication 200 2
HUM 23ENG234 Indian Short Stories in English 200 2
HUM 23FRE230 Proficiency in French Language (Lower) 200 2
HUM 23FRE231 Proficiency in French Language (Higher) 200 2
HUM 23GER230 German for Beginners I 200 2
HUM 23GER231 German for Beginners II 200 2
HUM 23GER232 Proficiency in German Language (Lower) 200 2
HUM 23GER233 Proficiency in German Language (Higher) 200 2
HUM 23HIN230 Hindi I 200 2
HUM 23HIN231 Hindi II 200 2
HUM 23HUM230 Emotional Intelligence 200 2
HUM Glimpses into the Indian Mind - the Growth of Modern
23HUM231 India 200 2
HUM 23HUM232 Glimpses of Eternal India 200 2
HUM 23HUM233 Glimpses of Indian Economy and Polity 200 2
HUM 23HUM234 Health and Lifestyle 200 2
HUM 23HUM235 Indian Classics for the Twenty-first Century 200 2
HUM 23HUM236 Introduction to India Studies 200 2
HUM 23HUM237 Introduction to Sanskrit Language and Literature 200 2
HUM 23HUM238 National Service Scheme 200 2
HUM 23HUM239 Psychology for Effective Living 200 2
HUM 23HUM240 Psychology for Engineers 200 2
HUM 23HUM241 Science and Society - An Indian Perspective 200 2
HUM 23HUM242 The Message of Bhagwat Gita 200 2
HUM 23HUM243 The Message of the Upanishads 200 2
HUM 23HUM244 Understanding Science of Food and Nutrition 200 2
HUM 23HUM245 Service Learning 200 2
HUM 23JAP230 Proficiency in Japanese Language (Lower) 200 2
HUM 23JAP231 Proficiency in Japanese Language (Higher) 200 2
HUM 23KAN230 Kannada I 200 2
HUM 23KAN231 Kannada II 200 2
HUM 23MAL230 Malayalam I 200 2
HUM 23MAL231 Malayalam II 200 2
HUM 23SAN230 Sanskrit I 200 2
HUM 23SAN231 Sanskrit II 200 2
HUM 23SWK230 Corporate Social Responsibility 200 2
HUM 23SWK231 Workplace Mental Health 200 2
HUM 23TAM230 Tamil I 200 2
HUM 23TAM231 TAMIL II 200 2
 SEMESTER I

23ECE101 Nature Inspired Engineering L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

(Pre-requisite: Nil)

Course Objectives

 To provide an understanding of nature from an engineering perspective

 To enable the study of engineering systems inspired by nature
 To motivate the development of technological ideas based on nature

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: understand the principles of systems in nature

CO2: understand engineering principles that are derived from nature
CO3: identify and ideate technological concepts inspired by nature
CO4: apply the concepts learnt to address simple engineering problems

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO2 PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 3
CO
CO1 3 1 1
CO2 3 2 1 1
CO3 2 3 1 2
CO4 2 3 1 2

Syllabus

The course will consist of discussions of case studies, broadly classified into three groups of a minimum of 5 each:

Unit 1
Introduction – Biological inspiration; Common characteristics of natural and engineered systems; Examples - Bullet train
shape / Kingfisher’s beak (helping to reduce aerodynamic stress); Beehive structure (evaporative cooling and natural
ventilation); Whale fin structure / Wind turbine blades (role of tubercules); Velcro tape / Hooks and loops (plants); Golden
ratio in nature / Fibonacci numbers (ratio of dimensional properties)

Unit II
Biomimetics – Mimicking nature; Examples - Gene Therapy / Immunotherapy; Dam / Beavers (structural engineering);
Aerodynamics / Flight / Birds (Wings, heavier-than-air flight, Humming Bird); Earthworm / Self-Cleaning by means of
small electric currents; Lizards / locomotion (inter-atomic bonding); Lizards – change in direction of hair, with no stickiness
/ Scotch tape; Bones / Material shaping

Unit III
Bio-inspired Innovations - Control Theory / Feedback / Biomechanisms; Digital Electronics / Human logic; Echolocation /
Dolphins / Bats (echolocation); Artificial Intelligence / Neural Networks;
Textbooks:
1. Biomimicry: Innovation Inspired by Nature: Benyus J P, Mariner Books, 2002; ISBN 9780060533229.
2. The Shark's Paintbrush: Biomimicry and How Nature is Inspiring Innovation: Harman J., White Cloud Press, 2013;
ISBN 978-1935952848
3. Biomimicry Innovation Inspired by Nature, Matheney B., 2023
References:
1. Engineering Education for the Next Generation – A Nature–Inspired Approach: Stier S C., W W Norton & Co., 2020;
ISBN 978-0393713770
2. Biomimicry: When Nature Inspires Amazing Inventions: Menu S, Walker E & Waters A, Triangle Square Publishers,
2020; ISBN 1644210185

Other resources:
1. https://tinyurl.com/Janine-01
2. https://tinyurl.com/Pawlyn-01
3. https://tinyurl.com/Biomimicry-01
4. https://asknature.org/

23MAT124 Engineering Mathematics-I L-T-P-C: 3-1-0-4

(Pre-requisite: Nil)

Course Objectives

 To strengthen the concepts of single variable calculus and linear ODEs

 To provide the fundamentals of matrix algebra
 To introduce the concepts and importance of Eigen values and Eigen vectors

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: solve problems involving limits, derivatives and ODEs

CO2: model and solve system of linear equations
CO3: characterize systems using Eigen values and vectors
CO4: apply the mathematical concepts learnt, to engineering problems

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO2 PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 3
CO
CO1 3 1
CO2 3 2 2
CO3 3 2 1
CO4 3 2 2

Syllabus

Unit I
Calculus: Limit and Continuity: Limit of Functions, Continuous functions, Discontinuities, Monotonic Functions, Infinite
Limits; Derivatives, Integration- Definite Integrals, Mean value theorem for definite integrals, Fundamental Theorem of
Calculus, Integration Techniques. Examples of applications of the above in solving real engineering problems.

Unit II
Differential Equations: Ordinary differential equations (ODE), Linear differential equations, Modelling problems: Electric
circuits; Second order Differential Equations, Homogeneous Systems and Non-homogeneous with constant coefficients,
System of ODEs, Basic concepts and theory; Examples of applications of the above in solving real engineering problem.

Unit III
Matrix Algebra: Review - System of linear Equations, linear independence; Properties of Matrices, Symmetric and Skew
Symmetric Matrices, Hermitian and Skew Hermitian Matrices and Orthogonal matrices; Eigen values and Eigen vectors;
Positive definite, negative definite and indefinite, Diagonalization and Orthogonal Diagonalization; Examples of
applications of the above in solving real engineering problem.

Textbook(s)
1. E Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley and Sons, Tenth Edition, 2018.
2. Srimanta Pal and Subhodh C Bhunia ‘Engineering Mathematics’, John Wiley and Sons, 2012, Ninth Edition.
Reference(s)

1. Monty J. Strauss, Gerald J. Bradley and Karl J. Smith ‘Calculus’, 3rd Edition, 2002.
2. Dennis G. Zill and Michael R.Cullen, Advanced Engineering Mathematics by, second edition, CBS Publishers,
2012.
 23ECE102 Problem Solving and Algorithmic Thinking L-T-P-C: 1-0-3-2
(Pre-requisite: Nil)
Course Objectives

 To provide insight into computational logic

 To introduce the fundamentals of computational thinking
 To introduce computational approach to problem solving

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: understand the concepts of computational logic

CO2: develop algorithmic thinking
CO3: identify algorithms and their suitability
CO4: apply algorithms to solve a problem

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO2 PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 3
CO
CO1 2 3
CO2 2 2
CO3 2 2 2
CO4 3 2 2

Syllabus

Unit I
Introduction -Computational thinking, corner stones of computational thinking; characteristics of algorithms; problem
solving strategies, computational logic, Boolean expressions and logic, data organization, variables, list, arrays and strings.

Unit II

Algorithmic thinking – name binding, sequence, selection, repetition and modularization; Modeling tools-state diagrams,
pseudocodes and flowcharts – code tracing - problem solving with algorithms – merging, searching, sorting and recursions-
brute force and greedy algorithms

Unit III

Introduction to analysis of algorithms - Algorithmic complexity, linear, logarithmic and exponential computational
complexity – Introduction to Python programming.

Textbook(s)
1. Riley DD, Hunt KA. Computational Thinking for the Modern Problem Solver. CRC press; 2014 Mar 27.
Reference(s)
1 . Ferragina P, Luccio F. Computational Thinking: First Algorithms, Then Code. Springer; 2018.
2 . Beecher K. Computational Thinking: A beginner's guide to Problem-solving and Programming. BCS Learning &
Development Limited; 2017.

Lab Syllabus

Define a system which might cover most of the experiments. It is possible to define at most 2 systems for whole
experiments of this course. In the beginning of the lab class, system level explanation must be given to the students.

Examination/evaluation for system level should have higher weightage of marks. They need to develop system (at least
prototype) at the end, not on breadboard.

Example:
Develop logic/flow chart/algorithm for a multifunctional calculator.
Model different circuit topologies with dependent sources and analyze resulting voltage and current sources.
Experiment Contents:
1. Familiarization with flowgorithm
2. Visualization of logical flow in flowgorithm using addition and subtraction of two numbers.
3. Exposure to various formatting methods using problems on addition, subtraction, calculation of area of circle and
identification of odd even numbers.
4. Arithmetic operations on vectors and matrices.
5. Solving Quadratic equations and generation of Fibonacci numbers
6. Modelling Simple resistive circuits
7. Use of arrays in solving problems.
8. Familiarization with strings.
9. Searching (linear and binary)
10. Sorting (bubble sort, insertion sort and selection sort)
11. Modelling circuits with dependent sources.

Textbook(s)
1. Gaddis, Tony. Starting Out with Programming Logic and Design, 5/e. Pearson Education India, 2021.

Reference(s)
1. Ferragina P, Luccio F. Computational Thinking: First Algorithms, Then Code. Springer; 2018.
2. Beecher K. Computational Thinking: A beginner's guide to Problem-solving and Programming. BCS Learning &
Development Limited; 2017.

23ECE103 Fundamentals of Electrical Engineering L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

(Pre-requisite: Nil)

Course Objectives

 To provide an understanding of fundamental electrical quantities and their measurements

 To help in the use of analytical tools for circuit analysis
 To provide an understanding of electromagnetic machines

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: understand fundamental electrical quantities

CO2: understand the principles of electrical measurements
CO3: analyse ac and dc circuits
CO4: understand the operation of electromagnetic machines

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO2 PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 3
CO
CO1 3
CO2 3 2 2
CO3 3 3 2
CO4 3

Syllabus

Unit I
Introduction: ac, dc, Voltage, Current and Power, Current and Voltage sources, Dependent and Independent; Resistance,
Inductance (self & Mutual), Capacitance, Series and parallel combination of R, L, C components, Wheatstone’s bridge.
Power and Energy - Alternating voltage and current, Amplitude, phase, Average and RMS values of waveforms. Complex
power, Power factor for purely resistive, RL, RC and RLC circuits.

Unit II
AC and DC circuit Analysis – Ohm’s law, Kirchhoff’s voltage and Current law, Voltage divider and Current divider Rule,
star delta transformation, Mesh and Nodal Analysis, Source transformation, Superposition Theorem, Thevenin &
Norton’s Theorems, and Maximum power transfer theorem.

Unit III
Electrical Machines – Construction, Principle of operation and applications, DC generator and DC Motors. Significance of
back EMF and EMF equation. Types of DC motors, Speed, Torque, Torque-Speed characteristics, Load characteristics,
Construction and working principles of three phase induction motor and single phase transformer..

Textbook(s)
1. Charles K,Alexander, Mattew N.O.Saidiku, Fundamentals of Electrical Circuits by Tata McGraw Hill company
2. D.P. Kothari and Nagrath “Electrical Machines”, McGraw Hill 2017

Reference(s)
1. Vincent DelToro, “Electrical engineering Fundamentals”, PHI second edition 2011
2. S. K. Bhattcharya, “Basic Electrical and Electronics Engineering”, Pearson, 2012.

23ECE104 Physics of Semiconductors L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

(Pre-requisite: Nil)

Course Objectives

 To provide an understanding of crystal structure

 To help appreciate the band gap nature of semiconductors
 To introduce the concepts of transport phenomena in semiconductors

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: understand the crystal structure of semiconductors

CO2: understand semiconductors based on energy band gap
CO3: understand current flow in semiconductors
CO4: understand the behaviour of PN junctions & MOSFETs

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO2 PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 3
CO
CO1 3 1
CO2 3 1
CO3 3 1
CO4 3 2

Syllabus

Unit I
Crystal structures - Crystal lattice, basis, unit cell and lattice parameters, crystal systems and Bravais lattices – Structure and
packing fractions of SC, BCC, FCC, diamond cubic, NaCL; ZnS structures – crystal planes, directions and Miller indices,
Imperfections in crystals.

Unit II
Classical free electron theory - Expression for electrical conductivity, Thermal conductivity, expression - Quantum free
electron theory; Tunneling – degenerate states, Fermi- Dirac statistics, Density of energy states, Energy bands in solids;
Electron effective mass – concept of hole Intrinsic Semiconductors, Energy band diagram, direct and indirect band gap
semiconductors; Carrier concentration in intrinsic and extrinsic semiconductors – Variation of carrier concentration with
temperature,; Carrier transport in Semiconductors- Drift, mobility and diffusion, Hall effect.

Unit III
Basic structure of PN junctions – Built-in-potential, Space Charge region, electric field across junction, Forward and reverse
bias, band diagram, minority carrier distribution across junction in forward and reverse bias, boundary conditions; Basics of
MOSFET – Structure of MOSFET, band diagram of MOS, Ideal MOS Capacitor, FET operation and their applications.

Textbook(s)
1. R.F.Pierret. Semiconductor Device Fundamentals. Pearson (Indian Edition), 2006.
 2. Donald Neeman, Semiconductor physics and devices, Basic principles, McGraw-Hill International, 3 Edition.

Reference(s)
1. Charles Kittel, Introduction to Solid State Physics, Wiley India Edition, 2019.
2. Jasprit Singh, Semiconductor Optoelectronics: Physics and Technology, McGraw-Hill Education (Indian Edition),
2019.
3. Steetman and Banerjee, Solid State Electronic Devices, PHI, 2014

23ECE105 Computer Programming L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

(Pre-requisite: Nil)
Course Objectives

 To provide understanding of basic programming in C

 To provide knowledge on programming constructs
 To enable development of modular programs

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: understand the syntax and semantics of programming

CO2: apply appropriate programming constructs
CO3: analyze programs and debug errors
CO4: develop programs to solve specific problems

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO2 PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 3
CO
CO1 2 2
CO2 2 2 2
CO3 2 2 2 2
CO4 3 2 3 2
Syllabus

Unit I
Introduction- structure of C program: data types, storage classes, constants, enumeration constant, keywords, variables,
operators, expressions, input/output statements, assignment statement conditional statements; number system: binary,
decimal, hexadecimal, conversion between number system types; Introduction to tools – IDE, compilation, linking,
debugging.

Unit II
Control flow statements - if-else, Looping – for, while, do-while, switch case, break and continue, goto and labels; Functions
– function prototype, function definition, function call, built-in functions, recursion; Arrays – declaration, initialization, one-
dimensional, matrix, multi-dimensional, array operations; string operations – length, compare, concatenate, copy. Recursion
– recursive definition, recursive solution, designing recursive functions, limitations of recursion.

Unit III
Pointers – pointer operators, pointer arithmetic, array and pointers, array of pointers, parameters passing – pass by value,
pass by reference; Structures – simple structure, nested structure, pointers and structure, array of structures, self-referential
structures, dynamic memory allocation, typedef; Input-output – command line arguments; File operations – types, sequential
access, random access.

Textbook(s)
1. Kernighan, B.W and Ritchie, D.M, “The C Programming language”, Second Edition, Pearson Education, 2015.
2. Forouzan BA, Gilberg RF. Computer Science: A structured programming approach using C. Third Edition,
Cengage Learning; 2006.

Reference(s)
1. Byron Gottfried, Programming With C, Fourth Edition, McGraw Hill, 2018.
2. Greg Perry and Dean Miller, “C Programming Absolute Beginner’s Guide”, Que Publishing; 3rd edition, 2013.
 3. JeriHanly and Elliot Koffman. Problem Solving and Program Design in C. Fifth Edition, Addison Wesley
(Pearson); 2007.

23ECE181 Electrical Engineering Laboratory L-T-P-C: 0-0-3-1

(Pre-requisite: Nil)

Course Objectives

 To provide hands-on experience of identifying electrical components and their specifications

 To help understand circuit theorems using practical circuits and measurements
 To demonstrate the principles of electrical machines

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: identify electrical components and their specifications

CO2: measure electrical quantities such as voltage and current
CO3: verify theorems for dc circuits
CO4: understand the operation of electrical machines

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO2 PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 3
CO
CO1 3 2 2 1
CO2 3 2 2 1
CO3 3 2 2
CO4 3 2 2

Syllabus

Define a system which might cover most of the experiments. It is possible to define at most 2 systems for whole
experiments of this course. In the beginning of the lab class, system level explanation must be given to the students.

Examination/evaluation for system level should have higher weightage of marks. They need to develop system (at least
prototype) at the end, not on breadboard.

Example:
Design a circuit to validate most of the theorems listed in the experiment contents by changing the loads (appliances such
as different power rating of lamp or others)

 Design Wheatstone bridge and modify one arm with one unknown resister (like sensor) and find the required load.

Experiment Contents:
1. Identification of electrical components and their specifications.
2. Familiarization of equipments like Multimeter, Function generator, DC Power supply and DSO, etc.
3. Verification of Kirchhoff’s laws.
4. Verification of Superposition theorem
5. Verification of Thevenin and Norton theorems
6. Speed control of a D.C motor.
7. Single phase transformers – turns ratio measurement, Step down/up
8. Measurement of unknown resistance using Wheatstone bridge.
9. System Development (Mandatory)
Textbook(s)
1. Hughes, Electrical & Electronic Technology, Pearson Education India, 2010.
2. D. P. Kothari and I. J. Nagrath, Electrical Machines, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2017
Reference(s)
1. Advanced Electrical Technology by H. Cotton, Reem Publication Pvt. Ltd, 2011
2. Electrical Engineering fundamentals by Vincent Deltoro, Pearson Education India, 2015
23ECE182 Computer Programming Laboratory L-T-P-C: 0-0-3-1
(Pre-requisite: Nil)

Course Objectives

 To provide hands-on exposure to programming in C

 To facilitate usage of Integrated Development Environment (IDE)
 To enable develop and debug programs

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: write and execute simple programs

CO2: employ IDE for compiling and debugging
CO3: handle dynamic input-output operations
CO4: develop programs for specific applications

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO2 PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 3
CO
CO1 2 3 3 3 2
CO2 2 3 3 3 2
CO3 2 3 3 3 2
CO4 3 2 3 3 3 2 2

Syllabus

Define a system which might cover most of the experiments. It is possible to define at most 2 systems for whole
experiments of this course. In the beginning of the lab class, system level explanation must be given to the students.

Examination/evaluation for system level should have higher weightage of marks. They need to develop system (at least
prototype) at the end, not on breadboard.

Example:
Let them develop something which either dept. can use, admin can make use of, finance dept. can make use of or they
themselves can make use of.

Experiment Contents:
1. Practice of Simple C Programs.
2. Control statements
3. Array concept
4. 1-D and multi-dimensional arrays operation
5. Strings and sorting of strings
6. Various types of functions and recursive functions
7. Pointers, Strings and pointers
8. Structures
9. File input/output and command line arguments
10. File handling and Dynamic memory allocation

Textbook(s)

1. Kernighan, B.W and Ritchie, D.M, “The C Programming language”, Second Edition, Pearson Education, 2015.
2. Byron S. Gottfried, “Schaum’s Outline of Theory and Problems of Programming with C”, McGraw-Hill
Education, 1996.

Reference(s)

1. Byron Gottfried. Programming With C. Fourth Edition, McGraw Hill, 2018.

2. Greg Perry and Dean Miller, “C Programming Absolute Beginner’s Guide”, Que Publishing; 3rd edition, 2013.
 3. JeriHanly and Elliot Koffman. Problem Solving and Program Design in C. Fifth Edition, Addison Wesley
(Pearson); 2007.
4. Forouzan BA, Gilberg RF. Computer Science: A structured programming approach using C. Third Edition,
Cengage Learning; 2006.

22ADM101 Foundations of Indian Heritage L-T-P-C: 2-0-1-2

Course Objectives

 To study fundamental concepts of Indian Heritage

 To discuss the cultural, philosophical, and historical facets of India
 To familiarize eternal and all-pervading nature of India’s cultural and spiritual ethos

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: understand true essence of India’s cultural and spiritual heritage

CO2: understand the ethical and political strategic concepts to induce critical approach to various theories about India.
CO3: get familiarized with the multidimension of man’s interaction with nature, fellow beings and society in general.
CO4: appreciate the socio-political and strategic innovations based on Indian knowledge systems

CO-PO Mapping
PO/ PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
PSO
CO
CO1 2 2
CO2 1 1 1 3
CO3 1 2 3
CO4 3 3 3 3

Syllabus

Unit I
Introduction - Educational Heritage of Ancient India- Life and Happiness- Impact of Colonialism and Decolonization- A
timeline of Early Indian Subcontinent

Unit II
Pinnacle of Selflessness and ultimate freedom- Indian approach towards life- Indian Mahatmas.

Unit III

Man's association with Nature- Metaphors and Tropes- Indian approach towards strategic thinking- India: In the Views of
Other Scholars and Travellers- Personality Development Through Yoga- Hallmark of Indian philosophical tradition-
Conversations on Compassion with Amma

Textbook(s)

Foundations of Indian Heritage, Amrita Vishwa Vidyapeetham (University publication)

Reference(s)

1. Aurobindo, “Foundations of Indian Culture”, The Sri Aurobindo Library Inc., 1953.
2. Basham A. L., “The wonder that was India”, Sidwick and Jackson, 1954.
3. Sai Deepak J., “India, that is Bharat: Coloniality, Civilisation, Constitution”, Bloomsbury, 2021.
22AVP103 Mastery Over Mind L-T-P-C: 1-0-2-2

Course Objectives

 To enhance health and wellbeing of all faculty, staff, and students (UN SDG -3).
 To manage stressful emotions and anxiety, in turn facilitating inner peace and harmony.
 To enhance the understanding of experiential learning based on the University’s mission: “Educationfor Life along
with Education for Living” and is aimed to allow learners to realize and rediscoverthe infinite potential of one’s true
Being and the fulfilment of life’s goals.

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: describe what meditation is and to understand its health benefits.

CO2: understand the causes of stress and how meditation improves well-being.
CO3: understand the science of meditation.
CO4: learn and practice MA OM meditation in daily life.
CO5: understand the application of meditation to improve communication and relationships.
CO 6: understand the power of meditation in compassion-driven action.

CO-PO Mapping

PO/
PSO PO PO2 PO PO PO PO6 PO PO PO PO10 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO2
CO 1 3 4 5 7 8 9 1 2 1
CO1 1 2 2 2
CO2 2 2 2 2 2
CO3 2 2 2 2 2
CO4 3 3 2 3 3 3 3
CO5 2 2 2 2 3 3
CO6 2 2 2 2 2

Syllabus

The course syllabus will be covered in six units as described below

Unit 1: Describe Meditation and Understand its Benefits (CO1)

A: Importance of meditation. How does meditation help to overcome obstacles in life (Pre-recorded video with
Swami Shubhamritananda Puri)

Reading 1: Why Meditate? (Swami Shubamritananda ji)

Reading 2: ‘Stillness of the Mind’ Chapter 17 in Amritam Gamaya (2022). MataAmritanandamayi

Mission Trust.

Additional Reading: Abhyasa Yoga: The Yoga of Practice. (Br. Achyutamrita Chaitanya)

B: Understand how meditation works. Understand how meditation helps in improving physical and mental
health. Understand how meditation helps in the development of personality (Pre-recorded video with Dr.
Ram Manohar)

Reading 1: Allen, Cynthia (2020) The Potential Health Benefits of Meditation

Additional Reading: Sharma, Hari (2022) Meditation: Process and Effects

Unit 2: Causes of Stress and How Meditation Improves Well-being (CO2)

 A: Learn how to prepare for meditation. Understand the aids that can help in effectively practicing meditation.
Understand the role of sleep, physical activity, and a balanced dietin supporting meditation. (Pre-recorded video
with Dr. Ram Manohar)

B: Causes of Stress. The problem of not being relaxed. Effects of stress on health. How meditation helps to
relieve stress. Basics of stress management at home and the workplace. (Pre-recorded video with Prof
Udhaykumar)

Reading 1: Mayo Clinic Staff (2022, April 29). Meditation: A Simple, Fast Way to Reduce Stress. Mayo Clinic.
https://www.mayoclinic.org/tests-procedures/meditation/in-depth/meditation/art-20045858 (PDF provided)

Reading 2: ‘Efficient Action.’ Chapter 28 in Amritam Gamaya (2022). MataAmritanandamayi

Mission Trust.

Unit 3: The Science of Meditation (CO3)

A: A preliminary understanding of the Science of meditation. What can modern science tell us about this
tradition-based method? (Pre-recorded video with Dr. Shyam Diwakar)

B: How meditation helps humanity according to what we know from scientific research
(Pre-recorded video with Dr. Shyam Diwakar)

Reading 1: Does Meditation Aid Brain and Mental Health (Dr Shyam Diwakar)

Reading 2: ‘Science and Spirituality.’ Chapter 85 in Amritam Gamaya (2022). MataAmritanandamayi

Mission Trust.

Unit 4: Practicing MA OM Meditation in Daily Life (CO4)

Guided Meditation Sessions following scripts provided (Level One to Level Five)

Reading 1: MA OM and White Flower Meditation: A Brief Note (Swami AtmanandaPuri)

Reading 2: ‘Live in the Present Moment.’ Chapter 71 in Amritam Gamaya (2022). Mata Amritanandamayi
Mission Trust.

Unit 5: Improving Communication and Relationships (CO5)

How meditation and mindfulness influence interpersonal communication. The role of meditation in
improving relationship quality in the family, at the university and in the workplace. (Pre-recorded video with
Dr Shobhana Madhavan)

Reading 1: Seppala E (2022, June 30th) 5 Unexpected Ways Meditation Improves Relationships a Lot.
Psychology Today. https://www.psychologytoday.com/intl/blog/feeling-it/202206/5-unexpected-ways-
meditation-improves-relationships-lot

Reading 2: ‘Attitude.’ Chapter 53 in Amritam Gamaya (2022). Mata Amritanandamayi Mission Trust.

Unit 6 Meditation and Compassion-driven Action (CO6)

Understand how meditation can help to motivate compassion-driven action. (Pre-recorded video with
Dr Shobhana Madhavan)

Reading 1: Schindler, S., & Friese, M. (2022). The relation of mindfulness and prosocialbehavior: What do we
(not) know? Current Opinion in Psychology, 44, 151-156.

Reading 2: ‘Sympathy and Compassion.’ Chapter 100 in Amritam Gamaya (2022). Mata Amritanandamyi
Mission Trust.

Text Books/Reference Books:

1. Meditation and Spiritual Life-Swami Yatiswarananda, Ramakrishna Math

2. The Complete Works of Swami Vivekananda Vol Vii by Advaita Ashram Mayavati Almora Himalayas
3. Dhyana Yoga-Holy Gita Swami Chinmayanda
 4. Voice of God, Chandrasekharendra Saraswati, 68th Acharya of Sri Kanchi Kamakoti Peetam,
5. Hindu Dharma-Chandrasekharendra Saraswati, 68th Acharya of Sri Kanchi Kamakoti Peetam,
6. Mind: It’s Mysteries and control-Swami Sivananda Saraswati
7. Amritam Gamaya (2022). Mata Amritanandamayi Mission Trust.
8. Books on Amma’s teachings like Awaken children, From Amma’s Heart etc.
9. The Science of Meditation: How to Change Your Brain, Mind and Body by Daniel Goleman and Richard. J.
Davidson.
10.Allen, Cynthia (2020) The Potential Health Benefits of Meditation
11. Seppala E (2022, June 30th Unexpected Ways Meditation Improves Relationships a Lot.Psychology Today
12. Sharma, Hari (2022) Meditation: Process and Effects
13. Mayo Clinic Staff (2022, April 29). Meditation: A Simple, Fast Way to Reduce Stress.
14. Schindler, S., & Friese, M. (2022). The relation of mindfulness and prosocial behavior: What do we (not) know?
Current Opinion in Psychology, 44, 151-156

SEMESTER II

23MAT130 Engineering Mathematics –II L-T-P-C: 3-1-0-4

(Pre-requisite – Engineering Mathematics-I)

Course Objectives

 To introduce the concepts of multivariable calculus

 To introduce the concepts of vector space and inner products
 To provide the foundations of matrix transformations and decompositions

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: solve problems involving vector differentiation and integration

CO2: understand the concepts of vector spaces and orthonormalisation
CO3: apply matrix transformations to linear system
CO4: apply concepts of vector calculus and linear algebra to engineering problems

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO2 PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 3
CO
CO1 3 1
CO2 3 1
CO3 3 2 1
CO4 3 2 2

Syllabus

Unit I
Vector Spaces - Vector spaces, subspaces, linear independence, basis, row, column and null spaces and dimension theorem.
Inner product space, orthogonally, Gram-Schmidt orthogonalization. Linear Transformation (matrix transformation) and
inverse linear transformation; Matrix Decompositions: LU, QR, Jordan, EVD, and SVD decompositions. Examples of
applications of the above in solving real engineering problems.

Unit II
Vector Differentiation- Vector and Scalar Functions, Derivatives, Curves, Tangents, Arc Length, Curves in Mechanics,
Velocity and Acceleration, Gradient of a Scalar field, Directional derivative, Divergence of a Vector field, Curl of a Vector
field. Examples of applications of the above in solving real engineering problems.

Unit III
Vector Integration - Line Integral, Line Integrals Independent of Path. Green’s Theorem in the Plane, Surfaces for Surface
Integrals, Surface Integrals, Triple Integrals – Gauss Divergence Theorem, Stoke’s Theorem. Examples of applications of
the above in solving real engineering problems.
Textbook(s)

1. E Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, John Wiley and Sons, Tenth Edition, 2018.
2. Howard Anton and Chris Rorres, Elementary Linear Algebra, 11th Edition, Wiley, 2015.
Reference(s)

1. Dennis G. Zill and Michael R. Cullen, Advanced Engineering Mathematics by, second edition, CBS Publishers,
2012.
2. Srimanta Pal and Subhodh C Bhunia ‘Engineering Mathematics’, John Wiley and Sons, 2012, Ninth Edition.

23ECE111 Electronic Devices and Circuits L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

(Pre-requisite: Physics of Semiconductors)

Course Objectives

 To enable the design of diode-based circuits

 To provide an understanding of the operation and analysis of MOSFET circuits
 To enable an understanding of BJTs & FinFETs

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: characterise semiconductor diodes

CO2: analyse diode-based circuits
CO3: design diode-based circuits for specific applications
CO4: understand the operation of transistors

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO2 PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 3
CO
CO1 3
CO2 3 2
CO3 3 2 2 2 2*
CO4 3

Syllabus

Unit I
Diode and its applications- PN Junction Diodes, Forward and Reverse Biasing, Reverse Saturation Current, Diode current
components, Cut-in voltage; VI Characteristics, Diode Models; Zener diodes -Shunt voltage regulator, Regulator Design,
Schottky diode, Tunnel diode, LED’s, Varactor diodes; Rectification – Half-wave, Full-wave and Bridge, Rectifier with and
without Filters; Wave shaping circuits- Clipping & Clamping Circuits, voltage multiplier.

Unit II
MOSFET –Construction, structure, Enhancement and depletion mode, Regions of operation; MOSFET characteristics;
MOSFET as a switch, MOSFET as an amplifier; DC Analysis and small signal model; FinFET- Construction- advantages
and applications.

Unit III
Introduction to BJT – BJTs, NPN and PNP transistors, Transistor currents, VI characteristics, Region of operation, BJT as
an amplifier, BJT as a switch; DC Analysis.

Textbook(s)
1. Adel S Sedra, Kenneth C Smith and Arun N Chandorkar, “Microelectronic Circuits – Theory and Applications”,
Seventh Edition, Oxford University Press, 2017.
2. “FinFET and Other Multi-Gate Transistors”-by J.P Colinge

Reference(s)
1. Donald A Neamen, “Electronic Circuits – Analysis and Design”, Third Edition, McGraw Hill Education, 2006.
 2. Albert Malvino and David Bates, “Electronic Principles”, Eighth Edition, McGraw Hill Education, 2016.

23ECE112 Signal Processing I L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

(Pre-requisite: Engineering Mathematics I)

Course Objectives

 To provide foundations of signals and systems

 To introduce time and frequency domain representations
 To enable analysis of LTI systems

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: characterize signals and systems

CO2: conduct time domain analysis on LTI systems
CO3: obtain frequency domain representations of signals
CO4: analyze spectral properties of LTI systems

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO2 PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 3
CO
CO1 3 2 2
CO2 3 3 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3

Syllabus

Unit I
Introduction to Signals- Continuous time and discrete time signals - Classification of Signals: Periodic, Aperiodic, Even,
Odd, Energy and Power signals, Deterministic and Random signals, Elementary signals: unit step, unit impulse, unit ramp,
sinusoidal and complex exponential signals - Basic operations on signals: Multiplication by a scalar, signal addition, linear
combination, signal multiplication, time shifting, time scaling, combination of time shifting and time scaling- Introduction
to Systems- Classification of Systems: Continuous time, discrete time, Invertible, non-invertible, Causal, non-causal
systems, time-invariant, time-variant systems, Linear and non-linear systems, BIBO stable and unstable systems -
Interconnection of systems.

Unit II
Time Domain characterization of continuous time and discrete time LTI systems - Convolution Integral-Convolution Sum-
Fourier series representation of continuous time periodic signals, properties of continuous time Fourier series - Fourier
transform of continuous time aperiodic and sinusoidal signals - properties of continuous time Fourier transform.

Unit III
Fourier series representation of discrete time periodic signals - properties of discrete time Fourier series - Discrete time
Fourier transform - properties of discrete time Fourier transform, Z-Transform: Definition – ROC - Inverse Z-transforms -
Unilateral Z Transform - Analysis and characterization of LTI systems using Z-transforms.

Textbook(s)
1. Simon Haykin, Barry Van Veen, “Signals and Systems”, Second Edition, John Wiley and Sons, 2007.
2. Alan V. Oppenheim, Alan S. Wilsky, S. Hamid Nawab, “Signals and Systems”. Prentice Hall India private Limited,
Second Edition, 1997.
Reference(s)
1. Lathi B P, “Signal Processing & Linear Systems”, Oxford University Press, 2006.
2. Rodger E. Ziemer, William H. Tranter D. Ronal Fannin, “Signals and Systems”, Pearson Education, Fourth Edition,
2004.
 23ECE114 Network Analysis L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3
(Pre-requisite: Fundamentals of Electrical Engineering)

Course Objectives

 To provide the concepts of transient analysis of circuits

 To introduce the concepts of frequency response and passive filters
 To introduce two-port networks and network parameters

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: analyse the transient behaviour of circuits

CO2: apply Laplace transforms for circuit analysis
CO3: understand the behaviour of passive filters
CO4: analyse two-port networks

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO2 PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 3
CO
CO1 3 3 2 2
CO2 3 3 2 2
CO3 3 2 2 1
CO4 3 3 1 2

Syllabus

Unit I
Laplace transform- Laplace Transforms of Simple Time Functions - Inverse Transform Techniques - Basic Theorems for
the Laplace Transform. Solution to differential equations – First and second order.

Unit II
Transient Analysis - Time domain analysis of first and second order circuits – source free excitation- with DC Excitation.

Unit III
Resonance - Q-factor and Bandwidth. Frequency response of Series and Parallel circuits. Transfer function -poles and zeroes.
Passive filters, filter design, Two-port Networks - impedance - admittance – hybrid - transmission parameters.

Textbook(s)
1. Charles K Alexander, Mathew N. O. Sadiku, “Fundamentals of Electric circuits”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2003.
2. William H. Hayt, Jack Kemmerly and Steven M. Durbin, “Engineering Circuit Analysis”, 8th edition, McGraw-
Hill.

Reference(s)
1. John D. Ryder, Myril Baird Reed and W. L. Everitt, “Foundation for Electric Network Theory”, Prentice Hall of
India, Second Edition, 2013.
2. M. E. Van Valkenburg, “Network Analysis”, Prentice Hall India Private Limited, Third Edition, 1999.

23ECE183 Signal Processing I Laboratory L-T-P-C: 0-0-3-1

(Pre-requisite: Nil)

Course Objectives

 To provide hands-on exposure to generation and visualization of signals

 To provide hands-on experience to process signals using Linear Time Invariant (LTI) systems
 To enable frequency domain analysis of signals and systems
Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: generate, visualize signals and interpret their properties

CO2: conduct operations on signals
CO3: analyze Linear Time Invariant systems
CO4: analyze and interpret the spectral properties using transforms

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO2 PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 3
CO
CO1 3 3 3 3 2 2
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 2
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2
CO4 3 3 3 3 3 3 2

Syllabus

Define a system which might cover most of the experiments. It is possible to define at most 2 systems for whole
experiments of this course. In the beginning of the lab class, system level explanation must be given to the students.

Examination/evaluation for system level should have higher weightage of marks. They need to develop system (at least
prototype) at the end, not on breadboard.

Example:

Integrate background music to vocal with different play rates and audio effects

1) System to vary the play rate of audio file

 Read the audio file and implement time scaling operation to obtain a variable play rate.
 Analyse the properties of the given system in terms of linearity, stability, causality.
 Understand the effects of the aforementioned operation in the frequency domain.

2) System to create audio effects

 Read audio file and implement audio effects such as echo and chorus.
 Analyse the effect of these effects in the frequency domain.

3) Guitar note generation

 Create multiple Guitar notes by using CTFS approach.
 Analyse the effect of adding harmonics in the generated note.

Experiment Contents:
1. Generation of Signals.
2. Basic Operations on Signals-Operation on dependent variable
3. Basic Operations on Signals-Operation on independent variable
4. Types of signals-Periodicity, Even, Odd, Energy and Power
5. Properties of Systems-Linearity, Time invariance, stability
6. Continuous and Discrete-time Convolution
7. Verification of system interconnections
8. CTFS and Gibbs Phenomenon
9. CTFT and its properties
10. DTFS and its properties
11. DTFT and its properties
12. Z-transform

Textbook(s)
2. Luis F. Chaparro, Aydin Akan, “Signals and Systems Using MATLAB”, Third edition, Academic Press, 2019.
3. D Sundararajan, “Signals and Systems: A Practical Approach”, Second edition. Springer International Publishing,
2022.

Reference(s)
1. Won Young Yang, “Signals and Systems with MATLAB”, Second Edition, Springer International Publishing, 2009.
2. Luis Chaparro, “Signals and Systems using MATLAB”, Elsevier Publishing, 2010.
 23ECE184 Introduction to Internet of Things L-T-P-C: 0-0-3-1
(Pre-requisite: Nil)
Course Objectives

 To introduce hardware platforms for interfacing sensors and actuators

 To introduce mobile application development for IoT
 To help build and prototype IoT based systems

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: interface sensors and actuators to hardware platforms

CO2: transfer data and control remote devices
CO3: develop mobile application for IoT
CO4: build and demonstrate IoT based systems

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO2 PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 3
CO
CO1 2 3 3 3 2
CO2 2 3 3 3 2
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 2
CO4 3 2 3 3 3 2 2

Syllabus
Define a system which might cover most of the experiments. It is possible to define at most 2 systems for whole
experiments of this course. In the beginning of the lab class, system level explanation must be given to the students.

Examination/evaluation for system level should have higher weightage of marks. They need to develop system (at least
prototype) at the end, not on breadboard.

Example:
Design an IoT based system to: (should use a technology with least cost possible)
a) count/occupancy (number of students present) of ECE classrooms at each hour of the dept. time table.
b) display this statistics in HoD/department office monitor. The display of counting should be updated every 10
minutes. The same display can also be available in the class room.
c) indicate the availability of teacher(s) in the class hour (this should also be updated every 10min)
d) switch off the display devices off all ECE classrooms from IoT lab (remote).

Experiment Contents:
1. GPIO and ADC Programming – LED – Switch – Relay - Proximity Sensor - Seven Segment
2. ADC Programming - Potentiometer - Temperature Sensor – Moisture Sensor - Gas Sensor
3. LCD and Keypad Interfacing
4. Serial Communication – Bluetooth - GPS.
5. SPI and I2C Programming – RFID - RTC
6. Speed and Direction Control of Motors – DC – Stepper/Servo
7. WebServer and IoT Cloud Communication – ESP8266, Thingspeak
8. Basic Mobile Application Development – MIT App Inventor 2
9. Remote Device Control Android App Development - MIT App Inventor 2

Textbook(s)
1. M. Margolis, B. Jepson, N. R. Weldin, “Arduino Cookbook: Recipes to Begin, Expand and Enhance Your
Projects”, Third Edition, Oreilly, 2020
2. N. Cameron, “Electronics Projects with the ESP8266 and ESP32: Building Webpages, Applications and Wifi
Enabled Devices”, Apress, 2021
 3. F. Kamriani, K. Roy “App Inventor 2 Essentials”, Packt Publishing, 2016

Reference(s)
1. D. Wolber, H. Abelson, E. Spertus, L. Looney, “App Inventor 2 Create Your Own Android Apps”, Second
Edition, Oreilly, 2018
2. M. Schwartz, “Esp8266 Internet of Things Cookbook”, Packt Publishing, 2017

23ECE185 Electronic Devices and Circuits Laboratory L-T-P-C: 0-0-3-1

(Pre-requisite: Nil)

Course Objectives

 To enable the study and extraction of device parameters from datasheets

 To enable the use of simulation tools in analysing electronic circuits
 To provide experience in design and prototyping of diode-based circuits
 To enable the characterization of transistors

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: use datasheets effectively

CO2: simulate electronic circuits
CO3: prototype diode-based circuits
CO4: characterize transistors

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO2 PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 3
CO
CO1 3 2 2 2 1
CO2 3 2 2 1 3 2 2 2 2
CO3 3 2 2 1 2 2 2
CO4 3 2 2

Syllabus

Define a system which might cover most of the experiments. It is possible to define at most 2 systems for whole
experiments of this course. In the beginning of the lab class, system level explanation must be given to the students.

Examination/evaluation for system level should have higher weightage of marks. They need to develop system (at least
prototype) at the end, not on breadboard.

Example:
Design a power supply system to get the following output:
1)- 4 DC output voltage (+ - 5V, +9V, +12V and + - 24V) (Use bridge rectifier with step down transformer)
2)- Get regulated +5V and +24V from the same circuit
3)- Use 24Vpp from the secondary and clip (get) the voltage to 16V positive cycle and 24V negative cycle
4)- The regulated output of 24V is switched at 1k frequency and supplied to a LED bulb (light) (use MOSFET for
switching)

Experiment Contents:
1. Familiarization of electronic components
2. Characterization of PN junction diode
 3. Realization of Clipper circuits
4. Realization of Clamper circuits
5. Realization of Rectifiers-Half wave and Full wave with filter
6. Zener diode characteristics and as a voltage regulator
7. MOSFET Input and Output Characteristics
8. MOSFET-DC analysis
9. BJT Input and Output Characteristics

Textbook(s)
1. Adel S Sedra, Kenneth C Smith and Arun N Chandorkar, “Microelectronic Circuits – Theory and Applications”,
Seventh Edition, Oxford University Press, 2017.

References(s)
1. Donald A Neamen, “Electronic Circuits – Analysis and Design”, Third Edition, McGraw Hill Education, 2006.
2. Albert Malvino and David Bates, “Electronic Principles”, Eighth Edition, McGraw Hill Education, 2016.

23ENG101 Technical Communication L-T-P-C: 2-0-3-3

(Pre-requisite-Nil)

Course Objectives

 To develop techniques of scanning for specific information, comprehension and organization of ideas
 To introduce the fundamentals of mechanics of formal writing, documentation and presentation
 To introduce the art of critical thinking and analysis

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: apply the basic elements of language in formal correspondence by interpreting and analyzing information and to
organize ideas in a logical and coherent manner
CO2: understand and summarize technical documents
CO3: understand the mechanics of writing and the elements of formal correspondence
CO4: compose project reports/documents, revise them for language accuracy and make technical presentations

CO-PO Mapping

CO- PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO
PO/PSO 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO1 2 3 3
CO2 2 2 3
CO3 2 3 3
CO4 2 2 3

Syllabus

Unit I
Error Analysis, Mechanics of Writing: Grammar rules -articles, tenses, auxiliary verbs (primary & modal) prepositions,
subject-verb agreement, pronoun-antecedent agreement, discourse markers and sentence linkers, impersonal passive,
modifiers, phrasal verbs, General Reading and Listening comprehension - rearrangement & organization of sentences

Unit II
Different kinds of written documents: Definitions- Descriptions- Instructions-Recommendations- User manuals - Reports –
Proposals; Formal Correspondence: Writing Formal Letters/Emails; Punctuation; Scientific Reading & Listening
Comprehension
Unit III
Technical paper writing: Documentation style - Document editing – Proof reading - Organizing and Formatting; Tone and
style; Graphical representation; Reading and listening comprehension of technical documents; Mini Technical project / Term
paper (10 -12 pages); Technical presentations

Reference(s)
1. Hirsh, Herbert. L Essential Communication Strategies for Scientists, Engineers and Technology Professionals.
II Edition. New York: IEEE press, 2002
2. Anderson, Paul. V. Technical Communication: A Reader-Centred Approach. V Edition. Harcourt Brace
College Publication, 2003
3. Strunk, William Jr. and White. EB. The Elements of Style New York. Alliyan & Bacon, 1999.
4. Riordan, G. Daniel and Pauley E. Steven. Technical Report Writing Today VIII Edition (Indian Adaptation). New Delhi:
Biztantra, 2004.
5. Michael Swan. Practical English Usage Oxford University Press, 2000

Course Objectives
22ADM111 Glimpses of Glorious India L-T-P-C: 2-0-1-2

 To introduce to the depths and richness of the Indian culture and knowledge traditions
 To enable obtain a synoptic view of the grandiose achievements of India in diverse fields
 To equip with a knowledge of own country and its eternal values

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: understand and analyze the legacy of ancient Indian cultures and a discussion on practical Vedānta
CO2: comprehend the teachings and principles of Kauṭilya, conceptual aspects of Gods, and contribution of the
Bhagavadgītā.
CO3: discuss the Indian soft powers and a portrayal of how nature was preserved through the medium of faith
CO4: recognize the contribution that India has made to the world

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PSO
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO
CO1 2 2 1 3 3 2 1 2

CO2 3 2 1 2

CO3 2 2 2 3 3 2 2 2 3

CO4 2 2 2 2 2 2

Syllabus

Unit I
Role of Women in India- Kaūṭilya- Conceptual aspects of gods
Unit II
Bhagavadgītā: From Soldier to Saṁsārin to Sādhaka - Lessons of Yoga from Bhagavad Gita- Indian Soft powers- Preserving
Nature through Faith- Different facets of Ancient Indian Cultures
Unit III

Practical Vedanta- To the World from India: Art and architecture, music, dance, theatre, sports, Yoga- Indian Approach to
Science: Chemistry, Physics, Metallurgy, Medical Sciences, Astronomy, Mathematics, Naval engineering.

Textbook

Glimpses of Glorious India, Amrita Vishwa Vidyapeetham (University publication)

Reference(s)

1. Altekar, A. S., “The Position of Women in Hindu Civilization”, Motilal Banarsidass, 1956.
2. B. Padmanabha Rao (ed.), “Bhāskarācārya’s Līlāvatī”, CIFS, 2014.
3. Lal B. B., “The Sarasvatī Flows on: The Continuity of Indian Culture”, Aryan Books International, 2002.

SEMESTER III
23ECE201 Digital Electronics L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

Course Objectives

 To provide an understanding of basic building blocks of digital circuits

 To enable the understanding of Boolean algebra and logic function optimization
 To enable design of combinational and sequential circuits

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: realise a given expression in terms of basic building blocks

CO2: minimise a given logic expression
CO3: design combinational circuits
CO4: design Sequential circuits

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO2 PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 3
CO
CO1 3 2 2
CO2 3 2 2
CO3 3 3 2 2 2
CO4 3 3 2 2 2

Syllabus

Unit I
Introduction to logic circuits - Variables and functions, inversion - Truth tables - Logic gates and Networks - Boolean algebra
- Synthesis using gates - Design examples - Optimized implementation of logic functions - Karnaugh map - Strategy for
minimization - Minimization of product of sums forms - Incompletely specified functions - Multiple output circuits - Tabular
method for minimization.

Unit II
Combinational circuit building blocks - Number representation and arithmetic circuits: Addition of unsigned numbers -
Signed numbers - Fast adders - Multiplexers - Decoders - Encoders - Code converters - Arithmetic comparison circuits.

Unit III
Sequential circuit building blocks - Basic latch - Gated SR latch - Gated D latch - Master slave and edge triggered - D flip-
flops - T flip-flop - JK flip-flop, Registers, Asynchronous Counters, Synchronous Counters, Ring Counter and Johnson
Counter, Synchronous sequential circuits - Basic design steps - State assignment problem – Design of Mealy and Moore
state models.

Textbook(s)
1. Stephen Brown, Zvonko Vranesic, “Fundamentals of Digital logic with Verilog Design”, Tata McGraw Hill
Publishing Company Limited, Special Indian Edition, 2007.
2. R. D. Sudhakar Samuel, “Logic Design: A Simplified Approach”, Sanguine Technical Publishers, Edition 1, 2006.
Reference(s)
1. M Morris Mano and Michael D Ciletti, “Digital Design with Introduction to the Verilog HDL”, Pearson Education,
Fifth Edition, Fifth Edition, 2015.
2. John F. Wakerly, “Digital Design Principles and Practices”, Fourth Edition, Pearson Education, 3rd Ed, 2008.

23ECE202 Analog Electronics I L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

(Pre-requisite: Electronic Devices and Circuits)

Course Objectives

 To provide an understanding of biasing of transistors

 To enable design of single and multistage amplifiers
 To provide an understanding of feedback and its effects

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: analyze different configurations of amplifiers

CO2: analyze the impact of feedback on amplifier circuits
CO3: analyze effect of capacitance on frequency response
CO4: analyze the operation of multistage amplifiers

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO2 PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 3
CO
CO1 3 3 2 3
CO2 3 3 1 3 2*
CO3 3 3 2
CO4 3 3 2

Syllabus

Unit I
MOSFET Biasing and configurations – Review of MOSFETs, basic amplifier configurations, MOSFET at dc, biasing,
Load line analysis; MOSFET amplifier- Small-signal analysis, Single-stage amplifier, Common Source, Common Gate,
Source Follower.

Unit II
Multi-stage amplifiers- Cascode, Darlington pair; MOSFET Frequency response – Parasitic capacitances in transistors;
Basic building blocks of ICs, current source as load, current source for biasing.
Unit III
Feedback concepts– types of feedback, Series and shunt configurations; Feedback network - effect on Gain, Bandwidth,
input/output impedance; Analysis of single and multi-stage amplifiers with feedback with respect to Gain, Bandwidth,
Impedance, etc.

Textbook(s)
1. A S. Sedra, K. C. Smith and A. N. Chandorkar, “Microelectronic Circuits -Theory and Applications”, Seventh Edition,
Oxford University Press, 2017.
2. J. Millman and A.Grabel, “Microelectronics”, Second Edition, McGraw-Hill, 2001.

Reference(s)
1. Robert L Boylestad and Louis Nashelsky, “Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory”, Eleventh Edition, Pearson India
Education Services Pvt. Ltd., 2015.
2. Sergio Franco, “Design with Operational Amplifiers and Analog Integrated Circuits”, Fourth Edition, Tata McGraw Hill
Publishing Company Limited, 2015.
 23ECE203 Signal Processing II L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3
(Pre-requisite: Signal Processing I)

Course Objectives

 To introduce discretization in time and frequency domain

 To provide knowledge of discrete frequency representation and efficient computation
 To introduce design and analysis of digital filters

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: understand concepts of sampling and aliasing

CO2: analyze signals using discrete Fourier transform
CO3: apply efficient methods for digital signal processing
CO4: design and analyze digital filters

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO2 PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 3
CO
CO1 2 3 2
CO2 3 3 2 3
CO3 3 2 2 2
CO4 3 3 3 3
Syllabus

Unit I
Sampling- Effects of sampling in time and frequency domain- Aliasing and reconstruction in time and frequency domain-
Discrete Fourier transform (DFT) – Definition- Inverse Discrete Fourier Transform- properties of DFT including periodicity,
multiplication of two DFT and circular convolution –Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) - Decimation in Time FFT, Decimation
in Frequency FFT, Inverse DFT using FFT- Linear filtering methods based on DFT- overlap add and overlap save methods.

Unit II
Introduction to Filters- Types of filters- low pass, band pass, high pass, band reject- Finite Impulse Response (FIR) filters:
symmetric and anti-symmetric FIR filters – design of linear phase FIR filter using Windowing method – FIR differentiators
– Hilbert transformer –Structures for FIR systems – direct form structures - Linear phase and cascade form structures-
applications of FIR filters.

Unit III
Introduction to IIR filters: Characteristics of commonly used analog filters-Butterworth filter- IIR filter design methods-
Impulse invariance and Bilinear transformation –- frequency transformations for analog and digital filters – Introduction to
Chebyshev filters- Structures for IIR systems-direct form structures - cascade form structures - parallel form structures-
Applications of IIR filters.

Textbook(s)
1. John G Proakis, G. Manolakis, “Digital Signals Processing Principles, Algorithms, Applications”, Prentice Hall India
Private Limited, Fourth Edition, 2007.
2. Sanjit K. Mitra, “Digital Signal Processing, A computer based approach”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company
Limited, Fourth Edition, 2010.

Reference(s)
1. Allen V. Oppenheim, Ronald W. Schafer, “Discrete time Signal Processing”, Prentice Hall India Privat Limited, Third
Edition, 2013.
2. Emmanuel C.Ifeachor, and Barrie. W.Jervis, “Digital Signal Processing”, Second Edition, Pearson Education, Prentice
Hall, 2002.

23ECE204 Electromagnetic Theory and Waves L-T-P-C: 3-1-0-4

(Pre-requisite: Nil)

Course Objectives
  To introduce the concepts of electromagnetic fields
 To provide foundations of plane waves and its application to communication
 To provide exposure to wave propagation through waveguides

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: understand the concepts of electric and magnetic fields

CO2: understand the concept of time-varying electromagnetic field
CO3: understand the wave propagation model
CO4: understand wave propagation through waveguides

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO2 PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 3
CO
CO1 3 2 2
CO2 3 2 2 2
CO3 3 2 2 2
CO4 2 2 2

Syllabus

Unit I
Electrostatics and Steady State Currents: Review of Vector Calculus- Electrostatics - Postulates - Coulomb’s law - Gauss
law - Electric potential - Behavior of conductors and dielectric in static fields - Dielectric constant - Poisson’s and Laplace
equation. Current density - Point form of Ohm’s law – Continuity equation

Unit II
Magnetostatics and Time Varying Fields: Lorentz force - Magneto statics – Postulates -– Relative permeability- Biot - savart
law. Faraday’s law of Induction - Maxwell’s equations - Differential and Integral Forms - Boundary Conditions for
electromagnetic fields - Wave equation - Time harmonic electromagnetic fields - Poynting vector– Normal incidence at
conducting and dielectric boundary.

Unit III
Guide Waves: Transverse Electric (TE) and Transverse Magnetic (TM) modes – Electromagnetic waves between parallel
plates (TE and TM) – Properties – Rectangular waveguides – TE and TM waves in rectangular waveguides – Properties –
Review of Attenuation in waveguides.

Textbook(s)
1. David K.Cheng, “Field and Wave Electromagnetics”, Pearson Education, Second Edition, 2002.
2. Clayton R. Paul, Keith W. Whites, Syed A. Nasar, “Introduction to Electromagnetic Fields”, Tata McGraw-Hill
Education Private Limited, Third Edition (Fifth Reprint), 2009.

Reference(s)

1. Kraus, Fleisch, “Electromagnetics with Applications”, Tata McGraw Hill Education Private Limited, Fifth Edition,
2004.
2. Constantine A. Balanis, “Advanced Engineering Electromagnetics”, Wiley, Second Edition, 2012.

23ECE205 Foundations of Data Science L-T-P-C: 3-1-0-4

(Pre-requisite: Engineering Mathematics - II)

Course Objectives

 To introduce the statistical concepts necessary for exploratory data analysis

 To provide the foundations of data pre-processing, interpretation & visualization
 To introduce the concepts of statistical testing
Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: understand descriptive statistics and data distributions

CO2: apply pre-processing techniques
CO3: interpret and visualise data
CO4: apply statistical tests

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO2 PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 3
CO
CO1 3 2 3
CO2 3 2 2
CO3 3 2 3
CO4 3 2 2

Syllabus

Unit I
Introduction- Data Science, Importance of probability for Data science, Axioms of probability, Conditional probability and
Bayes theorem; Random variables: Discrete, Uniform and Binomial Distribution, Continuous, Normal Distribution,
Exponential and Poisson Distribution; Types of Data, Central tendency measures, Dispersion measures, Skewness and
Mean, Covariance and Correlation, Central limit theorem.
Unit II
Data Processing- Collection Strategies, Data Pre-Processing Overview, Data Cleaning, Data Integration, Encoding
techniques- Ordinal, One hot and Binary, Data Reduction-PCA, Data Transformation and Discretization, Exploratory data
analysis: Visualization before analysis, visualizing a single variable, Examining multivariate Data- Heat map.
Unit III
Statistical Testing -Introduction to Hypothesis Testing-Null and alternative hypothesis, Type of Errors, A/B testing,
Parametric test: the T-test, Z-test, non-parametric tests- Chi-square tests, P-value, Confidence Intervals, Parametric
confidence intervals, Bootstrap confidence intervals

Textbook(s)
1. Carlos Fernandez-Granda, “Probability and Statistics for Data Science”, 2017.
2. Cathy O'Neil and Rachel Schutt, “Doing Data Science”, Straight Talk from The Frontline, O'Reilly, 2014.
Reference(s)
1. Joel Grus, “Data Science from Scratch” First Edition, April 2015
2. Chirag Shah, “A Hands-On Introduction to Data Science, Cambridge University Press.
3. Elizabeth Purdom, Statistical Methods for Data Science, 2023.
4. Jure Leskovek, Anand Rajaraman and Jeffrey Ullman, “Mining of Massive Datasets. v2.1”, Cambridge
University Press. 2nd edition, 2014.

23ECE281 Digital Electronics Laboratory L-T-P-C: 0-0-3-1

(Pre-requisite: Nil)

Course Objectives

 To provide hands-on experience in realising simple logic expressions

 To demonstrate the power of logic function optimization
 To enable the implementation of combinational and sequential circuits

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: use datasheets & simulation tools effectively

CO2: realise simple logic circuits
CO3: design & implement combinational circuits
CO4: design & implement sequential circuits

CO-PO Mapping
 PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO1 PSO2 PSO
O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3
CO
CO1 3 3 2 2 2 2
CO2 3 2 2 2
CO3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2
CO4 3 3 2 2 2 2 2

Syllabus

Define a system which might cover most of the experiments. It is possible to define at most 2 systems for whole
experiments of this course. In the beginning of the lab class, system level explanation must be given to the students.

Examination/evaluation for system level should have higher weightage of marks. They need to develop system (at least
prototype) at the end, not on breadboard.

Example:
Let them design a calculator or clock which have many functionalities.

Experiment Contents:

1. Verification of Basic Logic Gates.

2. Realization of Basic Gates using Universal Logic Gates.
3. Simplification and Realization of a given Boolean Expression
i) Using basic gates
ii) SOP Using NAND gates only
iii) SOP Using NOR gates only
iv) POS Using NAND gates only
v) POS Using NOR gates only and
vi) Compare and analyze the above implementations
4. Design and verification of Adders and Subtractors.
5. Design and verification of Parallel Adder / Subtractor.
6. Design and verification of Binary to Gray code converter and vice versa.
7. Design and verification of BCD to Excess-3 code converter and vice versa.
8. Design and verification of 2-bit Magnitude Comparator.
9. Design and verification of Multiplexers
10. Implementation and verification of Half adder, full adder, half subtractor and full subtractor using
multiplexers.
11. Design and verification of Flip-flops (D, T and JK flipflop).
12. Design and verification of shift Registers.
13. Design and verification of Ring and Johnson Counters.
14. Design and verification of 4-bit asynchronous Up and Down Counters

Textbook(s)
 Stephen Brown, Zvonko Vranesic, “Fundamentals of Digital logic with Verilog Design”, Tata McGraw Hill
Publishing Company Limited, Special Indian Edition, 2007.

Reference(s)
1. John F. Wakerly, “Digital Design Principles and Practices”, Pearson Education, Fourth Edition, 2008.
2. K A Navas, “Electronic Lab Manual” – Volume 1, Fifth Edition, Prentice Hall of India, 2015.
3. M Morris Mano and Michael D Ciletti, “Digital Design with Introduction to the Verilog HDL”, Pearson
Education, Fifth Edition, Fifth Edition, 2015

23ECE282 Analog Electronics Laboratory L-T-P-C: 0-0-3-1

(Pre-requisite: Electronic Devices and Circuits)

Course Objectives

 To provide hands-on experience in design, prototyping and characterizing of transistor amplifiers

 To enable the design and implementation of multi-stage amplifiers
  To enable the application of negative feedback and study its effect on amplifier performance

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: use datasheets effectively

CO2: simulate complex amplifier circuits
CO3: prototype & characterize transistor amplifiers
CO4: prototype & characterize negative feedback amplifiers

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO1 PSO2 PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3
CO
CO1 3 2 1 2 2
CO2 3 2 3 2 2 2 2
CO3 3 3 2 2 2 1 2
CO4 3 3 2 2 2 1 2

Syllabus

Define a system which might cover most of the experiments. It is possible to define at most 2 systems for whole
experiments of this course. In the beginning of the lab class, system level explanation must be given to the students.

Examination/evaluation for system level should have higher weightage of marks. They need to develop system (at least
prototype) at the end, not on breadboard.

Example:
Design a microphone amplifier to amplify your audio signal. Take this as input, design a driver amplifier using MOSFET
to drive a speaker of 12W. You can quickly design a regulated power supply necessary for this circuit (12V-15V).

Design a multistage voltage amplifier (Low Noise Amplifier-LNA to be used in 2-3G base station) which will have a
frequency response (600MHz to 3GHz) and a gain of 18dB.

Experiment Contents:

1. MOSFET Biasing Circuit – Voltage Divider Biasing with and without source resistance.
2. Common Source Stage Input & Output Characteristics.
3. Common Gate Stage Input & Output Characteristics
4. Source Follower Stage Input & Output Characteristics.
5. Common Source Amplifier Characteristics.
6. Frequency Response of Common Source Stage.
7. Multi-stage amplifier Characteristics
8. Voltage series Feedback amplifier
9. Current shunt Feedback amplifier

. Textbook(s)

1. A S. Sedra, K. C. Smith and A. N. Chandorkar, “Microelectronic Circuits -Theory and Applications”, Seventh
Edition, Oxford University Press, 2017.
2. B. Razavi, “Design of Analog CMOS Integrated Circuits”, McGraw Hill, 2001.
Reference(s)

1. Sergio Franco, “Design with Operational Amplifiers and Analog Integrated Circuits”, Fourth Edition, Tata
McGraw Hill Publishing Company Limited, 2015.

23ECE283 Digital Signal Processing Laboratory L-T-P-C: 0-0-3-1

(Pre-requisite: Signal Processing Lab)
Course Objectives

 To provide an understanding of discretization of signals

 To provide hands-on exposure to discrete Fourier analysis and efficient computation
 To enable design and analysis of digital filters

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: analyze the effects of sampling

CO2: apply discrete Fourier analysis on signals
CO3: perform efficient computation on digital signals
CO4: design and analyze digital filters

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO2 PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 3
CO
CO1 3 3 3 3 3 2 2
CO2 3 3 3 3 3 2 2
CO3 3 2 3 3 3 2 2
CO4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Syllabus

Define a system which might cover most of the experiments. It is possible to define at most 2 systems for whole
experiments of this course. In the beginning of the lab class, system level explanation must be given to the students.

Examination/evaluation for system level should have higher weightage of marks. They need to develop system (at least
prototype) at the end, not on breadboard.

Experiment Contents:
1. Sampling of analog signals and study of aliasing
2. Computation of DFT using direct /linear transformation method
3. Properties of DFT
4. DIT and DIF FFT implementation
5. Spectrum estimation with FFT
6. Application of DFT- Computation of 2N point DFT of a real sequence by using an N point DFT, Efficient computation
of 2 sequences of length N using a single N point DFT.
7. Linear filtering using Overlap add / save method
8. Design of FIR filter using different windowing techniques
9. Design of IIR filters- Butterworth and Chebyshev
10. Applications of filtering in signal processing

Textbook(s)
1. Li Tan, Jean Jiang, Digital Signal Processing: Fundamentals and Applications, 3rd edition, Academic Press, 2019.
2. Sanjit K. Mitra, “Digital Signal Processing, A computer based approach”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company
Limited, Fourth Edition, 2010.

References(s)

1. Tarun Kumar Rawat, “Digital Signal Processing”, Oxford University Press, 2015.
2. Vinay K. Ingle, John G. Proakis, “Digital Signal Processing Using MATLAB” Third Edition, Cengage Learning,
2012.
 22ADM211 Leadership from Ramayana L-T-P-C: 1-0-0-1

Course Objectives

To provide a deeper understanding of the ethical grandeur of Indian culture, and be inspired to follow the ideals
of the characters depicted in Ramayana

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: Appreciate the significance of Rāmāyaṇa as an itihāsa, and important aspects of Bālakāṇḍa.
CO2: Understand the family values and ideal human relationships portrayed in the Ayodhyakāṇḍa and Aranyakāṇḍa of
Rāmāyaṇa.
CO3: Understand dharma and its nuances, emphasizing its applicability in an individual’s life through Kishkindhakāṇḍa
and Sundarakāṇḍa of Ramayana
CO4: Appreciate the triumph of dharma over adharma through Yuddhakāṇḍa of Rāmāyaṇa.
CO5: Appreciate the spiritual values from Rāmāyaṇa in resolving personal and social conflicts through varied effective
presentations of important episodes of the Rāmāyaṇa

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PSO
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO
CO1 2 2 3 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 3
CO3 3 2 3 3 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 3
CO5 3 3 3 2 3

Syllabus

Unit I

An overview of Valmiki’s epic. Introduction to the content and structure of the epic text and it’s principal characters. Bala-
Kāṇḍa: Preparing for the renowned mission; Ayodhya-Kāṇḍa: Harbinger of an Entire Tradition of Nobleness. Araṇya-
Kāṇḍa: Tale of the forest life

Unit II

Kishkindha-Kāṇḍa: The Empire of Holy Monkeys. Sundara-Kāṇḍa: Heart of the Ramayana; Yuddha-Kāṇḍa:The most
popular part of the Ramayana; Uttara-Kāṇḍa: An attempt to explain the untold stories

Unit III

Ramayana and Modern-day learning, Ecological Awareness in the Ramayana; Different Ramayana: Epic that connects the
world.

Textbooks/References

1. Leadership Lessons from the Ramayana, ASCSS

2. Rajagopalachari. C, The Ramayana
3. Valmiki, The Ramayana, Gita Press
 23CHY109 Engineering Chemistry- B L-T-P-C: 2-1-0-3
(Pre-requisite: Nil)

Course Objective

 To impart knowledge on the concepts of chemistry involved in the application of engineering materials that are
used in the industry/day-to day life.

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to
CO1: characterize the solids using X-ray diffraction technique and analyse the materials using computational tools.
CO2: apply the fundamental principles of electrochemistry to illustrate the functioning of electrochemical energy
systems.
CO3: understand the application of polymers in fabricating integrated electronic devices

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2 3
CO
CO1 3 1 1
CO2 3 2 1 1
CO3 2 3 1 2
CO4 2 3 1 2

Syllabus

Unit I
Solid state- Fundamentals of crystalline structures – unit cell, lattice parameters, Bravais lattices and types of crystals; X-
ray diffraction - Bragg’s equation and experimental methods (powder method and rotating crystal technique); Elements of
symmetry in crystal systems, defects in crystals – stoichiometric, non-stoichiometric, extrinsic and intrinsic defects. Vesta
– for visualization of crystal structures. Solar energy - introduction, utilization and conversion, photovoltaic cells - design,
construction and working, panels and arrays. Advantages and disadvantages of PV cells. DSSC (elementary treatment).

Unit II
Electrochemical energy system -Faradays laws, origin of potential, electrochemical series, reference electrodes, Nernst
equation, introduction to batteries - classification - primary, secondary and reserve (thermal) batteries. Kinetics of
electrochemical reaction – Tafel equations. Characteristics - cell potential, current, capacity and storage density, energy
efficiency. Construction, working and application of Leclanche cell-Duracell, lead acid batteries. Ni-Cd battery, Lithium ion
batteries. Fuel cell - construction and working of PEMFC and biofuel cell.

Unit III
Polymer and composite materials -Conducting polymers: Conducting mechanisms - Electron transport and bipolar
polymers. Photoconductive polymers: Charge carriers, charge injectors, charge transport, charge trapping. Liquid crystalline
polymers: Fundamentals and process, liquid crystalline displays –applications. Polymers for light emitting diodes –
introduction, polymer structures, Organic LEDs-their functioning-advantages and disadvantages over conventional LEDs –
their commercial uses. Piezoelectric materials – working principle and applications.

Textbooks and References:

1. Chemistry: A Molecular Approach, 4th Edition Nivaldo J. Tro, Santa Barbara City College
2. Patrick M. Woodward, Pavel Karen, John S. O. Evans, Solid State Materials Chemistry, Cambridge University
Press, 2021
3. Vladimir S. Bagotsky, Alexander M. Skundin, Yurij M. Volfkovich, Electrochemical Power Sources Batteries,
Fuel Cells, and Supercapacitors, John Wiley and Sons, 2015.
4. Bansi D. Malhotra, Handbook of Polymers in Electronics, Rapra Technology Limited, 2002
5. Ye Zhou, Guanglong Ding, Polymer Nanocomposite Materials: Applications in Integrated Electronic Devices,
Wiley-VCH, 2021.
6. Jain and Jain, “Engineering Chemistry”, Dhanpat Rai Publishing company, 2015.
 23ENV300 Environmental Science P/F
(Pre-requisite: Nil)

Course Objectives

 To study the nature and facts about environment.

 To appreciate the importance of environment by assessing its impact on the human world.
 To study the integrated themes and biodiversity, pollution control and waste management.

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: understand aspects of nature and environment

CO2: analyze impact of environment on human world
CO3: to comprehend pollution control and waste management

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO1 PSO2 PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3
CO
CO1 3 2 3
CO2 3 2 3
CO3 3 2 3

Syllabus

Unit I
Introduction- Overview of the global environment crisis; Biogeochemical cycles; Climate change and related international
conventions & treaties and regulations. Ozone hole and related International conventions & treaties and regulations; Over
population; Energy crisis; Water crisis; Ground water hydrogeology; Surface water resource development.

Unit II
Ecology, biodiversity loss and related international conventions– treaties and regulations. Deforestation and land
degradation; Food crisis; Water pollution and related International and local conventions – treaties and regulations. Sewage
- domestic and industrial; Effluent treatment; Air pollution and related international and local conventions, treaties and
regulations. Other pollution (land, thermal, noise).

Unit III
Solid waste management (municipal, medical, e-waste, nuclear, household hazardous wastes). Environmental management,
Environmental accounting, Green business, Eco-labelling, Environmental Impact Assessment. Constitutional-legal and
regulatory provisions; Sustainable development.

Textbook(s)
1. R. Rajagopalan, “Environmental Studies – From Crisis to Cure”, Oxford University Press, 2005, ISBN 0-19-
567393-X.

Reference(s)
1. G.T. Miller Jr., “Environmental Science”, 11th Edition, Cenage Learning Pvt. Ltd., 2008.

2. Benny Joseph, “Environmental Studies”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing company Limited, 2008.

23LSE201 LIFE SKILLS FOR ENGINEERS I L-T-P-C: 1 0 2-P/F

Pre-requisite(s): An open mind and the urge for self-development, basic English language skills, knowledge of high
school level mathematics.

Course Objectives

 Assist students in inculcating Soft Skills and developing a strong personality

 Help them improve their presentation skills
 Support them in developing their problem solving and reasoning skills
 Facilitate the enhancement of their communication skills

Course Outcomes

CO1: Soft Skills: To develop greater morale and positive attitude to face, analyse, and manageemotions in real life
situations, like placement process.

CO2: Soft Skills: To empower students to create a better impact on a target audience through content creation,
effective delivery, appropriate body language and overcoming nervousness, in situations like presentations, Group
Discussions and interviews.

CO3: Aptitude: To analyze, understand and employ the most suitable methods to solve questions on arithmetic and
algebra.

CO4: Aptitude: To investigate and apply suitable techniques to solve questions on logical reasoning and data analysis.

CO5: Verbal: To infer the meaning of words and use them in the right context. To have a better understanding of the
basics of English grammar and apply them effectively.

CO6: Verbal: To identify the relationship between words using reasoning skills. To develop the capacity to
communicate ideas effectively.

CO-PO Mapping

PO
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO

CO1 2 3 3 3

CO2 2 3 3

CO3 3 2

CO4 3 2

CO5 3 3

CO6 3 3 3

Syllabus
Soft Skills

Soft Skills and its importance: Pleasure and pains of transition from an academic environment to work-environment. New-
age challenges and distractions. Learning to benefit from constructive criticisms and feedback, Need for change in mindset
and up-skilling to keep oneself competent in the professional world.

Managing Self: Knowing oneself, Self-perception, Importance of positive attitude, Building and displaying confidence,
Avoiding being overconfident, Managing emotions, stress, fear. Developing Resilience and handling failures. Self-
motivation, Self-learning, and continuous knowledge up- gradation / Life-long learning. Personal productivity - Goal setting
and its importance in career planning, Self-discipline, Importance of values, ethics and integrity, Universal Human Values.

Aptitude

Problem Solving I

Numbers: Types, Power Cycles, Divisibility, Prime, Factors & Multiples, HCF & LCM, Surds, Indices,Square roots, Cube Roots
and Simplification.

Percentage: Basics, Profit, Loss & Discount, and Simple & Compound Interest. Ratio, Proportion & Variation: Basics,
Alligations, Mixtures, and Partnership. Averages: Basics, and Weighted Average.

Data Interpretation: Tables, Bar Diagrams, Venn Diagrams, Line Graphs, Pie Charts, Caselets, Mixed Varieties, Network
Diagrams and other forms of data representation.

Verbal

Vocabulary: Familiarize students with the etymology of words, help them realize the relevance of wordanalysis and
enable them to answer synonym and antonym questions. Create an awareness about the frequently misused words,
commonly confused words and wrong form of words in English.

Grammar (Basic): Help students learn the usage of structural words and facilitate students to identify errors and
correct them.

Reasoning: Stress the importance of understanding the relationship between words through analogy questions.

Speaking Skills: Make students conscious of the relevance of effective communication in today’s worldthrough various
individual speaking activities.

Reference(s):

1. Students” Career Planning Guide, Corporate & Industry Relations, Amrita VishwaVidyapeetham.
2. Soft Skill Handbook, Corporate & Industry Relations, Amrita Vishwa Vidyapeetham.
3. Adair. J., (1986), "Effective Team Building: How to make * winning team", London, U.K
4. Gulati. S., (1006) "Corporate Soft Skills", New Delhi, India: Rupa & Co.
5. The hard truth about Soft Skills, by Amazon Publication.
6. Verbal Skills Activity Book, CIR, AVVP
7. English Grammar & Composition, Wren & Martin
8. Nova’s GRE Prep Course, Jeff Kolby, Scott Thornburg & Kathleen Pierce
9. Cracking the New GRE 2012
10. Kaplan’s – GRE Comprehensive Programme
11. Student Workbook: Quantitative Aptitude & Reasoning, Corporate & Industry Relations,Amrita Vishwa
Vidyapeetham.

12. Quantitative Aptitude for All Competitive Examinations, Abhijit Guha.

13. How to Prepare for Quantitative Aptitude for the CAT, Arun Sharma.
14. How to Prepare for Data Interpretation for the CAT, Arun Sharma.

Evaluation Pattern: 50:50

Assessment Internal External

Continuous Assessment (CA) – Soft Skills 30 -

Continuous Assessment (CA) – Aptitude 10 25

Continuous Assessment (CA) – Verbal 10 25

Total 50 50

Pass / Fail

*CA - Can be presentations, speaking activities and tests.

SEMESTER IV
Course Objectives

23ECE211 Microcontrollers and Interfacing L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

(Pre-requisite: Digital Electronics)

 To provide understanding of Microcontrollers and its Applications

 To enable the understanding of Microcontroller Peripherals and their configuration
 To provide insight on the design of a simple Embedded System for specific Applications

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: understand the fundamentals of Microcontroller and its Peripherals

CO2: configure the Internal Peripherals of a Microcontroller
CO3: interface External Peripherals with an Embedded Platform
CO4: design a Microcontroller based System for real world applications

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2 3
CO
CO1 3 2 2
CO2 3 2 2 2 2
CO3 3 2 2 2 3
CO4 3 3 3 2 3

Syllabus

Unit I
Introduction to Embedded Systems - Introduction to ARM Architecture - ARM Programmer's Model - ARM Processor
Modes and States - Addressing Modes - ARM Instruction Set - Types - Data Processing Instructions - Assembly Language
Programming - Binary Encoding of Data Processing Instructions - Data Transfer Instructions - Binary Encoding of Data
Transfer Instructions

Unit II
Pipeline in Processor - Pipeline Hazards - ARM 3 Stage Pipeline - LPC2148 Microcontroller Architecture – GPIO - PLL -
Introduction to serial communication - Serial Transmission and Reception using UART
Unit III
ADC - DAC - External Interrupt - Timer - PWM - Seven Segment - Relay - DC Motor - Stepper Motor - LCD - Keypad -
Temperature Controller - DC Motor Speed Control - Remote Device Control

Textbook(s)
1. S. Furber, “ARM system On Chip Architecture”, Second Edition, Pearson, 2015.
2. LPC2148 User manual, NXP Semiconductors, https://www.nxp.com/docs/en/user-guide/UM10139.pdf

Reference(s)
1. T. Noergaard, “Embedded Systems Architecture A Comprehensive Guide for Engineers and Programmers”,
Newnes, 2013
2. A. Sloss, D. Symes, C. Wright, “ARM System Developer's Guide: Designing and Optimizing System Software”,
First Edition, Elsevier, 2004.

23ECE212 Analog Electronics II L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

(Pre-requisite: Analog Electronics -1)

Course Objectives

 To provide an understanding of operational amplifiers and their parameters

 To enable design of linear circuits using opamps
 To enable design of non-linear circuits using opamps

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: understand the operation of differential amplifiers

CO2: understand the specifications and parameters of opamps
CO3: design linear circuits based on opamps
CO4: design non-linear circuits based on opamps

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO1 PSO PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 2 3
CO
CO1 3 2
CO2 3 2 2
CO3 3 3 2 3 2
CO4 3 3 2 3 2

Syllabus

Unit I
MOS Differential pair - DC analysis, small-signal analysis, Common mode and Differential mode operations, common-
mode rejection, mismatches in Rd and gm; Transistor current sources- Current mirrors, Cascoding, Wilson Current Mirror.

Unit II
Operation Amplifier - Ideal Characteristics, DC imperfections, Input offset voltage - input offset current, Slew rate, Gain-
Bandwidth product, Input and Output impedances-CMRR; Linear applications of Op-amp: Inverting and Non-inverting
Amplifier, Voltage Follower, Summing amplifier, Difference & Instrumentation Amplifier, Integrator and Differentiator.

Unit III
Non-Linear Applications of Op-Amps- Comparators, Schmitt Trigger -Log and AntiLog circuit, Precision Rectifiers, Peak
detectors; Principles of Sinusoidal Oscillators - RC phase shift oscillator, Wein-Bridge Oscillator. Multivibrators -astable
and monostable multivibrator.

Textbook(s)
1. A S. Sedra, K. C. Smith and A. N. Chandorkar, “Microelectronic Circuits -Theory and Applications”, Seventh
Edition, Oxford University Press, 2017.
2. B. Razavi, “Design of Analog CMOS Integrated Circuits”, McGraw Hill, 2001.
Reference(s)
 1. Sergio Franco, “Design with Operational Amplifiers and Analog Integrated Circuits”, Fourth Edition, Tata
McGraw Hill Publishing Company Limited, 2015.
2. J. Millman and A.Grabel, “Microelectronics”, Second Edition, McGraw-Hill, 2001.

23ECE213 Communication Theory L-T-P-C: 3-1-0-4

(Pre-requisite: Signal Processing I)

Course Objectives

 To introduce the concepts of analog communication

 To provide the knowledge of time and frequency domain representation of analog modulation techniques
 To introduce the concepts of random processes and noise in analog communication systems

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: understand the principles of analog modulation and demodulation techniques

CO2: analyze the performance of different analog modulation techniques
CO3: understand the concepts of random processes
CO4: analyze the effect of noise in analog communication systems

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO2 PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 3
CO
CO1 3 2 2 3
CO2 3 3 2 3
CO3 3 2 3 3
CO4 3 3 2 3

Syllabus

Unit I
Introduction: Communication, importance, Requirements-major components/blocks and their functions in brief; Channel -
Types, Wired vs Wireless, communication through wired and wireless channels, requirements of communication for wireless
channel; Types of communication systems (standards like analog, digital, mobile, etc). Frequency usage for analog types.
Modulation - necessity, effect, types-linear and non-linear; Amplitude Modulation (AM): types of AM- DSB-SC AM-
Conventional AM-SB modulation, Comparison of different types in terms of bandwidth, power, complexity, etc.; AM
modulators; Demodulation and detection: Coherent and non-coherent detection, Demodulation of amplitude modulated
signal- envelop detection, Demodulators; Vestigial sideband modulation - Signal Multiplexing – Example of AM
communication systems. Super heterodyne receiver.

Unit II
Angle Modulation: Introduction and representation; kind of angle modulation- FM, PM; Generation of FM and PM,
Implementation of modulators and demodulators for PM and FM; Spectral characteristics of angle modulation; Narrow
band and wide band FM, bandwidth and power of FM/PM; Example of FM radio system; comparison between AM and FM
radio systems.

Unit III
Noise effect: Introduction – channel noise, Guassian noise; Probability and random variables and process – basic concepts,
random process in frequency domain, complex low pass representation of narrow band signals, narrow band noise and
filtering; Effect of noise on linear/nonlinear modulation systems, derivation of signal to noise ratio (SNR) for analog and
FM, Performance comparison.

Textbook(s)
1. John. G. Proakis and Masoud Salehi, “Fundamentals of Communication Systems”, Pearson Education, First Edition,
2007.
2. Herbert Taub, Donald Schilling, Principles of Communications, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2008.

Reference(s)
1. Bruce Carlson, Paul. B. Crilly, Janet. C. Ruteledge, “Communication Systems”, McGraw-Hill, 1993, Fourth Edition.
2. Rodger. E. Ziemer, William. H. Tranter, “Principle of Communication”, John Wiley, 1998, Fifth Edition.

23ECE215 Control Systems L-T-P-C: 3-1-0-4

(Pre-requisite: Nil)

Course Objectives

 To provide knowledge of the modeling of physical systems

 To enable performance analysis of physical systems
 To enable the use of control theory for the performance enhancement of physical systems

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: develop mathematical models of physical systems

CO2: analyze the time domain response performance of systems
CO3: analyze the frequency domain response performance of systems
CO4: design a control system for a given specification

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO2 PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 3
CO
CO1 3 2* 2 2 2 2 2
CO2 3 2 2 2* 2 2 2 2 2 2
CO3 3 2 2 2* 2 2 2 2 2 2
CO4 3 3 3 2* 2 2 2 2 2
* To be assessed through Term Project

Syllabus**

Unit I
Introduction - Need for control systems, Objectives of analysis and design, Design process. Laplace transforms review,
Transfer functions of Electrical, mechanical and electro-mechanical systems (DC motor). Linearization concept. Block
diagram reduction, signal flow graphs, Mason’s gain formula.

Unit II
Time response analysis. Transient performance, First order, second order, effect of addition of pole and zero. Steady state
performance, static error constants. Stability, Routh Hurwitz criterion. Root locus technique. Transient response design via
gain adjustment.

Unit III
Frequency response analysis. Need for Frequency response analysis. Representation, bode plot, polar plot, transfer function
from bode plot. Nyquist stability criterion, gain margin and phase margin, obtaining GM and PM from bode plot. Frequency
response specifications, obtaining closed loop performance specifications from open loop frequency response. Relation
between frequency and transient response specifications, Design of compensators Lead, Lag. Introduction to PID controllers.
Introduction to state space modelling of systems.

** all the concepts to be illustrated through MATLAB/SIMULNK/Hardware demonstrations

Textbook(s)
1. Norman Nise, “Control System Engineering”, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., Eight Edition, 2019.

Reference(s)
1. Katsuhiko Ogata, “Modern Control Engineering” 5th Edition, Prentice Hall Boston 2010
 23ECE216 Machine Learning L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3
(Pre-requisite: Foundations of Data Science)

Course Objectives

 To provide the foundations of machine learning

 To introduce supervised and unsupervised learning techniques
 To enable the appreciation of machine learning techniques

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: understand the mathematical foundations of machine learning

CO2: understand supervised and unsupervised learning techniques
CO3: apply machine learning techniques to standard datasets
CO4: analyze the performance of machine learning models

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO2 PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 3
CO
CO1 3 2 3
CO2 3 2 2
CO3 3 3 2
CO4 3 3 2

Syllabus

Unit I
Review of Multi-variable Calculus – partial derivatives, gradient, Hessian and Jacobian, multi-variate Taylor’s series;
Unconstrained Optimization – local and global minima, gradient descent, step-size, adaptive learning rate; Constrained
Optimization – Lagrange multipliers and KKT condition; Introduction to Machine Learning – supervised vs. unsupervised,
regression vs. classification, data normalization, missing data problem and data imbalance problem, underfitting and
overfitting, bias vs. variance; Performance Evaluation – evaluation measures, train- test- and validation datasets, cross-
validation, hyperparameter tuning.

Unit II
Linear Models – linear regression, stochastic gradient descent, minibatch, regularization, early stopping, logistic regression;
Support Vector Machines (SVM); Classification – K-Nearest Neighbor (KNN); Naïve Bayes; Decision Trees, Bagging,
Random Forest, Boosting; Clustering – linkage algorithms, K-Means, DBSCAN.

Unit III
Neural Networks – artificial neural networks (ANN), multi-layer perceptron, neural network structures, fully connected,
convolutional and recurrent neural networks, automatic differentiation, backpropagation, Optimizers – momentum, RMSP,
ADAM; Dropout; Applications of ANN to regression and classification.

Textbook(s)
1. Hui Jiang, “Machine Learning Fundamentals”, Cambridge university Press, 2021.
2. Aurelion Geron, “Hands-On Machine Learning with Scikit-Learn, Keras and TensorFlow”, O’Reilly, Third Edition,
2023.
Reference(s)
1. Goodfellow, I., Bengio, Y. and Courville, A., 2016. Deep learning. MIT press.
2. Christopher M Bishop. Pattern Recognition and Machine Learning. Springer 2010.
3. Marc Peter Deisenroth, A. Aldo Faisal, and Cheng Soon Ong, “Mathematics for Machine Learning”, Cambridge
University Press, 2020.
 23ECE284 Microcontrollers and Interfacing Laboratory L-T-P-C: 0-0-3-1
(Pre-requisite: Digital Electronics)

Course Objectives

 To provide hands-on experience of a Microcontroller and its Peripherals

 To provide experience in the interfacing of External Peripherals with a Microcontroller
 To enable the design and implementation of simple Embedded Systems

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: program in Assembly Language and Embedded C

CO2: configure the Internal Peripherals of a Microcontroller
CO3: interface External Peripherals with a Microcontroller
CO4: prototype a Microcontroller based System

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2 3
CO
CO1 3 3 3 3 2 3
CO2 3 2 3 3 3 2 3
CO3 3 2 3 3 3 2 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3

Syllabus
Define a system which might cover most of the experiments. It is possible to define at most 2 systems for whole
experiments of this course. In the beginning of the lab class, system level explanation must be given to the students.

Examination/evaluation for system level should have higher weightage of marks. They need to develop system (at least
prototype) at the end, not on breadboard.

Example:
Design an office automation where all interfaces of it might be used for controlling several of office items/machineries.

Experiment Contents:
1. Assembly Language Programs for Addition, Subtraction, Indirect Addressing Modes
2. LED Blinking and Control of LED with Switch using GPIO Peripheral in LPC2148
3. Serial Transmission and Reception using UART
4. Sensor Interfacing using ADC
5. Square Wave Generation using Timer
6. DC Motor Speed Control using PWM
7. LCD Interfacing
8. Term Project

Textbook(s)
1. LPC2148 User manual, NXP Semiconductors, https://www.nxp.com/docs/en/user-guide/UM10139.pdf

References(s)
1. Sloss, D. Symes, C. Wright, “ARM System Developer's Guide: Designing and Optimizing System Software”, First
Edition, Elsevier, 2004.

23ECE285 Machine Learning Laboratory L-T-P-C: 0-0-3-1

(Pre-requisite: Foundations of Data Science)

Course Objectives
  To provide hands-on experience in the training of ML models
 To enable the performance analysis of Machine Learning algorithms
 To enable the identification of optimal model hyperparameters

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: preprocess data

CO2: train ML models
CO3: analyze the performance of ML algorithms
CO4: optimize model performance

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO2 PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 3
CO
CO1 3 3 2 2 3
CO2 3 3 2 2 2
CO3 3 2 3 2 2 3
CO4 3 2 2 3 2 2 2

Syllabus
Define a system which might cover most of the experiments. It is possible to define at most 2 systems for whole
experiments of this course. In the beginning of the lab class, system level explanation must be given to the students.

Examination/evaluation for system level should have higher weightage of marks. They need to develop system (at least
prototype) at the end, not on breadboard.

Example:
Develop a useful application (case study) which can be used directly by student, faculty, dept. management, school,
university or anyone or organization.

Experiment Contents:
1. Data pre-processing: data cleaning, scaling, encoding
2. Descriptive Statistics - central tendency and dispersion
3. Regression- single- and multi-variable
4. Classification – logistic regression, KNN, Naïve Bayes’, decision trees
5. Clustering - K-Means, DBSCAN, GMM
6. Performance Evaluation: confusion matrix, accuracy, precision, recall, specificity, ROC, inertia, silhouette score,
hyper-parameter tuning for optimizing the performance
7. Artificial Neural Networks - Case Studies involving classification

Textbook(s)
1. Wei-Meng Lee, “Python Machine Learning”, Wiley, 2019.
2. Aurelion Geron, “Hands-On Machine Learning with Scikit-Learn, Keras and TensorFlow”, O’Reilly, Third Edition,
2023.

Reference(s)
1. Thomas Nield, “Essential Math for Data Science”, O’Reilly, 2022.
2. Jake VanderPlas, “Python Data Science Handbook”, O’Reilly, Second Edition, 2023.
3. Jason Brownlee, “Machine Learning Algorithms from Scratch”, Available Online, 2018.
4. Joel Grus, “Data Science from Scratch: First Principles with Python”, O’Reilly Media, 2015.

23ECE286 Circuits and Communication Laboratory L-T-P-C: 0-0-3-1

(Pre-requisite: Analog Electronics -1)

Course Objectives
  To enable an understanding of differential amplifier operation
 To provide hands-on experience in prototyping IC-based circuits
 To enable the implementation of simple analog communication circuits

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: use datasheets effectively

CO2: simulate complex circuits
CO3: characterise differential amplifiers
CO4: design & prototype op-amp based circuits
CO5: design & prototype simple analog communication circuits

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO1 PSO2 PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3
CO
CO1 3 2 2 2 2
CO2 3 2 3 2 2 2 2
CO3 3 2 2 2
CO4 3 2 2 2 2 2 3
CO5 3 2 2 2 2 2

Syllabus
Define a system which might cover most of the experiments. It is possible to define at most 2 systems for whole
experiments of this course. In the beginning of the lab class, system level explanation must be given to the students.

Examination/evaluation for system level should have higher weightage of marks. They need to develop system (at least
prototype) at the end, not on breadboard.

Example:
 To design transimpedance amplifier to amplify the AC signal of a photodiode. The circuit should reject DC signals.
Switching speed should be more than 3MHz.

Reference:
https://www.ti.com/lit/an/sboa324/sboa324.pdf?ts=1684025930170&ref_url=https%253A%252F%252Fwww.ti.com%252
Fsitesearch%252Fen-us%252Fdocs%252Funiversalsearch.tsp%253FlangPref%253Den-
US%2526searchTerm%253Dinstrumentation%2Bamplifier%2526nr%253D966034

 To design a low-noise analog signal chain for PIR-based motion detection subsystems in line-powered applications
resulting in longer detection range.

Reference:
https://www.ti.com/lit/ug/tidueh9/tidueh9.pdf?ts=1684027114303&ref_url=https%253A%252F%252Fwww.ti.com%252F
tool%252FCIRCUIT060004

 Design an AM (approximately 1W power output) broadcast transmitter and receiver. Demonstrate with 1 Transmitter
and multiple receivers in the lab. You can take any frequency around 755KHz.

Experiment Contents:
1. MOS Differential Amplifier
2. Characterization of operational amplifiers
3. Operational amplifier -Inverting, Non-inverting Amplifier and Difference Amplifiers.
4. Operational amplifier- Integrators, differentiator.
5. RC phase shift oscillator/ Wein-Bridge Oscillator.
 6. Integrated-Circuit Timer Astable and Monostable multivibrator.
7. Generation and recovery of Amplitude modulated signal
8. DSB_SC Amplitude modulator using Ring modulator.
9. Circuit design (MOSFET) for envelop detector
10. Frequency Modulator
11. Pulse width modulator and pulse position modulator using 555 timer*
12. SSB-AM, VSB-AM using MATLAB
13. Frequency Division Multiplexing using MATLAB

Textbook(s)
1. A S. Sedra, K. C. Smith and A. N. Chandorkar, “Microelectronic Circuits -Theory and Applications”, Seventh
Edition, Oxford University Press, 2017.
2. John. G. Proakis and Masoud Salehi, “Fundamentals of Communication Systems”, Pearson Education, First Edition,
2007.
Reference(s)

1. Robert L Boylestad and Louis Nashelsky, “Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory”, Eleventh Edition, Pearson India
Education Services Pvt. Ltd., 2015.
2. Bruce Carlson, Paul.B. Crilly, Janet.C.Ruteledge, “Communication Systems”, McGraw-Hill, 1993, Fourth Edition.

23LSE211 LIFE SKILLS FOR ENGINEERS II L-T-P-C: 1-0-2-2

Pre-requisite(s): An inquisitive mind, basic English language skills, knowledge of high school level mathematics.

Course Objectives

 Assist students in inculcating Soft Skills and developing a strong personality.

 Help them improve their presentation skills.
 Aid them in developing their problem solving and reasoning skills.
 Facilitate them in improving the effectiveness of their communication.

Course Outcomes

CO1: Soft Skills: To develop greater morale and positive attitude to face, analyse, and manageemotions in real life
situations, like placement process.

CO2: Soft Skills: To empower students to create better impact on a target audience through content creation,
effective delivery, appropriate body language and overcoming nervousness, in situations like presentations, Group
Discussions and interviews.

CO3: Aptitude: To analyze, understand and employ the most suitable methods to solve questions on arithmetic and
algebra.

CO4: Aptitude: To investigate and apply suitable techniques to solve questions on logical reasoning and data analysis.

CO5: Verbal: To learn to use more appropriate words in the given context. To have a better understanding of the
nuances of English grammar and become capable of applying them effectively.

CO6: Verbal: To be able to read texts critically and arrive at/ predict logical conclusions. To learn to organize speech
and incorporate feedback in order to convey ideas with better clarity.

CO-PO Mapping
 PO
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO

CO1 2 3 3 3

CO2 2 3 3

CO3 3 2

CO4 3 2

CO5 3 3

CO6 3 3 3

Syllabus

Soft Skills

Communication: Process, Language Fluency, Non-verbal, Active listening. Assertiveness vs. aggressiveness. Barriers in
communication. Digital communication

Presentations: Need, importance, preparations, research and content development, structuring and ensuring flow of the
presentation. Ways and means of making an effective presentation: Understanding and connecting with the audience –
using storytelling technique, managing time, appropriate language, gestures, posture, facial expressions, tones,
intonations and grooming. Importance of practice to make an impactful presentation.

Aptitude

Problem Solving II

Equations: Basics, Linear, Quadratic, Equations of Higher Degree and Problems on ages.

Logarithms, Inequalities and Modulus: Basics

Time and Work: Basics, Pipes & Cistern, and Work Equivalence.

Time, Speed and Distance: Basics, Average Speed, Relative Speed, Boats & Streams, Races andCircular tracks.

Logical Reasoning: Arrangements, Sequencing, Scheduling, Venn Diagram, Network Diagrams,Binary Logic, and
Logical Connectives.

Verbal

Vocabulary: Aid students learn to use their vocabulary to complete the given sentences with the rightwords. Usage of
more appropriate words in different contexts is emphasized.

Grammar (Basic-intermediate): Help students master usage of grammatical forms and enablestudents to identify
errors and correct them.

Reasoning: Emphasize the importance of avoiding the gap (assumption) in arguments/ statements/ communication.

Reading Comprehension (Basics): Introduce students to smart reading techniques and help themunderstand
different tones in comprehension passages.
Speaking Skills: Make students be aware of the importance of impactful communication throughindividual speaking
activities in class.

Writing Skills: Introduce formal written communication and keep the students informed about the etiquette of email
writing.

Reference(s)

1. Students” Career Planning Guide, Corporate & Industry Relations, Amrita VishwaVidyapeetham.
2. Soft Skill Handbook, Corporate & Industry Relations, Amrita Vishwa Vidyapeetham.
3. Adair. J., (1986), "Effective Team Building: How to make * winning team", London, U.K
4. Gulati. S., (1006) "Corporate Soft Skills", New Delhi, India: Rupa & Co.
5. The hard truth about Soft Skills, by Amazon Publication.
6. Verbal Skills Activity Book, CIR, AVVP
7. English Grammar & Composition, Wren & Martin
8. Nova’s GRE Prep Course, Jeff Kolby, Scott Thornburg & Kathleen Pierce
9. Cracking the New GRE 2012
10. Kaplan’s – GRE Comprehensive Programme
11. Student Workbook: Quantitative Aptitude & Reasoning, Corporate & Industry Relations, Amrita Vishwa
Vidyapeetham.
12. Quantitative Aptitude for All Competitive Examinations, Abhijit Guha.
13. How to Prepare for Quantitative Aptitude for the CAT, Arun Sharma.
14. How to Prepare for Data Interpretation for the CAT, Arun Sharma.

Evaluation Pattern: 50:50

Assessment Internal External

Continuous Assessment (CA) – Soft Skills 30 -

Continuous Assessment (CA) – Aptitude 10 25

Continuous Assessment (CA) – Verbal 10 25

Total 50 50

*CA - Can be presentations, speaking activities and tests.

 22ADM201 Strategic Lessons from Mahabharata L-T-P-C: 1-0-0-1
(Amrita Value Programme -2)
Course Objectives

To provide deeper understanding of the ethical grandeur of Indian culture, and be inspired to follow the ideals of
the characters depicted therein

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: understand the impact of itihasas on Indian civilization with a special reference to the Adiparva of Mahabharata
CO2: understand the importance of fighting adharma for the welfare of the society through Sabha and Vanaparva.
CO3: understand the nuances of dharma through the contrast between noble and ignoble characters of the epic as depicted
in the Vana, Virata, Udyoga and Bhishma parvas
CO4: get deeper understanding of the Yuddha Dharma through the subsequent Parvas viz., Drona, Karna, Shalya, Sauptika
Parvas
CO5: appreciate the spiritual instruction on the ultimate triumph of dharma through the presentations of the important
episodes of the MB with special light on Shanti, Anushasana, Ashwamedhika, Ashramavasika, Mausala,
Mahaprasthanika and Swargarohana Parvas

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PSO
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO
CO1 1 3 1 3
CO2 2 3 3 3 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 2 3
CO5 3 1 3 1 1 3

Syllabus

Unit I

Mahābhārata - A Brief Summary- A Preamble to the Grand Itihāsa- The Unbroken Legacy; Dharmic Insights of a Butcher;
The Vows We Take; Kingship and Polity Acumen

Unit II
Karna – The Maestro that Went Wide off the Mark; Tactics of Krishna; Yajnaseni; Popular Regional Tales; Maha
Prasthanam – The Last Journey.

Unit III

Mahabharata - An All-Encompassing Text; Mahābhārata- Whats and What Nots; Nyayas in Mahabharata.

Textbooks/References

1. Leadership Lessons from the Mahabharat, ASCSS

2. Rajagopalachari. C, The Mahabharata

23LAW300 Indian Constitution L-T-P-C: P/F

(Pre-requisite – Nil)
Course Objectives
To know about Indian constitution, Indian society, central and state government functionalities in India

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to
CO1: understand the functions of the Indian government
CO2: understand and abide the rules of the Indian constitution
CO3: understand and appreciate different culture among the people

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO1 PSO2 PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3
CO
CO1 - - - - - 3 2 3 - - - - - - -
CO2 - - - - - 3 2 3 - - - - - - -
CO3 - - - - - 3 2 3 - - - - - - -

Syllabus

Unit I
Historical Background – Constituent Assembly of India – Philosophical Foundations of The Indian Constitution – Preamble
– Fundamental Rights – Directive Principles of State Policy – Fundamental Duties – Citizenship – Constitutional Remedies
for Citizens.

Unit II
Union Government – Structures of the Union Government and Functions – President – Vice President – Prime Minister –
Cabinet – Parliament – Supreme Court of India – Judicial Review.

Unit III
State Government – Structure and Functions – Governor – Chief Minister – Cabinet – State Legislature – Judicial System
in States – High Courts and other Subordinate Courts.

Textbook(s)
1. Durga Das Basu, “Introduction to the Constitution of India “, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 24 th Edition, 2021.
2. R. C. Agarwal, “Indian Political System”, S. Chand and Company, New Delhi, 12 th Edition, 2019.

Reference(s)
1. Sharma, Brij Kishore, “Introduction to the Constitution of India”, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 7 th Edition, 2019.

SEMESTER V

23ECE301 Computer Systems and Architecture L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

(Pre-requisite: Digital Electronics)

Course Objectives

 To provide introduction to Computer System Architecture

 To provide foundation on various building blocks of a Computer Architecture
 To introduce the concepts of Pipelining and Parallel Processing

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: understand various functional units and mathematical operations of Computer Systems
CO2: design data-path and control-path operations during execution
CO3: understand Memory Organization and Input Output interfacing
CO4: understand the effect of Pipelining and Parallel Processing

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2 3
CO
CO1 3 3 3
 CO2 3 2 2 3 3
CO3 3 2 2 3 3
CO4 3 2 3 3

Syllabus

Unit I
Introduction to computer system – Usage of basic digital blocks - Floating point number – IEEE single precision and double
precision representation - Floating point arithmetic - Floating point adder/Subtractor - Addressing modes with examples -
Data path and controller design – Single bus dataflow unit - Multi bus architecture

Unit II
Introduction to CPU design - Processor organization - Execution of complete instruction - Design of control unit - Hardwired
Control - Microprogrammed Control - Memory and system organization – CPU and memory interaction - Organization of
memory modules and interfacing - Cache memory: introduction, related mapping and replacement policies -

Unit III
Input/output processing - Introduction to Interrupts - Interrupt controlled I/O transfer DMA - Introduction to RISC and
CISC approaches - Introduction to pipelining - Pipeline performance - Hazards in pipeline and types – Introduction to
Parallel Processing - Parallel Processing Performance – Multithreading - Cache coherence for shared data - Message passing
in distributed memory systems - Mathematical modeling of performance.

Textbook(s)
1. V. Carl Hamacher, Zvonko G. Varanesic and Safat G. Zaky, “Computer Organisation”, Fifth edition, Indian
Edition, McGraw-Hill Education, 2011.
2. Patterson DA, Hennessy JL. Computer Organisation and Design, The Hardware/Software interface (ARM Edition).
Fourth Edition, Morgan Kaufmann; 2010.
Reference(s)

1. Behrooz Parhami, “Computer Architecture”, Indian Edition, Oxford University Press, 2012.
2. John P. Hayes, “Computer Architecture and Organisation”, Indian Edition, McGraw-Hill Education, 2017.

23ECE302 VLSI Design L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

(Pre-requisite: Electronic Devices and Circuits, Digital Electronics)

Course Objectives

 To enable design of CMOS logic circuits at the schematic and layout level
 To enable an understanding of dc and transient characteristics of MOS circuits
 To enable the analysis of RC delays in CMOS circuits

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: design schematics and layout of CMOS circuits

CO2: characterize the DC and transient behaviour of CMOS circuits
CO3: analyze effect of device sizing on RC delays
CO4: understand different CMOS circuit enhancements for improved speed, area and delay

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO1 PSO2 PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3
CO
CO1 3 2 2 3
CO2 3 2 3
CO3 3 2 3
CO4 3 3

Syllabus

Unit I
VLSI Design – Introduction, VLSI design flow - MOSFETs as logic switches – Pass Characteristics of MOSFETs, CMOS
logic design, Transmission gates-based design, CMOS Layers, RC of an Interconnect, Design of FET Arrays, CMOS
physical layouts and stick diagrams - Design Rules, CMOS Process Flow.

Unit II
MOSFET characteristics and sizing - MOSFET channel and current equations, Scaling Theory. FET RC Model, Elmore
Delay calculation. DC switching characteristics of CMOS inverter - DC characteristics of NAND and NOR gates - Transient
response of Inverter. Power Dissipation, Gate design for transient performance, Logical Effort.

Unit III
CMOS logic circuit design Techniques - Mirror circuits – Pseudo NMOS - Clocked CMOS - Dynamic CMOS logic circuits,
Domino, MODL, CVSL.

Textbook(s)

1. J. P. Uyemura, “Introduction to VLSI Circuits and Systems”, John Wiley and Sons, 2006.
2. Neil Weste, David Harris, Ayan Banerjee, “CMOS VLSI Design: A Circuits and Systems Perspective”, Pearson
Education, 4th Edition, 2011.
Reference(s)
1. Jan M. Rabey, Anantha Chandrakasan, and Borivoje Nikolic, “Digital Integrated Circuits-A Design Perspective”,
Second Edition, Prentice Hall/Pearson, 2003.
2. Sung-Mo Kang, Yusuf Leblechi, “CMOS Digital Integrated Circuits - Analysis and Design”, Tata McGraw Hill
Publishing Company Limited, Third Edition, 2003.

23ECE303 Radio Frequency and Microwave Engineering L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

(Pre-requisite: Electromagnetic Theory and Waves)

Course Objectives

 To provide fundamentals to analyze the parameters of transmission lines

 To enable characterize high frequency devices
 To understand microwave communication systems

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: model and analyze transmission line parameters

CO2: characterize high frequency passive devices
CO3: understand the working of passive microwave devices
CO4: understand microwave communication systems

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO2 PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 3
CO
CO1 3 2 2 3
CO2 3 2 2 3
CO3 2 2 3
CO4 2 3 3

Syllabus

Unit I
Transmission line theory: TEM wave along parallel plate line – Transmission line parameters;– General equations – Infinite
line concept – Transmission line parameters – Finite line properties – Input impedance – Smith chart calculations –
Transmission line impedance matching techniques – Stub matching.

Unit II
High Frequency analysis: Scattering matrix – S-parameter analysis of passive waveguide devices; Directional Couplers,
Tees, Circulators. Noise in RF systems – Noise figure computations, Dynamic range.

Unit III
RF Systems: Antenna Systems – Antenna Parameters – Antenna Noise Temperature – Friis Formula – Link Budget
Calculations- Carrier to Noise Ratio – Case studies : GPS, DTH

Textbook(s)
1. David M. Pozar, “Microwave Engineering”, Wiley India Limited, Fourth Edition, 2012.
2. Samuel. Y. Liao, “Microwave Devices and Circuits”, Pearson Education, Third Edition, 2004 .

References(s)
1. Ludwig R, Bogdanov G,“RF Circuit Design, Theory and Applications”, Pearson Education Inc, Second Edition,
2013.

Course Objectives

23ECE304 Digital Communication L-T-P-C: 3-1-0-4

(Pre-requisite: Communication Theory)
 To introduce the concepts of digital modulation and demodulation techniques
 To provide an understanding of optimum receiver design
 To enable performance analysis of digital communication systems

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: understand the concepts of waveform coding and signal design

CO2: understand the principles of digital modulation techniques
CO3: design optimum receivers for digital communication systems
CO4: conduct performance analysis of digital modulation techniques

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO2 PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 3
CO
CO1 3 2 2 3
CO2 3 2 3 3
CO3 3 3 2 3
CO4 3 3 3 3

Syllabus
Unit I

Introduction: Digital communication, importance, requirements; Main blocks and major functions; Analog to Digital
Conversion; Waveform Coding –PCM –DPCM –DM; Time Division Multiplexing; Geometric representation of signal
waveforms- Binary pulse modulation –Optimum receiver for binary modulated signals in additive white Gaussian noise: M-
ary binary and orthogonal pulse modulation –Probability of error for binary and M-ary pulse modulation.

Unit II

Digital Transmission through band limited channel- Baseband, Bandpass, Band limited channels, Inter-Symbol Interference
(ISI) - Signal design for band limited channels –Probability of error for detection of digital PAM –System design in the
presence of channel distortion.

Unit III

Transmission of digital information via carrier modulation: Types of digital modulation –Amplitude shift keying (ASK) –
Phase shift keying (BPSK, QPSK, M-PSK); Quadrature amplitude modulated signals (M-QAM) –Frequency modulated
signals (FSK)- Minimum Shift Keying (MSK), Continuous phase shift keying-Comparison of Various Modulation
Techniques; Derivation and calculation of probability of error, Performance analysis of different modulation techniques.
Textbook(s)
1. John.G.Proakis and Masoud Salehi, “Fundamentals of Communication Systems”, Pearson Education, First Edition,
2007.
2. Simon Haykin, "Digital Communication systems", John Wiley&sons,2014.

Reference(s)
1. Ziemer and Peterson, Introduction to Digital Communication, Pearson Education, 2000.
2. B.Sklar, “Digital Communications”, Pearson Education, Second Edition, 2006.

23ECE381 Open Laboratory -1 L-T-P-C: 0-0-3-1

(Pre-requisite: Nil)

Course Objectives

 To provide platform for creative and innovative thinking

 To enable understanding of available state of art in the identified area of interest
 To enable simulation/hardware-prototyping of solutions to effectively transform ideas to reality

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: analyze practical problems and investigate scope for applying technology to develop feasible solutions
CO2: design the required system using appropriate EDA tools and implement the hardware
CO3: analyze the implementation impact and suggest improvements or modifications
CO4: present the concept with adequate validation on technical aspects and cost analysis

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PSO
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

CO1 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3

23ECE382 Radio Frequency and Microwave Laboratory L-T-P-C: 0-0-3-1

(Pre-requisite: Nil)

Course Objectives

 To provide hands-on experience on electromagnetic simulation software

 To provide exposure to working and characterization of microwave devices
 To provide exposure to microwave communication systems

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: design and simulate radio frequency devices

CO2: analyze and interpret simulated results
CO3: setup experiments to characterize passive microwave devices
CO4: conduct experiments on microwave communication systems
CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO2 PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 3
CO
CO1 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 3
CO2 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 3
CO3 3 2 3 3 2 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 3

Syllabus

Define a system which might cover most of the experiments. It is possible to define at most 2 systems for whole
experiments of this course. In the beginning of the lab class, system level explanation must be given to the students.

Examination/evaluation for system level should have higher weightage of marks. They need to develop system (at least
prototype) at the end, not on breadboard.

Example:

Establish a microwave link for a minimum of 10m distance to transmit and receive a data of around 10-100Mbps. What
would you do to get this data rate? Study, measure and verify all stages in/output signal.
Also, measure the radiation pattern around received antenna. Also, measure or calculate the received data rate within the
radiation pattern.

Experiment Contents
1) Characterization of waveguide-based microwave setup.
2) Measurement of return loss and insertion loss of selected microwave component.
3) Material characterization using waveguide based set up.
4) Measurement of radiation pattern of horn antennas and Friis analysis.
5) Electromagnetic simulation and scattering matrix studies on coaxial transmission lines.
6) Electromagnetic simulation and scattering parameters study on microstrip lines.
7) Electromagnetic simulation and characterization of rectangular microstrip antenna.
8) Electromagnetic simulation and characterization of microstrip power dividers.
9) Electromagnetic simulation and characterization of rectangular microstrip resonator.
10) Electromagnetic simulation and characterization of hybrid ring couplers.

Textbook(s)
1. David M. Pozar, “Microwave Engineering”, Wiley India Limited, Fourth Edition, 2012.

Reference(s)
1. Samuel. Y. Liao, “Microwave Devices and Circuits”, Pearson Education, Third Edition, 2004.

23ECE383 VLSI Design Laboratory L-T-P-C: 0-0-3-1

(Pre-requisite: Digital Electronics)

Course Objectives

 To enable the use of simulation tools for analyzing CMOS circuits

 To provide hands-on experience in HDL modeling and simulation of digital subsystems
 To provide a background in the synthesis and implementation of HDL models

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: model and simulate combinational subsystems using HDLs

CO2: model and simulate sequential subsystems using HDLs
CO3: implement HDL models on FPGA
CO4: model and simulate CMOS logic circuits

CO-PO Mapping
PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO1 PSO2 PSO
O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3
CO
CO1 3 3 3 3 2 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 3
CO3 3 2 3 3 3 2 3
CO4 3 2 3 3 3 2 3

Syllabus

Define a system which might cover most of the experiments. It is possible to define at most 2 systems for whole
experiments of this course. In the beginning of the lab class, system level explanation must be given to the students.

Examination/evaluation for system level should have higher weightage of marks. They need to develop system (at least
prototype) at the end, not on breadboard.

1. Write Verilog code to design following combinational circuits using Gate level (Structural) modeling-
(i) Half adder
(ii) 2:1 Multiplexer
2. Write Verilog code to design following combinational circuits using Data flow modeling-
(i) Half adder
(ii) 2:1 Multiplexer
3. Write Verilog code to design following combinational circuits using Gate level (Structural) modeling-
(i) Full adder using half adders and any other required logic gate
(ii) 4:1 Multiplexer using 2:1 Multiplexers only
(iii) 8:1 Multiplexer using 2:1 Multiplexers only
4. Write Verilog code to design following sequential circuits using behavioral modeling-
(i) D Latch
(ii) D Flip-flop
(iii) T Flip-flop
(iv) JK Flip-flop
5. Write a Verilog code to design 4-bit Up/Down counter using behavioral modeling.
6. Implementation of sequence detector using Mealy and/or Moore FSM.
7. Implementation of FIFO and LIFO.
8. Design and analyze the transient characteristics for CMOS logic schematics.
9. Design and analyze the transient Characteristics for Full Adder and Ripple Carry Adder using CMOS logic in
schematic.
10. Design and analyze the transient characteristics for D-Flip Flop, JK Flipflop, and T-Flip Flop using CMOS logic
in schematic.

Textbook(s)

1. Samir Palnitkar, “Verilog HDL: A Guide to Digital Design and Synthesis”, Second Edition, Pearson, 2003.
Michael D Ciletti, “Advanced Digital Design with the Verilog HDL”, Second Edition, Pearson, 2017.
2. J. P. Uyemura, “Introduction to VLSI Circuits and Systems”, John Wiley and Sons, 2006.
Reference(s)
1. T. R. Padmanabhan and B. Bala Tripura Sundari, “Design through the Verilog HDL”, First Edition, Wiley
Interscience, 2004.
2. Stephen Brown, Zvonko Vranesic, “Fundamentals of Digital logic with Verilog Design”, Tata McGraw Hill
Publishing Company Limited, Special Indian Edition, 2007.
 23ECE384 Communication Systems Laboratory L-T-P-C: 0-0-3-1
(Prerequisite: Communication Theory)

Course Objectives

 To provide hands-on exposure to digital communication techniques using ICs and discrete components
 To enable performance analysis of various digital modulation schemes
 To provide exposure to hardware platforms for communication systems

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: build electronic circuits for digital communication

CO2: simulate and verify digital modulation schemes
CO3: analyze the performance of digital modulation techniques
CO4: utilize hardware platforms to realize communication systems

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO2 PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 3
CO
CO1 3 2 3 3 2 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 3 2 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
CO4 3 2 3 3 3 3 3

Syllabus

Define a system which might cover most of the experiments. It is possible to define at most 2 systems for whole
experiments of this course. In the beginning of the lab class, system level explanation must be given to the students.

Examination/evaluation for system level should have higher weightage of marks. They need to develop system (at least
prototype) at the end, not on breadboard.

Example:
 To design a BPSK wireless communication system.
 Record your audio (read above 4 Cos). Convert this audio to digital form. Modulate, transmit through wireless channel
and receive at closed by (same board). Study, investigate, measure the signal in-out at each stage.
 Use any hardware platform like NooRadio, SDR, ZigBee and establish end-to-end communication. Measure all stages
input and output. Create necessary interference/noise and record BER performance.

Experiment Contents:

1. Sampling and reconstruction of an analog signal by designing pulse amplitude modulator and demodulator
circuits.
2. Application of sampling by designing time division multiplexer and demultiplexer circuits.
3. Amplitude modulator which can be used to transmit the digital information via carrier and be able to reconstruct
the message signal.
4. Phase modulator which can be used to transmit the digital information via carrier and be able to reconstruct the
message signal.
5. Pulse code modulator and Delta modulator
6. Geometric representation of the given signal using Gram Schmidt orthogonalization procedure implemented in
MATLAB.
7. ASK (OOK) and BPSK modulator and demodulator and BER performance comparison
8. M-PSK and QAM modulator and demodulator and BER performance comparison
9. To study the effects of ISI by generating an Eye pattern
10. Specifications, characterization of Hardware platforms like NooRadio, SDR, etc.
11. Establishment of wireless communication link using a pair of hardware platform

Textbook(s)
1. John G. Proakis, Masoud Salehi and Gerhard Bauch, “Contemporary Communication Systems Using
MATLAB.Cengage Learning India”, Third Edition, 2012.
Reference(s)
1. John.G.Proakis and Masoud Salehi, “Fundamentals of Communication Systems”, Pearson Education, First Edition,
2007.
2. Simon Haykin, "Digital Communication systems", John Wiley&sons,2014.

23LSE301 LIFE SKILLS FOR ENGINEERS III L-T-P-C: 1-0-2-2

Pre-requisite(s): Willingness to learn, communication skills, basic English language skills,knowledge of high school
level mathematics.

Course Objectives

 Help students understand corporate culture, develop leadership qualities and become good team players
 Assist them in improving group discussion skills
 Help students to sharpen their problem solving and reasoning skills
 Empower students to communicate effectively

Course Outcomes

CO1 - Soft Skills: To improve the inter-personal communication and leadership skills, vital for arriving at win-win
situations in Group Discussions and other team activities.

CO2 - Soft Skills: To develop the ability to create better impact in a Group Discussions through examination,
participation, perspective-sharing, ideation, listening, brainstorming and consensus.

CO3 - Aptitude: To identify, investigate and arrive at appropriate strategies to solve questionson geometry, statistics,
probability and combinatorics.

CO4 - Aptitude: To analyze, understand and apply suitable methods to solve questions on logical reasoning.

CO5 - Verbal: To be able to use diction that is more refined and appropriate and to be competent in spotting
grammatical errors and correcting them.

CO6-Verbal: To be able to logically connect words, phrases, sentences and thereby communicate their
perspectives/ideas convincingly.

CO-PO Mapping

PO
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO

CO1 3 3 2 3

CO2 3 2 2

CO3 3 2
 CO4 3 2

CO5 3 3

CO6 3 3 3

Syllabus

Soft Skills

Professional Grooming and Practices: Basics of corporate culture, key pillars of business etiquette – online and
offline: socially acceptable ways of behavior, body language, personal hygiene, professional attire and Cultural
adaptability and managing diversity. Handling pressure, multi-tasking. Beingenterprising. Adapting to corporate life:
Emotional Management (EQ), Adversity Management, Health consciousness. People skills, Critical Thinking and
Problem solving.

Group Discussions: Advantages of group discussions, Types of group discussion and Roles played in a group discussion.
Personality traits evaluated in a group discussion. Initiation techniques andmaintaining the flow of the discussion,
how to perform well in a group discussion. Summarization/conclusion.

Aptitude

Problem Solving III

Geometry: 2D, 3D, Coordinate Geometry, and Heights & Distance.

Permutations & Combinations: Basics, Fundamental Counting Principle, CircularArrangements, and Derangements.

Probability: Basics, Addition & Multiplication Theorems, Conditional Probability and Bayes'Theorem.

Statistics: Mean, Median, Mode, Range, Variance, Quartile Deviation and Standard Deviation.

Logical Reasoning: Blood Relations, Direction Test, Syllogisms, Series, Odd man out, Coding

\& Decoding, Cryptarithmetic Problems and Input - Output Reasoning.

Verbal

Vocabulary: Create an awareness of using refined language through idioms and phrasal verbs. Grammar (Upper
Intermediate-Advanced): Train Students to comprehend the nuances of Grammarand empower them to spot errors
in sentences and correct them.

Reasoning: Enable students to connect words, phrases and sentences logically.

Oral Communication Skills: Aid students in using the gift of the gab to interpret images, do a video synthesis, try a
song interpretation or elaborate on a literary quote.

Writing Skills: Practice closet tests that assess basic knowledge and skills in usage and mechanics of writing such as
punctuation, basic grammar and usage, sentence structure and rhetorical skills such as writing strategy, organization,
and style.

Reference(s)
1. Students” Career Planning Guide, Corporate & Industry Relations, Amrita VishwaVidyapeetham.
2. Soft Skill Handbook, Corporate & Industry Relations, Amrita Vishwa Vidyapeetham.
3. Adair. J., (1986), "Effective Team Building: How to make * winning team", London, U.K
4. Gulati. S., (1006) "Corporate Soft Skills", New Delhi, India: Rupa & Co.
5. The hard truth about Soft Skills, by Amazon Publication.
6. Verbal Skills Activity Book, CIR, AVVP
7. English Grammar & Composition, Wren & Martin
8. Public Sector – Engineer Management Trainee Recruitment Exam (General English)
9. Nova’s GRE Prep Course, Jeff Kolby, Scott Thornburg & Kathleen Pierce
10. Student Workbook: Quantitative Aptitude & Reasoning, Corporate & Industry Relations, Amrita Vishwa
Vidyapeetham.
11. Quantitative Aptitude for All Competitive Examinations, Abhijit Guha.
12. How to Prepare for Quantitative Aptitude for the CAT, Arun Sharma.
13. How to Prepare for Data Interpretation for the CAT, Arun Sharma.
14. How to Prepare for Logical Reasoning for the CAT, Arun Sharma.
15. Quantitative Aptitude for Competitive Examinations, R S Aggarwal.
16. A Modern Approach to Logical Reasoning, R S Aggarwal.
17. A Modern Approach to Verbal & Non-Verbal Reasoning, R S Aggarwal.

Evaluation Pattern: 50:50

Assessment Internal External

Continuous Assessment (CA) – Soft Skills 30 -

Continuous Assessment (CA) – Aptitude 10 25

Continuous Assessment (CA) – Verbal 10 25

Total 50 50

*CA - Can be presentations, speaking activities and tests.

Course Objectives

23LIV390 Live-in Lab -1 L-T-P-C: 0-0-9-3

(Pre-requisite: Nil)

 Identify and analyse the various challenge indicators present in the village by applying concepts of Human Centered
Design and Participatory Rural Appraisal.
 Assess the user need through quantitative and qualitative measurements
 Design a solution by integrating human centered design concepts
 Devising proposed intervention strategies for sustainable social change management

Course Outcome: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: learn ethnographic research and utilise the methodologies to enhance participatory engagement.
CO2: prioritize challenges and derive constraints using Participatory Rural Appraisal.
CO3: identify and formulate the research challenges in rural communities.
CO4: design solutions using human centered approach.
CO-PO Mapping

PO/PSO
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO
CO1 3 3 1 1 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 3
CO3 3 1 3 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Syllabus

This initiative is to provide opportunities for students to get involved in coming up with technology solutions for societal
problems. The students shall visit villages or rural sites during the vacations (after 4th semester) and if they identify a
worthwhile project, they shall register for a 3-credit Live-in-Lab project, in the fifth semester.
Thematic Areas
 Agriculture & Risk Management
 Education & Gender Equality
 Energy & Environment
 Livelihood & Skill Development
 Water & Sanitation
 Health & Hygiene
 Waste Management & Infrastructure

The objectives and the projected outcome of the project will be reviewed and approved by the department chairperson and
a faculty assigned as the project guide.

SEMESTER VI

23ECE311 Wireless Communication and Networks L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

(Pre-requisite: Digital Communication)

Course Objectives

 To introduce the characteristics of wireless channels

 To provide the fundamental techniques to combat fading channels
 To introduce multiple access techniques in wireless networks

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: characterize wireless channels

CO2: apply techniques to improve performance in fading channels
CO3: understand multiple access techniques in wireless networks
CO4: understand working principles of modern wireless networks

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO2 PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 3
CO
CO1 3 3 2 2 3 3
 CO2 3 3 2 2 2 3
CO3 3 3 2 2 3
CO4 3 3 3 3

Syllabus

Unit I
Introduction: Wireless communication, importance and requirements, types and classifications; Block diagram, brief
function of major blocks; Wireless channels- characterization of wireless channel, Communication link, propagation
phenomenon, LoS, NLoS; Mobile wireless channel- multipath propagation, ISI, fading, large scale-Friss free-space path-
loss model, ray tracing model, two-ray tracing model, shadowing, small scale multipath measurements; Rayleigh, Rician
model, Fading parameters like power-delay profile, coherence bandwidth, delay spread, etc., Passband representation of
received signal; Channel capacity –AWGN, fading channel capacity, outage capacity, BER performance.

Unit II
Performance improvement techniques: Equalization-adaptive, DFE; Diversity techniques- types, receive diversity, transmit
diversity, MIMO, MIMO-Channel, capacity, data rate; receiver architecture – combiners, rake receiver. Chanel Coding –
Parity, block codes, convolution codes, interleaving, randomizer. Multicarrier communication – Frequency selective
channels, OFDM, Single-carrier vs multi-carrier. Multiple access- techniques, TDMA, FDMA, CDMA, space division.

Unit III
Introduction to Wireless networks: Wireless Local Area Networks, 802.11n; Cellular mobile communication architecture,
2G network, evolution of cellular mobile communication 1G-5G;

Textbook(s)
1. Andrea Goldsmith, “Wireless Communication”, Cambridge University Press, 2005.
2. David Tse and Pramod Viswanath, “Fundamentals of wireless communication”, 2005

Reference(s)
1. William C Y Lee, “Wireless and Cellular Communications”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Limited,
Third Edition, 2006.

23ECE312 Computer Networks and Protocols L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

(Pre-requisite: Nil)

Course Objectives

 To provide an understanding of layered architecture of computer networks

 To provide fundamentals of internetworking
 To provide foundations on network protocols

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: understand layered architecture of computer networks

CO2: understand the concepts of addressing, switching, routing and reliable transport of data
CO3: understand the working of network protocols
CO4: analyze the qualitative aspects of protocols

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO2 PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 3
CO
CO1 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3
CO3 3 2 3
CO4 3 2 2 3

Syllabus

Unit I
Computer Networks – Introduction: Network, Types of networks, Computer Networks, Types of computer networks,
network topology. The Internet (the network of networks) - Protocol Layering: The OSI Model- TCP/IP Protocol suite.
 Circuit Switching- Packet Switching and Switches. PHY Layer and its functions, protocols; Data link layer and its functions-
protocols, Frame, ARP - Error detection and correction - Medium Access control (MAC)- Random access- Controlled
access- Ethernet.

Unit II
Network Layers and its functions- Network Layer major functions and its protocols, Internet Protocol- Routing Algorithms-
Routing in the Internet-Broadcast and Multicast routing Data plane forwarding - Control plane routing- SDN approach.

Unit III
Transport Layer and higher layers – TCP, UDP, Flow Control-Congestion Control. Application Layer - WWW and HTTP
- DNS.

Textbook(s)
1. Behrouz Forouzan, “Data Communication and Networking”, Tata McGraw Hill, 5th edition, 2012.
2. James Kurose and Keith Ross, “Computer Networking: A Top-Down Approach”, 6th Edition, Pearson Education
Ltd., 2017.

Reference(s)
1. Andrew S Tannenbaum, David J. Whetheral, “Computer Networks”, Prentice Hall, 5th edition, 2010.
2. William Stallings, “Data and Computer Communications”, 8th edition, Pearson Education Asia, 2007
3. Larry L. Peterson and Bruce S. Davie, “Computer Networks - A Systems Approach”, Morgan Kaufmann, Fifth
Edition, 2011.

Course Objectives
23ECE313 Embedded Systems L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3
(Pre-requisite: Microcontrollers and Interfacing)

 To provide foundation on Embedded System Platforms

 To enable configuration of advanced peripherals for Embedded Applications
 To provide basic understanding of Real Time Operating Systems

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: understand the architectural features of an Embedded System

CO2: configure the peripherals of an advanced Microcontroller
CO3: understand the concepts of Real Time Operating Systems
CO4: understand the design of an Embedded System

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2 3
CO
CO1 3 2 2 3
CO2 3 2 2 2 3
CO3 3 2 2 3
CO4 3 2 3 2 3
Syllabus

Unit I
Introduction- Architecture, hardware and software requirements, applications; Cortex M3 architecture – Registers -
Operating Modes - NVIC - Memory Map - MPU – Exceptions - Debug Support in Cortex M3 - Stack Pointer - Link Register
- Program Status Registers - Interrupt Mask Registers - Control Registers - Stack Memory Operations - Reset Sequence -
Bit Banding - Memory Access Attributes - Advantages of Bit Banding – Pipelining - Detailed Cortex M3 Architecture - Bus
Interfaces - Reset Types - Preempt and Sub Priority - Interrupt Input and Pending Behavior

Unit II
Bus Faults - Memory Management Fault - Usage Fault - Hard Fault - Methods of dealing with Faults - Supervisory Call -
Pendable Service Call - System Tick Timer - Sleep on Exit - Wake up Interrupt Controller - Multiprocessor Communication
- Self Reset Control - Debug Architecture - CoreSight Architecture, Modified CoreSight Architecture - TM4C123
Architecture - GPIO - ADC - Timers - PWM - External Interrupt

Unit III
SPI - I2C – DAC Interfacing using SPI – RTC Interfacing using I2C - Software Architectures - Round Robin - Round Robin
with Interrupt - Function Queue Scheduling - RTOS software architecture – Task - Task States - Context of Task - Shared
Data Problem – Reentrancy – Semaphore – Types - Semaphore problems - Priority Inversion - Deadly Embrace - Ways to
Protect Shared Data, Message Queue - Mailbox – Pipe - Pitfalls with MQ, Mailboxes and Pipes
Textbook(s)
1. J. Yiu, “The Definitive Guide to the ARM Cortex M3 and Cortex M4 Processors”, Third Edition, Elsevier Inc.,
2014
2. M. A. Mazidi, S. Chen, S. Naimi, Ti Tiva Arm Programming for Embedded Systems: Programming Arm Cortex-
M4 TM4C123G with C, 2016
3. Richard Barry, “Using the FreeRTOS Real Time Kernel ARM Cortex-M3 Edition”, Real Time Engineers Ltd.,
2010.
Reference(s)
1. D. V. Gadre, S. Gupta, Getting Started with Tiva ARM Cortex M4 Microcontrollers, Springer, 2018
2. Richard Barry, “Mastering the FreeRTOS Real Time Kernel, A Hands-On Tutorial Guide”, Real Time Engineers
Ltd., 2016.

23ECE385 Open Laboratory -II L-T-P-C: 0-0-6-2

(Pre-requisite: Nil)

Course Objectives

 To provide platform for creative and innovative thinking

 To enable understanding of available state of art in the identified area of interest
 To enable simulation/hardware-prototyping of solutions to effectively transform ideas to reality

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: analyze practical problems and investigate scope for applying technology to develop feasible solutions
CO2: design the required system using appropriate EDA tools and implement the hardware
CO3: analyze the implementation impact and suggest improvements or modifications
CO4: present the concept with adequate validation on technical aspects and cost analysis

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PSO
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

CO1 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3

23ECE386 Wireless Communication and Networks Laboratory L-T-P-C: 0-0-3-1

(Pre-requisite: Digital Communication)

Course Objectives

 To provide an exposure to wireless communication over fading channels through simulations

 To enable develop wireless networks using hardware modules
 To provide hands-on exposure to computer networks and protocols

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: analyze performance of wireless communication systems over fading channels

CO2: demonstrate wireless networks using hardware modules
CO3: simulate and configure wireless networks
CO4: analyze the performance of computer networks

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO2 PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 3
CO
CO1 3 3 3 3 3 2 3
CO2 3 2 3 3 3 3 3
CO3 3 2 3 3 3 2 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 3 2 3

Syllabus
Define a system which might cover most of the experiments. It is possible to define at most 2 systems for whole
experiments of this course. In the beginning of the lab class, system level explanation must be given to the students.

Examination/evaluation for system level should have higher weightage of marks. They need to develop system (at least
prototype) at the end, not on breadboard.

Example:
Use SDR as Tx/Rx and design a prototype of a system, that is establish air interface connection.

Experiment Contents:
1. Study of Propagation Path loss Models : Indoor & Outdoor
2. Performance comparison of different propagation models including fading channels, Rayleigh, Rician, CDF, PDF
3. Outdoor Propagation – Okumura Model, Hata Model
4. Hardware based radio set up, communication through wireless channel using hardware platform like SDR
5. Network topology design using any tool like OMNET++, NS, Cisco Packet Tracer, NetSim
6. Simple topology, WAN design with few routers, study and configure of protocols
7. Study of TCP protocol using packet sniffers.
8. Study of application layer protocols- HTTP.
9. Client-server communication using socket programming (TCP and UDP).

Textbook(s)
1. F. Pe´rez Fonta´n and P. Marin˜o Espin˜eira, “Modeling the Wireless Propagation Channel A Simulation Approach
with MATLAB, Willey Publications, 2008
2. A Hands-On Introduction to SDR with USRP and GNU Radio, ETUSS

Reference(s)
1. B.-P. Paris, Simulation of Wireless Communication Systems using MATLAB, Lecture Note, 2007
2. F Perez Fontan and P Martin Espinetra, Modeling the Wireless Propagation Channel: A Simulation Approach with
MATLAB, Wiley Publication

23ECE387 Embedded Systems Laboratory L-T-P-C: 0-0-3-1

(Pre-requisite: Microcontrollers and Interfacing)

Course Objectives

 To provide hands-on experience to use peripherals of an advanced Microcontroller

 To enable implementation of Real Time Operating System (RTOS) concepts
 To enable design of an Embedded System using advanced Microcontroller

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to
CO1: configure peripherals of an advanced Microcontroller
CO2: interface External Peripherals with an Embedded Platform
CO3: implement Task Management and Inter Task Communication using RTOS
CO4: prototype an Embedded System using advanced Microcontroller

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2 3
CO
CO1 3 2 3 3 3 2 3
CO2 3 2 3 3 3 2 3
CO3 3 2 3 3 3 2 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3

Syllabus
Define a system which might cover most of the experiments. It is possible to define at most 2 systems for whole
experiments of this course. In the beginning of the lab class, system level explanation must be given to the students.

Examination/evaluation for system level should have higher weightage of marks. They need to develop system (at least
prototype) at the end, not on breadboard.

Example:
Let them develop something for cafeteria a process of giving an order till customer has gone out of café.

Experiment Contents:
1. GPIO Programming using Cortex M4
2. Delay Time Generation using Timer
3. Analog Sensor Interfacing using ADC
4. External DAC Interfacing using SPI
5. External RTC Interfacing using I2C
6. Task Management using FreeRTOS
7. Inter Task Communication using FreeRTOS
8. Term Project

Textbook(s)
1. M. A. Mazidi, S. Chen, S. Naimi, Ti Tiva Arm Programming for Embedded Systems: Programming Arm Cortex-
M4 TM4C123G with C, 2016
2. Richard Barry, “Using the FreeRTOS Real Time Kernel ARM Cortex-M3 Edition”, Real Time Engineers Ltd.,
2010.

Reference(s)
3. Richard Barry, “Mastering the FreeRTOS Real Time Kernel, A Hands-On Tutorial Guide”, Real Time Engineers
Ltd., 2016.

23LSE311 LIFE SKILLS FOR ENGINEERS IV L-T-P-C: 1-0-2-2

Pre-requisite(s): Self-confidence, presentation skills, listening skills, basic English language skills, knowledge of high
school level mathematics.

Course Objectives

 Help students prepare resumes and face interviews with confidence

 Support them in developing their problem-solving ability
 Assist them in improving their problem solving and reasoning skills
 Enable them to communicate confidently before an audience
Course Outcomes

CO1: Soft Skills: To acquire the ability to present themselves confidently and showcase theirknowledge, skills, abilities,
interests, practical exposure, strengths and achievements to potential recruiters through a resume, video resume,
and personal interview.

CO2: Soft Skills: To have better ability to prepare for facing interviews, analyse interview questions, articulate correct
responses and respond appropriately to convince the interviewer of one’s right candidature through displaying
etiquette, positive attitude and courteous communication.

CO3: Aptitude: To manage time while applying suitable methods to solve questions on arithmetic, algebra and
statistics.

CO4: Aptitude: To investigate, understand and use appropriate techniques to solve questionson logical reasoning and
data analysis.

CO5: Verbal: To use diction that is less verbose and more precise and to use prior knowledge of grammar to
correct/improve sentences.

CO6: Verbal: To understand arguments, analyze arguments and use inductive/deductivereasoning to arrive at
conclusions. To be able to generate ideas, structure them logically and express them in a style that is comprehensible
to the audience/recipient.

CO-PO Mapping

PO
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO

CO1 3 3 2

CO2 2 3 3 2

CO3 3 2

CO4 3 2

CO5 3 3

CO6 3 3 3

Syllabus

Soft Skills

Teamwork: Value of teamwork in organizations, Definition of a team. Why team? Effective team building. Parameters
for a good team, roles, empowerment and need for transparent communication, Factors affecting team effectiveness,
Personal characteristics of members and its influence on team. Project Management Skills, Collaboration skills.

Leadership: Initiating and managing change, Internal problem solving, Evaluation and co-ordination, Growth and
productivity, Importance of Professional Networking.

Facing an interview: Importance of verbal & aptitude competencies, strong foundation in core competencies,
industry orientation / knowledge about the organization, resume writing (including cover letter, digital profile and
video resume), being professional. Importance of good communication skills, etiquette to be maintained during an
interview, appropriate grooming and mannerism.
Aptitude

Problem Solving II

Sequence and Series: Basics, AP, GP, HP, and Special Series.

Data Sufficiency: Introduction, 5 Options Data Sufficiency and 4 Options Data Sufficiency.

Logical reasoning: Clocks, Calendars, Cubes, Non-Verbal reasoning and Symbol based reasoning.

Campus recruitment papers: Discussion of previous year question papers of all major recruiters ofAmrita Vishwa
Vidyapeetham.

Competitive examination papers:Discussion of previous year question papers of CAT, GRE,GMAT, and other
management entrance examinations.

Miscellaneous: Interview Puzzles, Calculation Techniques and Time Management Strategies.

Verbal

Vocabulary: Empower students to communicate effectively through one-word substitution. Grammar: Enable
students to improve sentences through a clear understanding of the rules ofgrammar.

Reasoning: Facilitate the student to tap his reasoning skills through Syllogisms, critical reasoningarguments and
logical ordering of sentences.

Reading Comprehension (Advanced): Enlighten students on the different strategies involved intackling reading
comprehension questions.

Public Speaking Skills: Empower students to overcome glossophobia and speak effectively andconfidently
before an audience.

Writing Skills: Practice formal written communication through writing emails especially composing job application
emails.

References

1. Students” Career Planning Guide, Corporate & Industry Relations, Amrita VishwaVidyapeetham.
2. Soft Skill Handbook, Corporate & Industry Relations, Amrita Vishwa Vidyapeetham.
3. Adair. J., (1986), "Effective Team Building: How to make * winning team", London, U.K
4. Gulati. S., (1006) "Corporate Soft Skills", New Delhi, India: Rupa & Co.
5. The hard truth about Soft Skills, by Amazon Publication.
6. Verbal Skills Activity Book, CIR, AVVP
7. English Grammar & Composition, Wren & Martin
8. Public Sector – Engineer Management Trainee Recruitment Exam (General English)
9. Nova’s GRE Prep Course, Jeff Kolby, Scott Thornburg & Kathleen Pierce
10. A Modern Approach to Verbal Reasoning – R.S. Aggarwal
11. Student Workbook: Quantitative Aptitude & Reasoning, Corporate & Industry Relations,Amrita Vishwa
Vidyapeetham.

12. Quantitative Aptitude for All Competitive Examinations, Abhijit Guha.

13. How to Prepare for Quantitative Aptitude for the CAT, Arun Sharma.
14. How to Prepare for Data Interpretation for the CAT, Arun Sharma.
15. How to Prepare for Logical Reasoning for the CAT, Arun Sharma.
16. Quantitative Aptitude for Competitive Examinations, R S Aggarwal.
17. A Modern Approach to Logical Reasoning, R S Aggarwal.
18. A Modern Approach to Verbal & Non-Verbal Reasoning, R S Aggarwal

Evaluation Pattern: 50:50

 Assessment Internal External

Continuous Assessment (CA) – Soft Skills 30 -

Continuous Assessment (CA) – Aptitude 10 25

Continuous Assessment (CA) – Verbal 10 25

Total 50 50

*CA - Can be presentations, speaking activities and tests.

23LIV490 Live-in Lab-II L-T-P-C: 0-0-9-3

(Pre-requisite: Nil)

Course Objectives

 Identify and analyse the various challenge indicators present in the village by applying concepts of Human Centered
Design and Participatory Rural Appraisal.
 Assess the user need through quantitative and qualitative measurements
 Design a solution by integrating human centered design concepts
 Devising proposed intervention strategies for sustainable social change management

Course Outcome: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: learn ethnographic research and utilise the methodologies to enhance participatory engagement.
CO2: prioritize challenges and derive constraints using Participatory Rural Appraisal.
CO3: identify and formulate the research challenges in rural communities.
CO4: design solutions using human centered approach.

CO-PO Mapping
PO/PSO
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO
CO1 3 3 1 1 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 3
CO3 3 1 3 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Syllabus

This initiative is to provide opportunities for students to get involved in coming up with technology solutions for societal
problems. The students shall visit villages or rural sites during the vacations (after 4th semester) and if they identify a
worthwhile project, they shall register for a 3-credit Live-in-Lab project, in the fifth semester.
Thematic Areas
 Agriculture & Risk Management
 Education & Gender Equality
 Energy & Environment
 Livelihood & Skill Development
 Water & Sanitation
 Health & Hygiene
 Waste Management & Infrastructure
The objectives and the projected outcome of the project will be reviewed and approved by the department chairperson and
a faculty assigned as the project guide.
 SEMESTER VII

23ECE498 Project Phase 1 L-T-P-C: 0-0-24-8

(Pre-requisite: Nil)

Course Objectives

 To define the problem of the proposed research work

 To apply the concepts of engineering design in solving the research problem
 To demonstrate and validate the results of the design concept

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: formulate a suitable research problem

CO2: develop solution to the problem
CO3: analyze and implement the solution
CO4: prepare report and present the outcomes

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PSO
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

CO1 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3

23ECE497 Technical Writing P/F

(Pre-requisite: Nil)

Course Objectives

 To enable understand the importance of research publications, plagiarism and resoruces

 To provide technical writing skills
 To encourage and motivate for research publications following necessary ethics

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: understand various formats of technical writing

CO2: check the plagiarism and citations
CO3: understand the difference between publication and patent
CO4: write technical research article in a given format

CO-PO Mapping
PO/PSO
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

CO1 3 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3

SEMESTER VIII
23ECE499 Project Phase II L-T-P-C: 0-0-18-6
(Pre-requisite: Nil)

Course Objectives
 To define the problem of the proposed research work
 To apply the concepts of engineering design in solving the research problem
 To demonstrate and validate the results of the design concept

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: formulate a suitable research problem

CO2: develop solution to the problem
CO3: analyze and implement the solution
CO4: prepare report and present the outcomes

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PSO
CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO1 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3

Syllabus
Phase-1 project can be extended. However, it is also possible to present internship work as project. It is suggested that faculty can work closely
with student and company manager with whom student is working.

Professional Electives

Wireless Communications

23ECE466 Cellular Mobile Communications L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

(Pre-requisite: Digital Communication)
Course Objectives

 To provide an overview of cellular systems

 To explore the performance analysis of multiple access techniques
 To introduce cellular standards

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to
CO1: understand the basic concepts of cellular systems
CO2: analyze the effect of interference and system capacity
CO3: analyze performance of multiple access techniques
CO4: understand the working principles of cellular standards

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO2 PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 3
CO
CO1 3 2 3
CO2 3 2 2 3
CO3 3 2 2 3
 CO4 3 2 3

Syllabus
Unit I
Introduction to cellular systems - Basic Cellular System - Cellular communication infrastructure: Cells – Clusters - Cell
Splitting - Frequency reuse concept and reuse distance calculation - Cellular system components - Operations of cellular
systems – Handoff / Handover - Channel assignment - Fixed and dynamic - Cellular interferences: Co-Channel and adjacent
channel and sectorization.

Unit II
Channel Models: Properties of mobile radio channels - Intersymbol interference - Multipath and fading effects - Interleaving
and diversity - Multiple access schemes (TDMA – FDMA – CDMA – SDMA – OFDMA) – Inter user interference - Traffic
issues and cell capacity - Power control strategies.

Unit III
Introduction to modern cellular standards - GSM and CDMA – GPRS – UMTS – LTE – Introduction to 5G; AI/ML to
improve channels and other functionalities of networks; Role of AI/ML in resource/channel allocation.

Textbook(s)
1. T.S. Rappaport, “Wireless Communication, Principles and Practice, Pearson Education”, Second Edition, 2010.
2. Andrea Goldsmith, “Wireless Communications”, Cambridge University Press, 2005

Reference(s)
1. A Molisch, “Wireless Communications”, Wiley 2005.
2. D. Tse and P. Viswanath, “Fundamentals of Wireless Communications”, Cambridge University Press, 2005.
3. Haykin & Moher, “Modern Wireless Communications”, Indian Edition, Pearson 2011.
4. J. G Proakis, “Digital Communications”, McGraw Hill, New York, 1989.

23ECE321 MIMO and Multicarrier System L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

(Pre-requisite: Digital Communication)

Course Objectives

 To introduce the fundamental concepts and design principles in MIMO wireless communication
 To provide the performance improvement techniques and analysis of MIMO systems
 To introduce the MIMO-OFDM system

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the students should be able to

CO1: understand the fundamental concepts of MIMO wireless systems

CO2: model MIMO channels and obtain the channel capacity
CO3: apply diversity, spatial multiplexing and signal detection techniques
.CO4: understand the concepts of MIMO-OFDM systems

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO2 PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 3
CO
CO1 3 2 3
CO2 3 2 2 3
CO3 3 2 2 2 3
CO4 3 2 3

Syllabus

Unit I
Introduction - Crowded spectrum - Need for high data rates – Multiple input multiple output systems – Multi antenna systems
and concepts - Spatial multiplexing - MIMO system model- MIMO system capacity- Channel known to the transmitter -
Channel unknown to the transmitter - Water-pouring principle – Capacity calculation – SIMO - MISO - Ergodic capacity -
Outage capacity – Influence of fading Correlation on MIMO capacity - Influence of LOS on MIMO capacity.

Unit II
Delay diversity scheme- Alamouti space-time code - Maximum likelihood decoding - Maximum ratio combining - Transmit
diversity - Space-time block codes - STBC for real signal constellations - Decoding of STBC-OSTBC - Capacity of OSTBC
channels - Space-time code Word design criteria – Multiplexing architecture - VBLAST architecture.

Unit III
Data transmission over multipath channels - Single carrier approach - Multicarrier approach - OFDM - OFDM generation -
Cyclic prefix - Performance of space - Time coding on frequency-Selective fading channels- Capacity of MIMO - OFDM
systems - Performance analysis of MIMO-OFDM systems; Case study – MIMO signal detection using machine learning.

Textbook(s)
1. Mohinder Janakiram, “Space-time Processing and MIMO systems”, Artech House, First Edition, 2004.
2. Arogyaswami Paulraj, Rohit Nabar, Dhananjay Gore, “Introduction to Space-Time Wireless Communications”,
Cambridge University Press, 2008.
Reference(s)
1. Hamid Jafarkhani, “Space-Time coding-Theory and Practice”, Cambridge University Press, First Edition, 2005.
2. David Tse, Pramod Viswanath, “Fundamentals of Wireless Communication”, Cambridge University Press, 2005.
3. Yong Soo Cho, Jaekwon Kim, Won Young Yang, Chung-Gu Kang, “MIMO-OFDM Wireless Communications
with MATLAB”, Wiley, 2010.

23ECE467 Information Theory and Coding L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

(Pre-requisite: Foundations of Data Science)

Course Objectives

 To introduce the fundamental concepts of Information theory

 To explore different source coding algorithms to ensure efficient encoding of information.
 To explore different channel coding algorithms to ensure efficient error detection and correction

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: understand the fundamental concepts of Information theory

CO2: apply the concepts of source entropy and efficient encoding of information
CO3: understand channel models and determine the channel capacity
CO4: understand error control coding schemes

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO1 PSO2 PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3
CO
CO1 3 2 3
CO2 3 2 2 3
CO3 3 2 2 3
CO4 3 2 2 3

Syllabus

Unit I
Modeling of Information Sources – Measure of information- Entropy- Mutual Information-Source Coding - Prefix Codes-
Kraft inequality- Shannon Fano Encoding Algorithm-Huffman algorithm- Arithmetic coding- Lempel Ziv coding.

Unit II
Channel Models- Channel Matrix, Joint probability Matrix-System Entropies, Channel Capacity, Channel coding theorem-
Shannon-Hartley’s law.

Unit III
Error Correction Codes – Introduction to Galois fields, polynomial arithmetic, linear block codes for error correction -
Decoding – Standard array decoding and Syndrome decoding. Cyclic Codes – Introduction to Convolutional codes- distance
properties – Trellis codes, Viterbi decoder. Case study - Machine learning based encoding and decoding.

Textbook(s)
1. Ranjan Bose, “Information Theory, Coding and Cryptography”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2nd edition.
2. P.S. Satyanarayana, “Concepts of Information Theory and Coding”, Dynaram Publication, 2005.
Reference(s)
1. Richard B. Wells, “Applied Coding and Information Theory for Engineers” Pearson Education, LPE 2004.
2. Shu Lin and Daniel Castello, “Error Control Coding – Fundamentals and Applications”, second edition 2004

23ECE322 Modeling and Simulation of Communication Systems L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

(Pre-requisite: Wireless Communication)

Course Objectives

 To introduce system level aspects of communication systems

 To provide modeling and simulation tools for performance analysis
 To enable design of communication systems for specific applications

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: understand the system level aspects of communication systems

CO2: use modelling and simulation tools for performance analysis
CO3: understand tradeoffs of various system parameters
CO4: design communication systems for specific applications

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PSO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO
CO1 3 2 3
CO2 3 3 2 3
CO3 3 2 2 2 3
CO4 3 2 2 2 3

Syllabus

Unit I
Introduction-challenges in design and optimization– Overview of deterministic and stochastic simulations– Tractable and
intractable systems– Role of simulations for link budgeting–Behavior predictions; role of ML in behavior prediction.

Unit II
Simulation methodology—Simulation errors due to sampling and quantization–Baseband representation of band pass signals
and systems– Time varying systems— Modeling of system building blocks - filters, amplifiers with internal noise- Modeling
oscillator phase noise.

Unit III
Simulation of random process and noise sources—Post processing– Eye-diagrams– Spectrum and scatter plots—BER
simulations using Monte-Carlo techniques—Introduction to simulation of nonlinear and time varying systems—Models of
waveform channels– Guided and unguided channels, Radio channels, Multipath and fading channel—Introduction to
discrete channel model; Case studies- Digital predistortion of amplifier using Machine learning.

Textbook(s)
1. W. H. Tranter, K. S. Shanmugan, T. S. Rappaport and K. L. Kosbar, Principles of Communication Systems
Simulation with Wireless Applications, Prentice Hall, 2003.

Reference(s)
1. G. Rubino and B. Tuffin, Rare Event Simulation Using Monte Carlo Methods, John Wiley and Sons, 2009.
2. M. Schiff, Introduction to Communication Systems Simulation, Artech House, 2006.
3. C. B. Rorabaugh, Simulating Wireless Communication Systems: Practical Models in C, Prentice Hall, 2004
23ECE323 Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3
(Pre-requisite: Digital Communication)

Course Objectives

 To introduce the fundamentals of OFDM

 To analyze the effects of different types of interference and synchronization techniques
 To provide different channel estimation methods and PAPR reduction techniques

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the students should be able to

CO1: understand the architecture of OFDM transceiver

CO2: apply different synchronization techniques to handle the effect of ISI and CSI
CO3: understand pilot structures and channel estimation techniques
.CO4: understand the effect of PAPR and reduction techniques

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO2 PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 3
CO
CO1 3 2 3
CO2 3 2 2 2 3
CO3 3 2 3
CO4 3 2 3

Syllabus

Unit I
Introduction to OFDM-Single-Carrier vs. Multi-Carrier Transmission, Basic Principle of OFDM, OFDM Modulation and
Demodulation, OFDM Guard Interval, BER of OFDM Scheme, Coded OFDM, OFDMA: Multiple Access Extensions of
OFDM, Resource Allocation.

Unit II
Synchronization for OFDM - Effect/estimation of symbol-time offset (STO), Effect/estimation of carrier-frequency offset
(CFO), Effect/compensation of sampling clock offset (SCO).

Unit III
Channel Estimation- Pilot Structure, Training Symbol-Based Channel Estimation, DFT-Based Channel Estimation,
Decision-Directed Channel Estimation-Introduction to PAPR- PAPR and oversampling, PAPR Reduction Techniques;
AI/ML role in channel estimation or resource allocation.

Textbook(s)
1. Yong Soo Cho, Jaekwon Kim, Won Young Yang, Chung-Gu Kang, “ MIMO-OFDM Wireless Communications with
MATLAB”, Wiley, 2010, ISBN: 978-0-470-82561-7
Reference(s)
1. Y. Li. G. Stuber, “ OFDM for Wireless Communication”, Springer, 2006.
2. R. Prasad, “ OFDM for Wireless Communication”, Artech House, 2006.
23ECE468 Signal Estimation and Detection L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3
(Pre-requisite: Foundations of Data Science)

Course Objectives

 To introduce the fundamental principles of decision making under uncertainty

 To enable mathematical formulation of practical estimation and detection problems arising in communication
systems
 To provide exposure to classical and Bayesian solution approaches for signal estimation and detection

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: understand the principles of optimal estimation and detection.

CO2: model specific problems in communication systems as standard estimation and detection problems
CO3: apply appropriate solution techniques
CO4: analyze the performance of estimation and detection techniques

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO2 PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 3
CO
CO1 3 2 3
CO2 3 2 2 3
CO3 3 2 2 2 3
CO4 3 2 2 3

Syllabus

Unit I
Review of probability and random processes; Applications of statistical estimation and detection techniques in
communication systems; Classical estimation – Bias and variance, Cramer Rao lower bound, Sufficient statistic, MVUE,
Fischer Neyman factorization theorem, Rao-Blackwell theorem.

Unit II
Maximum Likelihood (ML) estimation; Linear models – BLUE; Least Squares – consistency, efficiency and asymptotics;
Bayesian estimation – MMSE and MAP estimation, Kalman and Weiner filtering; Introduction to channel and spectrum
estimation.

Unit III
Detection theory - Bayesian and Neyman-Pearson detection, Minimax Detection, Composite hypothesis testing, GLRT,
Sequential detection, Performance analysis by Monte Carlo method, Signal detection in continuous time, Karhunen Loève
(KL) theorem, Detection of random signals in Gaussian noise; ML role in channel estimation.

Textbook(s)
S.M. Kay, “Fundamentals of Statistical Signal Processing”, Volume I and II, Prentice Hall Inc., 1998.

Reference(s)
1. H. V. Poor, “An Introduction to Signal Detection and Estimation”, 2nd Ed., Springer-Verlag, 1994.
2. H. L. Van Trees, “Detection, Estimation and Modulation Theory”, Part 1, 2nd Ed., John Wiley, 2013.
3. M. D. Srinath, P. K. Rajasekaran and R. Vishwanathan, “An Introduction to Statistical Signal Processing with
Applications”, Prentice-Hall, 1996.

23ECE324 Satellite Communication L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

(Pre-requisite: Communication Theory)
Course Objectives

 To provide an overview of satellite communication systems

 To provide an understanding of design parameters
 To create an appreciation for design aspects in practical scenarios

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: understand the basic concepts of satellite communication

CO2: design link budget for satellite communication system
CO3: understand the various subsystems in satellite communication systems
CO4: apply appropriate multiple access schemes for specific applications

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO2 PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 3
CO
CO1 3 2 3
CO2 3 2 2 2 3
CO3 3 2 3
CO4 3 2 2 3

Syllabus

Unit I
Review of Microwave Communications - Overview of satellite communications - Satellite orbits - Orbital mechanics and
effects - Kepler’s laws - Configurations of various orbits - Orbital elements - Elevation and azimuth angles - Doppler effect
- Effect of the sun and moon - Sun transit outage. Satellite link models and design - Satellite system parameters - Link budget
design.

Unit II
Satellite subsystems – AOCS - TTC&M - Power and communication subsystems - Computations and controlling by
processors - Satellite multiple access schemes – FDMA - TDMA and CDMA - Spread spectrum concepts - Comparison of
multiple access schemes.

Unit III
Satellite applications – VSAT - DTH television principles - Direct broadcast radios - Principles of navigation – GPS -
Satellites and launch vehicles – INSAT - IRS satellites – PSLVs – GSLVs, AI/ML role in satellite communication and
satellite based navigation

Textbook(s)
1. T.Pratt, C.W.Bostain and J.E.Allnut, “Satellite Communications”, John Wiley and Sons, Second Edition, 2003.
2. Dennis Roddy, “Satellite Communications”, McGraw-Hill Publishing Company, Fourth Edition, 2006.

Reference(s)
1. Wilbur L. Pritchard, Hendri G. Suyderhoud, Robert A. Nelson, “Satellite Communication Systems
Engineering”, Prentice Hall/Pearson, 2007.
2. M. Richharia, “Satellite Communication Design Principles”, McGraw-Hill Publishing Company, Second Edition.

23ECE325 Optical Communication Systems L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

(Pre-requisite: Nil)
Course Objectives

 To provide an overview of optical communication systems

 To provide an understanding of design parameters
 To create an appreciation for design aspects in practical scenarios
Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: understand the signal propagation through optical fibers.

CO2: analyze the effect of various design parameters on the performance of optical detectors
CO3: design optical links for effective end-end communication
CO4: understand the concepts of measurements in fiber optic systems

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2 3
CO
CO1 3 2 3
CO2 3 3 2 3
CO3 3 3 2 2 3
CO4 3 2 3

Syllabus

Unit I

Introduction – Ray theory transmission – Electromagnetic mode theory for optical propagation – Cylindrical fibers – Single mode
fibers – Attenuation – Material absorption losses in silica glass fibers – Linear and nonlinear scattering losses Fiber bend losses
– Chromatic and intermodal dispersion.

Unit II

Optical detectors: Introduction – Device types – Optical detection principles Absorption – Quantum efficiency – Responsively –
Long- wavelength cutoff – Semiconductor photodiodes with and without internal gain.

Unit III

Link design – System degradation and power penalty – Measurements on fiber optic systems – SONET – EDFA – WDM
components and networks; Case Study-End to End deep learning for system optimization.

Textbook(s)

1. John M Senior, “Optical Fiber Communication, Principles and Practice”, Third Edition, Prentice Hall, 2009.

Reference(s)

1. Gerd Keiser, “Optical Fiber Communication”, Fourth Edition, MGH, 2008.

2. Joseph c. Palais, “Fiber Optic Communications”, Fourth Edition, Pearson Education, 2004.
3. C. Siva Ram Murthy and Mohan Gurusamy, “WDM Optical Networks: Concepts, Design, and Algorithms” Prentice-
Hall, 2002.

23ECE469 Wireless Local Area Networks L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

(Pre-requisite: Wireless Communication and Networks)

Course Objectives

 To introduce the principles behind modern wireless local area networking standards
 To enable performance analysis and optimization of wireless local area networks
 To provide exposure to research literature in this area
Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: understand the working of wireless local area networks

CO2: analyze the performance of wireless local area networks
CO3: understand techniques for optimization of its performance
CO4: understand research literature on specific topics

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO2 PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 3
CO
CO1 3 2 2 2 2 3
CO2 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 3
CO3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 3
CO4 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3

Syllabus

Unit I
Overview of the IEEE 802.11; MAC Layer – Network Architecture, Frame Types and Formats, Distributed Channel Access,
Medium Access Rules, Hidden Node Problem, EDCA, PCF, HCCA, AP Discovery, Connection Establishment and
Termination, Fragmentation and Aggregation, Block ACK, Power Save Methods, PSMP, Interoperability, Roaming, AP
Channel Switching.

Unit II
PHY Layer – OFDM, MIMO basics, High Throughput (HT), VHT, 802.11b, 802.11a, 802.11g, 802.11n, 802.11ac; Wi-Fi 6
– EHT, 802.11ax, OFDMA, Multiuser Operation, TWT, Ppatial Reuse; Implementation Issues – Hardware, Software,
Algorithms, Regulatory Requirements, Introduction to Wi-Fi 6E and 802.11be.

Unit III
Applications and Case Studies – Intelligent techniques (AI/ML) to optimize Channel Access, Rate Adaptation, Frame
Aggregation, PHY parameters, Beamforming, Multiuser Communication, Spatial Reuse, Channel Bonding, Multiuser
MIMO, and Network Management.

Textbook(s)
1. Perahia, E., and Stacey, R., “Next generation wireless LANs: 802.11n and 802.11ac”, Cambridge
university press, Second Edition, 2013.
2. Gulasekaran, S.R., and Sankaran, S.G., “Wi-Fi 6: Protocol and Network”, Artech House, 2021.

Reference(s)
 Selected Research papers.

23ECE470 Performance Evaluation of Networks and Computing Systems L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

(Pre-requisite: Computer Networks and Protocols)

Course Objectives

 To introduce the mathematical foundations required for modeling and analysis of computer networks and
computing systems.
 To enable performance analysis and optimization of networks and computing systems
 To provide exposure to research literature in this area

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: understand the necessary mathematical foundations.

CO2: apply mathematical tools to model and analyze networks and computing systems
CO3: carry out discrete event simulations of networks and computing systems
 CO4: understand research literature on specific topics

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO2 PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 3
CO
CO1 3 2 2 2 2 3
CO2 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 3
CO3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 3
CO4 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3

Syllabus

Unit I
Introduction – networks and computing systems as discrete event systems, mathematical and simulation tools for modeling
and analysis, performance metrics; Selected Topics in Random Variables and Processes with applications to modeling of
networks and computing systems – memoryless property, moment generating function; Laplace-Stieljes transform (LST),
stationary- and independent-increment processes, Bernoulli, Poisson, Gaussian and Markov processes, discrete- and
continuous-time Markov chains, renewal processes.

Unit II
Queueing Theory – Little’s Law, PASTA, common queueing models (M/M/1, M/M/1/K, M/M/K/K, M/G/1, M/G/1/K,
M/G/∞), multiclass queueing models, networks of queues, Discrete-Event Simulation of Queueing Systems.

Unit III
Applications to Computing Systems – availability analysis of web servers, CPU and I/O job scheduling in computing
systems, shared and cache memories, multiprogramming and multiprocessor systems; Applications to Computer Networks
– statistical multiplexing in links, packet buffering and queue overflows, Chernoff bound, dynamic channel allocation in
circuit switched networks, throughput analysis of Wi-Fi MAC layer, coverage analysis in wireless sensor networks. ML
based job scheduling.

Textbook(s)
1. Vidyadhar G. Kulkarni, Modeling and Analysis of Stochastic Systems. CRC Press, 2016.
2. Kishore S. Trivedi, Probability and Statistics with Reliability, Queuing, and Computer Science Applications,
Second Edition, John Wiley and Sons, 2016.
3. Anurag Kumar, D. Manjunath, Joy Kuri, Communication Networking: An Analytical Approach, Morgan
Kauffmann Publishers, 2004.
.
Reference(s)
 Selected Research papers.
1. Dimitri P. Bertsekas, and Robert G. Gallager, Data Networks. Prentice-Hall International, 1987

23ECE326 Molecular Communication L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

(Pre-requisites: Digital Communication, Nature Inspired Engineering)

Course Objectives

 To provide an overview of Molecular communication systems

 To provide an understanding of processes involved in Molecular communication
 To create an awareness for various application areas

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: understand the basic concepts of Molecular communication

CO2: understand the mechanism of transmission of information
 CO3: understand the information theoretic foundations
CO4: understand the applications in various fields

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO2 PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 3
CO
CO1 3 2 3
CO2 3 2 3
CO3 3 2 3
CO4 3 2 3

Syllabus

Unit I

Introduction to Molecular communication- Need for molecular communication-Examples to demonstrate the usage and to
introduce the basic issues related to designing a molecular communication system - History of molecular communication-
Early history and theoretical research- More recent theoretical research- Implementational aspects- Contemporary research
- Applications areas-Biological engineering - Medical and healthcare applications-Industrial applications-Environmental
applications -Information and communication technology applications.

Unit II

Molecular communication paradigm-Molecular communication model-General characteristics -Transmission of information

molecules- Information representation -Slow speed and limited range -Stochastic communication- massive parallelization-
Energy efficiency- Biocompatibility, Detection and estimation in molecular communication.

Unit III

Information theory concepts in molecular communication, Application areas of molecular communication- Drug delivery -
Example: Cooperative drug delivery- Intracellular therapy, Tissue Engineering-Example: Tissue structure formation, Lab-
on-a-chip technology- Examples- Bio-inspired lab-on-a-chip, Smart dust biosensor- Unconventional computation-
Examples- Reaction diffusion computation - Artificial neural networks-Combinatorial optimizers.

Textbook(s)

1. Pierobon, Massimiliano, and Ian F. Akyildiz. "Fundamentals of diffusion-based molecular communication in

nanonetworks." Foundations and Trends in Networking 8.1-2 (2014): 1-147.
2. Nakano, T., Eckford, A., and Haraguchi, T., “Molecular Communication”. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press
2013. doi:10.1017/CBO9781139149693

Reference(s)

•Selected Research papers

23ECE471 Quantum Information Theory L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

(Pre-requisite: Mathematics-II)
Course Objectives
  To introduce basic concepts and mathematical techniques of Quantum Information Theory
 To introduce the various mathematical tools in Quantum Information Theory
 To enable the understanding of communication over Quantum channels

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: understand the extension of Shannon theory to quantum domain

CO2: understand the mathematical tools used for measurement and analysis
CO3: understand resources used in quantum communication
CO4: understand tradeoffs among the resources

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO2 PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 3
CO
CO1 3 2 3
CO2 3 2 3
CO3 3 2 3
CO4 3 2 3

Syllabus

Unit I
Review of Quantum theory: state vectors- qubits-Pauli matrices- unitary transformations-measurement- composite systems
and tensor products- quantum gates and circuits- entanglement-and Bell inequalities, Noisy quantum states: ensembles and
density matrices- POVMs and generalized measurements- separability and entanglement- Kraus maps and quantum
instruments- noisy quantum channels- purifications. Unit quantum protocols: entanglement distribution- elementary
encoding- superdense coding- quantum teleportation- Resource inequalities.

Unit II
Tools of Quantum Shannon Theory: distance measures- classical information and entropies- quantum information and
entropies, Classical typicality: typical sets, typical sequences, Shannon compression, weak and strong typicality, joint
typicality, conditional typicality. Quantum typicality: typical subspaces, bipartite and multipartite states, conditional
quantum typicality, weak and strong quantum typicality, joint and conditional quantum typicality. Schumacher compression.

Unit III
Classical communication over noisy quantum channels: Holevo information, and classical capacity, Examples of quantum
channels, Super additivity of classical capacity, Classical communication over entanglement-assisted quantum channels.
Capacity theorem. Coherent communication with noisy resources: entanglement-assisted quantum communication, private
classical communication, Quantum communication, The quantum capacity theorem, Resource trade-offs and trade-off
coding, Non-additivity and other open problems. Introduction to quantum machine learning (QML).

Textbook(s)
1. Wilde, M. (2017). Quantum Information Theory (2nd ed.). Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
doi:10.1017/9781316809976
Reference(s)
1. Nielsen, Michael A.; Chuang, Isaac L. (2000). Quantum Computation and Quantum Information (1st
ed.). Cambridge University Press.
2. Watrous, J. (2018), The Theory of Quantum Information. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
doi:10.1017/9781316848142

23ECE327 5G Mobile Communication and Networks L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

(Pre-requisite: Mathematics-II)
Course Objectives

 To introduce 4G mobile network and evolution to 5G network

 To introduce the various technologies for 5G mobile networks
 To enable the understanding and functions of major network components

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to
CO1: understand 4G network architecture and evolution to 5G
CO2: understand different technologies constituents of 5G mobile networks
CO3: understand the radio access network of 5G and analyze physical layer channels and procedures
CO4: understand radio interface and 5G architecture deployment options in designing such networks

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO2 PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 3
CO
CO1 3 2 2 3
CO2 3 2 2 3
CO3 3 2 3
CO4 3 2 3

Syllabus

Unit I
Introduction- 4G (LTE-A) Mobile network architecture, technology, LTE-frequency band, LTE Frame structure, operating
mode, LTE channel types; 5G Evolution.

Unit II
5G Enabling Technology –Major enabling technologies like multi-antenna techniques, spectrum, spectrum sharing, access
techniques, air interface, mmWave, SDN/NFV, 5G NR, Network Slicing, etc.

Unit III

5G RAN Overview - Overall System Architecture, frame structure, physical channels and signals, physical layer procedures
(MIMO, Power control, link adaptation, beam forming, massive MIMO); Radio Interface Architecture: 5G architecture
options, core network architecture, RAN architecture.

Books and References

1. Afif Osseiran, Jose F Monserrat, Patrick Marsch, “5G Mobile and Wireless Communications
Technology”, Cambridge University Press, 2016.
2. Erik Dahlman, Stefan Parkvall, Johan Skold,” 5G NR: The Next Generation Wireless Access Technology”, Academic
Press, 2018.
3. Harri Holma, Antti Toskala, Takehiro Nakamura, “5G Technology 3GPP NEW RADIO”, John Wiley & Sons First
Edition, 2020.

VLSI

23ECE331 Analog IC Design L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

(Pre-requisite: Analog Electronics II)

Course Objectives

 To provide students with a fundamental understanding of MOS amplifier configurations.

 To enable students to analyze and design Cascode connections, with consideration of gain, bandwidth, and
input/output impedance modification.
 To equip students with the skills necessary to analyze and design feedback systems, and compensation of
amplifiers.
Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: analyze the basic characteristics of single and multi-stage amplifier configurations.
CO2: analyze the design of multi-stage amplifiers.
CO3: evaluate and apply the different principles in amplifier design.
CO4: analyze the design of feedback systems for amplifiers.

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2 3
CO
CO1 3 3 2 3
CO2 3 3 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3

Syllabus

Unit 1
Common Source - Single pole amplifiers, frequency and step response, input pole, input capacitance, active load. Common
Gate and Source Follower Review – Single-ended Differential Pair – Active Current Mirrors - Widlar Current Source - Low
Current Bias Circuit - Cascode self-biased source.

Unit II
MOS Op-amp - Single stage op-amp review. Two-stage op-amp frequency response- Feedback, Stability, Compensation,
Common mode and differential gain. RHP zero from Cc - RHP zero- Current mirror pole/zero doublet - Supply-independent
biasing.

Unit III
Telescopic and Folded cascode – Folded Cascode Biasing - Switched capacitors- ADCs, DACS, Programmable Gain
Amplifiers . MOS switch regulators - StrongArm latch - Charge injection - rail-to-rail input and output - Ri, Ro and feedback
noise; Circuit synthesis using AI/ML Techniques.

Textbook(s)
1. B. Razavi, “Design of Analog CMOS Integrated Circuits”, McGraw Hill, 2017.
2. P. Allen and D. Holberg, “CMOS Analog Circuit Design”, Oxford University Press, Second Edition, 2012.
Reference(s)
1. Sedra/Smith, “Microelectronic circuits”, 7th edition, Oxford University Press, 2015.
2. P. Gray, P. Hurst, S. Lewis, and R.G. Meyer, “Analysis and Design of Analog Integrated Circuits”, John Wiley and
Sons, Fourth Edition, 2001.

23ECE332 Digital IC Design L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

(Pre-requisite: Digital Electronics)
)
Course Objectives

 To provide an understanding of basic building blocks of mixed logic digital circuits

 To understand the optimizing techniques available for combinational logic functions.
 To optimize the delay analysis in the sequential and combinational logic function

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: realize the mixed logic building block and optimized logic function.
CO2: understand the optimizing concepts of arithmetic building blocks.
CO3: understand the basic testing of the combinational circuits.
CO4: analysis the synchronous sequential state machine.

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2 3
 CO
CO1 3 2 2
CO2 3 2 2 2
CO3 3 2 2 2
CO4 3 2 2 2

Syllabus

Unit I
Mixed logic circuits - Entered variable K-map Minimization - Multiple output Minimization-Multilevel Minimization and
Optimization - Resubstitution – Decomposition – Factorization - Adders -Carry Look Ahead adder - Carry Save adder.

Unit II
Hazards- Propagation delay & Timing defects in combinational logic - Lumped Path Delay Diagram - Binary Decision
Diagram (BDD)- Ordered BDD – LPDD – Testing: Fault Detection and Analysis in Combinational Systems: Path
Sensitizing Method– Boolean Difference Method; Fault Detection and Analysis using AI/ML Techniques.

Unit III
Static Timing Analysis (STA) design flow – STA Concepts – Standard Cell Library-Synchronous State Machines (FSM) -
Design & analysis of simple state machines - state assignment - state reduction techniques - Asynchronous State Machine-
Analysis of simple state machines - Detection and elimination of output races – glitches

Textbook(s)
1. Richard F. Tinder, “Engineering Digital Design”, Academic Press, 2000.
2. Eugene Fabricius, “Modern Digital Design & Switching Theory”, CRC Press, 1992.

Reference(s)
1. Samuel C. Lee, “Digital Circuits and Logic Design”, Prentice Hall India Private Limited, 2006.
2. Zvi Kohavi and Niraj K Jha, “Switching and Finite Automata Theory”, Third Edition, Cambridge University, Press,
2009.

23ECE333 Functional Verification L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

(Pre-requisite: VLSI Design)

Course Objectives

 To provide a practical approach for verification of VLSI circuits.

 To introduce hardware design languages for functional verification.
 To enable the need and use of reusable verification environments.

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: understand the process of functional verification and its different methodologies.
CO2: apply methodologies to design a verification environment using System Verilog.
CO3: analyze the device under test and to write test-benches using System Verilog.
CO4: analyze the verification process by use of assertion-based techniques.

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO1 PSO2 PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3
CO
CO1 3 3
CO2 3 2 3
CO3 3 3 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3

Syllabus

Unit I
HDL Review - Need for Functional Verification - ASIC Verification Concepts - Verification Tasks - Verification Plan -
Linear Test Bench - Linear Random Test Bench – Self-Checking Test Benches - Test Coverage - System Verilog for Design
- Data Types and Literals - Procedures and Procedural Statements - Operators - User-Defined Data Types - Hierarchy and
Connectivity.

Unit II
System Verilog for Verification - Tasks - Functions - Interfaces - Verification Blocks Transaction Level Modeling - System
Verilog Classes - Random Stimulus - Class-Based Randomization - Functional Coverage - Queues - Dynamic Arrays - Inter-
Process Synchronization - System Verilog Assertions (SVA) - Assertion-Based Verification (ABV) - Boolean Expressions
- Single and Multiple Clock Definitions - Implication Operators - System functions - Nested Implications - Immediate
Assertions - Concurrent Assertions - Boolean Assertions - Sequences - Sequence Composition.

Unit III
Building a Test bench with Threads and Inter-Process Communication - Functional Coverage Strategies - Parameterized
Cover Groups - Coverage Data Analysis - Coverage Statistics Measurement - Complete System Verilog Test Bench Design
- FSM Modeling with System Verilog - Verification of a Four Port Router: Case Study - Opportunities for AI-Powered
Verification and Machine Learning in Formal Verification.

Textbook(s)

1. Chris Spear, “SystemVerilog for Verification: A Guide to Learning the TestBench Language Features,” Third
Edition, Springer, 2012.
2. Sutherland, Stuart, Davidmann, Simon, Flake, Peter, “SystemVerilog for Design: A Guide to Using SystemVerilog
for Hardware Design and Modeling”, Second Edition, Springer Science & Business Media, 2006.

Reference(s)

1. Faisal Haque, Jonathan Michelson, Khizar Khan, “The Art of Verification with System Verilog Assertions”, First
Edition, Verification Central, 2006.
2. S Halsoun and T Sasao, “Logic Synthesis and Verification”, Kluwer Academic publishers, 2002.

23ECE334 Physical Design of ICs L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

(Pre-requisite: VLSI Design)

Course Objectives

 To provide an understanding of the physical design process

 To provide an understanding of the partitioning, floor planning and placement techniques.
 To provide an understanding of the routing algorithms and generation of GDS II file.

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: understand the steps by step process involved in the Physical design cycle.
CO2: analyze the different partitioning and floor planning methodologies used in the physical design of ICs.
CO3: analyze the different placement and routing methodologies used in the physical design of ICs.
CO4: generation of GDS II file after RC extraction.

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2 3
CO
CO1 3 3
CO2 3 2 2 3
CO3 3 2 2 3
 CO4 3 2 2 3

Syllabus

Unit I
Physical IC Design–Objectives–VLSI Physical Design Cycle-Layout and design rules- basic algorithmic concepts for
physical design- physical design processes and complexities. Partition: Kernigham- Lin’s algorithm and Fiduccia Mattheyes
algorithm - multilevel partition techniques; Optimal Partitioning using AI/ML Techniques.

Unit II
Floor-Planning: Hierarchical design - wire length estimation-slicing and non-slicing floor plan-polar graph representation
and operator concept. Stockmeyer algorithm for floor planning. Placement: Design types – ASICs – SoC - microprocessor
RLM. Placement Techniques: Simulated annealing-partition-based-analytical- Hall’s quadratic- Timing and congestion
considerations.

Unit III
Routing: Detailed- global and specialized routing- channel ordering- channel Routing problems and constraint graphs-
routing algorithms- Yoshimura and Kuh’s method-zone scanning and net merging- boundary terminal problem- minimum
density spanning forest problem- topological routing- cluster graph representation. Parasitic Extraction (RC Extraction)–
Chip Finishing Overview–Final Validation– Net List Output–GDS2 Output.

Textbook(s)
1. Naveed Sherwani, ―Algorithms for VLSI physical design Automation‖, 2nd Edition, Kluwer Academic Publisher,
1999.
2. Christophn Meinel and Thorsten Theobold, ―Algorithm and Data Structures for VLSI Design‖, KAP, 2002.
3. Sarrafzadeh, M. and Wong, C.K., “An Introduction to VLSI Physical Design”, 4th Ed., McGraw-Hill. 1996
Reference(s)
1. Wolf, W., “Modern VLSI Design System on Silicon”, 2nd Ed., Pearson Education. 2000
2. Sait, S.M. and Youssef, H., “VLSI Physical Design Automation: Theory and Practice”, World Scientific. 1999
3. Sherwani, N.A., “Algorithm for VLSI Physical Design Automation”, 2nd Ed., Kluwer.
1999
4. Lim, S.K., “Practical Problems in VLSI Physical Design Automation”, Springer.
2008

23ECE335 Mixed Signal IC Design L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

(Pre-requisite: Analog Electronics II)

Course Objectives

 Understand the concept and impact of electrical noise on circuit performance.

 Gain knowledge of data converter principles, architectures, and design considerations.
 Develop skills to design and apply fully-differential output op-amps and CMFB in mixed-signal circuits.

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: develop a comprehensive understanding of electrical noise.

CO2: understand the design considerations of different data converters.
CO3: gain proficiency in designing mixed-signal circuits.
CO4: develop the skills to use switched-capacitor CMFB for op-amp design.

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2 3
CO
 CO1 3 3 2 3
CO2 3 3 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3

Syllabus

Unit I
Feedback and Topologies Review; Introduction to electrical noise- noise measurements, thermal noise, simulating MOSFET
noise, noise equivalent bandwidth, kT/C noise, signal-to-noise ratio (SNR), noise figure (NF), white noise, shot noise, flicker
noise, noise and feedback, op-amp noise modeling.

Unit II
Data converter fundamentals - DAC architectures: resistor string, R-2R, and current steering topologies. Cyclic and pipeline
DACs. ADC architectures including flash and two-step - successive approximation (charge redistribution) ADCs -
segmentation, calibrating DAC offsets and gains, topologies without an op-amp, op-amps in data converters - bottom-plate
sampling - S/H and Cyclic (algorithmic) converter - pipeline ADC.

Unit III
Fully-differential output op-amps - biasing for power and speed - diff-amps and CMFB - op-amp design for mixed-signal
circuits - switched-capacitor CMFB - Op-Amp Design Using Switched-Capacitor CMFB; Circuit Optimization using
AL/ML techniques.

Textbook(s)

1. R. Jacob Baker, “CMOS Circuit Design, Layout and Simulation”, Wiley India Pvt. Ltd, Third Edition.
2. B. Razavi, “Principles of Data Conversion System Design”, John Wiley and Sons, 1995
Reference(s)

1. R. Jacob Baker, “CMOS Mixed Signal Circuit Design”, Wiley India Pvt. Ltd, 2008
2. B. Razavi, “Design of Analog CMOS Integrated Circuits”, McGraw Hill, 2001.
3. B. Razavi, “RF Microelectronics”, Prentice Hall, 2011.

23ECE336 VLSI Testing and Testability L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

(Pre-requisite: Digital Electronics)

Course Objectives

 To provide an understanding of the concepts of VLSI Testing and fault models

• To provide an understanding of the logic and fault simulation methods.
• To provide an understanding of the challenges involved in scan design and design for test

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: understand the fault equivalence and dominance collapsing for digital circuits
CO2: analyse the given fault as detectable or not using logic and fault simulation algorithms.
CO3: generate the test vector using combinational ATPG algorithms.
CO4: understand the scan and logic BIST architectures.

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO2 PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 3
CO
CO1 3 3
CO2 3 2 2 3
CO3 3 2 2 3
 CO4 3 3

Syllabus

Unit I
Introduction to VLSI Testing- Need for VLSI Testing - Fault Modelling – Defects, Errors and Faults- Functional Vs
Structural Testing- Levels of Fault Models - Glossary of fault models - Single stuck-at fault – Equivalence and Dominance
- Checkpoint theorem.

Unit II
Logic and fault simulation – Simulation for Design Verification and Test Evaluation - Modeling circuits for simulation -
Algorithms for true value simulation and fault simulation - Combinational ATPG Algorithms- Redundancy Identification -
Roth’s D-algorithm – PODEM Algorithm; Fault detection using AI/ML Techniques.

Unit III
Design for Testability– Digital DFT and Scan Design – Ad-Hoc DFT methods – Scan Design – Logic BIST- Test pattern
generation – Exhaustive Testing – Pseudo Random Testing – Pseudo Exhaustive Testing – Output Response Analysis –
Signature Analysis- Logic BIST architecture.

Textbook(s)

1. Vishwani D. Agrawal and Michael L. Bushnell, “Essentials of Electronic Testing for Digital Memory and Mixed
Signal VLSI Circuits”, Kluwer Academic Publishers, 2005.
2. Parag K. Lala, “An Introduction to Logic Circuit Testing”, Morgan &Claypool Publishers, 2009.

Reference(s)
1. LaungTerng Wang, Cheng Wen Wu and Xiaoqing Wen, “VLSI Test Principles and Architectures – Design for
Testability”, First Edition, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers, 2006.
2. Parag K. Lala, “Digital Circuit Testing and Testability”, Academic Press, 1997.

23ECE337 System on Chip L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

(Pre-requisite: VLSI Design)

Course Objectives

 To introduce ARM System on chip

 To introduce the NoC in advanced digital systems
 To introduce the concept of system-level design and transaction-level modelling

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: understand the concept of ARM System on a chip.

CO2: understand the interconnect topologies in ARM SoC.
CO3: understand the basic concepts of SystemC.
CO4: understand the basics of electronic system transaction Level Modelling.

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO2 PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 3
CO
CO1 3 2 2
CO2 3 2 2
CO3 3 2 2 2
CO4 3 2 2 2
Syllabus

Unit I
Digital System and VLSI Design-Why design Integrated Circuits-Integrated Circuit design Techniques-IP based Desgin-
Introduction to System-on-Chip-Socs Design Flow-Soc Technology- Soc I/O blocks- Processor, Memory and IP blocks.

Unit II
Soc InterConnect- Interconnect Requirements- Basic Interconnect Topologies- Simple Packet-Switched Interconnect-
Network-on-Chip- Advanced Interconnect Topologies- Interconnect Building Blocks- Long-distance Interconnects-
Serialiser and Deserialiser: SERDES- Automatic Topology Synthesis.

Unit III
Electronic System-Level Modelling- Modelling Abstractions- Interconnect Modelling- SystemC Modelling Library-
Transaction-level Modelling- Processor Modelling with Different Levels of Abstraction- ESL Modelling of Power,
Performance and Area; Optimal SoC design using AI/ML Techniques.

Textbook(s)

1. Wayne Wolf, “Modern VLSI Design: SOC Design,-IP based design” Pearson Education, 2002.
2. Prakash Rashnikar, Peter Paterson and Lenna Singh, “System On a Chip Verification Methodology & Techniques,”
Kluwer Academics Publishers, 2001.
Reference(s)

1. Farzad Nekoogar and Faranak Nekoogar, “From ASICs to SOCs: A Practical Approach,” Prentice Hall, 2003.
2. David J. Greaves” Modern System-on-Chip Design on Arm” , Arm education media
1. Modern Grant Martin and Henry Chang, “Winning the SOC Revolution: Experiences in Real Design,” Kluwer
Academic Publishers, 2003.
2. Jerraya and W. Wolf, “Multiprocessor Systems On Chips,” Morgan Kaufmann, 2004.
3. G. De Micheli, R. Ernst, and W. Wolf, “Readings in Hardware/Software Co-Design,” Morgan Kaufmann, 2001

23ECE338 VLSI Fabrication Technology L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

(Prerequisite: VLSI Design)

Course Objectives

 To introduce the preparation of wafer and cleanroom concept

 To provide the understanding of doping methods, oxidation and pattering of micro devices
 To provide the understanding of thin films deposition and etching techniques

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: understand the wafer preparation and impurities doping mechanisms and its importance.
CO2: understand the growth of oxide and lithography process to pattern microdevices.
CO3: understand the lithography and pattering process of microdevices.
CO4: understand the different methods of film deposition and wet and dry etching processes.

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO2 PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 3
CO
CO1 3 2 3
 CO2 3 3 3
CO3 3 3 3
CO4 3 3 3

Syllabus

Unit I
Brief History of Semiconductor technology. Scaling Trends and Scaling Methodologies - Scaling Challenges, ITRS
Roadmap. Silicon structure and properties- Czochralski and Float Zone crystal growth, dopant distribution, and wafer
preparation, Crystalline defects and their effects. Basic fabrication steps and their importance- Concepts of Clean room and
safety requirements- Concepts of Wafer cleaning processes.

Unit II
Diffusion and ion implantation- Types of diffusion- Ficks laws, junction depth, stopping mechanisms, Gaussian implantation
profile, variations to predicted distribution, implantation damage, and annealing. Oxidation technologies- Plasma and Rapid
Thermal Processing. Characterization of oxide films- High and low k dielectrics. Lithography. Photolithography, E-beam
lithography and minimum resolvable feature sizes, UV sources, photoresists.

Unit III
Deposition requirements and techniques – Physical- Evaporation and sputtering techniques. Failure mechanisms in metal
interconnect - multilevel metallization schemes. Chemical Vapor Deposition- CVD techniques for deposition of polysilicon
- silicon dioxide, silicon nitride and metal films. Epitaxial growth of silicon- PECVD.
Etching - wet chemical etching techniques. Plasma etching and RIE techniques- Chemical Mechanical Polishing, Process
integration and characterization techniques.

Textbook(s)

1. Plummer, J. “Silicon VLSI Technology: Fundamentals, Practice and Modeling”, 3rd Ed., Prentice Hall, 2000.
2. Gandhi, S. K., “VLSI Fabrication Principles: Silicon and 1996 Gallium Arsenide”, John Wiley and Sons,
2003.
3. S. M. Sze, VLSI Technology, TATA, McGraw-Hill, 1999.

Reference(s)

1. Peter Van Zant, “Microchip Fabrication: A Practical Guide to Semiconductor Processing”, McGraw- Hill
Professional, Sixth Edition, 2014.
2. Chang, C.Y. and Sze, S.M., “ULSI Technology”, McGraw Hill, 1999.
3. Campbell, S.A., “The Science and Engineering of Microelectronic Fabrication”, 4th Ed., Oxford University
Press, 1999.

23ECE339 Semiconductor Memories L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

(Pre-requisite: VLSI Design)
Course Objectives

 To learn & understand the Memory hierarchy and array structure in the system.
 To learn various types of architecture for semiconductor memories in detail to understand their limitations and
available solutions to improve them.
 To learn and understand memory cell structures, various parameters associated with them, and various aspects of
reliability.

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be

CO1: understand the SRAM cell structures with its advantages & disadvantages.
CO2: understand the variations in DRAM with its advantages & disadvantages.
CO3: understand other types of semiconductor memories to implement EEPROM and Flash memories etc.
CO4: understand MRAMs and FRAMs types of memories.
CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO2 PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 3
CO
CO1 3 3 2 1 2 3
CO2 3 3 2 2 3
CO3 3 3 2 2 3
CO4 3 2 2 3

Syllabus

Unit I
Random Access Memory Technologies: SRAM Cell structures, MOS SRAM Architecture, Advanced SRAM architectures
and technologies, Application specific SRAMs.

Unit II
CMOS DRAM, DRAM cell theory and cell structures, BICMOS DRAM, DDR, Non-volatile Memories: Masked ROMs,
High density ROM, PROM, CMOS PROMS, EPROM, Floating gate EPROM cell, One-time programmable EPROM,
EEPROM, Flash Memories, Advanced Flash memory architecture- RAM fault modeling - BIST techniques for memory.

Unit III
Radiation effects, Single Event Phenomenon (SEP), Radiation Hardening Process and Design Issues, FRAMs, GaAs
FRAMs, Magneto resistive RAMs (MRAMs), Memory MCM testing and reliability issues, Memory cards, High Density
Memory Packaging; Optimal memory cell design, detection and classification of defects using AI/ML techniques .

Text Book(s)

1. Ashok K. Sharma, “Semiconductor Memories: Technology, Testing, and Reliability”, Wiley, 2013.
2. Betty Prince, “Emerging Memories: Technologies and Trends “, Kluwer Academic, 2002.
3. Tegze P Haraszti, “CMOS Memory Circuits”, Kluwer Academic, 2001.
4. Brent Keeth and R Jacob Baker, “DRAM Circuit Design: A Tutorial”, Wiley – IEEE Press, 2000.

Reference(s)

1. Kevin Zhang, “Embedded Memories for Nano- Scale VLSIs”, Springer, 2009
2. Santosh K. Kurinec and Krzysztof Iniewski, “Nanoscale Semiconductor Memories: Technology and Applications”,
CRC press, 2013.
3. Koichi Ishibashi and Kenichi Osada, “Low Power and Reliable SRAM Memory Cell and Array Design”, Springer,
2011.
4. Saraju P. Mohanty and Ashok Srivastava, “Nano-CMOS and Post-CMOS Electronics: Circuits and Design”, Vol
2., (IET) The institution of Engineering and Technology, 2015

23ECE340 FPGA based System Design L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

(Pre-requisite: Digital Electronics)
Course Objectives

 To introduce programmable logic devices (PLDs).

 To understand the organization and implementation of an FPGA-based digital system.
 To familiarize the design of advanced digital hardware systems targeting FPGAs.

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: design digital circuits using programmable logic devices.

CO2: understand the architectures and features of various technology-based FPGAs.
CO3: comprehend the different phases of FPGA design flow and timing constraints.
 CO4: understand advanced architectures of FPGA.

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO1 PSO2 PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3
CO
CO1 3 2 3 3 3
CO2 3 2 3 3 3
CO3 3 2 3 3 3
CO4 3 2 3 3 3

Syllabus

Unit I
Programmable Logic Devices - PROM - PAL - PLA - CPLD - Gate Arrays – MPGA. Introduction to FPGAs – Design flow
– Circuit Fabrics – LUTs and IO Blocks. FPGA Technology overview – Digital Design for FPGAs, FPGA Programming
Technologies – Antifuse - EPROM - EEPROM - FLASH – SRAM. FPGA Fabric - Configurable Logic Block - LUT - Slice
– Slicem. Programmable Interconnects - Input Output Blocks - Keeper Circuit - Xilinx 7 Series Architecture.

Unit II
FPGA Design Flow and Abstraction Levels - Verilog Design for Synthesis - One Hot Encoding - Memory Blocks - Block
Memory Generator (BRAM/BROM) - Single Port Memory - Dual Port Memory - FIFO - Distributed RAM - Synthesis
Pitfalls - Latch Inference - Static Timing Analysis - Speed Performance - Timing Constraints - Clock Management - Clock
Buffers - Clock Tree Routing.

Unit III
Introduction to SoC Design - Hard Macros - Multipliers - DSP Block - Hard Core Processors - Interface Circuits -
Configuration Chain - JTAG Interface - Zynq7000 Architecture; Case Study: FPGA implementation of AI/ML algorithms.

Textbook(s)

1. Wayne Wolf, “FPGA-Based System Design”, Prentice Hall India Pvt. Ltd., 2005.
2. Amano, Hideharu, “Principles and Structures of FPGAs”, First Edition, Springer, 2018.
3. Readler, Blaine C.,” Verilog by example: a concise introduction for FPGA design”, Full Arc Press, 2011.
Reference(s)

1. Zainalabedin Navabi, “Embedded Core Design with FPGAs, First Edition”, McGraw Hill, 2008.
2. Xilinx Inc, “Vivado Design Suite User Guide, 2021.
3. Michael D. Ciletti, “Advanced Digital Design with Verilog HDL”, Second Edition, Pearson Higher Education,
2011.

23ECE341 Hardware Security and Trust L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

(Pre-requisite: VLSI Design)

Course Objectives

 To introduce Hardware Trojan taxonomy

 To familiarize Trojan insertion methods and detection approaches at various levels of abstraction
 To introduce VLSI design flow incorporating trust at different levels

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: understand typical hardware security vulnerabilities at various phases of VLSI Design flow
CO2: understand fundamental approaches used in Trojan insertion
CO3: understand different approaches for Trojan and Piracy detection and analysis
 CO4: analyze the ways in which trust can be incorporated in VLSI Design flow

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO1 PSO2 PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3
CO
CO1 3 3
CO2 3 3
CO3 3 3 3
CO4 3 2 3

Syllabus

Unit I
Review of VLSI Design Flow - Hardware Trojan –Trojan taxonomy - Case study - Trojan detection – Classification of
Trojan detection - Challenges in Trojan detection.

Unit II
Design for hardware trust – Delay-based methods – Shadow registers – Ring oscillators - Dummy scan Flip-Flop insertion
- Trojan activation time analysis - Trojan detection and isolation flow – Architectural approaches; AI-based Hardware trojan
detection techniques.

Unit III
Security and testing – Scan-based testing – Scan-based attacks and countermeasures - System-on-chip test infrastructure -
Emerging areas of test security. Trojan prevention: Built-in self-authentication - BISA structure and insertion flow -
Analysing BISA structure - Trusted design in FPGAs.

Textbook(s)

1. Mohammad Tehranipoor and Cliff Wang (Eds.), “Introduction to Hardware Security and Trust”, Springer, New
York, 2012.
2. Mohammad Tehranipoor, Hassan Salmani and Xuehui Zhang, “Integrated Circuit Authentication - Hardware
Trojans and Counterfeit Detection”, Springer International Publishing, Switzerland 2014.

Reference(s)

1. Nicolas Sklavos, Ricardo Chaves, Giorgio De Natale, Francesco Regazzoni (Eds), “Hardware Security and Trust:
Design and Deployment of Integrated Circuits in a Threatened Environment”, Springer, 2017.
2. Prabhat Mishra, Swarup Bhunia, Mark Teharanipoor (Eds), “Hardware IP Security and Trust”, Springer, 2017.

23ECE342 VLSI System Design L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

(Pre-requisite: Digital Electronics)

Course Objectives

 To introduce the various modeling styles for Hardware Description Languages (HDLs).
 To introduce Register Transfer Level (RTL) abstraction for HDL based design flow.
 To understand the behavioral HDL modeling of combinational and sequential subsystems.

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: understand the basic constructs of Verilog.

CO2: design digital blocks using Gate level and Data flow modeling style of Verilog.
CO3: design digital blocks using behavioral modeling and also synthesizable constructs in the same.
CO4: analyze the working and designing of standard VLSI System building blocks.

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO2 PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 3
CO
CO1 3 2 2 2 3
CO2 3 3 3 2 3
CO3 3 3 3 2 3
CO4 3 3 3 2 3

Syllabus

Unit I
Review of VLSI Design Flow - Introduction to HDLs - Verilog modeling styles – Gate Level, Structural - Dataflow -
Register Transfer Level (RTL) abstraction for HDL-Based Design Flow.

Unit II
Behavioral Verilog Modeling of Combinational and Sequential Subsystems: Multiplexer – Decoder – Encoder – adders –
Multipliers – Counters - Shift Registers - State Machines.

Unit III
Logic Synthesis with Verilog HDL and their constructs, Impact of Logic Synthesis, Basics of Timing - Speed of a Digital
system - Design Case Studies - Simple Processor – FIFO - Circular Buffer - DSP Blocks – LFSR; Case Study: Design the
AI/ML algorithms using Verilog.

Textbook(s)
1. Samir Palnitkar, “Verilog HDL: A Guide to Digital Design and Synthesis”, Second Edition, Pearson, 2003.
2. Michael D Ciletti, “Advanced Digital Design with the Verilog HDL”, Second Edition, Pearson, 2017.

Reference(s)
1. T. R. Padmanabhan and B. Bala Tripura Sundari, “Design through the Verilog HDL”, First Edition, Wiley
Interscience, 2004.

Devices and Circuits

23ECE351 Design of ICs for Optical Communication L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

(Pre-requisite: Nil)

Course Objectives

 To provide an understanding of a general optical system and random binary data

 To provide a foundation to design and analyse optical active and passive devices and circuits
 To provide an overview of design challenges and performance analysis of optical devices and systems

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: understand the design challenges in transmission of random binary data in optical communication system
CO2: design optical communication related circuits and systems
CO3: analyze and characterize optical communication related circuits and systems
CO4: carry out the performance evaluation of an optical communication system
CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO2 PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 3
CO
CO1 3 1 3 3
CO2 2 3 2 2 3
CO3 2 3 3 1 3
CO4 2 3 3 3 1 3

Syllabus

Unit I
Optical Communication System: General Optical System – Design Challenges – State of the Art Random Binary Data –
Properties – Generation – Data Formats – Effect of Bandwidth Limitation – Effect of noise – Phase noise and jitter –
Transmission Lines; Optical Devices: Laser Diodes – Optical Fibers - Photodiodes – Optical Systems

Unit II
Transimpedance Amplifiers: General Considerations – Open Loop TIA – Feedback TIA – Supply Rejection – Differential
TIA – High Performance Techniques – Automatic Gain Control – Development in TIA Design with case studies; Limiting
Amplifiers and Output Buffers: General Considerations – Broadband Techniques - Output Buffers – Distributed
Amplification, Oscillators: Ring Oscillators - LC Oscillators – Inductors – Varactors – Quadrature Oscillator – Distributed
Oscillator - Voltage Controlled Oscillators

Unit III
PLL - Charge-Pump PLLs - Nonideal Effects in PLLs - Delay-Locked Loops, Clock and Data Recovery: General
Considerations - Phase Detectors for Random Data - Frequency Detectors for Random Data - CDR Architectures - Jitter in
CDR Circuits, Multiplexers and Laser Drivers: Multiplexers - Frequency Dividers - Laser and Modulator Drivers - Design
Principles - Laser Driver Design, Burst-Mode Circuits: Burst-Mode TIAs - Burst-Mode CDR Circuits; Design optimization
of high-speed laser driver IC using support vector regression (SVR), Deep Neural Network for anomaly detection in high-
speed laser driver circuits.

Textbook(s)
1. Behzad Razavi, “Design of Integrated Circuits for Optical Communications”, 2 nd Edition, Wiley, 2012.
2. Behzad Razavi, “Design of CMOS Phase Locked Loops”, Cambridge University Press, 2020.

Reference(s)
1. Eduard Säckinger, “Analysis and Design of Transimpedance Amplifiers for Optical Receivers” Wiley, 2017.
2. Ofer Aluf, “Advance Elements of Laser Circuits and Systems: Nonlinear Applications in Engineering”, 1st Edition,
2021.

23ECE352 Optoelectronic Integrated Circuit Design L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

(Pre-requisite: Electronic Devices and Circuits)

Course Objectives

 To provide an understanding of the optical semiconductor materials and device mechanisms

 To develop the fundamental knowledge on optoelectronic devices
 To understand the MOS dynamic effect, LED materials and configuration

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: understand the working principle of the optical devices

CO2: use the optical materials for different applications
CO3: design simple optoelectronics device
CO4: understand the behavioral characteristics of optical devices

CO-PO Mapping
PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO PSO
O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2 3
CO
CO1 3 2 2 3
CO2 2 3 2 3
CO3 2 3 1 3
CO4 2 3 3 1 3

Syllabus
Unit I
Introduction -Optical mechanism in semiconductors, E-H pair generation and recombination, absorption and radiation in
semiconductor, deep level transitions, Auger recombination, luminescence and time resolved photoluminescence, optical
properties of photonic band-gap materials; Junction photodiode: PIN, heterojunction and avalanche photodiode;
Comparisons of various photodetectors, measurement techniques for output pulse.

Unit II
Photovoltaic effect, V-I characteristics and spectral response of solar cells, heterojunction and cascaded solar cells, Schottky
barrier and thin film solar cells, design of solar cell, Generative Adversial Network (GAN) to optimize nanostructure design
for solar cells. Modulated barrier, MS and MSM photodiodes; Wavelength selective detection, coherent detection;
Microcavity photodiode, Support Vector Regression (SVR) and particle swarm optimization (PSO) algorithms to optimize
design parameters of microcavity photodiode.

Unit III
Dynamic effects of MOS capacitor, basic structure and frequency response of charge coupled devices, buried channel
charge coupled devices. Electroluminescent process, choice of light emitting diode (LED) material, device configuration
and efficiency; LED: Principle of operation, LED structure, frequency response, defects, and reliability.

Textbook(s)
1. Horst Zimmermann “Silicon Optoelectronic Integrated Circuits” 2 nd edition, Volume 13, Springer Series in
Advanced Microelectronics
2. Jianjun Gao “Optoelectronic Integrated Circuit Design” 1 st edition, 2011, Wiley

Reference(s)
1. O. Wada “Optoelectronic Integration: Physics, Technology and Applications” 1994
2. Ginés Lifante “Integrated Photonics Fundamentals” 2003. Wiley

23ECE353 Optoelectronic Materials and Devices L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

(Pre-requisite: Electronic Devices and Circuits)

Course Objectives

 To provide an understanding of the optical semiconductor materials and device mechanisms

 To develop the fundamental knowledge on optoelectronic devices
 To understand the MOS dynamic effect, LED materials and configuration

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: understand the working principle of the optical devices

CO2: use the optical materials for different applications
CO3: design simple optoelectronics device
CO4: understand the behavioral characteristics of optical devices

CO-PO Mapping
 PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO PSO
O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2 3
CO
CO1 3 2 3
CO2 3 2 2 3
CO3 3 2 2 3
CO4 3 2 2 3

Syllabus

Unit I
Introduction -Optical mechanism in semiconductors, E-H pair generation and recombination, absorption and radiation in
semiconductor, deep level transitions, Auger recombination, luminescence and time resolved photoluminescence, optical
properties of photonic band-gap materials; Junction photodiode: PIN, heterojunction and avalanche photodiode;
Comparisons of various photodetectors, measurement techniques for output pulse.

Unit II
Photovoltaic effect, V-I characteristics and spectral response of solar cells, heterojunction and cascaded solar cells, Schottky
barrier and thin film solar cells, design of solar cell; Modulated barrier, MS and MSM photodiodes; Wavelength selective
detection, coherent detection; Microcavity photodiode;

Unit III
Dynamic effects of MOS capacitor, basic structure and frequency response of charge coupled devices, buried channel
charge coupled devices. Electroluminescent process, choice of light emitting diode (LED) material, device
configuration and efficiency; LED: Principle of operation, LED structure, frequency response, defects, and reliability;
Deep learning for the development of optoelectronic devices.

Textbook(s)
1. Sze, S.M., and Ng, K.K., “Physics of Semiconductor Devices”, 3rdEd. Wiley-Interscience, 2006.
2. Liao, S.Y., “Microwave Devices and Circuits”, 4thEd., Pearson Education, 2002.

Reference(s)
1. Golio, M., “RF and Microwave Semiconductor Devices Handbook”, CRC Press, 2002.
2. Rebeiz, M.G., “R.F. MEMS: Theory, Design and Technology”, 2ndEd., Wiley-Interscience, 2003.

23ECE354 Radio Frequency Integrated Circuits L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

(Pre-requisite: RF and Microwave Engineering)

Course Objectives

 To provide an overview of RF CMOS device characterization

 To enhance design capability for the RF IC designs
 To enrich the skills of computations by introducing modern engineering tools necessary for evaluating RF circuits.

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: understand RF CMOS device characteristics and its importance in RF ICs

CO2: apply RF computational techniques to design actively loaded RF amplifiers
CO3: design and analyze two port networks
CO4: evaluate the characteristics of RF CMOS sub blocks from top-level specifications and to model circuits using circuit
simulators

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2 3
CO
CO1 3 2 2 3
 CO2 3 2 2 2 3
CO3 3 3 2 2 3
CO4 3 3 2 3 2 3

Syllabus

Unit I
Introduction- Review of RF and communication systems concepts, Basic Concepts in RF Design - General Considerations,
Effects of Nonlinearity, Noise, and Sensitivity and Dynamic Range. RF systems – basic architectures, Parallel RLC - Series
RLC - Impedance Transformers - L-Pi-T-Type. Higher Order Matching - Transmission Lines - Driving Point Impedance.
Small Signal RF CMOS Model - Noise Sources Transceiver Architectures- Basic and Modern Heterodyne Receivers, Direct-
Conversion Receivers. Low-IF Receivers and Heterodyne Transmitters. Low-Noise Amplifiers- General Considerations,
Problem of Input Matching, and LNA Topologies

Unit II
Mixers- General Considerations, Passive Down conversion Mixers, Active Down conversion Mixers, and Active Mixers
with High IP2, Up conversion Mixers. Two Port Network - S-Parameters - Maximum Stable Gain - Reflection Coefficients
- Stability - Non-Linearity - 1-dB Gain Compression Point - Inter-Modulation -Receiver Architecture - Direct Conversion -
Super Heterodyne - Hartley Architecture - CMOS sub blocks - Low Noise Amplifier - Inductive Source Degeneration -
Cascode and Differential Configurations - Inductive Peaking - Current Reuse.

Unit III
Oscillators- Cross-Coupled Oscillator, Voltage-Controlled Oscillators, Low-Noise VCOs. Phase-Locked Loops- Type-I
PLLs, Type-II PLLs, and PFD/CP Nonidealities. Power Amplifiers- Classification, High-Efficiency Power Amplifiers,
Cascode Output Stages, and Basic Linearization Techniques. Doherty Power Amplifier, Polar Modulation, and Out phasing;
ML based linearization techniques.

Textbook(s)
1. RF Microelectronics by Behzad Razavi. Second Edition, Pearson, 2012 (Indian Edition 2013 by Dorling
Kindersley).
2. The Design of CMOS Radio-Frequency Integrated Circuits by Thomas H. Lee. Cambridge University Press, 2004.
Reference(s)
1. SorinVoinigescu, High-Frequency Integrated Circuits, Cambridge University Press, 2013, South Asian Paperback
edition of 2018.
2. Michael Steer, Microwave and RF Design - A Systems Approach, SciTech Publishing, 2010, Indian Reprint by
Yesdee Publishing, 2012.

23ECE362 Microwave Circuits for Wireless Communications L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

(Pre-requisite: RF and Microwave Engineering)

Course Objectives

 To analyze microwave networks

 To design and implement matching networks
 To design and analyze microwave amplifiers

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: understand and apply the principles of electromagnetics and transmission lines
CO2: analyze microwave networks and determine the network parameters and characteristics
CO3: design and implement the matching networks and multisection matching transformers
CO4: design and analyze microwave amplifiers

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2 3
CO
 CO1 3 3 2 3
CO2 3 3 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3

Syllabus

Unit I

Review of electromagnetics: Maxwell's equations, plane wave solutions, transmission lines; types of transmission lines and
their properties, coaxial lines, rectangular waveguides, microstrip. Microwave Network analysis; scattering matrix,
transmission matrix formulations. Flow graphs, Mason's rule.

Unit II

Matching networks: lumped element designs and limitations, single and double stub tuned designs. Quarter-wavelength
transformers, multisection matching transformers; Active microwave circuit design, characteristics of microwave diodes
and transistors. Linear and nonlinear behavior and models; Filter Synthesis by Using Artificial Intelligence Techniques-
Neural Network Modeling, Experimental Design and Data Acquisition.

Unit III

Amplifier design: gain and stability, design for noise figure. Noise in microwave circuits; dynamic range and noise sources,
equivalent noise temperature, system noise figure considerations.

Textbook(s)
1. David M. Pozar, Microwave Engineering, 4th. ed., John Wiley & Sons, 2012.

Reference(s)
1. Guillermo Gonzalez, Microwave Transistor Amplifiers, 2nd. ed., Prentice-Hall, 1997.

23ECE363 Design of Millimeter-Wave Circuits and Systems L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

(Pre-requisite: RF and Microwave Engineering)

Course Objectives

 To provide foundation on the requirements for millimeter-wave (mmWave) radio, radar, and radiometer systems
 To provide understanding of the capabilities of silicon technology at mmWave frequencies
 To enable analyze and design the key integrated circuits in mmWave transceivers

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: understand the mmWave IC technology, its capabilities and limitations

CO2: analyze and optimize radio link budgets for wireless communication systems
CO3: design mmWave ICs
CO4: analyze the system-level requirements and trade-offs associated with various mmWave applications

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2 3
CO
CO1 3 3 2 3
CO2 2 3 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3

Syllabus
Unit I
Introduction to mmWave: Physics, Technology - Active components: SiGe BiCMOS Technology - SOI CMOS Technology
- Passive components: transmission lines, Capacitor / Inductor / Transformer, Hybrid couplers.

Unit II
Millimeter-wave Communication Links and Budgets - Phased-Array: Beamforming, Architecture, ML techniques for
beamforming; Metrics - Building Block: Low Noise Amplifier design and Power Amplifier design, layout and verification
- mmWave Phase Shifters: Active and Passive.

Unit III
Transmit/Receive switches and their use in systems - mmWave Transceivers: Architecture - mmWave Mixers, Active and
Passive - mmWave multipliers – Voltage Controlled Oscillators - High-Speed circuits & dividers for LO networks (CML) -
Phased-Array Systems - Radar Fundamentals - Radar Transceiver System-on-chip.

Textbook(s)
Sorin Voinigescu, High-Frequency Integrated Circuits, 1st ed., Cambridge, 2013

Reference(s)
1. Hubregt J. Visser, Array and Phased Array Antenna Basics, Wiley, 1st ed., 2005.
2. David Pozar, Microwave Engineering, Wiley, 4th ed., 2011.
3. Merrill Skolnik, Introduction to Radar Systems, McGraw-Hill, 3rd ed., 2002.

23ECE355 IC Design for Sensor Systems L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

(Pre-requisite: Analog Electronics-II/Electronic Circuits-II)

Course Objectives

 To provide an understanding of sensor interface circuits and smart sensor systems

 To understand the fundamentals of precision and dedicated sensor circuits and systems
 To provide foundation on design MOS based sensor circuits for smart sensing applications

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: understand the concepts of design and calibration of sensor interface circuits and sensor interface system
CO2: apply the design principles on precision instrumentation amplifiers and dedicated sensor systems
CO3: analyze CMOS based sensor circuits and their characteristics
CO4: evaluate the performance of MOS based sensor interface circuits and systems using simulation tools

CO-PO Mapping
PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO PSO
O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2 3
CO
CO1 3 2 3 3
CO2 2 3 2 2 3
CO3 2 3 2 2 3
CO4 2 2 3 3 2 3

Syllabus

Unit I
Sensor Interface Circuits – Sensor Signal Normalization – Analog Data Acquisition Circuits in Integrated Sensing System
– Integrated Interface Circuits for Capacitive Micromechanical Sensors – Interfaces for Microsensor Systems - Sensor
Interface Systems – Smart Sensor Systems – Smart Sensor Design – Calibration and Self-Calibration of Smart Sensors

Unit II
Precision Instrumentation Amplifiers – Three- OpAmp Instrumentation Amplifier, Current-Feedback Instrumentation
Amplifiers -Auto-Zero OpAmps and InstAmps - Chopper OpAmps and InstAmps - Chopper Stabilized OpAmps and
InstAmps - Chopper Stabilized and AZ-Chopper OpAmps and InstAmps, Dedicated Impedance-Sensor Systems -
Capacitive-Sensor Interfaces using Square-Wave Excitation Signals - Dedicated Measurement Systems – Detection of
Microorganisms – Water Content Meaurements– Blood Impedance Characterization
Unit III
CMOS Based Sensors – DNA Microarrays –Functionalization – Electrochemical Readout Techniques - Image Sensors –
Impact of CMOS Scaling – CMOS Pixel Architectures – Photon Shot Noise – A/D Converters for CMOS Image Sensors –
Light Sensitivity – Dynamic Range – Global Shutter Circuit Platforms for Smart Sensors – mm Scale Sensor Platform for
future IOT Applications – Deep Neural Networks and Reinforcement Learning to optimize design of sensor system for
power consumption and data accuracy-Smart Sensor Microsystem-Decision Trees and Genetic Algorithm to optimize design
of smart sensor microsystem for performance and power consumption; Application-Dependent Design and Integration
Approaches – Energy Efficient RRAM Crossbar-based Approximate Computing for Smart Cameras - NVRAM-Assisted
Optimization Techniques for Flash Memory Management in Embedded Sensor Nodes

Textbook(s)
Gerard Meijer, Michiel Pertijs, Kofi Makinwa “Smart Sensor Systems: Emerging Systems and Applications” 1 st edition,
Wiley, 2014
Reference(s)
1. Chong-Min Kyung, Hirrota Yassura, “Smart Sensors and Systems” Springer, 2017
3. Willy Sansen, Johan H Huijsing “Analog Circuit Design Mixed A/D Circuit Design, Sensor Interface Circuits and
Communication Circuits” Springer Science, 1999

23ECE356 Microelectromechanical Devices L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

(Pre-requisite: Nil)
Course Objectives

 To understand the Microelectromechanical (MEMS) system and MEMS materials

 To understand different MEMS micro sensor and actuators principle and mechanism
 To introduce the fabrication process involved in microsystem and packaging

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: understand the MEMS devices and MEMS materials used in fabrication
CO2: understand the different MEMS micro sensor principles and micro actuators mechanism
CO3: understand the engineering science of microsystem
CO4: understand the mechanism and fabrication process of microsystem and packaging

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS P P P P P P P P P PO PO PO PSO2 PSO3

O O O O O O O O O O 10 11 12 PSO1
CO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
CO1 3 2 2 - - - - - - - - - 3 3
CO2 2 3 - - - - - - - - - - 3 3
CO3 2 2 2 - - - - - - - - - 3 3
CO4 2 2 1 3 - - - - - - - - 3 3

Syllabus

Unit I
Overview of MEMS and Microsystem, MEMS Materials: Silicon, Polymer: Polymers in MEMS– Polimide, SU-8, Liquid
Crystal Polymer (LCP), PDMS, PMMA, Parylene; Microsensor-Working principles of different microsensors-acoustic,
BioMEMS, Chemicals, Optical, Pressure, and Thermal, Flow and Tactile sensors- Optical MEMS – Lenses and Mirrors.
Micro-actuators-different actuations mechanisms- Thermal force, Shape memory alloy, Piezoelectric materials, Electrostatic
force, Applications of micro actuators.

Unit II
Engineering science for microsystem design: Engg. Mechanics of microsystem: Design-static bending of thin plates,
mechanical vibration, thermomechanical, fracture mechanics, thin film mechanics, and finite element analysis, thermofluidic
and microsystem design- characteristic of moving fluid, continuity and momentum equations, Laminar fluid flow, and heat
conduction, miniaturization laws.
Unit III
Microsystem fabrication process-photolithography, ion-implantation, diffusion, oxidation, thin films deposition methods-
chemical vapor deposition, physical vapor deposition, epitaxy deposition, Etching- Anisotropic Wet Etching – Dry Etching
of Silicon – Plasma Etching – Deep Reactive Ion Etching (DRIE) – Isotropic Wet Etching- Gas Phase Etchants;
Micromanufacturing: Bulk micromachining, surface micromachining, and LIGA process; Assembly of 3D MEMS,
Microsystems packaging and materials- Artificial Intelligence applications for MEMS Sensors and actuators and
applications of MEMS devices.

Textbook(s)
1. Tai-Ran Hsu, MEMS and Micro systems Design and Manufacture, Tata McGraw Hill, 2002.
2. Chang Liu, Foundation of MEMS, International Edition, 2nd edition, 2006.
3. GK Anantha Suresh, et. al, Micro and Smart Systems, Wiley-India, 2010.
Reference(s)
1. Stephen D Senturia, Microsystem Design, Springer Publication, 2000.
2. Julian W.Gardner, Vijay K Varadhan, “Microsensors, MEMS and Smart devices”, John Wiley & sons, 2001.

23ECE357 Energy Harvesting Technologies and Circuits L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

(Pre-requisite: Nil)
Course Objectives

 To understand the different energy harvesting methods

 To understand the fundamentals and circuit model of energy harvesting technologies
 To understand the energy harvesting interfacing and power conditioning circuits

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: understand various energy sources available in the environment

CO2: understand the fundamentals of energy harvesting technologies and methods
CO3: understand about the low power and high-power energy harvesting technologies and their model
CO4: understand different conditional circuits used for energy harvesting devices

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO2 PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 3
CO
CO1 3 2 3
CO2 3 2 2 3
CO3 3 2 2 2 3
CO4 3 3 2 2 2 3

Syllabus

Unit I
Introduction-Energy sources, energy harvesting based sensor networks, photovoltaic cell technologies, generation of electric
power in semiconductor PV cells, Thermoelectric energy harvesting- design and effecinecy, piezoelectric energy harvesting,
types of Piezoelectric materials, Transducers. Micro scale harvesting, Strategy for Enhancing the generated power.

Unit II
Piezoelectric Electromechanical modeling of Lumped parameter model and coupled distributed parameter models and closed
from solution. Performance Evalution, Electromagnetic-Basic priciple, micro fabricated coils and magnetic materials,
scaling, power maximization, micro and macro scale implementations. Non-linear techniques, vibration control & steady
state cases. Power sources for WSN, Power generation, conversion, examples – case studies.

Unit III
Harvesting circuits- Schottky diode, MOSFET as a diode, PWM and transistor switching, Interface/power conditioning
circuit: linear DC-DC converters, Buck-boost Convertor, AC-DC boots rectifiers, Voltage Multipliers, and LT Spice
Analysis of Power Conditioning Circuit; Role and application of AI/ML in energy systems.

Textbook(s)

1. Carlos Manuel Ferreira Carvalho, Nuno Filipe Silva Veríssimo Paulino, “CMOS Indoor Light Energy Harvesting
System for Wireless Sensing Applications", springer, 2016.
2. Shashank Priya, “Energy Harvesting Technologies, “Springer, 2009.
Reference(s)

1. Danick Briand, Eric Yeatman, Shad Roundy, “Micro Energy Harvesting”, 2015

23ECE358 FinFET Technology L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

(Pre-requisite: Electronic Devices and Circuits/Electronic Circuit-1)

Course Objectives

 To introduce MOSFET scaling challenges, Multi Gate MOS system, and FinFET region of operation
 To introduce the understanding of the physical effect, leakages, and parasitic of the FinFET
 To familiarize with materials, fabrication process, and challenges to FinFET process and devices

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: know the challenges of MOSFET scaling, oxide defects, and importance of FinFET
CO2: understand the MOS System, region of operation, physical effect of FinFET Technology
CO3: understand the different types of leakages and parasitic resistances in FinFET
CO4: know the fabrication materials, process and various fabrication challenges

CO-PO Mapping
PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO PSO
O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2 3
CO
CO1 3 3 3
CO2 3 2 2 3
CO3 3 2 2 3
CO4 3 2 2 3

Syllabus
Unit I
Introduction-Moore’s Law, MOSFET Scaling, Challenges, and Physics-Leakage Current, Variability, FinFET- Single and
Multigate, Multigate MOS Capacitor, Oxide Charges, Effect of Oxide Charges on Energy Band, Multigate MOS Capacitor
Systems, Fin-FET-Operation, Basic Features, Drain Current Formulation-Derivation of Electrostatic Potential, Continuous
Drain Current, Equation, Regional Drain Current Equations.

Unit II
Physical Effect and Leakage and Parasitic- Short Channel Effect on Threshold, Quantum Mechanical Effect, Surface
Mobility, Subthreshold, Gate induced Drain and Source, Gate induced Source, Source Drain P-N Junction leakages, and
Gate Oxide Tunneling leakages, Impact Ionization Current, Source-Drain Parasitic Resistance, Gate Resistance, Source
Drain-P-N Junction Capacitances,
Unit III
FinFET-Fabrication-material, well formation, Fin pattering, Alternative well formation, Gate Definition, Source-Drain
Extension, Raised Source-Drain, replacement metal gate formation, Challenges to FinFET Process-Lithography, Process
Integration, Dopant Implantation, and Etching, Device Technology and FinFET circuit Design Challenges; Role of Al/ML
in FinFET optimization and fabrication.

Textbook(s)
1. Samar K. Saha, “FinFET Devices for VLSI Circuit and Systems,” CRC Press, 2021.
2. Yogesh Singh Chauhan, “FinFET Modelling for IC Design and Simulation, Academic Press, 2015.

Reference(s)
Jean-Pierre Colinge, “FinFETs and Other Multi-gate Transistors,” Springer, 2008.

23ECE359 Nano Electronics L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

(Pre-requisite: Electronic Devices and Circuits)

Course Objectives

 To study deep sub-micron effects of MOSFETs and understand the latest trends in the technology and principles
of nano-electronics
 To introduce the mathematical methods applied for advanced material based MOSFET models and familiarize new
material devices and their performances
 To provide a unified applied treatment of fundamental mathematics of quantum transport and use it for device
modeling using the principles learnt above

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: understand the deep sub-micron effects and limits of scaling on nano-electronic devices
CO2: use of wave – particle analysis in the development of transport properties
CO3: use mathematical methods for advanced nanomaterial studies
CO4: develop spice compatible models

CO-PO Mapping

PO/ PO PO PO PO4 PO PO6 PO PO PO PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO

PSO 1 2 3 5 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO
CO1 3 2 - - - - - - - - - - - - -
CO2 2 2 - 3 - - - - - 2 2 2 2 2 -
CO3 2 2 - - - - - - - 2 2 2 2 2 -
CO4 2 2 3 - - - - - 2 2 2 2 2 2 -

Syllabus
Unit I
Deep Submicron Devices Limits to Scaling –Nano Devices – Quantum Effects– Atomic Scale Parameter Fluctuation –
Nanoscale MOSFET –FINFETS –Vertical MOSFETS - Tunnel FETS - The Schrödinger Equation –Electrons in a Crystal
Lattice – Quantum Well– Wire and Dot Devices - Scattering Rates and Lifetimes in Electronic Devices - CVD and Other
Processes in Fabrication of Nano Devices.

Unit II
Band-Structure and Transport Resonant Tunneling Transistors –Single Electron Transistors –and Spintronics Devices -
Atoms–up Approaches – Transport in Molecular Structures – Molecular Systems as Schrodingers equation – Nanoscale and
Quantum Devices –Single Electron Transistor – Quantum Wires - Quantum Dot Cellular Automata.

Unit III
Alternatives to Conventional Electronics – Drift Diffusion– Ballistic Transport –NEGF –Molecular Interconnects –
Graphene–Carbon Nanotubes and Silicon Nanowire, Technology Devices and Circuits - 1 D transport - Reflection,
Transmission and the non-equilibrium Green Function Formalism (NEGF) - Contacting the schodinger - Density of states –
Hamiltonian - and Spice compatible modeling of carbon-based advanced nanomaterial channels for MOSFET devices.

Textbook(s)
1. S. Datta, “Lessons from Nanoelectronics”, World Scientific, 2012.
2. S. Datta, “Quantum Transport: Atom to Transistor”, Cambridge University Press, 2005.

Reference(s)
1. Gerhard Klimeck, “Nanoelectronics Modeling: From Quantum Mechanics and Atoms to Realistic Devices”,
https://nanohub.org/resources/8086, 2010.
2. Waser Ranier, “Nano Electronics and Information Technology: Advanced Electronic Materials and Novel Devices”
Wiley VCH, 2003.

23ECE360 Energy Materials L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

(Pre-requisite: Semiconductor Physics)

Course Objectives

 To study solar cells and energy harvesting materials

 To introduce energy storage materials and synthesis methods of energy harvesting materials
 To provide a deep understanding of different characterization techniques of materials

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: understand the applications of different solar cells

CO2: understand the new generation energy harvesting materials
CO3: know the different synthesis methods of materials
CO4: understand various methods to analyze and characterize the materials

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PSO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO
CO1 3 3 - - - - - - - - - - - 3 -
CO2 3 3 - - - - - - - - - 2 3 -
CO3 3 2 - - - - - - - - - - 2 3 -
CO4 3 2 - - - - - - - - 2 3 -

Syllabus

Unit I
Solar and Energy Harvesting Materials- First generation solar cell materials; single and polycrystalline Silicon, amorphous
silicon, contact materials. Second generation solar cell materials: CdSe, CdTe, Copper Indium Gallium Selenide (CIGS),
Gallium Arsenide for applications in photovoltaics, Materials for thin film solar cells, thin film processing, and properties.
Contact materials for second generation solar cells. Third generation solar cell materials; Quantum Dots, Organic materials,
Composites, Dyes, Perovskites and their synthesis, characterization and properties, Interface energetics, photoactive layers
and their materials. Piezoelectric, Pyroelectric and Thermo-electrics materials, Electrostatic (capacitive) Energy Harvesting
and materials, energy from Magnetic Induction, Metamaterial, energy from atmospheric pressure changes, electroactive
polymers (EAPs); Use of Machine Learning and Artificial Intelligence for Energy Materials.

Unit II
Energy Storage Materials-Electrochemistry and electro-chemical Battery materials, Hydrogen Storage materials for fuel
cells: Metal hybrids, Nanostructured metal hydrides, Non-metal hydrides, Carbohydrates, Synthesis of hydrocarbons,
Aluminum, Liquid organic hydrogen carriers (LOHC), Ammonia, Amine borane complexes, Nano borohydrides and nano
catalyst doping, imidazolium ionic liquids, phosphonium borate, Carbonite substances, Metal Organic frameworks,
Activated Carbons, Carbon nanotubes, Clathrate hydrates, Glass capillary arrays; Physical Materials Synthesis Methods:
Vacuum Evaporation, Electron beam evaporation Sputtering, Cathodic Arc Deposition, Chemical Vapour Deposition,
Atomic Layer Deposition, Pulsed Laser Deposition, Molecular Beam Epitaxy, Lithography and their types; Al/Ml in material
Process and manufacturing.

Unit III
Physical Materials Synthesis Methods: Sol-Gel technique, self-assembly, colloidal method, hydro-thermal method,
coprecipitation method, solid state synthesis, microwave method, micro-emulsion method; Materials Characterization
Methods: Electron beam instruments: Transmission electron and scanning electron microscopes, Auger electron
spectroscope, x-ray spectrometers, Analysis of micrographs in TEM, SEM, and HRTEM, Interpretation of analytical data:
EDS, WDS, Auger, EELS, ESCA, SIMS. Bulk averaging techniques: Thermal analysis, DTA, DSC, TGA,
resistivity/conductivity. Optical spectroscopy: atomic absorption spectroscopy, infrared spectroscopy and Raman
spectroscopy; Scanning Tunneling and Atomic Force Microscopy.

Textbook(s)
1. Advanced Energy Materials, Ashutosh Tiwari & Sergiy Valyukh, J. Wiley & Sons, 2014.
2. Eco- and Renewable Energy Materials, Young Zho, Springer, 2013.
Reference(s)
Materials and Energy (Book Series), Leonard C Feldman (Ed. In Chief), World Scientific

23ECE361 Thin Electronic Films L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

(Pre-requisite: Nil)
Course Objectives

 To provide understanding of thin electronic film materials and its property

 To explain thin film applications
 To provide conceptual principles of design and processing of thin film materials for electronic applications

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: understand the structure and fabrication of thin film materials used in electronics applications
CO2: understand the physics and technology behind electronic thin films materials used in engineering applications
CO3: understand the dependence of the electronic properties and characteristics on various parameters
CO4: understand the principles behind designing, and engineering of thin film materials for electronic applications

CO – PO Mapping:
CO/PO PO PO2 PO PO PO PO PO PO8 PO PO PO PO PSO1 PSO
1 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 11 12 2
CO1 3 2 1 - - - - - - - - - 2 1
CO2 3 2 1 - - - - - - - - - 2 1
CO3 3 2 1 1 1 - - - - - - - 2 1
CO4 3 2 1 2 1 - - - - - - - 2 1

Syllabus

Unit I
Introduction - Bonding and crystal structure of electronic materials, thin film vs bulk material considerations, thin film
formation and structure – Physical Vapor Deposition, Chemical Vapor Deposition, Introduction to Artificial Intelligence for
Thin film Manufacturing; Epitaxy; Nucleation and Kinetics; Structure of thin films; Electrical conduction in thin metal films,
Skin Effect, Resistivity vs thickness, Interconnects in Microelectronics, Electromigration; Thin film diodes and transistors;
Role of Defects.

Unit II
Thin films for Dielectric and magnetic applications - Polarization Mechanisms in thin films, electric susceptivity and
polarizability, Clausius Mossotti Equation, high and low K materials, frequency dependence, dielectric loss and Breakdown,
Piezoelectric and Ferroelectric thin films; Magnetic properties of thin films, Hard and Soft magnetic materials, Anisotropic
and Giant Magnetoresistance, Spintronics and magnetic sensors, Magnetic Recording, Superconducting thin films.

Unit III
Thin films for Optical and electromagnetic applications - Light Propagation in materials, Total Internal Reflection,
Luminescence, Optical Anisotropy, LCDs, Optoelectronic devices – LEDs, LASERs, Solar Cells, Photodetectors,
waveguides, Optical fibers; responses of materials to electromagnetic waves, metamaterials, materials for electromagnetic
shielding, radars and antennas; smart materials, wide band gap materials.

Textbooks/References

1. Jianguo Zhu, Xiaohong Zhu, Hong Liu, Jie Xing, “Thin Film Physics And Devices: Fundamental Mechanism,
Materials And Applications For Thin Films”, World Scientific, 2021 (First Edition).
2. Jaydeep Sarkar, “Sputtering Materials for VLSI and Thin Film Devices”, Elsevier (William Andrew) Inc., First
Edition, 2014
3. S. O. Kasap, “Principles of Electronic Materials and Devices”, Fourth Edition, McGraw Hill Education, 2018
4. L. Solymar, D. Walsh and R. R. A. Syms, “Electrical Properties of Materials”, Ninth Edition, Oxford
University Press, 2014
5. Rolf. E Hummel, “Electronic Properties of Materials”, Fourth Edition, Springer, 2012

EMBEDDED SYSTEMS

23ECE431 Operating Systems L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

(Pre-requisite: Nil)

Course Objectives

 To provide understanding of the structure and implementation of modern operating systems, virtual machines and
their applications
 To provide understanding of techniques for achieving process synchronization and managing resources like
memory and CPU in an operation system
 To enable compare and contrasts the common algorithms used for both pre-emptive and non-pre-emptive
scheduling of tasks in operating systems

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: understand the architecture and functionalities of modern OS.

CO2: understand and apply the algorithms for scheduling.
CO3: understand and apply the algorithms for resource management
CO4: apply semaphores and monitors for classical and real-world synchronization scenarios

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO1 PSO2 PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3
CO
CO1 1 1 1 3
CO2 2 2 3 1 3
CO3 2 2 3 1 3
CO4 2 3 3 1 3

Syllabus

Unit I
Introduction to Operating Systems: Overview - Types of systems - Computer system operations - Hardware Protection -
Operating systems services - System calls - System structure - Virtual machines. Process Management: Process concepts -
Process scheduling - Operations on Process - Cooperating process – Inter-process communication - Multithreading models
- Threading issues - Thread types - CPU scheduling –scheduling algorithms.

Unit II
Process Synchronization: Critical section problem - synchronization hardware – Semaphores - Classical problems of
synchronization - Critical regions – Monitors – Deadlocks - Deadlock characterization - Methods of handling deadlocks -
Deadlock prevention – Avoidance - Detection and recovery.

Unit III
Storage Management: Memory management – Swapping - Contiguous memory allocation. Paging – Segmentation -
Segmentation with Paging - Virtual memory - Demand paging - Process creation – page replacement - Thrashing. File
Systems: Directory structure - Directory implementation - Disk scheduling. Case study: Threading concepts in Operating
systems, Kernel structures.
Textbook(s)
1. Silberschatz and Galvin, “Operating System Concepts”, Ninth Edition, John Wiley and Sons, 2012.
Reference(s)
1. Deitel. Deitel and Choffnes, “Operating System”, Third edition, Prentice Hall, 2003.
2. Tannenbaum A S, “Modern Operating Systems”, Third edition, Prentice Hall, 2007.
3. Stevens W R and Rago S A, “Advanced Programming in the Unix Environment”, Second Edition, Addison-
Wesley, 2008.
4. Gary Nutt, “Operating Systems”, Third Edition, Addison Wesley, 2009.

23ECE432 Real-Time Systems L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

(Pre-requisite: Operating Systems)

Course Objectives

 To provide foundations of real time systems

 To introduce concept of real time task-scheduling, and resource sharing and dependencies
 To enable real time communication using real time operating systems and develop real time systems

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: understand the foundations of real time systems

CO2: apply the concept of real time task-scheduling, and resource sharing
CO3: perform real time communication using real time operating systems
CO4: develop real time systems using real time operating systems

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO6 PO PO PO PO PO PO PS PS PS
O 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
CO
CO1 2 3
CO2 3 2 2 2 2 2 3
CO3 3 3 2 2 2 2 3
CO4 3 2 3 3 3 2 3

Syllabus
Unit I
Introduction: Real-time and real time system, applications, models of real-time systems (RTS), characteristics, safety and
reliability, types, timing constraints, examples of RTSs.; Global Times: time and order, time measurement, dense time vs
sparse time, internal clock synchronization, external clock synchronization; Real-time model: components and messages,
component state, gateway component, linking interface specification, component integration.

Unit II
Temporal relations: real-time entities, observations (untimed, indirect, state and event), real-time images and objects,
temporal accuracy, permanence and idempotency, determinism; Real-time task scheduling: types of real-time tasks, task
scheduling, concepts and classification, algorithms – clock driven scheduling, hybrid schedulers, event driven scheduling,
EDF scheduling, rate monotonic algorithm, multiprocessor task allocation, dynamic allocation of tasks. Resource sharing
and Dependencies: resource sharing, priority inversion, basic concepts of faults, errors, failures, anomaly detection, fault
tolerance, robustness.

Unit III
Real-time communication: requirements, design issues, communication model, flow control, event triggered
communication, rate constrained communication, time-triggered communication; Real-time operating systems: features,
inter-component communication, task management, time as data, inter-task interactions, Process I/O, error detection, Unix
as a RTOS, POSIX, Contemporary RTOSs like PSOS, RT Linux et, benchmarking real time systems.

Textbook(s)
Kopetz H. Real-time Systems: Design Principles for Distributed Embedded Applications. Springer Science &
Business Media; 2011 Apr 15.
Reference(s)
1. Rajib Mall. Real-Time Systems: Theory and Practice, Pearson, First Edition; 2006.
2. Laplante PA. Real-time Systems Design and Analysis: An Engineer's Handbook. Wiley-IEEE Press; 1996 Nov 1.
3. Real-Time Systems - Course (nptel.ac.in)
4. Real Time Systems (iitpkd.ac.in)

23ECE433 MIPS Architecture L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

(Pre-requisite: Digital Electronics)

Course Objectives

 To introduce to the MIPS architecture and its features

 To provide an understanding of the MIPS assembly language
 To enable design and implement basic MIPS programs using the assembly language

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: describe the MIPS architecture and its components

CO2: write basic MIPS assembly language programs
CO3: analyze and debug MIPS assembly language programs
CO4: design and implement simple embedded systems using the MIPS architecture

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PSO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PS PS PS
PO1 PO7
CO 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 10 11 12 O1 O2 O3
CO1 3 2 3
CO2 3 3 2 2 3
CO3 3 2 3 2 2 3
CO4 3 2 3 2 2 3

Syllabus

Unit I
Introduction-Introduction to Computer Architecture, MIPS Architecture Overview, MIPS Instruction Set, MIPS Assembly
Language Programming, Data Types and Addressing Modes

Unit II
MIPS Processor Design- MIPS Processor Architecture, MIPS Pipeline Design, MIPS Memory Hierarchy, Cache Memory
and Virtual Memory, MIPS I/O System

Unit III
Advanced Topics in MIPS Architecture- Multithreading and Multicore Processing, Exception and Interrupt, Handling,
MIPS Performance Analysis and Optimization, MIPS SIMD Architecture, MIPS Future and Emerging Trends.

Textbook(s)
1. Computer Organization and Design MIPS Edition: The Hardware/Software Interface (5th Edition) by David A.
Patterson and John L. Hennessy
2. Advanced Computer Architecture: Parallelism, Scalability, Programmability (2nd Edition) by Hesham El-Rewini
and Mostafa Abd-El-Barr

Reference(s)
1. MIPS Assembly Language Programming by Robert Britton
2. Computer Organization and Design: The Hardware/Software Interface, ARM Edition (1st Edition) by David A.
Patterson and John L. Hennessy
3. Computer Architecture, Fifth Edition: A Quantitative Approach by John L. Hennessy and David A. Patterson.
23ECE434 Parallel and Pipelined based Computer Architecture L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3
(Pre-requisite: Computer System and Architecture)

Course Objectives

 To learn different techniques to estimate, analyze, and enhance the performance of computing systems.
 To learn advanced hardware and software design principles of modern processors when going from single-core to
multi-core systems
 To apply multi-processor memory management techniques to enhance the processor performance
.
Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: interpret the performance of a processor based on different metrics

CO2: predict the challenges of realizing different kinds of and leverage them for performance advancement.
CO3: apply the concept of memory hierarchy for efficient memory design and virtual memory to overcome the memory
wall
CO4: explore emerging computing trends, computing platforms, and design trade-offs

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PSO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO PO PO PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
10 11 12
CO
CO1 3 2 3
CO2 3 3 2 2 3
CO3 3 2 3 2 2 3
CO4 3 2 3 2 2 3

Syllabus

Unit I
Design Space Exploration and Optimizations: Performance metrics and performance enhancement techniques, Basic
concepts of parallel processing and pipelining, Power dissipation in processors, power metrics, and low-power design
techniques. Instruction set architecture design: Instruction set design, implementation and performance perspectives, relative
advantages of RISC and CISC instruction set, Data Path Design

Unit II
Instruction-level parallelism (ILP): Pipeline data-path, data-dependence. Challenges in ILP realization. Pipeline hazards and
their solutions, out-of-order execution, branch prediction, and dynamic scheduling. VLIW and superscalar processors.

Unit III
Memory systems: Overview of memory hierarchy, Cache design considerations, instruction vs. data caches, write-policy
and replacement policy, analysis of cache performance, and cache design for performance enhancement. Brief overview of
memory technologies (SRAM, DRAM, and flash). Data Level Parallelism: Flynn Processor classification, SIMD, MIMD,
GPU architectures, IO: types, models, protocols, Sockets, ISR.

Textbook(s)
1. J.L.Hennessy, D.A.Patterson, Computer Architecture: a quantitative approach, Morgan Kaufmann, 5th edition,
2011, ISBN: 978-1558605961.
2. William Stallings, Computer Organization and Architecture, Prentice Hall, 10th edition, 2015, ISBN-10:
013293633X, ISBN-13: 978-0132936330
3. Kai Hwang, Advanced Computer Architecture: Parallelism, Scalability, Programmability, McGraw-Hill, 3rd Ed,
2015
Reference(s)

1. Andrew S. Tanenbaum, Structured Computer Organization, Prentice Hall, 6th edition, 2012, ISBN: 978-
0132916523.
2. Patterson, J.L. Hennessy, Computer Organization and Design: The Hardware/Software Interface, Morgan
Kaufmann, 5th edition, 2013, ISBN-13:9780124078864
 3. C. Hamacher, Z. Vranesic and S. Zaky, Computer Organization, McGraw-Hill, 5th edition,2002, ISBN:
0072320869.
4. Advanced Computer Architecture (iitpkd.ac.in)
5. NPTEL
6. advanced-computer-architecture.pdf (abit.edu.in)

23ECE435 Parallel Computing L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

(Pre-requisite: Operating Systems)

Course Objectives

 To introduce the fundamental concepts of shared and distributed memory, message passing, and
synchronous/asynchronous send/receive algorithms
 To get familiarize with the network topologies that are used for parallel communication and the evaluating their
performance using metrics, models and profiles
 To learn the designing of parallel codes, parallel I/O algorithms, bottlenecks, issues, and trends

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: understand significance of shared and distributed memory for parallel computing
CO2: understand parallel communication among the cores for carrying out the parallel computation
CO3: understand and analyze the parallel codes, and parallel I/O algorithms
CO4: develop efficient the parallel codes, and parallel I/O algorithms

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PSO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO
CO1 3 2 3
CO2 3 3 2 2 3
CO3 3 2 3 2 2 3
CO4 3 2 3 2 2 3

Syllabus
Unit I
Introduction: Parallel computing, Shared memory and distributed memory parallelism, Amdahl’s law, speedup and
efficiency, supercomputers. Message passing: MPI basics, point-to-point communication, collective communication,
synchronous/asynchronous send/receive, algorithms for gather, scatter, broadcast, reduce.

Unit II
Parallel communication: Network topologies, network evaluation metrics, communication cost, routing interconnection
networks, static and adaptive routing, process-to-processor mapping. Performance: Scalability, benchmarking, performance
modeling, impact of network topologies, parallel code analysis and profiling.

Unit III
Designing parallel codes: Domain decomposition, communication-to-computation ratio, load balancing, adaptivity, AI/ML
role in load balancing; case studies: weather and material simulation codes. Parallel I/O: MPI I/O algorithms, contemporary
large-scale I/O architecture, I/O bottlenecks Job scheduling, RDMA, one-sided communication, NVM, extreme scale
computing: issues and trends.

Textbook(s)
1. Peter S Pacheco, “An Introduction to Parallel Programming,” Morgan Kaufmann, 2011.
 2. DE Culler, A Gupta and JP Singh, Parallel Computer Architecture: A Hardware/Software Approach Morgan-
Kaufmann, 1998.
3. A Grama, A Gupta, G Karypis, and V Kumar, Introduction to Parallel Computing. 2nd Ed., Addison-Wesley,
2003.

Reference(s)
1. Marc Snir, Steve W. Otto, Steven Huss-Lederman, David W. Walker and Jack Dongarra, “MPI - The Complete
Reference, Second Edition,” Volume 1, The MPI Core.
2. William Gropp, Ewing Lusk, Anthony Skjellum, Using MPI: portable parallel programming with the message-
passing interface, 3rd Ed., Cambridge MIT Press, 2014.

23ECE436 Embedded Systems for Robotics L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

(Pre-requisite: Embedded Systems)
Course Objectives

 To provide an overview of robotic systems

 To understand the design parameters involved in the design of robots
 To analyze different robot designs

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: understand the concept of controllers in robotic systems

CO2: understand the different sensors and actuators required for robotic systems
CO3: analyse different types of robot designs
CO4: develop mobile robot application

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO2 PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 3
CO
CO1 3 2 3
CO2 3 2 2 3
CO3 3 2 2 2 3
CO4 3 2 2 3

Syllabus

Unit I
Robots and Embedded Systems-Robots and Controllers: Mobile Robots-Embedded Controllers-Interfaces-Operating
System, Robot operating system (ROS), Sensors, Actuators in Robots - Control - On-Off Control, PID Control, Velocity
Control and Position Control, Recent Trends in Robotics

Unit II
Mobile Robot Design: Driving Robots- Single Wheel Drive- Differential Drive- Tracked Robots- Synchro-Drive-
Ackermann Steering- Drive Kinematics, Omni-Directional Robots, Balancing Robots, Walking Robots
Unit III
Mobile Robots, Concepts of Localization, and path planning, Maze Exploration, Map Generation

Textbook(s)
Thomas Bräunl, “Embedded Robotics: Mobile Robot Design and Applications with Embedded Systems”, Third
Edition, Springer-Verlag Berlin Heidelberg, 2008.
Reference(s)
1. R.K.Mittal and I.J.Nagrath, “Robotics and Control”, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New
Delhi, 2003.
2. John J. Craig, “Introduction to Robotics: Mechanics and Control”, Fourth Edition, Pearson, 2018.
3. Anis Koubaa, “Robot Operating System (ROS) The Complete Reference”, First Volume, Springer, 2016.
4. K.S. Fu, R.C. Gonzalez and C.S.G. Lee, “Robotics: Control, Sensing, Vision, and Intelligence”, McGraw-Hill, New
York, 1987.

23ECE437 Multi-Core Architecture L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

(Pre-requisite: Computer System and Architecture)

Course Objectives

 To understand multi-core architectures and their design principles

 To introduce to the challenges and opportunities of multi-core architectures in embedded systems
 To equip with the necessary knowledge and skills on multi-core architectures

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: analyze and evaluate the performance of multi-core architectures

CO2: design and develop software for multi-core architectures using parallel programming paradigms and techniques
CO3: apply the knowledge of multi-core architectures to solve real-world problems in embedded systems
CO4: develop applications using multi-core architecture

CO-PO Mapping
PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO PSO
O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2 3
CO
CO1 3 2 3
CO2 3 3 2 3
CO3 3 2 2 3
CO4 3 2 2 3

Syllabus
Unit I
Introduction to Multi-Core Architectures - Introduction to parallel computing and multi-core architectures - Characteristics
and design principles of multi-core architectures - Challenges and opportunities of multi-core architectures in embedded
systems - Case studies of multi-core architectures in industry and research

Unit II
Programming Multi-Core Architectures - Parallel programming paradigms and models - Synchronization and
communication mechanisms for multi-core architectures - Performance analysis and optimization of parallel programs -
Tools and libraries for programming multi-core architectures.

Unit III
Applications of Multi-Core Architectures in Embedded Systems - Multi-core architectures for real-time and safety-critical
systems - Multi-core architectures for multimedia and signal processing applications - Multi-core architectures for Internet
of Things (IoT) and Cyber-Physical Systems (CPS) - Case studies of multi-core architectures in embedded systems.

Textbook(s)
1. "Multi-Core Embedded Systems" by Georgios Keramidas and Stamatis Vassiliadis
2. "Programming Multi-Core and Many-Core Computing Systems" by Sabri Pllana and Fatos Xhafa
3. "Multi-Core Technologies: Foundations and Applications" by Jan F. Broenink, Henk Corporaal, and Sander
Stuijk

Reference(s)
1. "Multi-Core Embedded Systems" edited by Georgios Keramidas and Stamatis Vassiliadis
2. "Parallel Computing: Principles and Practice" by Michael J. Quinn
3. "Parallel Programming in C with MPI and OpenMP" by Michael J. Quinn
4. "OpenMP: Portable Shared Memory Parallel Programming" by Barbara Chapman, Gabriele Jost, and Ruud van
der Pas

23ECE438 Embedded Automotive Systems L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

(Pre-requisite: Embedded System)

Course Objectives

 To provide an overview of an embedded automotive system

 To enable understanding of the architecture involved in the design of automotive technology
 To provide communication concepts and the software development phase in automotive embedded system

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: understand the automotive architecture

CO2: understand the protocol functioning in the automotive network
CO3: understand the communication involved in automotive system
CO4: understand the software development process in automotive industry

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO2 PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 3
CO
CO1 3 2 3
CO2 3 2 2 3
CO3 3 2 2 2 3
CO4 3 2 2 3

Syllabus

Unit I
Automotive Architectures: Vehicle Functional Domains and Their Requirements- Functional Domains-Standardized
Components, Models, and Processes- Certification Issue of Safety-Critical In-Vehicle Embedded Systems, Application of
the AUTOSAR Standard: Motivation- Mainstay of AUTOSAR: AUTOSAR Architecture - Main Areas of AUTOSAR
Standardization-Methodology and templates, Intelligent Vehicle Technologies: Introduction: Road Transport and Its
Evolution, New Technologies, Dependability Issues, Fully Autonomous Car: Dream or Reality?.

Unit II
Embedded Communications: A Review of Embedded Automotive Protocols: Automotive Communication Systems- In-
Car Embedded Networks- Middleware Layer- Open Issues for Automotive Communication Systems, FlexRay Protocol:
Introduction- FlexRay Communication- FlexRay Protocol- FlexRay Application, Dependable Automotive CAN Networks:
Introduction- Data Consistency Issues- CANcentrate and ReCANcentrate- CANELy- FTT-CAN: Flexible Time-Triggered
Communication on CAN- FlexCAN: A Deterministic, Flexible, and Dependable Architecture for Automotive Networks

Unit III
Embedded Software and Development Processes: Product Lines in Automotive Electronics: Introduction- Characteristics
of Automotive Product Lines- Basic Terminology- Global Coordination of Automotive Product-Line Variability- Artifact-
Level Variability, Reuse of Software in Automotive Electronics: A Challenge for Automotive OEMs- Requirements-
Supporting the Reuse of Application Software Components in Cars- spplication example
Textbook(s)
Nicolas Navet, Francoise Simonot-Lion, “Automotive Embedded Systems Handbook”, Industrial Information
Technology Series, CRC Press, Taylor and Francis Group,
Reference(s)
1. Ronald K Jurgen : “Automotive Electronics Hand Book”, 2nd Edition , McGraw- Hill, 1999
2. James D Halderman: “Automotive Electricity and Electronics”, PHI Publication
3. Allan Bonnick: “Automotive Computer Controlled Systems Diagnostic Tools And Technology”.Elsevier Science,
2001

23ECE439 Real Time Operating Systems L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

(Pre-requisite: Operating Systems)

Course Objectives

 To provide foundation on the fundamental concepts of real time operating systems (RTOS)
 To enable understanding of different aspects of task management
 To provide implementation knowledge and skills of real time applications using RTOS

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: understand the basic concepts in real time systems

CO2: understand the RTOS architecture and kernel service
CO3: analyze various real-time scheduling algorithms
CO4: design and develop real time applications using RTOS

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PSO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO PO PO PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
CO 10 11 12
CO1 3 2 2
CO2 3 2 2
CO3 3 3 2 2 2
CO4 3 3 3 2 2

Syllabus
Unit I
Overview of concepts of GPOS, GPOS functionalities, Evolution of operating systems. Introduction to real-time systems,
RTOS basic architecture, RTOS vs. GPOS. Architecture of OS (Monolithic, Microkernel, Layered, Exokernel and Hybrid
kernel structures). POSIX Standards. RTOS Kernel services.

Unit II
Task Management -tasks, process and threads, task attributes and types, preemption-context switching, task states and
transition, task control block. Introduction to real-time task scheduling, clock-driven and priority-driven scheduling,
uniprocessor scheduling algorithms- RM-response time analysis, DM, EDF-processor demand analysis, Least Laxity First
(LLF), and introduction to multiprocessor scheduling concepts. Blocking, deadlock, priority inversion and solutions.

Unit III
Task Communication and Synchronization - Semaphores and Mutex, Mailbox, Queue, Pipes. Timer Management, Interrupt
handling, Memory Management-Cache and virtual memory, Input-Output handling. Familiarization of Free RTOS –
architecture, porting, Real time applications using RTOS.

Textbook(s)
1. Jane W.S. Liu, “Real -Time Systems”, First Edition, Pearson Education, 2000.
2. Cheng, A. M. K., “Real-Time Systems: Scheduling, Analysis, and Verification”, First Edition, Wiley, 2002.
3. Richard Barry, “Mastering the FreeRTOS™ Real Time Kernel A Hands-On Tutorial Guide”, First Edition, Real
Time Engineers Ltd., 2016.

Reference(s)
1. Krishna, C. M., Shin, K. G., “Real-Time Systems”, First Edition, McGraw-Hill, 2017.

23ECE440 FPGA based Embedded Systems L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

(Pre-requisite: Embedded Systems)
Course Objectives

 To provide in depth understanding of FPGA architecture and its features

 To enable the knowledge for the design of sub-systems, usage of existing sub-systems on FPGA
 To enable the understanding of FPGA based embedded system design

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: understand the architecture and specifications of FPGA

CO2: understand synthesizable HDL modeling of digital subsystems
CO3: understand the design flow of embedded systems including design of the data path, control unit subsystems and
interpreting reports
CO4: develop block-based embedded system using FPGA resources and I/O interfaces

CO-PO Mapping

PO/
PSO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO
PSO1 PSO2 PSO3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CO
CO1 3 2 3
CO2 3 2 2 2 3
CO3 3 3 3 2 3
CO4 3 2 2 2 3

Syllabus
Unit I

Introduction to FPGAs – Design flow – Circuit Fabrics – LUTs and IO Blocks – FPGA Technology overview – Digital
Design for FPGAs - High Level System Architecture and Specification: Behavioural modelling and simulation - Hardware
description languages.

Unit II

FPGA based embedded design flow - Design of data path and controller subsystems – FIFOs - Memory controllers – DSP
blocks – FPGA Block RAMs - Case Study of RTL Design for FPGAs – Interpreting Synthesis and Implementation reports
of RTL Designs - Synthesis issues.

Unit III

FPGA processor fabrics and bus interfaces – ADC interface, DAC interface, I/O interfaces - Block-based design flow –
System Level synthesis from high level languages - Case study of design of FPGA based embedded systems.

Textbooks/References
 1. Michael D. Ciletti, “Advanced Digital Design with Verilog HDL”, Second Edition, Pearson Higher Education,
2011.
2. Stephen Brown and Zvonko Vranesic, “Fundamental of Digital Logic with VHDL Design”, Third Edition, McGraw
Hill, 2009.
3. Samir Palnitkar, “Verilog HDL, A Guide to Digital Design and Synthesis”, Second Edition, Pearson Education,
2003.
4. Wayne Wolf, “FPGA-Based System Design”, Prentice Hall India Pvt. Ltd., 2005.

Radio Frequency and Microwave Engineering

23ECE371 Smart Antennas and Adaptive Beamforming L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

(Pre-requisite: Electromagnetic Theory and Waves)

Course Objectives

 To provide fundamental concepts of antenna arrays and smart antennas

 To understand the benefits of smart antenna systems for adaptive beamforming
 To understand concepts of various angle of arrival estimation methods

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: study and design different types of antenna arrays

CO2: understand types of adaptive antenna systems
CO3: comprehend spatial diversity and radio receiver techniques for smart antennas
CO4: understand and analyse different beamforming algorithms

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO2 PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 3
CO
CO1 3 2 2 2
CO2 3 2 2 2
CO3 3 2 2 2 2
CO4 3 2 2 2 2 2

Syllabus
Unit I

Introduction to Smart Antennas: Antenna Fundamentals, Linear Antennas, Array Fundamentals, Linear Arrays, Two element
array, Uniform N-element linear array, Uniform N-element linear array, Circular Arrays, Beam steered circular arrays,
Rectangular Planar Arrays.

Unit II

Adaptive Antenna System, Adaptive Beam forming, Spatial Diversity, Diversity Combining, and Sectoring, Digital Radio
Receiver Techniques and Software Radios for Smart Antennas.

Unit III

Angle-of-Arrival Estimation: AOA Estimation Methods, Bartlett AOA estimate, Capon AOA estimate, Linear prediction
AOA estimate, Maximum entropy AOA estimate, MUSIC AOA estimate, Root-MUSIC AOA estimate, ESPRIT AOA
estimate; AI/ML role in AOA estimation. Fixed Weight Beam forming Basics, Maximum signal-to-interference ratio,
Maximum likelihood, Minimum variance, Adaptive Beam forming, Least mean squares, Recursive least squares, Constant
modulus, Least squares constant modulus, Conjugate gradient method.

Textbook(s)

1. Constantine A. Balanis & Panayiotis I. Ioannides, “Introduction to Smart Antennas”, Morgan & Claypool
Publishers’ series-2007.
References(s)

1. T. K. Sarkar, Michael C. Wicks, M. Salazar-Palma, Robert J. Bonneau, “Smart Antenna”, John Wiley & Sons,
2005.
2. T.S Rappaport, “Smart Antennas Adaptive Arrays Algorithms and Wireless Position Location”, IEEE press 1998,
PTR – PH publishers 1999.
3. Lal Chand Godara, “Smart Antennas”, CRC Press, LLC-20.

23ECE372 Computational Electromagnetics L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

(Pre-requisite: Electromagnetic Theory Waves)
Course Objectives

 To provide understanding of problems and challenges in electromagnetic computation

 To provide the skills required to understand numerical techniques for solving generalized practical
electromagnetic problems
 To provide understanding of simulation tools for analysis

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: understand the concept of computational electromagnetic techniques for modeling wireless communication devices
CO2: understand the concept of finite difference method and FDTD analysis techniques
CO3: comprehend finite element analysis and method of moment techniques
CO4: apply the computational methods for solving electromagnetics problems

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO1 PSO2 PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3
CO
CO1 3 3 2 2
CO2 3 3 2 2
CO3 3 3 3 2 2
CO4 3 3 2 2 2 2

Syllabus

Unit I

Classification of Electromagnetic Problems, Classification of methods of analysis, mathematical frame work, Overview of
Computational methods, Analytical methods and orthogonal functions.

Unit II

Finite Difference Approximations, Treatment of Interface and Boundary Conditions, Finite Difference Analysis of Guiding
Structures, Pulse Propagation in a Transmission Line, Finite Difference Time Domain (FDTD) Analysis in One-Dimension,
Applications of One-Dimensional FDTD Analysis, FDTD Analysis in Two-Dimensions, FDTD Analysis in Three
Dimensions, Implementation of Boundary Conditions in FDTD.

Unit III
Basic Steps in finite element analysis, finite element method (FEM) analysis in one dimension, FEM analysis in two
dimension. Eigenvalue Analysis using method of moments (MoM), Solution of Integral Equations using MoM, Fast
Multipole Solution Methods for MoM, Comparison of FDM, FDTD, FEM and MoM, selected problems in electromagnetics
using modern tools.

Textbook(s)

1. Peterson, A.F, Ray, S.L. and Mittra, R., "Computational Methods for Electromagnetics”, Wiley-IEEE Press.
2. Matthew N.O. Sadiku, “Numerical Techniques in Electromagnetics with MATLAB”, CRC Press, 2009.
3. Ramesh Garg, Analytical and Computational methods in Electromagnetics, Artech House, INC, 2008.
References(s)

1. Karl E. Lonngren, Sava V. Savov, Randy J. Jost, “Fundamentals of Electromagnetics with MATLAB”, SciTech
Publishing, Inc., 2007, Second Edition.
2. JaanKiusalaas, “Numerical Methods in Engineering with Python 3”, Cambridge University Press, 2013.

23ECE373 RADAR Systems L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

(Pre-requisite: Electromagnetic Theory and Waves)

Course Objectives

 To provide fundamental concepts of RADAR technology

 To understand different types of RADAR systems
 To understand concepts of RADAR receivers and sources of error in radar signal detection/estimation

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: understand system specifications of RADAR

CO2: understand architecture of different RADAR systems
CO3: understand the concepts of RADAR receivers
CO4: understand performance of RADAR systems under noise

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO2 PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 3
CO
CO1 3 2 2
CO2 3 2 2
CO3 1 2 2 2 2
CO4 1 2 2 2 2

Syllabus
Unit I

Introduction-Nature of Radar, Maximum Unambiguous Range, Radar Waveforms, Simple form of Radar Equation, Radar
Block Diagram and Operation, Radar Frequencies and Applications, Radar Equation: Prediction of Range Performance,
Minimum Detectable Signal, Receiver Noise and SNR, Integration of Radar Pulses, Radar Cross Section of Targets (simple
targets - sphere, cone-sphere), Transmitter Power, PRF and Range Ambiguities.

Unit II

CW and Frequency Modulated Radar : Doppler Effect, CW Radar – Block Diagram, Isolation between Transmitter and
Receiver, Non-zero IF Receiver, Receiver Bandwidth Requirements, Applications of CW radar. FM-CW Radar, Range and
Doppler Measurement, Block Diagram and Characteristics (Approaching/ Receding Targets), FM-CW altimeter,
Measurement Errors, Multiple Frequency CW Radar.

Unit III

MTI and Pulse Doppler Radar: Introduction, Principle, MTI Radar with - Power Amplifier Transmitter and Power Oscillator
Transmitter, Delay Line Cancellers – Filter Characteristics, Blind Speeds, Double Cancellation, Staggered PRFs. Range
Gated Doppler Filters. MTI Radar Parameters, Limitations to MTI Performance - Non-coherent MTI, MTI vs Pulse Doppler
Radar; Radar Receivers : Matched Filter Receiver – Response Characteristics and Derivation, Correlation Function and
Cross-correlation Receiver, Efficiency of Non-matched Filters, Matched Filter with Non-white Noise. Noise Figure and
Noise Temperature. Displays – types. Duplexers – Branch type and Balanced type, Circulators as Duplexers. Introduction
to Phased Array Antennas – Basic Concepts, Radiation Pattern, Beam Steering and Beam Width changes, Series versus
Parallel Feeds, Applications, Advantages and Limitations.

Textbook(s)

1. Introduction to Radar Systems – Merrill I. Skolnik, 3rd edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2001.

Reference(s)

1. David K. Barton, Modern Radar System Analysis, Artech House, Inc., NY 1988.
2. Brookner E, Aspects of Modern Radar, Artech House, Inc., NY 1988.

23ECE472 Remote Sensing Systems L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

(Pre-requisite: Nil)
Course Objectives

 To congregate the basic concepts and fundamentals of physical principles of remote sensing
 To understand the working principle of remote sensing systems
 To understand the various applications of remote sensing systems

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: understand fundamental principles of remote sensing

CO2: understand interaction of electromagnetic radiation with homogeneous and multi-layered medium
CO3: understand the working principles of different remote sensing systems
CO4: understand the remote sensing data processing

CO-PO Mapping
PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO2 PSO
O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 3
CO
CO1 3 2 2
CO2 3 2 2 2 2
CO3 3 2 2 2
CO4 3 2 2 2 2

Syllabus
Unit I
Electromagnetics basis: Electromagnetic waves, Polarization, Spectra and Fourier transform, Doppler effect, Angular
distribution of radiation, Thermal radiation, diffraction, Interactions of electromagnetic radiation: Propagation through
homogeneous materials, Reflection and emission from real materials, Propagation through the atmosphere Molecular
absorption and scattering, Radiative transfer equation

Unit II

Remote sensing system: Spectral Imagery, VIR imaging systems, Thermal infrared imagers, Passive Microwave Systems:
Microwave Radiometry, Ranging Systems: Laser profiling, Radar altimetry

Unit III

Scattering Systems: LiDAR, Microwave Scatterometry, Synthetic Aperture Radar, Data Processing: Image Processing,
Classification and Segmentation, Applications of Remote Sensing Systems; AI/ML role in radar image processing.

Textbook(s)

1. W. G. Rees, “Physical Principles of Remote Sensing”, Cambridge University Press; 3rd edition, 2013.

References(s)

1. R. C. Olsen, “Remote Sensing from Air and Space”, SPIE Press, 2007.

2. James B. Campbell, Randolph H. Wynne, “Introduction to Remote Sensing”, 5th Edition, Guilford Press, 2011.

Course Objectives

23ECE374 Biomedical Applications of Radio Frequency Waves L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

(Pre-requisite: Electromagnetic Theory and Waves)

 To understand the electrical properties of biological tissues

 To understand electromagnetic interaction with biological materials
 To understand the principles of RF systems for various biomedical applications

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: understand the dielectric properties of biological tissues

CO2: comprehend how biological materials interact with electromagnetic fields
CO3: understand the thermal effects on biological tissues due to electromagnetic waves
CO4: understand RF system concepts for biomedical applications

CO-PO Mapping
PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO PSO
O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2 3
CO
CO1 3 2 2 2
CO2 3 2 2 2 2
CO3 3 2 2 2 2
CO4 3 2 2 2

Syllabus
Unit I

Introduction: Fundamentals of electromagnetics- Electromagnetics, RF/Microwave energy, Penetration in Biological tissues

and skin effect, Dielectric measurements and exposure; Environmental electromagnetic field and Bio-systems

Unit II

Electromagnetic Interaction Mechanism in Biological Materials: Bioelectricity, Tissue characterization, Thermodynamics

and energy, Biological Effects: Absorption – Fundamentals, Dosimetry and SAR, Thermal considerations.

Unit III

RF Systems for Therapeutic applications: transmission lines and waveguides for medical applications; antennas;
RF/Microwave ablation, Perfusion chamber, Endometrial ablation, E. M. based method for measuring blood perfusion in
hear muscle, Lumen measurements of arteries using RF equipments, RF tissue Welding, Principles of computerized
Tomography (CT) scan equipment.

Textbook(s)

1. V. Vorst, A Rosen and Y Kotsuka, “RF/Microwave Interaction with Biological Tissues”, John Wiley & Sons

Reference(s)

1. J Malmivuo and R Plonsey, “Bioelectromagnetism - Principles and Applications of Bioelectric and Biomagnetic Fields”,
New York, Oxford University Press
2. M. Gandolfo, “Biological Effects and Dosimetry of Nonionizing Radiation: Radio Frequency and Microwave Energies”,
Springer.

Course Objectives

23ECE375 RFID Systems L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

(Pre-requisite: Nil)
 To understand fundamental concepts of RFID technology
 To understand various network protocols and standards of RFID systems
 To understand the application of RFID solutions to various logistic and monitoring applications and to evaluate
the system advantages and cost structure

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: understand physical principles of RFID components

CO2: understand protocol standards used in RFID systems
CO2: understand system design and evaluation from component and network specifications
CO4: understand broad potential applications of RFID systems

CO-PO Mapping
PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO2 PSO
O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 3
CO
CO1 3 2 2
CO2 3 2 2 2
CO3 3 2 2 2
CO4 3 2 2

Syllabus
Unit I

Introduction to RFID – Comparison with other identification systems – Operating and physical principles. Types of tags –
Passive, active, semi-passive, security issues, memory capacity – Radio regulatory issues and frequency ranges.

Unit II
Communication principles, coding, modulation and demodulation – Data integrity multiple access procedures -Anti-
collision procedures – Security issues and solutions. Hardware architecture of Tags and readers – Transponder design –
memory- Sensors. Reader RF interface-control unit – Middleware – Near field communications. Comparison of successful
RFID standards.

Unit III

Case studies – Smart cards – Public transport – Payment systems – NFC Applications – Electronic passport – Ski Tickets –
Access control – Online and offline Systems – Intelligent infrastructure – Healthcare management – Supply chain and
transport systems – Container transport animal identification – Stock keeping – Product lifecycle monitoring – Industrial
and medical applications.

Textbook(s)

1. M. Bolic, D. Simplot and I. Stojmenvoic, “RFID Systems: Research Trends and Challenges”, 2010.
2. Klaus Finkenzeller, “RFID Handbook – Fundamentals and applications in contact less smart cards, radio frequency
identification and near-field communication”, 3rd edition, Wiley 2010.
Reference(s)

1. Curty, Declercq, Dehollain and Joehl, “Design and Optimization of passive UHF RFID Systems”, Springer, 2007.
2. V.D. Daniel, A. Puglia and M. Puglia, “RFID: A Guide to Radio Frequency Identification”, Wiley, 2007.
Course Objectives

23ECE376 Software Defined Radio Architecture L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

(Pre-requisite: Digital Communication)
 To provide advanced level of theoretical knowledge on baseband processing
 To enable analysis, configuration and programming for software defined radio
 To introduce integration of programmable hardware baseband processing with RF modules

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: understand baseband processing techniques including multi-rate systems

CO2: understand Multi-standard radio systems
CO3: understand the integration of baseband techniques with radio systems
CO4: analyze the performance of baseband techniques for SDR

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO2 PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 3
CO
CO1 3 2 3 3
CO2 3 2 3 3
CO3 3 3 2 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3
Syllabus

Unit I
Introduction to wireless communication systems – Baseband signal processing – overview of wireless digital communication
– Digital modulation and demodulations techniques: transmitter for complex PAM – symbol mapping – pulse shaping –
wireless channel: source and channel coding schemes – channel impairments techniques: time and frequency offset
corrections - Signal processing with passband signals – Multi-rate signal processing – down sampling – up sampling –
polyphase structure – changing the sampling rate – Digital generation of signals – Analog to Digital (ADC) and Digital to
Analog (DAC) conversion architectures.

Unit II
Software Communication Architecture: Operating environments - operating scenarios - general requirements and services –
Devices and device manager - Hardware Architecture: General Purpose Processor (GPP) based SDR – FPGA based SDR –
Multi-channel SDR – Software Centric SDR platform – RF front end architecture – Development tools – Digital hardware
choices – Case studies: SPEAKeasy – Joint Tactical Radio Systems (JTRS) – Spectrumware.

Unit III
 Applications of SDR: Cognitive Radio: architecture – Dynamic spectrum access – OpenBTS – OpenLTE – WiFi Transceiver
– Zigbee Transceiver – Military communication – deep space communication – Video streaming applications – satellite
signal reception – HAM radio communication – MIMO-OFDM communication system.

Textbook(s)

1. Bard, John, and Vincent J. Kovarik Jr. Software defined radio: the software communications architecture. John
Wiley & Sons, 2007.
2. Reed, Jeffrey Hugh. Software radio: a modern approach to radio engineering. Prentice Hall Professional, 2002.
References(s)
[1] www.gnuradio.org
[2] https://in.mathworks.com/discovery/sdr.html
[3] https://www.ni.com/

Signal Processing

23ECE441 Agent based Modeling L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

(Pre-requisite: Nil)

Course Objectives

• To introduce the concept of artificial agents

• To provide an understanding of the features and design considerations for developing a multi-agent system
• To provide an overview of the applicability of data mining techniques for design of intelligent agents

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: apply the concepts of data mining for designing a simple agent based model
CO2: analyze and formulate an agent-based solution
CO3: design a simple multi-agent system model to solve complex engineering problems
CO4: implement artificial agents using agent based modeling software

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO2 PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 3
CO
CO1 3 3 2
CO2 3 2 3 3 3
CO3 2 3 2 3 3 3
CO4 2 2 2 2 3 3 3
Syllabus

Unit-I

Introduction to Agents – Features - Classification of agents. Multi Agent Systems (MAS) and properties – Agent
communication ontology - Agent communication languages. Internal structure of MAS: Shell – Reasoning engine-MAS
development methodology - Agent behavior - Agent action - Knowledge diffusion in MAS – Application level -behavior
level and evolutionary agent communities.

Unit II
Data mining techniques for intelligent Agents - Association rule mining – A priori, DHP, DIC, κ-Profile- Clustering – K-
means, PAM, EM, Classification- ID 3, C4.5, CLS, σ-FLNMap Evolutionary algorithms-Genetic Algorithm, Particle Swarm
optimisation-Ant Colony Optimization.

Unit III
Applying data mining to agents - Study of available agent-based modeling software NetLogo-Implementation of agent-
based models using NetLogo- Case studies - Application level - behavior level and evolutionary agent communities.

Textbook(s)
1. A. L. Symeonidis, P. A. Mitkas, “Agent Intelligence through Data Mining”, Springer, 2005.
2. Uri Wilensky, William Rand, “An Introduction to Agent-Based Modeling”, MIT Press, 2015.
Reference(s)
1. M. Mohammadian, “Intelligent Agents for Data Mining and Information Retrieval,” Idea Group Publishing, 2003
2. D. L. Poole, A. K. Mackworth, “Artificial Intelligence: Foundations of Computational Agents,” Cambridge
University Press, 2010.

23ECE442 Computer Vision L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

(Pre-requisite: Image Processing)

Course Objectives

 To introduce the fundamental concepts and techniques in basic image formation models.
 To familiarize with various feature extraction models.
 To familiarize with concepts of camera geometry models.

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: Understand the basics concepts of image formation models.

CO2: Understand the various feature extraction models.
CO3: Understand and apply the calibration and geometry models.
CO4: Use simulation tools to develop applications using computer vision techniques.

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO2 PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 3
CO
CO1 3 2 3 2
CO2 3 3 3 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 3

Syllabus

Unit I

Image Formation: Geometric image formation, Photometric image formation - Camera Models and Calibration: Camera
Projection Models – Orthographic, Affine, Perspective, Projective models. Projective Geometry, Transformation of 2D and
3D, Internal Parameters, Feature Detection and Matching – points and patches, edges, lines, Feature-Based Alignment - 2D,
3D feature based alignment, pose estimation, Image Stitching, Dense motion estimation – Optical flow - layered motion,
parametric motion, Structure from Motion.

Unit II

Local Feature Detectors and Descriptors: Hessian corner detector, Harris Corner Detector, LOG detector, DOG detector,
SIFT, PCA-SIFT, GLOH, SURF, HOG, Pyramidal HOG, PHOW-Calibration Methods: Linear, Direct, Indirect and
Multiplane methods - Pose Estimation.

Unit III

Stereo and Multi-view Geometry: Epipolar Geometry, Rectification and Issues related to Stereo, General Stereo with E
Matrix Estimation, Stratification for 2 Cameras, Extensions to Multiple Cameras, Self-Calibration with Multiple Cameras,
3D reconstruction of cameras and structures, Three View Geometry.

Textbook(s)
1. Forsyth and Ponce, “Computer Vision – A Modern Approach”, Second Edition, Prentice Hall, 2011.
2. Richard Szeliski, “Computer Vision: Algorithms and Applications”, Springer, 2011.
Reference(s)
1. Olivier Faugeras, “Three Dimensional Computer Vision”, MIT Press, 1993.
2. Emanuele Trucco and Alessandro Verri, “Introductory Techniques for 3-D Computer Vision”, Prentice Hall, 1998.
23ECE443 Biomedical Signal Processing L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3
(Pre-requisite: Signal Processing II)

Course Objectives

• To introduce the origin and characteristics of biomedical signals

• To provide an understanding of the application of signal processing concepts in analyzing biomedical signals
• To enable implementation of algorithms for various biomedical signal-processing tasks

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: understand techniques for various levels of tasks in biomedical signal analysis
CO2: adopt appropriate algorithms according to the nature of the signal and acquisition characteristics
CO3: develop contemporary algorithms to address complex problems
CO4: implement biomedical signal processing algorithms using appropriate tools

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO2 PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 3
CO
CO1 3 2 2 3 3 3 3
CO2 2 3 2 2 3 3 3 3
CO3 2 - 3 3 3 3 3 3
CO4 2 3 3 3 3
Syllabus

Unit I
Introduction to Biomedical Signals- Action Potential and Its Generation- Origin and Waveform Characteristics of Basic
Biomedical Signals - Electrocardiogram (ECG), Electroencephalogram (EEG), Electromyogram (EMG), Phonocardiogram
(PCG), Electroneurogram (ENG), Event-Related Potentials (ERPS), Electrogastrogram (EGG)- Objectives of Biomedical
Signal Analysis, Difficulties in Biomedical Signal Analysis, Computer-Aided Diagnosis

Unit II
Cardiological and Neurological signal Analysis-Data Acquisition- ECG signals -Basic electrocardiography, ECG lead
systems, ECG signal characteristics- Filtering for Removal of Artifacts in ECG – Algorithms for QRS Detection –
Morphological Analysis of ECG, Arrhythmia analysis-Heart sounds and Murmurs- Data acquisition -EEG Rhythms - Waves
and Transients – Correlation Analysis of EEG Channels.

Unit III
Data Compression Techniques: Turning point algorithm, AZTEC algorithm, Fan algorithm, Huffman coding, data reduction
algorithms; The Fourier transform, Correlation, Convolution, Power spectrum estimation, Frequency domain analysis of the
ECG – Applications. – Adaptive noise canceller – cancellation of 50 Hz signal in ECG – Cancellation of maternal ECG in
foetal electrocardiography– Muscle artifact (noise) Cancellation from EEG signals.

Textbook(s)
1. Rangaraj M Rangayyan “Biomedical Signal Analysis – A case study approach” IEEE press series in biomedical
engineering, First Edition, 2002.
2. Willis J Tompkins, “Biomedical Digital Signal Processing”, Prentice Hall India Private Limited, First Edition,
2006.
Reference(s)
1. Reddy, D.C, ”Biomedical signal processing: principles and techniques”. McGraw-Hill, 2005
2. Begg R, Palaniswami M and Lai D T H, “Computational Intelligence in Biomedical Engineering”, CRC Press,
2007.
23ECE444 Natural Language Processing L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3
(Pre-requisite: Nil)

Course Objectives

• To introduce the leading trends and systems in Natural Language Processing.

• To enable understanding of the basic representations used in syntax, the semantics of NLP
• To familiarize with the models used for word/sentence representations for various NLP applications.
 Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: Generate word representation to solve NLP problems

CO2: Implement machine learning models for NLP
CO3: Implement sequence-to-sequence models for NLP
CO4: Assess NLP models using various evaluation metrics

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO2 PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 3
CO
CO1 3 2 2 3 2 3 3
CO2 3 2 2 3 3 3 3
CO3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3
CO4 3 3 2 2 3 3 3 3

Syllabus

Unit I
Computational linguistics- Introduction, syntax, semantics, morphology, collocation and other NLP problems. Word
representation: One-hot encoding, Bag-of-Words (BoW) Dictionary: Term Frequency – Inverse Document Frequency (TF-
IDF), Embedding: Word2vec, Glove and Fasttext

Unit II
Language Model-n-gram, Sequences and sequential data: Part-of-Speech tagging-HMM and CRF, Named Entity
Recognition, Dependency parsing. Evaluation metrics for NLP models- Precision, Recall, F score, ROUGE, BLEU scores
and Visualization

Unit III
Machine learning and deep learning for NLP, Sequence to sequence modelling (Encoder decoder), Attention mechanism,
Transformer Networks – BERT, A brief introduction to Reinforcement learning for NLP. NLP application introduction-
Sentiment Analysis, Machine translation, Question Answering, Text summarization.

Textbook(s)
1. Christopher Manning and Hinrich Schütze, ‘Foundations of Statistical Natural Language Processing’, MIT
press, 1999
2. Daniel Jurafsky, James H Martin, ‘Speech and language processing’ ,Prentice Hall, 2008
Reference(s)

1. Steven Bird, Ewan Klein and Edward Loper, ‘Natural Language Processing with Python’, O'Reilly Media,
Inc.", 2009.
2. Douglas O'Shaughnessy, ‘Speech Communication’, University Press, 2001

23ECE445 AI in Speech Signal Processing L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

(Pre-requisite: Signal Processing II)

Course Objectives

• To provide understanding of acoustic theory behind human speech production and perception systems.
• To enable the analysis and estimation of the acoustic features from a speech signal.
• To enable the understanding of the AI-based algorithms used for speech modelling

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: explain the acoustics of speech production and perception

CO2: differentiate the characteristics of different speech sounds
CO3: analyse the time-domain and frequency-domain features of the speech signal
CO4: realize various algorithms on AI-based speech modelling

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO2 PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 3
CO
CO1 3 2 2 3 3 2
CO2 3 2 2 3 3 2
CO3 3 3 2 3 2 3 2
CO4 3 3 2 2 3 3 3 2

Syllabus

Unit I
Overview of Speech Processing Systems, Speech Production, Speech Perception, Speech Signal Characteristics-
Stationarity, Non-stationarity, Properties of speech sounds – Elements of language -Phonemes – Vowels – Consonants-
Fricatives- Stops.

Unit II
Short-time processing of speech - Windows – Rectangular, Hamming, Hanning-Time Domain parameters: Pitch, Short-time
energy of speech, Zero crossing rate, Autocorrelation - Frequency domain parameters: Feature extraction for speech
processing: Short term Fourier transform –Mel frequency cepstral coefficients (MFCC), Linear Prediction Analysis

Unit III
Basic applications in speech modelling - Speech Recognition- Basic speech models- Hidden Markov models (HMM) for
acoustic modelling, Observation probability and model parameters - HMM as probabilistic automata - Viterbi algorithm,
Deep neural network models: RNN, LSTM, DBN used for speech modelling, Speech synthesis: Linguistic processing -
Acoustic processing - Text preprocessing - Grapheme to phoneme conversion – Rule based and decision tree approaches -
Syntactic prosodic analysis - Prosodic analysis - Speech signal modelling -Speaker recognition introduction - popular
approaches-Applications for speech based AI.

Textbook(s)
1. Thomas F Quatieri, ‘Discrete Time Speech Signal Processing’, Pearson Education Inc., 2004
2. L. Rabiner, R. W. Schafer, ‘Theory and applications of digital speech processing’, Pearson Education India,2010
Reference(s)
1. L. Rabiner, Biing-Hwang Juang and B. Yegnanarayana, ‘Fundamentals of Speech Recognition’, Pearson Education
Inc, 2008.
2. Douglas O'Shaughnessy, ‘Speech Communication’, University Press, 2001

23ECE446 Image Processing L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

(Pre-requisite: Signal Processing II)

Course Objectives

 To enable analysis of images in time and frequency domain

 To enable implementation of various operations on images
 To familiarize with various applications of image processing

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: understand the basic mathematical concepts used in image processing.

CO2: analyze different techniques adapted for image enhancement in spatial and frequency domain.
CO3: understand different morphological operations on images.
CO4: implement various image processing techniques.

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO2 PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 3
 CO
CO1 3 2 2 2 3 2
CO2 3 3 2 3 3 3
CO3 3 3 2 3 3 3
CO4 3 3 2 3 3 3

Syllabus

Unit I
Image processing- Introduction- Different types of images- Visual perception, Image sensing and Acquisition,
Quantization, Sampling, Revision of Mathematical concepts for image processing, Image negatives, Log transformations,
Histogram processing, Spatial filter: smoothing and Sharpening, Discrete Fourier transform, properties of 2-D DFT, Image
smoothing and Sharpening in Fourier domain, Image restoration- Inverse filter, Weiner filter, Constrained Least squares
filter.

Unit II
Morphological Image Analysis: Erosion, Dilation, Opening, Closing, Hit or Miss transformation, Application of
Morphological operations- Boundary detection, Region filling, Connected components, Convex hull, Shape thinning and
thickening, Skeletonization, Edge Detection: Gradient and Laplacian based edge detection, Diffusion based edge detection:
Isotropic and anisotropic diffusion.

Unit III
Image segmentation: Thresholding, region-based Morphological Watersheds, Bayesian-based image segmentation, Image
Compression: Spatial and Temporal redundancy, Basic image compression models, compression standards, basic
compression methods: Huffman coding, Run-length coding, Block transform coding, Predictive coding.

Textbook(s)
1. Rafael C Gonzalez and Richard E Woods, “Digital Image Processing”, Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2009.
2. Anil K Jain, “Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing”, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2010.

Reference(s)
1. William K Pratt, “Digital Image Processing”, Wiley, 2010.
2. John W. Woods, “Multidimensional Signal, Image, and Video Processing and Coding”, Academic Publisher,
2012.

23ECE447 Multirate Signal Processing and Wavelets L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

(Pre-requisite: Signal Processing II)

Course Objectives

 To provide conceptual background in multi-rate filter banks, wavelets and multiresolution signal analysis
 To enable understanding of the principles behind device or algorithm based on structures
 To enable practical application of multi-rate signal processing and wavelets

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: understand Time-frequency decomposition of signals

CO2: understand Multi-rate filtering and filter banks
CO3: understand Multi-resolution analysis and its connection to filter banks
CO4: demonstrate the applications of multi-rate signal processing and wavelets

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO2 PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 3
CO
CO1 3 2 3 3 3 2
CO2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
CO4 3 3 3 3 3 3

Syllabus
Unit-I
Fundamentals of multi-rate digital signal processing, Up sampling, down sampling, interpolation, decimation, Polyphase
decomposition, Multi-stage Interpolation and Decimation systems, Two-channel quadrature-mirror filter bank, Perfect
reconstruction of two-channel FIR filter banks.

Unit-II
Introduction to wavelets, Vector Space-Functions and function spaces, Continuous-time Fourier Transforms, Short time
Fourier transforms, the uncertainty principle and time-frequency tiling, Discrete wavelet transforms, Scaling and Wavelet
Functions, Filter Banks- Legendre Polynomials – Recurrence Formula – Laplace’s Integral Formula – Design of Orthogonal
Wavelet Systems.

Unit III
Bi-orthogonal Wavelet – Introduction to Lifting Scheme – Dealing with Signal Boundaries – Multi Wavelet – Frequency
Domain Approach-Applications of Wavelets- Data Compression, De-noising, Edge Detection, Object Isolation, Audio
Coding, Communication Applications, Channel Coding, Speckle Removal, Image Fusion, Filter Design, Image
Compression, AI based compression technique.

Textbook(s)
1. P.P Vaidyanathan “Multi-rate systems and filter banks”, Prentice Hall India, 1993
2. Soman K. P. and Ramachandran K. I., “Insight into Wavelets from Theory to Practice”, Prentice Hall, third edition,
2010.
Reference(s)
1. J.G Proakis and D G Manolakis. “Digital signal processing: principles algorithms and applications”, Pearson, 2014.
2. Stephane Mallat “A Wavelet Tour of Signal Processing: The Sparse Way”, Academic Press Elsevier 2009.

23ECE448 Statistical Signal Processing L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

(Pre-requisite: Signal Processing II)

Course Objectives

 To enable the understanding of discrete-time random process and fundamentals of signal models
 To provide the concepts of optimum filters
 To introduce various spectrum estimation methods

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: understand discrete-time random processes and various signal models

CO2: analyze and develop algorithms for linear filtering and adaptive filtering
CO3: understand spectral estimators and design solution for estimation problems
CO4: formulate and apply frequency estimation algorithms

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO2 PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 3
CO
CO1 3 1 3 3 3 3
CO2 3 3 1 3 3 2
CO3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3
CO4 2 3 3 2 3 3 3
Syllabus

Unit I
Random processes- Gaussian Processes-Stationary processes- Autocovariance and Autocorrelation matrices, - Ergodicity -
White noise - Power spectrum, Autoregressive moving average processes- Signal Modeling - The Least Squares method -
Autocorrelation method - Covariance method - Autoregressive moving average models.

Unit II
Optimum Signal Estimation-Linear Mean Square Error Estimation-Optimum FIR and IIR filters- Linear Prediction-
Fundamentals of Order Recursive Algorithms- Order-Recursive Algorithms for Optimum FIR Filters- Levinson-Durbin
Recursion- Lattice filters - Wiener filtering-Least Squares FIR Filter
Unit III
Spectrum Estimation: Nonparametric methods – Periodogram - Barlett’s method - Welch’s method, Blackman and Tukey
method of smoothing periodogram. Parametric methods-Autoregressive spectrum estimation - Moving average spectrum
estimation - Frequency estimation - Eigen decomposition of Autocorrelation matrix - Detection of Harmonic signals -
Pisarenko’s method - MUSIC algorithm.

Textbook(s)
1. D.G Manolakis, Vinay K Ingle, Stephen M Kogon, “Statistical and Adaptive Signal Processing: Spectral
Estimation, Signal Modeling, Adaptive Filtering, and Array Processing”, Artech House , 2005
2. Steven Kay, Fundamentals of Statistical Signal Processing, Vol I: Estimation Theory, Vol II: Detection Theory,
Prentice Hall, 1993/1998.

Reference(s)
1. Boaz Porat, “Digital Processing of Random Signals: Theory and Methods”, Dover Books on Electrical Engineering,
First Ed. 2008
2. Monson H. Hayes, Statistical Digital Signal Processing and Modelling, John Wiley, 1996.

23ECE449 Adaptive Signal Processing L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

(Pre-requisite: Signal Processing II)

Course Objectives

 To introduce the adaptive filter for estimation and tracking

 To enable development of various adaptive algorithms for communication systems
 To enable practical application of adaptive signal processing theory

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: understand spectral estimators and design solution for estimation problems.
CO2: design filter to meet performance requirements derived from various real life applications
CO3: develop algorithms for the design of filters to track variations of non-stationary random process
CO4: demonstrate the applications of adaptive filters.

CO-PO Mapping
PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO2 PSO
O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 3
CO
CO1 3 2 2 2 3 2
CO2 2 2 3 3 3 3
CO3 2 3 3 3 3 3
CO4 3 2 3 3 3 3

Syllabus

Unit I
Discrete time stochastic processes - Power spectral density – properties- Autocorrelation and covariance structures of
discrete time random processes- Eigen-analysis of autocorrelation matrices-Spectrum Estimation - Non-parametric methods
- Estimators and its performance analysis - periodogram estimators - signal modeling - parameter estimation using Yule-
Walker Method.

Unit II
Newton’s method - Steepest descent method –Convergence analysis -– Least Mean Square (LMS) filter– Convergence –
Excess mean square error -Leaky LMS - Normalized LMS –Recursive least squares (RLS) algorithm for adaptive filtering
of stationary process- Matrix inversion – Comparison with LMS – RLS for quasi-stationary signals- Exponentially weighted
RLS- Sliding window RLS – RLS algorithm for array processing

Unit III
Kalman Filtering - Statistical filtering for non-stationary signals - Principles – Initialization and tracking – Scalar and vector
Kalman filter – Extended Kalman filter algorithm- Unscented Kalman filter algorithm-Applications in signal processing –
Adaptive equalization-Adaptive Noise Cancellation- Time varying channel estimation – Radar tracking.

Textbook(s)

1. Simon O. Haykin, “Adaptive Filter Theory”, 5 th Edition, Pearson Education Limited, 2014.
2. Dimitris G. Manolakis, Vinay K. Ingle, Stephen M. Kogon, “Statistical and Adaptive Signal Processing: Spectral
Estimation, Signal Modeling, Adaptive Filtering, and Array Processing”, McGraw-Hill, 2005.
Reference(s)
1. Monson H.Hayes, “Statistical Digital Signal Processing and Modeling”, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., Singapore,
2002.
2. Sopocles J. Orfanidis, “Optimum Signal Processing”, McGraw Hill, 2007.

Common Electives

23ECE456 Sensor Networks L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

(Pre-requisite: Computer Networks)

Course Objectives

 To provide students with a comprehensive understanding of the fundamental concepts, architectures, and
protocols used in sensor networks.
 To enable students to design and implement sensor networks for various applications
 To introduce students to the latest developments and emerging trends in the field of sensor networks

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: analyze and evaluate the performance of sensor networks based on various metrics
CO2: design and implement sensor networks using various hardware and software platforms
CO3: identify and solve the challenges and issues related to sensor network design
CO4: apply the knowledge and skills in sensor networks to real-world problems and applications

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO9 PO PO PO PSO PSO PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 11 12 1 2 3
CO
CO1 1 1 1 3
CO2 2 2 3 1 3
CO3 2 2 3 1 3
CO4 2 3 3 1 3

Syllabus

Unit I
Introduction to Sensor Networks- Introduction to sensor networks: definitions, applications, and characteristics; Sensor
network architecture and components: sensors, microcontrollers, communication modules, and power sources;
Communication protocols and standards for sensor networks: IEEE 802.15.4, ZigBee, and LoRaWAN; Energy-efficient
design principles for sensor networks: power management, duty cycling, and sleep/wake scheduling: Data collection and
processing in sensor networks: data aggregation, compression, and filtering.

Unit II
Sensor Network Design and Implementation - Sensor network topology and deployment: star, mesh, and tree topologies;
Localization and tracking in sensor networks: triangulation, trilateration, and fingerprinting; Security and privacy in sensor
networks: encryption, authentication, and key management; Programming and development tools for sensor networks:
Arduino, Contiki, and TinyOS; Hands-on lab sessions: designing and implementing a sensor network using wireless sensor
nodes and microcontrollers.
Unit III
Advanced Topics in Sensor Networks- Emerging trends and applications in sensor networks: smart cities, precision
agriculture, and healthcare; Big data analytics and machine learning for sensor networks: data mining, classification, and
prediction; Cloud-based sensor networks: architecture, services, and platforms; Integration of sensor networks with other
systems and technologies: Internet of Things (IoT), Cyber-Physical Systems (CPS), and Wireless Sensor-Actuator Networks
(WSANs); Final project: developing a sensor network application for a specific domain or problem.

Textbook(s)
1. Feng Zhao and Leonidas Guibas, "Wireless Sensor Networks: An Information Processing Approach,
2. N. Sastry and S. Shakkottai, "Building Wireless Sensor Networks: Theoretical and Practical Perspective,
3. Chiara Buratti, Marco Stango, and Roberto Verdone "Sensor Networks with IEEE 802.15.4 Systems: Distributed
Processing, MAC, and Connectivity"

Reference(s)

1. Wenbo Mao, Wei Li, and Sushil Jajodia, "Security in wireless sensor networks"
2. Ali H. Al-Bayatti, Azween Abdullah, and Mazin Abed Mohammed, "Machine learning for wireless sensor
networks: A comprehensive survey"

23ECE450 Deep Learning L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

(Pre-requisite: Machine Learning)

Course Objectives

• To introduce the idea of artificial neural networks and their architecture

• To enable students to design an artificial neural network for classification
• To enable students to design and deployment of deep learning models for machine learning problems

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: understand the mathematics behind the functioning of artificial neural networks
CO2: design deep learning models for sequential and image data
CO3: carry out design and implementation of deep learning models for signal processing applications
CO4: design and deploy simple TensorFlow-based deep learning solutions to classification problems

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO2 PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 3
CO
CO1 3 3 3 3 2
CO2 3 2 3 3 3 3
CO3 2 3 2 3 3 3 3
CO4 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3

Syllabus

Unit I
Introduction to Deep Learning: Basics: Biological Neuron, Idea of computational units, McCulloch– Pitts unit and
Thresholding logic, Linear Perceptron, Activation and Loss Functions, Perceptron Learning Algorithm, Linear separability.
Convergence theorem for Perceptron Learning Algorithm. Building small functions using perceptron model, Feedforward
Networks: Multilayer Perceptron, Gradient Descent, Backpropagation, regularization.

Unit II
Convolutional Neural Network: Building a convolutional neural network. Input Layers, Convolution Layers. Pooling Layers.
Dense Layers. Backpropagation Through the Convolutional Layer. Filters and Feature Maps. Backpropagation Through the
Pooling Layers. Dropout Layers and Regularization. Batch Normalization, Optimizers. LeNet, AlexNet. Visualisation of
various layers in CNN- Image processing using CNN-examples and applications.
Unit III
Embedding and Representation Learning: Autoencoder Architecture-Implementing an Autoencoder in TensorFlow -
Denoising- Sparsity in Autoencoders. Models for Sequence Analysis - Recurrent Neural Networks- Vanishing Gradients-
Long Short-Term Memory (LSTM) Units- TensorFlow Primitives for RNN Models -Augmenting Recurrent Networks with
Attention.

Textbook(s)
1. Ian Goodfellow, Yoshua Bengio, Aaron Courville, “Deep Learning”, MIT Press, 2016.
2. Yoshua Bengio "Learning deep architectures for AI." Now publishers, 2009.

Reference(s)
1. N.D.Lewis, “Deep Learning Made Easy with R: A Gentle Introduction for Data Science”, Createspace
Independent, 2016.
2. Nikhil Buduma, “Fundamentals of Deep Learning: Designing Next-Generation Machine Intelligence
Algorithms”, O’Reilly, 2022.

23ECE451 Reinforcement Learning L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

(Pre-requisite: Machine Learning)

Course Objectives

 To familiarize mathematical foundations of reinforcement learning.

 To enable understanding of various reinforcement learning algorithms.
 To implementation of various reinforcement learning algorithms for practical applications.

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: understand the mathematics behind reinforcement learning algorithms

CO2: implement probabilistic reinforcement learning algorithms
CO3: implement model free Reinforcement learning techniques
CO4: understand function approximation and deep learning-based reinforcement learning solutions

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO2 PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 3
CO
CO1 3 2 3 2 3 2
CO2 3 3 3 3 3 3
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 3
CO4 3 2 3 3 3 3

Syllabus

Unit I
Introduction- Markov Decision Process: Markov property, Markov chains, Markov reward process (MRP). Bellman
equations for MRPs, Introduction to Markov decision process (MDP), state and action value functions, Bellman expectation
equations, optimality of value functions and policies, Bellman optimality equations, Overview of dynamic programing for
MDP- principle of optimality, iterative policy evaluation, policy iteration

Unit II
Overview of Monte Carlo methods for model free RL, First visit and every visit Monte Carlo, Monte Carlo control, On
policy and off policy learning, Importance sampling, Incremental Monte Carlo Methods for Model Free Prediction- TD(0),
 TD(1) and TD(λ), k-step estimators, unified view of DP, MC and TD evaluation methods, TD Control methods - SARSA,
Q-Learning and their variants.

Unit III
Function approximation methods- Gradient MC and Semi-gradient TD(0) algorithms, Control with function approximation,
Least squares, Experience replay in deep Q-Networks-Policy Gradient methods - Log-derivative trick, Naive REINFORCE
algorithm, actor-critic methods- Introduction to deep reinforcement learning methods and multi-agent reinforcement
learning.

Textbook(s)
1. Richard S. Sutton and Andrew G. Barto, Reinforcement Learning: An Introduction, 2nd Edition, MIT Press, 2019
2. Wiering, Marco, and Martijn Van Otterlo. "Reinforcement learning. Adaptation, learning, and optimization 12”,
Springer 2012

Reference(s)
1. Russell, Stuart J., and Peter Norvig. “Artificial intelligence: a modern approach”, Pearson Education Limited, 2016.
2. M. Wiering and M. van Otterlo, “Reinforcement Learning: State-of-the-Art”, Springer, 2012

23ECE452 Internet of Things L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

(Pre-requisite: Introduction to IoT/Wireless Communication)

Course Objectives

 To provide the foundation of IoT and major elements

 To enable understanding of various protocols and standards for IoT
 To provide foundation of designing and building IoT applications

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: understand the fundamentals of IoT technology

CO2: visualize and appreciate the business opportunity and applications
CO3: understand the technology and standard for IoT
CO4: develop and design IoT networks for identified applications

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS
O PSO PSO
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1
2 3
CO
CO1 3 2 2 3 3 3
CO2 3 2 2 3 3 3
CO3 3 3 2 3 3 3
CO4 3 3 2 3 3 3

Syllabus

Unit I
Introduction- IoT definition, use-cases and business Opportunities; IoT Architecture: Objects Layer, Object Abstraction
Layer, Service Management Layer, Application Layer, Business Layer.

Unit II
 IoT Elements- Identification, Sensing, Communication, Computation, Services, Semantics; IoT Common standards: ZigBee,
BLE, WiFi, LoRa, LPWAN, IPV6, AMPQ, MQTT; Support to the IoT: Big Data Analytics, Cloud computing, and Fog
computing;

Unit III
QoS Criteria: Reliability, Mobility, Performance, Scalability, Management, Interoperability; Security and Privacy in IoT:
Confidentiality, Integrity, Availability, Privacy; IoT Applications: smart city, smart health, smart farming, smart
manufacturer.

Textbooks and References

1. Hersent, O., Boswarthick, D. and Elloumi, O., 2011. The internet of things: Key applications and protocols. John
Wiley & Sons.
2. Burbank, J.L., Andrusenko, J., Everett, J.S. and Kasch, W.T., 2013. Wireless networking: Understanding
internetworking challenges. John Wiley & Sons.

23ECE453 Blockchain Technology L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

(Pre-requisite: Introduction to IoT/Computer Programming)

Course Objectives

 To provide the foundation on security and blockchain technology

 To enable understanding of various evolution of blockchain technology
 To provide skill to develop blockchain for specified applications

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: understand the fundamentals of blockchain technology

CO2: understand development and evolution of blockchain technology
CO3: understand the distributed technology and system and importance of blockchain
CO4: develop and design platform for blockchain for the specified applications

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS
O PSO PSO
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1
2 3
CO
CO1 3 2 2 3 2
CO2 3 2 2 3 2
CO3 3 3 2 3 2
CO4 3 3 2 3 2

Syllabus

Unit I
Introduction- Blockchain, Basic Cryptographic primitives used in Blockchain – Secure, Collison-resistant hash functions,
digital signature, public key cryptosystems, zero-knowledge proof systems; Basic Distributed System concepts – distributed
consensus and atomic broadcast, Byzantine fault-tolerant consensus methods.

Unit II
(Blockchain 1.0 and 2.0) – Concepts germane to Bitcoin and contemporary proof-of-work based consensus mechanisms,
operations of Bitcoin blockchain, crypto-currency as application of blockchain technology; Blockchain 2.0 -blockchains
with smart contracts and Turing complete blockchain scripting – issues of correctness and verifiability, Ethereum platform
and its smart contract mechanism.
 Unit III
Blockchain 3.0- Plug-and-play mechanisms for consensus and smart contract evaluation engines, Hyperledger fabric
platform; Applications, limitation and research direction in blockchain.

Textbooks and references

1. Draft version of “S. Shukla, M. Dhawan, S. Sharma, S. Venkatesan, ‘Blockchain Technology: Cryptocurrency and
Applications’, Oxford University Press, 2019.
2. Josh Thompson, ‘Blockchain: The Blockchain for Beginnings, Guild to Blockchain Technology and Blockchain
Programming’, Create Space Independent Publishing Platform, 2017.

23ECE454 Understanding ICT Standardization: Principles and Practices L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

(Pre-requisite: Nil)

Course Objectives

 To provide information on the purpose of standards and the basic concepts of the SDOs’ processes
 To provide basic knowledge of the international, regional and national standardization landscape
 To identify the characteristics of formal and de facto standardization, and to be aware of the processes through which
de facto standards are adopted by SDOs

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: understand the purpose of ICT standards and SDOs process

CO2: understand landscape of national, regional and international standardization
CO3: understand and distinguish between formal and de facto standardization
CO4: learn the process of de facto standards get adopted by SDOs

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS
O PSO PSO
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1
2 3
CO
CO1 3 3 2
CO2 3 3 2
CO3 3 3 2
CO4 3 3 2

Syllabus

Unit I
Introduction- Basic of standardization, standards in everyday life, formal standardization, standard development
organization (SDO) standards, regulation; benefits and risks, standardization landscape, standardization process, standard
development process, Characteristics of standard, standard development life cycle.

Unit II
Standard organizations-formal standardization and standrds development organizations, De facto standards, sonsortia and
standardization, selecting relevant SDOs, identifying SDO documents, structure and formalism of the standards;
standardization documents, classification and naming conventions.

Unit III
National, regional and international standardization – cooperation and coordination, geographical scope in standardization,
guidance for the regional and national adoption of international standards; standards supporting regulation, legislation and
policy.
 Textbooks and references
3. Nizar Abdelkaf et al. “Understanding ICT Standardization: Principles and Practices. ETSI 2021.
4. https://standards.ieee.org/develop/

23ECE457 System Engineering L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

(Pre-requisite: Nil)

Course Objectives

 To introduce system engineering concepts and development methods

 To provide knowledge on requirement analysis and modelling
 To enable understanding of system integration, validation and testing

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: describe processes, methods, and practices of systems engineering

CO2: apply systems engineering practices and methods to relevant examples.
CO3: develop requirements, architectures, specifications, verifications, and tests.
CO4: analyze systems using systems engineering approaches to increase performance.

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS
O PSO PSO
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1
2 3
CO
CO1 3 3 3 3 3 2
CO2 3 3 3 3 3 2
CO3 3 3 3 3 3 2
CO4 3 3 3 3 3 2

Syllabus

Unit I
Introduction- System Engineering overview- origin, uses and applications of systems engineering, system of systems, value
of system engineering; System Building Blocks and Interfaces- Systems Engineering through the System Life Cycle, The
Systems Engineering Method, Testing throughout System Development, Managing System Development and Risks
Organization of Systems Engineering

Unit II
Concept Development- Need analysis, Originating a New System, Operations Analysis, Functional Analysis, Feasibility
Definition, Needs Validation, System Operational Requirements, Developing the System Requirements, Operational
Requirements Analysis, Performance Requirements Formulation, Implementation of Concept Exploration, Performance
Requirements Validation Process, System Modeling Languages: Unified Modeling Language (UML) and Systems Modeling
Language (SysML), Model-Based Systems Engineering (MBSE), System Functional Specifications.

Unit III
Implementing the System Building Blocks, Requirements Analysis, Functional Analysis and Design, Component Design,
Design Validation, Integration, testing and evaluating total system; Test planning and preparation, system integration,
Developmental and operational test and evaluation, Engineering for production, transition from development to production,
Production operations, Installation, maintenance and upgrading, Installation testing, In-service support, Upgrades and
modernization.
Textbooks and references

1. Alexander Kossiakoff William N. Sweet Samuel J. Seymour Steven M. Biemer, System Engineering: Principles and
Practices, 2nd Edition, John Wiley and Sons, 2010.
2. Cathleen Shamieh, System Engineering for Dummies, IBM limited edition, Joh Wiley and Sons, 2012

Other Electives
23ECE461 Software Defined Networks L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3
(Pre-requisite: Computer Networks and Protocols)

Course Objectives

 To introduce the principles of software defined networks (SDN)

 To introduce modern software defined networking standards and practices
 To enable the appreciation for the strengths and limitations of various techniques and protocols in SDN

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: understand the principles of software defined networking

CO2: understand standard protocols and practices in the data and control plane.
CO3: understand the concept of network function virtualization and provide examples of its usage.
CO4: understand the application of SDN in various scenarios and the challenges involved

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO2 PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 3
CO
CO1 3 2 3
CO2 3 2 3
CO3 3 2 3
CO4 3 2 2 3
Syllabus

Unit I
Introduction – Packet switching, switch architecture, forwarding tables; Evolution of Switches and Networking – Data and
control planes, cost and other constraints- Data center architecture and requirements, orchestration, virtualization- Evolution
towards SDN, How SDN Works – Characteristics, operation, SDN switches and controllers, SDN Applications.

Unit II
OpenFlow – Overview and basics, OpenFlow 1.1-1.5, interoperability, limitations, and drawbacks of SDN, SDN via APIs
and overlays- Network Function Virtualization – OPNFV, NFV vs. SDN, in-line network functions, Open Daylight and
ONOS controller.

Unit III
Applications and Use Cases – Applications in data centers, WANs, ISPs, campus networks, optical networks, and mobile
networks, reactive vs. proactive applications, internal vs. external applications.

Textbook(s)
1. Goransson P, Black C, Culver T, “Software Defined Networks: A Comprehensive Approach”, Morgan Kaufmann,
Second Edition, 2017.

Reference(s)
1. Gray K, Nadeau TD, Amsterdam Boston Heidelberg, Morgan Kaufmann, “Network Function Virtualization” 2016.
2. Nadeau TD, Gray K. SDN: “Software Defined Networks: [an Authoritative Review of Network Programmability
Technologies]”, 1. ed. Beijing: O’Reilly; 2013.

23ECE462 Information Security L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

(Pre-requisite: Nil)
Course Objectives

 To introduce the cryptography algorithm suitable for information security

 To enable the understanding of firewall design for System Security
 To provide the knowledge about network layer security and embedded security design

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: identify and analyze various Cryptographic algorithms used in Information Security
CO2: analyze the firewall design and firewall characteristics for system security
CO3: understand the concept related to various network layers security
CO4: understand the various features related to physical cryptographic platform

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO2 PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 3
CO
CO1 3 3 2 2
CO2 3 3 3 2 2
CO3 3 2 2 2
CO4 3 2 2 2

Syllabus

Unit I
Cryptography - Introduction to Cryptography: OSI Security Architecture - Security Services, Security Attacks, Security
Mechanism. Introduction to Classical Cryptography. Modern Cryptography: Secret key Cryptography - DES, AES. Public
key Cryptography - Diffie- Hellman, RSA, ECC. Introduction to Hash Algorithm, Introduction to Digital Signature,
Introduction to PKI.
Unit II
System and Network Security-Introduction - Access Control, Intrusion Detection and Prevention. Firewalls: Firewall Design
Principles - Firewall Characteristics, Types of Firewalls. Trusted System. Malicious Soft wares: Virus, Trojan Horse, Ad
ware/ Spy ware, Worms, Logic Bomb. Cyber Law and Forensics - IT ACT 2000, Cyber Forensics; Network Security
Introduction to Network Concepts, OSI Layers and Protocols, Network Devices, Network layer Security (IPSec) - IP
Security Overview, IPSec Architecture, Authentication header, Encapsulating security Payload, Combining Security
Associations, Key management. Transport Layer Security - SSL/TLS, SET. Application Layer Security - Authentication
Applications, Kerberos, X. 509 Authentication Services. E-mail Security – PGP, S/MIME.

Unit III
Embedded Security -Introduction, Types of Security Features – Physical, Cryptographic, Platform. Kinds of
Devices – CDC, CLDC. Embedded Security Design, Keep It Simple and Stupid
Principle, Modularity Is Key, Important Rules in Protocol Design, Miniaturization of
security, Wireless Security, Security in WSN

Textbooks
1. Cryptography and Network Security: Principles and Practice- William Stallings
2. Practical Embedded Security: Building Secure Resource Constrained Systems -Timothy Stapko, Publisher Newnes.

Reference(S)

1. Cryptography: Theory and Practice – 3rd Ed. SD Stinson, CRC Press.

2. Information Security for Technical Staff-SEI.
3. Guide to firewalls & network security: with intrusion detection & VPNs- HOLDEN, GREG.
4. CISSP: Certified Information Systems Security Professional Study Guide- Stewart, James Michael Et Al

23ECE463 Neuroengineering L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

(Pre-requisite: Nil)

Course Objectives

• To introduce the concepts of neurosciences for engineering applications

• To develop knowledge in biological realistic neural circuit-based procedure and bioengineering techniques
• To provide knowledge in designing and developing systems and learning models

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: understand aspects of neuroscience and bioengineering techniques for data-based modelling
CO2: adopt appropriate techniques to stimulate neural system
CO3: develop simple electronic for acquisition of brain signal
CO4: develop model for neuron and extracts the characteristics

CO – PO Mapping:
CO/PO PO PO2 PO PO PO PO PO PO8 PO PO PO PO PSO1 PSO
1 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 11 12 2
CO1 3 2 2 - - - - - - - - 2 2
CO2 3 2 2 2 - - - - - - - - 2 2
CO3 3 - 2 2 - - - - - - - - 2 2
CO4 2 - - - - - - - - - - - 2 2

Syllabus

Unit I

Introduction – Neuroscience and Brain Circuits - Brain, Spinal Cord, Pathways for Movement and Perception, Neurons,
Synapses, Parts of the centra nervous systems, Nonlinearity of signals in the brain, Spikes, Synaptic potentials, Population
signals, Local field potentials.
Unit II

Neuro-recording methods – EEG, single unit recording, Near-infrared spectroscopy, Transcranial direct-current stimulation
(TDCS), Transcranial magnetic stimulation (TMS), Functional magnetic resonance imaging (fMRI).

Unit III

Mixed Signal Electronics in Neuroengineering - device-tissue interactions, bioelectronics recording/stimulation interface –

experiments, hardware and methods; Computational Neuroscience – Membrane modelling, Single neurons, Excitatory and
Inhibitory Synapses, Simple Neural circuits and models; Neuroscience to Artificial Intelligence – Models and circuits,
Learning, Hebbian and backpropagation in biological circuits, reinforcement learning, Largescale models and abstractions.

Textbook(s)

1. Purves, D., Augustine, G. J., Fitzpatrick, D., Hall, W. C., LaMantia, A.-S., McNamara, J. O., & Williams, S. M.
(Eds.). (2004). Neuroscience (3rd ed.). Sinauer Associates.
2. Akay M., Handbook of Neural Engineering, 2006, Wiley
Reference(s)

1. N. Aryan, Stimulation and Recording Electrodes for Neural Prostheses (2014), Springer, Available at
https://link.springer.com/book/10.1007/978-3-319-10052-4
2. M. Nicolelis, Methods for Neural Ensemble Recordings (2008), CRC-Press
Available at https://www.semanticscholar.org/paper/Methods-for-NeuralEnsemble-Recordings-
Nicolelis/f5199d649d17cfa34a27c6e42e276eb722b17798

3. E. Kandel et al. Principles of Neural Science, McGraw-Hill Education / Medical; 6th edition (5 April 2021).

Course Objectives

23ECE455 Robotic System Design L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

(Pre-requisite: Nil)

 To introduce robotic design essential

 To provide mathematical foundations necessary to analyze and design
 To provide foundation on different controls and design aspects of robotic system

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: understand the different terminology and mechanical subsystems

CO2: understand and analyze the controls involved in robotic system
CO3: use and apply necessary sensors and controls for robotic design
CO4: design a robot for a specific applications

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 2 3
CO
CO1 3 3 2 2 2
CO2 3 2 2 3 2 2 2
CO3 3 2 2 3 2 2 2
CO4 3 2 3 2 2 2

Syllabus

Unit I
Introduction: Classification of robots, Three laws, Robot terminologies: work volume, Degree of Freedom, resolution,
accuracy, repeatability, dexterity, compliance, payload capacity, speed of response, Wrist assembly, Joint notations,
Selection criteria of any robot, Industrial applications of robot, Industrial robot system, Types, Centralized robotics system
controllers, decentralized robotics system controller. Real time communication and timing; Futuristic robotics; Types of
drives – Hydraulic, Pneumatic and Electric, Comparison of all such drives, DC servo motors, Stepper motors, AC servo
motor – salient features and applications, pulse count calculations End effectors - Types of Grippers – Mechanical, Magnetic,
vacuum, pneumatic and hydraulic, selection and design considerations.

Unit II

Need for sensors, types of sensors used in Robotics, classification and applications of sensors, Characteristics of sensing
devices, Selections of sensors. Robot Vision setup (RVS), block diagram, components, working of RVS, Human vision Vs
Robot Vision, Gradient calculations, Applications of RVS; Mathematical details-Spatial Descriptions: positions,
orientations, and frame, mappings: changing description from frame to frame, Operators: translations, rotations and
transformations, Homogeneous transformations, transformation arithmetic, compound Transformations, inverting a
transform, transform equations, Euler Angles, Fixed Angles, Euler Parameters.

Unit III

Manipulator Kinematics, Link Description, Link to reference frame connections, Denavit-Hartenberg Approach, D-H
Parameters, Position Representations, Forward Kinematics, Inverse Kinematics; Application specific robots .

Textbook/References

1. S. K. Saha, Introduction to Robotics 2e, TATA McGraw Hills Education (2014)

2. AsitavaGhoshal, Robotics: Fundamental concepts and analysis, Oxford University Press (2006)
3. Dilip Kumar Pratihar, Fundamentals of Robotics, Narosa Publishing House, (2019)
4. S. B. Niku, Introduction to Robotics – Analysis, Contro, Applications, 3rd edition, John Wiley & Sons Ltd., (2020)

23ECE477 Cyber Physical Systems L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

(Pre-requisite: Nil)

Course Objectives

 To introduce the mathematical foundation for modeling CPS

 To enable build models of CPS for simple use cases
 To introduce networking, intelligence and security aspects of CPS

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: understand the mathematical concepts of CPS

CO2: apply model based design to build CPS models
CO3: analyze the performance of simple CPS models
CO4: understand the role of networking, sensing, security and intelligent systems

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO2 PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 3
CO
CO1 3 2 3
CO2 3 2 2 3
CO3 3 2 2 2 3
CO4 3 2 2 3

Syllabus

Unit I
Introduction – Overview of CPS, characteristics, CPS in the real world, Computational vs. Physical Systems, Fundamental
approach, CPS Genesis, Modeling, Design, Verification and Validation, Assembly and Deployment; trends and challenges
of modern cyber-physical systems.

Unit II
Modeling Cyber-Physical Systems: Overview of Continuous, Discrete, and Hybrid Models, dynamics of a physical system;
Properties of Systems -Causal Systems, Memoryless Systems, Linearity and Time Invariance, Stability; Feedback Control,
Controller Design techniques, Logic based system specification; Discrete Systems - Discrete Signals, Modeling Actors as
Functions; The Notion of State- Finite-State Machines, Transitions, When a Reaction Occurs, Update Functions, Software
Tools Supporting FSMs, Moore Machines and Mealy Machines;

Unit III
Requirements and Design- Processors and Sensors: Sensors and CPS – trends, Sensors, CPS, and IoT, Actuators and servos,
Embedded CPS architectures, Communications, Security, Processors; CPS design and analysis of their performance-
Canonical Example: Stopping a car, Feedback, Reduced-gravity Drone; Trajectory Planning and examples, Aviation
example, Typical requirements; Guidance techniques, Classical optimization and examples, Dynamic Programs,
Automotive example.

Textbook(s)
1. Rajeev Alur, Principles of Cyber-Physical Systems, MIT Press, 2015
2. Edward A. Lee and Sanjit A. Seshia, Introduction to Embedded Systems: A Cyber-Physical Systems Approach, 2011.

References(s)
http://www.feron.org/Eric/OMSCS-CyberPhysicalSystems/page.html
http://LeeSeshia.org

23ECE473 Physical Chemistry of Materials and Processes L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

(Pre-requisite: Nil)

Course Objectives

 To provide an understanding of physical properties of semiconductor materials

 To introduce the effect of defects on physical properties
 To understand the growth and processing of semiconductor materials

Course Outcomes: At the end of the course, the student should be able to

CO1: understand the physical properties of semiconductors

CO2: understand the impact of defects in semiconductors
CO3: understand growth of semiconductor materials
CO4: understand the processing of semiconductor materials

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PS PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO PO1 PO1 PO1 PSO PSO2 PSO

O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 1 3
CO
CO1 3 2
CO2 3 2
CO3 3 2
CO4 3 2

Syllabus

Unit I
Elemental and compound semiconductor materials, structural, electronic and optical properties, Defects in Semiconductors
- Point Defects in Ionic Solids: Modelling the Electrical Conductivity of Ionic Solids by Point Defects, Mediated Charge
Transfer, Point Defects and Impurities in Elemental Semiconductors, Vacancies and Self-Interstitials in Semiconductors
with the Diamond Structure, Effect of Defect–Defect Interactions on Diffusivity: Trap-and-Pairing Limited Diffusion
Processes, Light Impurities in Group IV Semiconductors: Hydrogen, Carbon, Nitrogen, Oxygen and Their Reactivity

Unit II

Growth of Semiconductor Materials - Growth of Bulk Solids by Liquid Crystallization, Growth of Si-Ge Alloys, Single
Crystal Growth from the Vapour Phase - Epitaxial Growth of Single Crystalline Layers of Elemental and Compound
Semiconductors, Growth of Poly/Micro/Nano-Crystalline Thin Film Materials- Growth of Nanocrystalline/Microcrystalline
Silicon, Growth of Silicon Nanowires

Unit III

Semiconductor Materials Processing - Thermal Annealing Processes, Rapid thermal processing, Hydrogen Passivation
Processes, Introduction to Gettering and Defect Engineering, Oxidation, Diffusion and ion implantation, Chemical and
physical deposition methods, Wafer Bonding.

Textbook(s)
1. Sergio Pizzini, Physical Chemistry of Semiconductor Materials and Processes, 2015, John Wiley & Sons.
2. S. Cambell, The Science & Engineering of Microelectronic Fabrication, Oxford, 1996.

Reference(s)
1. S.P. Mauraka and M.C. Peckerar, Electronic Materials Science and Technology, Academic Press, 1989.

Courses offered under the framework of

Amrita Values Programmes I and II

22AVP201 Message from Amma’s Life for the Modern World

Amma’s messages can be put to action in our life through pragmatism and attuning of our thought process in a
positive and creative manner. Every single word Amma speaks and the guidance received in on matters which
we consider as trivial are rich in content and touches the very inner being of our personality. Life gets enriched
by Amma’s guidance and She teaches us the art of exemplary life skills where we become witness to all the
happenings around us still keeping the balance of the mind.

22ADM211 Leadership from the Ramayana

Introduction to Ramayana, the first Epic in the world – Influence of Ramayana on Indian values and culture –
Storyline of Ramayana – Study of leading characters in Ramayana – Influence of Ramayana outside India –
Relevance of Ramayana for modern times.
22ADM201 Strategic Lessons from the Mahabharata

Introduction to Mahabharata, the largest Epic in the world – Influence of Mahabharata on Indian values and
culture – Storyline of Mahabharata – Study of leading characters in Mahabharata – Kurukshetra War and its
significance - Relevance of Mahabharata for modern times.

22AVP204 Lessons from the Upanishads

Introduction to the Upanishads: Sruti versus Smrti - Overview of the four Vedas and the ten Principal
Upanishads - The central problems of the Upanishads – The Upanishads and Indian Culture – Relevance of
Upanishads for modern times – A few Upanishad Personalities: Nachiketas, SatyakamaJabala, Aruni,
Shvetaketu.

22AVP205 Message of the Bhagavad Gita

Introduction to Bhagavad Gita – Brief storyline of Mahabharata - Context of Kurukshetra War – The anguish of
Arjuna – Counsel by Sri. Krishna – Key teachings of the Bhagavad Gita – Karma Yoga, Jnana Yoga and Bhakti
Yoga - Theory of Karma and Reincarnation – Concept of Dharma – Concept of Avatar - Relevance of
Mahabharata for modern times.

22AVP206 Life and Message of Swami Vivekananda

Brief Sketch of Swami Vivekananda’s Life – Meeting with Guru – Disciplining of Narendra - Travel across India -
Inspiring Life incidents – Address at the Parliament of Religions – Travel in United States and Europe – Return
and reception India – Message from Swamiji’s life.

22AVP207 Life and Teachings of Spiritual Masters India

Sri Rama, Sri Krishna, Sri Buddha, AdiShankaracharya, Sri Ramakrishna Paramahamsa, Swami Vivekananda, Sri
RamanaMaharshi, Mata Amritanandamayi Devi.

22AVP208 Insights into Indian Arts and Literature

The aim of this course is to present the rich literature and culture of Ancient India and help students appreciate
their deep influence on Indian Life - Vedic culture, primary source of Indian Culture – Brief introduction and
appreciation of a few of the art forms of India - Arts, Music, Dance, Theatre.

22AVP209 Yoga and Meditation

The objective of the course is to provide practical training in YOGA ASANAS with a sound theoretical base and
theory classes on selected verses of Patanjali’s Yoga Sutra and Ashtanga Yoga. The coverage also includes the
effect of yoga on integrated personality development.

22AVP210 Kerala Mural Art and Painting

Mural painting is an offshoot of the devotional tradition of Kerala. A mural is any piece of artwork painted or
applied directly on a wall, ceiling or other large permanent surface. In the contemporary scenario Mural
painting is not restricted to the permanent structures and are being done even on canvas. Kerala mural
paintings are the frescos depicting mythology and legends, which are drawn on the walls of temples and
churches in South India, principally in Kerala. Ancient temples, churches and places in Kerala, South India,
display an abounding tradition of mural paintings mostly dating back between the 9th to 12th centuries when
this form of art enjoyed Royal patronage. Learning Mural painting through the theory and practice workshop is
the objective of this course.

22AVP213 Traditional Fine Arts of India

India is home to one of the most diverse Art forms world over. The underlying philosophy of Indian life is ‘Únity
in Diversity” and it has led to the most diverse expressions of culture in India. Most art forms of India are an
expression of devotion by the devotee towards the Lord and its influence in Indian life is very pervasive. This
course will introduce students to the deeper philosophical basis of Indian Art forms and attempt to provide a
practical demonstration of the continuing relevance of the Art.

22AVP214 Principles of Worship in India

Indian mode of worship is unique among the world civilizations. Nowhere in the world has the philosophical
idea of reverence and worshipfulness for everything in this universe found universal acceptance as it in India.
Indian religious life even today is a practical demonstration of the potential for realization of this profound
truth. To see the all-pervading consciousness in everything, including animate and inanimate, and constituting
society to realise this truth can be seen as the epitome of civilizational excellence. This course will discuss the
principles and rationale behind different modes of worship prevalent in India.

22AVP215 Temple Mural Arts in Kerala

The traditional percussion ensembles in the Temples of Kerala have enthralled millions over the years. The
splendor of our temples makes art enthusiast spellbound, warmth and grandeur of color combination
sumptuousness of the outline, crowding of space by divine or heroic figures often with in vigorous movement
are the characteristics of murals.

The mural painting specially area visual counterpart of myth, legend, gods, dirties, and demons of the theatrical
world, Identical myths are popular the birth of Rama, the story of Bhīma and Hanuman, Shiva, as Kirata, and
the Jealousy of Uma and ganga the mural painting in Kerala appear to be closely related to, and influenced by
this theatrical activity the art historians on temple planes, wood carving and painting the architectural plane of
the Kerala temples are built largely on the pan-Indians almost universal model of the Vasthupurusha.

22AVP218 Insights into Indian Classical Music

The course introduces the students into the various terminologies used in Indian musicology and their
explanations, like Nadam, Sruti, Svaram – svara nomenclature, Stayi, Graha, Nyasa, Amsa, Thala,- Saptatalas
and their angas, Shadangas, Vadi, Samavadi, Anuvadi. The course takes the students through Carnatic as well
as Hindustani classical styles.

22AVP219 Insights into Traditional Indian Painting

The course introduces traditional Indian paintings in the light of ancient Indian wisdom in the fields of
aesthetics, the Shadanga (Sixs limbs of Indian paintings) and the contextual stories from ancient texts from
where the paintings originated. The course introduces the painting styles such as Madhubani, Kerala Mural,
Pahari, Cheriyal, Rajput, Tanjore etc.

22AVP220 Insights into Indian Classical Dance

The course takes the students through the ancient Indian text on aesthetics the Natyasastra and its commentary
the AbhinavaBharati. The course introduces various styles of Indian classical dance such as Bharatanatyan,
Mohiniyatton, Kuchipudi, Odissy, Katak etc. The course takes the students through both contextual theory as
well as practice time.

22AVP221 Indian Martial Arts and Self Defense

The course introduces the students to the ancient Indian system of self-defense and the combat through various
martial art forms and focuses more on traditional Kerala’s traditional KalariPayattu. The course introduces the
various exercise technique to make the body supple and flexible before going into the steps and techniques of
the martial art. The advanced level of this course introduces the technique of weaponry.

PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVES UNDER SCIENCE STREAM

CHEMISTRY

23CHY240 COMPUTATIONAL CHEMISTRY AND MOLECULAR MODELLING L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

Course Outcomes:

CO1: Get to understand the structure of molecules using symmetry.

CO2: Understanding Quantum mechanical approach to calculate the energy of a system.

CO3: Applying mathematical knowledge and quantum mechanical approach in finding out the
characteristics-reactivity, stability, etc., of the molecule.

CO4: To get a brief idea about molecular mechanics based chemical

calculations.CO5: To get an idea about general methodology of molecular
modeling.

Syllabus

Unit 1

Introduction: Stability, symmetry, homogeneity and quantization as the requirements of natural changes - Born - Haber

cycle – Energetic – kinetics - Principles of spectra.

Computational techniques: Introduction to molecular descriptors, computational chemistry problems

involvingiterative methods, matrix algebra, Curve fitting.

Molecular mechanics: Basic theory - Harmonic oscillator – Parameterization - Energy equations - Principle
ofcoupling - Matrix formalism for two masses - Hessian matrix - enthalpy of formation - enthalpy of reactions.

Introduction to Quantum mechanics - Schrodinger equation - Position and

momentumMO formation - Operators and the Hamiltonian operator - The
quantum oscillator Oscillator Eigen value problems - Quantum numbers - labeling
of atomic electrons.

Unit 2

Molecular Symmetry: Elements of symmetry - Point groups - Determination of point groups of molecules.
Huckel’s MO theory: Approximate and exact solution of Schrodinger equation - Expectation value of energy -
Huckel’s theory and the LCAO approximation - Homogeneous simultaneous equations - Secular matrix - Jacobi
method - Eigen vectors: Matrix as operator - Huckel’s coefficient matrix - Wheeland’s method - Hoffmann’s EHT
method - Chemical applications such as bond length, bond energy, charge density, dipole moment, Resonance
energy.

Unit 3

Self consistent fields: Elements of secular matrix - Variational calculations - Semi empirical methods - PPP self
consistent field calculation - Slater determinants - Hartree equation - Fock equation – Roothaan - Hall equation -
Semi empirical models and approximations.

Ab-initio calculations: Gaussian implementations – Gamess - Thermodynamic functions - Koopman’s theorem

- Isodesmic reactions, DFT for larger molecules - Computer aided assignments/mini projects with softwares -
Introduction to HPC in Chemical calculations.

Molecular modelling software engineering - Modeling of molecules and processes

Signals and signal processing in Chemistry - QSAR studies and generation of molecular descriptors - Applications of
chemical data mining - Familiarization with open source softwares useful for molecular modeling - Introduction
tomolecular simulation - M.D. simulation.

TEXTBOOKS:
 1. K. I. Ramachandran, G Deepa and K Namboori, “Computational Chemistry and Molecular Modeling -
Principles and Applications”, Springer-Verlag, Berlin, Heidelberg, 2008, ISBN-13 978-3-540-77302-3.
2. Donald W Rogers, “Computational Chemistry Using PC”, Wiley, (2003).
3. Alan Hinchliffe, “Chemical Modeling from atoms to liquids”, Wiley, (2005).

REFERENCES:

1. James B Forseman and Aeleen Frisch-Gaussian, “Exploring Chemistry with Electronic Structure Method”,
Inc., Pittsburgh, PA, 2nd edition, (2006).
2. A C Philips, “Introduction to Quantum mechanics”, Wiley, (2003).
3. Wolfram Koch, Max C. Holthausen, “A Chemist’s guide to Density Functional Theory”, Wiley, VCH, 2nd
edition, (2001).

Evaluation Pattern

Assessment Internal End Semester

Periodical 1 (P1) 15

Periodical 2 (P2) 15

*Continuous Assessment (CA) 20

End Semester 50

*CA – Can be Quizzes, Assignment, Projects, and Reports.

23CHY241 ELECTROCHEMICAL ENERGY SYSTEMS AND PROCESSES L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

Course Outcomes:

CO1: Understand the fundamental concepts of electrochemistry through electrode potential and reaction
kinetics CO2: Learn the application of the electrochemical principles for the functioning and fabrication of
industrial

batteries and fuel cells

CO3: Acquire knowledge in solving numerical problems on applied electrochemistry

CO4: Analysis and practical problem solving in fabrication of batteries and fuel cells
CO5: Application of concepts and principle in industrial electrochemical processes
CO6: Evaluation of comprehensive knowledge through problem solving

SyllabusUnit 1

Background Theory: Origin of potential - electrical double layer - reversible electrode potential - standard hydrogen

electrode - emf series - measurement of potential - reference electrodes (calomel and silver/silver chloride) indicatorand
ion selective electrodes - Nernst equation - irreversible processes - kinetic treatment - Butler- Volmer equation -
Overpotential, activation, concentration and IR overpotential - its practical significance - Tafel equation and Tafelplots
- exchange current density and transfer coefficients.

Unit 2

Batteries: Primary batteries: The chemistry, fabrication and performance aspects, packing classification and rating of the
following batteries: (The materials taken their function and significance, reactions with equations, their performance in
terms of discharge, capacity, and energy density to be dealt with). Zinc-carbon (Leclanche type), zinc alkaline (Duracell),
zinc/air, zinc-silver oxide batteries; lithium primary cells - liquid cathode, solid cathode and polymer electrolyte types
and lithium-ferrous sulphide cells (comparative account).

Secondary batteries: ARM (alkaline rechargeable manganese) cells, Lead acid and VRLA (valve regulated (sealed)lead
acid), nickel-cadmium, nickel-zinc, nickel- metal hydride batteries, lithium ion batteries, ultra thin lithium polymer cells
(comparative account). Advanced Batteries for electric vehicles, requirements of the battery - sodium-beta and redox
batteries.

Unit 3

Reserve batteries and Fuel cells: Reserve batteries - water activated, electrolyte activated and thermally activated
batteries - remote activation - pyrotechnic materials. Fuel Cells: Principle, chemistry and functioning - carbon, hydrogen-
oxygen, proton exchange membrane (PEM), direct methanol(DMFC), molten carbonate electrolyte (MCFC) fuel cells
and outline of biochemical fuel cells.

Electrochemical Processes: Principle, process description, operating conditions, process sequence and applications of
Electroforming – production of waveguide and plated through hole (PTH) printed circuit boards by electrodeposition;
Electroless plating of nickel, copper and gold; Electropolishing of metals; Anodizing of aluminium; Electrochemical
machining of metals and alloys.

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Derek Pletcher and Frank C. Walsh, “Industrial Electrochemistry”, Blackie Academic and Professional, (1993).
2. Dell, Ronald M Rand, David A J, “Understanding Batteries”, Royal Society of Chemistry, (2001).

REFERENCES:

1. Christopher M A, Brett, “Electrochemistry – Principles, Methods and Applications”, Oxford University, (2004).
2. Watanabe T, “Nano-plating: microstructure control theory of plated film and data base of plated film
microstructure”, Elsevier, Oxford, UK (2004).
3. Kanani N, “Electroplating and electroless plating of copper and its alloy”, ASM International, Metals Park, OH
and Metal Finishing Publications, Stevenage, UK (2003).
4. Lindon David, “Handbook of Batteries”, McGraw Hill, (2002).
5. Curtis, “Electroforming”, London, (2004).
 6. Rumyantsev E and Davydov A, “Electrochemical machining of metals”, Mir, Moscow, (1989).

Evaluation Pattern

Assessment Internal End Semester

Periodical 1 (P1) 15

Periodical 2 (P2) 15

*Continuous Assessment (CA) 20

End Semester 50

*CA – Can be Quizzes, Assignment, Projects, and Reports.

23CHY242 FUELS AND COMBUSTION L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

Course Objectives:

To provide the basic knowledge about fuels, rocket propellants and explosives.

Course Outcomes:

CO1: Understand the types of fuels and variation in their

propertiesCO2: Able to analyze the fuel content

CO3: Obtain knowledge in identifying a proper fuel as per the requirement

CO4: Ability to know the preparation and working of propellants and
explosives

SyllabusUnit 1

Fuels - Solid fuels - Classification, preparation, cleaning, analysis, ranking and properties - action of heat, oxidation,

hydrogenation, carbonization, liquefaction and gasification.

Liquid fuels – Petroleum - origin, production, composition, classification, petroleum processing, properties, testing -flow
test, smoke points, storage and handling.

Secondary liquid fuels - Gasoline, diesel, kerosene and lubricating oils. Liquid fuels - refining, cracking, fractional
distillation, polymerization. Modified and synthetic liquid fuels. ASTM methods of testing the fuels.

Unit 2

Gaseous fuels - Types, natural gas, methane from coal mine, water gas, carrier gas, producer gas, flue gas, blast furnace
gas, biomass gas, refinery gas, LPG - manufacture, cleaning, purification and analysis. Fuels for spark ignition engines,
knocking and octane number, anti knock additives, fuels for compression, engines, octane number, fuels forjet engines
and rockets.

Flue gas analysis by chromatography and sensor techniques.

Unit 3

Combustion: Stochiometry, thermodynamics. Nature and types of combustion processes - Mechanism - ignition
temperature, explosion range, flash and fire points, calorific value, calorific intensity, theoretical flame temperature.
Combustion calculations, theatrical air requirements, flue gas analysis, combustion kinetics – hydrogen - oxygen
reaction and hydrocarbon - oxygen reactions.
Rocket propellants and Explosives - classification, brief methods of preparation, characteristics; storage and handling.

TEXTBOOK:

1. Fuels and Combustion, Samir Sarkar, Orient Longman Pvt. Ltd, 3rd edition, 2009.

REFERENCES:

1. Fuels - Solids, liquids and gases - Their analysis and valuation, H. Joshua Philips, Biobliolife Publisher,
2008.
2. An introduction to combustion: Concept and applications - Stephen R Turns, Tata Mc. Graw Hill, 3rd edition,
2012.
3. Fundamentals of Combustion, D P Mishra, 1st edition, University Press, 2010
4. Engineering Chemistry - R. Mukhopadhyay and Sriparna Datta, Newage International Pvt. Ltd, 2007.

Evaluation Pattern
 Assessment Internal End Semester

Periodical 1 (P1) 15

Periodical 2 (P2) 15

*Continuous Assessment (CA) 20

End Semester 50

*CA – Can be Quizzes, Assignment, Projects, and Reports.

23CHY243 GREEN CHEMISTRY AND TECHNOLOGY L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

Course Objectives:

1. Understand the principles of green chemistry and its contribution to the development of sustainable products
2. Possess knowledge of the migration from a hydrocarbon-based economy to carbohydrate-based economy
3. Evaluate the deficiencies of traditional process and acknowledge the invent of new processes
4. Distinctly map the culmination of academic research to industrial chemistry

Course Outcomes:

CO1: Understand the evolving concept of Green Chemistry and its application to the manufacture of
sustainableproducts

CO2: Appreciate the need for Renewable energy and Feed stock along with carbon sequestration through
thefundamentals of Green Chemistry Techniques

CO3: Develop a coherence to evaluate systematic deficiencies in traditional Chemical science process and
products CO4: Undertake a purposeful Journey through the microscopic domain of academic research to the
macroscopic

domain of Industrial chemistry

SyllabusUnit 1

Our environment and its protection, chemical pollution and environmental regulations, environmental chemistry,
pollution prevention strategies, challenges to the sustainability of chemical industry, Pollution Prevention Act 1990,USA,
Green Chemistry and its 12 principles, toxicity of chemicals, material safety data sheet (MSDS), concept of zero pollution
technologies, atom economy, functional toxicity vs non-functional toxicity, alternative solvents, energy minimization,
microwave and sonochemical reactions, renewable feed stock, carbon dioxide as a feed stock.

Unit 2

Greener strategies of the synthesis of ibuprofen synthesis, teriphthalic acid etc. phase behaviour and solvent attributes of
supercritical CO2, use of supercritical carbon dioxide as a medium chemical industry, use of ionic liquids as a synthetic
medium, gas expanded solvents, superheated water, etc. Synthesis of various chemicals from bio mass, polycarbonate
synthesis and CO2 fixation, green plastics, green oxidations, etc.

Unit 3

Processes involving solid catalysts – zeolites, ion exchange resins, Nafion/silica nano composites and enhanced activity.
Polymer supported reagents, green oxidations using TAML catalyst, membrane reactors. Green chemistry in material science,
synthesis of porous polymers, green nanotechnology.

REFERENCES:

1. Hand Book of Green Chemistry and Technology; by James Clarke and Duncan Macquarrie; Blakwell
 Publishing.
2. Anastas, P. T., Warner, J. C. Green Chemistry: Theory and Practice, Oxford University Press Inc., New
York, 1998.
3. Matlack, A. S. Introduction to Green Chemistry Marcel Dekker: New York, NY, 2001.
Evaluation Pattern

Assessment Internal End Semester

Periodical 1 (P1) 15

Periodical 2 (P2) 15

*Continuous Assessment (CA) 20

End Semester 50

*CA – Can be Quizzes, Assignment, Projects, and Reports.

23CHY244 INSTRUMENTAL METHODS OF ANALYSIS L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

Course Outcomes:

CO1: To develop an understanding of principle and working of the range of instrumental methods in
analyticalchemistry

CO2: To provide an understanding and skills in contemporary methods of separation and appropriate selection
ofinstruments for the successful analysis of chemical compounds

CO3: To impart skills in the scientific method of planning, conducting, reviewing, reporting experiments
andproblem solving in chemical analysis.

SyllabusUnit 1

Error Analysis and Sampling: Accuracy - Precision - Classification of Errors -Minimization of errors - Standard

deviation - Coefficient of variance - F-test - t-test - Significant figures. Sampling - Basis of sampling, Sampling andphysical
state - Safety measures of sampling.

Separation Techniques: Brief out line of column, paper and thin layer chromatography - Ion exchange methods -
principle and application – HPLC.

Unit 2

Gas chromatography - principle and applications – gel chromatography.

Electroanalytical techniques: Potentiometry - Potentiometric titration - determination of equivalence point - acidbase,

complexometric, redox and precipitation titrations - merits and demerits. Voltammetry - Cyclic voltammetry - basic
principle and application - Polarography - introduction - theoretical principles - migration current - residual current -
half wave potential - instrumentation - analytical applications.

Unit 3

Spectro-chemical techniques: UV-VIS spetrophotometry - principle - Beer's Law application - photometric titration - single
and double beam spectrophotometer - instrumentation of IR - sample handling - IR applications - H - NMR -
Instrumentation and applications – principle - instrumentation - applications of atomic absorption spectroscopy.

Thermal and Diffraction techniques: Principles and applications of DTG - DTA DSC - X-ray - Electron DiffractionStudies -
SEM, TEM.

TEXTBOOKS:
 1. Willard H W, Merritt J R, “Instrumental Methods of Analysis”, 6th edition, Prentice Hall, (1986).
2. Skoog Douglas A, West Donald, “Fundamentals of Analytical Chemistry”, 7th edition, New York Addison,
Wesley, (2001).

REFERENCES:

1. “Vogel's Textbook of Quantitative Chemical Analysis”, 5th edition, ELBS, (1989).

2. Kaur. H, “Instrumental Methods of Chemical Analysis”, Goel Publisher, (2001).
Evaluation Pattern

Assessment Internal End Semester

Periodical 1 (P1) 15

Periodical 2 (P2) 15

*Continuous Assessment (CA) 20

End Semester 50

*CA – Can be Quizzes, Assignment, Projects, and Reports.

23CHY245 BATTERIES AND FUEL CELLS L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

Course Objective:

To provide sound knowledge on the application of electrochemistry in energy storage systems.

Course Outcome

CO1: Understand the fundamental concepts of electrochemistry through electrode potential and reaction
kinetics CO2: Learn the application of the electrochemical principles for the functioning and fabrication industrial
batteries

and fuel cells

CO3: Analysis of practical problem solving in fabricating batteries and fuel cells
CO4: Evaluation of comprehensive knowledge through problem solving

SyllabusUnit 1

Background Theory: Origin of potential - electrical double layer - reversible electrode potential - standard hydrogen

electrode - emf series - measurement of potential - reference electrodes (calomel and silver/silver chloride) indicatorand
ion selective electrodes - Nernst equation - irreversible processes - kinetic treatment - Butler- Volmer equation -
Overpotential, activation, concentration and IR overpotential - its practical significance - Tafel equation and Tafelplots
- exchange current density and transfer coefficients.

Unit 2

Batteries: Primary batteries: The chemistry, fabrication and performance aspects, packing classification and rating of the
following batteries: (The materials taken their function and significance, reactions with equations, their performance in
terms of discharge, capacity, and energy density to be dealt with). Zinc-carbon (Leclanche type), zinc alkaline (Duracell),
zinc/air batteries; Lithium primary cells - liquid cathode, solid cathode and lithium-ferrous sulphide cells (comparative
account).

Secondary batteries: Lead acid and VRLA (valve regulated (sealed) lead acid), nickel-cadmium, nickel-zinc, nickel-metal
hydride batteries, lithium ion batteries, ultrathin lithium polymer cells (comparative account). Advanced Batteries for
electric vehicles, requirements of the battery - sodium-beta and redox batteries.

Unit 3

Fuel Cells: Description, working principle, anodic, cathodic and cell reactions, fabrication of electrodes and other
components, applications, advantages, disadvantages and environmental aspects of the following types of fuel cells:
Proton Exchange Membrane Fuel Cells, alkaline fuel cells, phosphoric acid, solid oxide, molten carbonate, direct
methanol fuel cells.

Membranes for fuel cells: Nafion – Polymer blends and composite membranes; assessment of performance – recent
developments.

Fuels for Fuel Cells: Hydrogen, methane, methanol - Sources and preparation, reformation processes for hydrogen –clean
up and storage of the fuels – use in cells, advantages and disadvantages of using hydrogen as fuel.

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Dell, Ronald M Rand, David A J, ‘Understanding Batteries’, Royal Society of Chemistry, (2001).
2. M. Aulice Scibioh and B. Viswanathan ‘Fuel Cells – principles and applications’, University Press, India
(2006).

REFERENCES:

1. Kanani N, ‘Electroplating and electroless plating of copper and its alloy’, ASM International, Metals Park,
OH and Metal Finishing Publications, Stevenage, UK (2003).

2. Curtis, ‘Electroforming', London, (2004).

3. F. Barbir, ‘PEM fuel cells: theory and practice’, Elsevier, Burlington, MA, (2005).
4. G. Hoogers, ‘Fuel cell handbook’, CRC, Boca Raton, FL, (2003).

Evaluation Pattern

Assessment Internal End Semester

Periodical 1 (P1) 15

Periodical 2 (P2) 15

*Continuous Assessment (CA) 20

End Semester 50

*CA – Can be Quizzes, Assignment, Projects, and Reports.

23CHY246 CORROSION SCIENCE L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

Course Outcome:

CO1: Development of skill in identifying the nature and type of

corrosionCO2: Understanding the mechanism of various types of corrosion

CO3: Analysing the problem and find out a solution to combat corrosion in any sort of environment.

CO-PO Mapping

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3 PSO4

CO1 1 2 - - - - - - - - - - 3 1 - -

CO2 - 3 1 2 - - - - - - - 1 1 2 - -

CO3 - 3 3 3 2 3 3 - - - - 1 3 2 3 -

SyllabusUnit 1

Basic principles: Free energy concept of corrosion - different forms of corrosion - Thermodynamic & Kinetic aspects of
corrosion: The free energy criterion of corrosion possibility - Mechanism of Electrochemical corrosion - Galvanic and
Electrochemical series and their significance.

Corrosion Control: Materials selection - metals and alloys - metal purification - non metallic - changing medium.

Unit 2

Anodic and cathodic protection methods - Coatings - metallic and other inorganic coatings - organic coatings - stray
current corrosion - cost of corrosion control methods.

Corrosion protection by surface treatment: CVD and PVD processes - Arc spray - Plasma spray - Flame spray.Corrosion

Inhibitors: Passivators - Vapour phase inhibitor.

Unit 3

Stress and fatigue corrosion at the design and in service condition - control of bacterial corrosion.

Corrosion protection: Automobile bodies – engines – building construction.

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Fontana and Mars G, “Corrosion Engineering”, 3rd edition, McGraw Hill, (1987).
2. Uhlig H H and Reviees R W, “Corrosion and its Control”, Wiley, (1985).

REFERENCES:

1. ASM Metals Handbook, “Surface Engineering”, Vol. 5, ASM Metals Park, Ohio, USA, (1994).
2. ASM Metals Handbook, “Corrosion”, Vol. 13, ASM Metals Park, Ohio, USA, (1994).
3. Brain Ralph, “Material Science and Technology”, CRC Series, Boston, New York.
Evaluation Pattern

Assessment Internal End Semester

Periodical 1 (P1) 15

Periodical 2 (P2) 15

*Continuous Assessment (CA) 20

End Semester 50

*CA – Can be Quizzes, Assignment, Projects, and Reports.

PHYSICS

23PHY240 ADVANCED CLASSICAL DYNAMICS L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

Course Outcomes:

CO1: Able to use the Lagrangian formalism to solve simple dynamical system

CO2: Able to understand Hamiltonian formalism and apply this in solving dynamical systems

CO3: Able to apply Lagrangian formalism in bound and scattered states with specific reference to Kepler’s
lawsand Scattering states

CO4: Able to solve problems in the Centre of Mass frame and connect it to Laboratory Frame of
ReferenceCO5: Understand and solve problems in rigid body rotations applying of Euler’s equations.

CO-PO Mapping

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

CO1 3 3 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0

CO2 3 3 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0

CO3 3 3 3 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0

CO4 3 3 3 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0

CO5 3 3 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0

SyllabusUnit 1

Introduction to Lagrangian dynamics

Survey of principles, mechanics of particles, mechanics of system of particles, constraints, D'Alembert's principle and
Lagrange's equation, simple applications of the Lagrangian formulation, variational principles and Lagrange's equations,
Hamilton's principles, derivation of Lagrange's equations from Hamilton's principle, conservation theorems and symmetry
properties.

Unit 2

Central field problem

Two body central force problem, reduction to the equivalent one body problem, Kepler problem, inverse square lawof
force, motion in time in Kepler's problem, scattering in central force field, transformation of the scattering to laboratory
system, Rutherford scattering, the three body problem.

Rotational kinematics and dynamics

Kinematics of rigid body motion, orthogonal transformation, Euler's theorem on the motion of a rigid body.

Unit 3

Angular momentum and kinetic energy of motion about a point, Euler equations of motion, force free motion of rigid body.
Practical rigid body problems

Heavy symmetrical spinning top, satellite dynamics, torque-free motion, stability of torque-free motion - dual-spin
spacecraft, satellite maneouvering and attitude control - coning maneuver - Yo-yo despin mechanism - gyroscopic
attitude control, gravity- gradient stabilization.

TEXTBOOKS:

1. H. Goldstein, Classical Mechanics, Narosa Publishing House, New Delhi, 1980, (Second Edition)
2. H. Goldstein, Charles Poole, John Safko, Classical Mechanics, Pearson education, 2002 (Third Edition)
3. Howard D. Curtis, Orbital Mechanics for Engineering Students, Elsevier, pp.475 - 543
4. Anderson John D, Modern Compressible flow, McGraw Hill.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. D. A. Walls, Lagrangian Mechanics, Schaum Series, McGraw Hill, 1967.

2. J. B. Marion and S. T. Thornton, Classical dynamics of particles and systems, Ft. Worth, TX: Saunders,
1995.

Evaluation Pattern

Assessment Internal End Semester

Periodical 1 (P1) 15

Periodical 2 (P2) 15

*Continuous Assessment (CA) 20

End Semester 50

*CA – Can be Quizzes, Assignment, Projects, and Reports.

23PHY241 ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING MATERIALS L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

Course Outcomes

CO1: To understand the nature of interaction between atoms in crystalline solid materials that determines their
dielectric, magnetic and electrical properties.

CO2: Analyze the relation between the macroscopic dielectric constant and the atomic structure of an insulator.

CO3: Fundamental concepts of magnetic fields required to illustrate the magnetic dipoles. This forms the basis to
understand the magnetic properties of dia, para, ferro, antiferro and ferri magnetic materials.

CO4: Fundamentals concerned with conduction mechanism in metals and superconductors.

CO5: Understand the basics for classification of materials based on its conductivity, nature of chemical bonds inSi and
Ge, carrier density, energy band structure and conduction mechanism in intrinsic and extrinsic semiconductors.

CO-PO Mapping

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 1 1 1 -

CO2 2 2 2 1 -

CO3 2 2 2 2 -

CO4 2 2 2 2 -

CO5 2 2 2 2 1 -

SyllabusUnit 1

Conducting materials: The nature of chemical bond, crystal structure Ohm’s law and the relaxation time, collision time,
electron scattering and resistivity of metals, heat developed in a current carrying conductor, thermal conductivity of metals,
superconductivity.

Semiconducting materials: Classifying materials as semiconductors, chemical bonds in Si and Ge and it’sconsequences,
density of carriers in intrinsic semiconductors, conductivity of intrinsic semiconductors, carrier densities in n type
semiconductors, n type semiconductors, Hall effect and carrier density.

Unit 2
Magnetic materials: Classification of magnetic materials, diamagnetism, origin of permanent, magnetic dipoles in
matter, paramagnetic spin systems, spontaneous magnetization and Curie Weiss law, ferromagnetic domains and
coercive force, anti ferromagnetic materials, ferrites and it’s applications.

Unit 3

Dielectric materials: Static dielectric constant, polarization and dielectric constant, internal field in solids and liquids,
spontaneous polarization, piezoelectricity.

PN junction: Drift currents and diffusion currents, continuity equation for minority carriers, quantitative treatment of
the p-n junction rectifier, the n-p-n transistor.

TEXTBOOK:

1. A J Decker, “Electrical Engineering materials”, PHI, New Delhi, 1957.

REFERENCES:

1. A J Decker, “Solid State Physics”, Prentice Hall, Englewood Cliffs, N J 1957.

2. C Kittel, “Introduction to solid state Physics”, Wieley, New York, 1956 (2nd edition).
3. Allison, Electronic Engineering materials and Devices, Tata Mc Graw Hill
4. F K Richtmyer E H Kennard, John N Copper, “Modern Physics”, Tata Mc Graw Hill, 1995 (5th edition).

Evaluation Pattern

Assessment Internal End Semester

Periodical 1 (P1) 15

Periodical 2 (P2) 15

*Continuous Assessment (CA) 20

End Semester 50

*CA – Can be Quizzes, Assignment, Projects, and Reports.

23PHY242 PHYSICS OF LASERS AND APPLICATIONS L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

Unit 1

Review of some basic concepts and principle of laser.

Introduction to light and its properties: Reflection, refraction, interference, diffraction and polarization. Photometry

– calculation of solid angle. Brewster’s law. Snell’s law and, its analysis.

Introduction to LASERS: Interaction of radiation with matter - induced absorption, spontaneous emission, stimulated
emission. Einstein’s co-efficient (derivation). Active material. Population inversion – concept and discussion about
different techniques. Resonant cavity.

Unit 2

Properties of LASERS

Gain mechanism, threshold condition for PI (derivation), emission broadening - line width, derivation of FWHM natural
emission line width as deduced by quantum mechanics - additional broadening process: collision broadening, broadening
due to dephasing collision, amorphous crystal broadening, Doppler broadening in laser and broadeningin gases due to
isotope shifts. Saturation intensity of laser, condition to attain saturation intensity.

Properties – coherency, intensity, directionality, monochromaticity and focussibility. LASER transition – role of electrons
in LASER transition, levels of LASER action: 2 level, 3 level and 4 level laser system.

Unit 3

Types of LASERS

Solid state LASER: (i) Ruby LASER – principle, construction, working and application. (ii) Neodymium (Nd) LASERS. gas
LASER: (i) He-Ne LASER - principle, construction, working and application. (i) CO2 LASER - principle, construction,
working and application.

Liquid chemical and dye LASERS. Semiconductor LASER: Principle, characteristics, semiconductor diode LASERS, homo-
junction and hetero-junction LASERS, high power semi conductor diode LASERS.

Applications in Communication field:

LASER communications: Principle, construction, types, modes of propagation, degradation of signal, analogue
communication system, digital transmission, fiber optic communication.
Applications of LASERS in other fields:

Holography: Principle, types, intensity distribution, applications. laser induced fusion. Harmonic generation. LASER
spectroscopy. LASERS in industry: Drilling, cutting and welding. Lasers in medicine: Dermatology, cardiology,
dentistry and ophthalmology.

REFERENCES:

1. William T Silfvast, “Laser Fundamentals”, Cambridge University Press, UK (2003).

2. B B Laud, “Lasers and Non linear Optics”, New Age International (P) Ltd., New Delhi.
 3. Andrews, “An Introduction to Laser Spectroscopy (2e)”, Ane Books India (Distributors).

4. K R Nambiar, “Lasers: Principles, Types and Applications”, New Age International (P) Ltd., New Delhi.

5. T Suhara, “Semiconductor Laser Fundamentals”, Marcel Dekker (2004).

Evaluation Pattern

Assessment Internal End Semester

Periodical 1 (P1) 15

Periodical 2 (P2) 15

*Continuous Assessment (CA) 20

End Semester 50

*CA – Can be Quizzes, Assignment, Projects, and Reports.

23PHY243 CONCEPTS OF NANOPHYSICS AND NANOTECHNOLOGY L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

Course Outcomes

CO1: Understand, Comprehend and acquaint with concepts of NanoPhysics

CO2: To familiarize the material’s property changes with respect to the dimensional confinements.

CO3: Acquire knowledge on the modern preparation process and analysis involved in the nanomaterial’s
research CO4: To learn about the technological advancements of the nano-structural materials and devices in the
engineering

applications

CO-PO Mapping

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 3 2

CO2 2 3

CO3 3

CO4 3 2 1

Syllabus Unit 1

Introduction

Introduction to nanotechnology, comparison of bulk and nanomaterials – change in band gap and large surface to
volume ratio, classification of nanostructured materials. Synthesis of nanomaterials - classification of fabrication
methods – top down and bottom up methods.

Concept of quantum confinement and phonon confinement

Basic concepts – excitons, effective mass, free electron theory and its features, band structure of solids. Bulk to nano
transition – density of states, potential well - quantum confinement effect – weak and strong confinement regime.
Electron confinement in infinitely deep square well, confinement in two and three dimension. Blue shift of band gap

- effective mass approximation. Vibrational properties of solids - phonon confinement effect and presence of surface
modes.

Unit 2

Tools for characterization:

Structural – X-ray diffraction, transmission electron microscope,scanning tunneling microscope, atomic force
microscope. Optical - UV – visible absorption and photoluminescence techniques, Raman spectroscopy.

Nanoscale materials – properties and applications:

Carbon nanostructures – structure, electrical, vibration and mechanical properties. Applications of carbon nanotubes

Unit 3
Field emission and shielding – computers – fuel cells – chemical sensors – catalysis – mechanical reinforcement.
Quantum dots and Magnetic nanomaterials – applications.

Nanoelectronics and nanodevices:

Impact of nanotechnology on conventional electronics. Nanoelectromechanical systems (NEMSs) – fabrication

(lithography) and applications. Nanodevices - resonant tunneling diode, quantum cascade lasers, single electron
transistors – operating principles and applications.

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Robert W. Kelsall, Ian W. Hamley and Mark Geoghegan, Nanoscale Science and Technology, John Wiley
and Sons Ltd 2004.
2. W. R. Fahrner (Ed.), Nanotechnology and Nanoelectronics, Springer 2006.

Evaluation Pattern

Assessment Internal End Semester

Periodical 1 (P1) 15

Periodical 2 (P2) 15

*Continuous Assessment (CA) 20

End Semester 50

*CA – Can be Quizzes, Assignment, Projects, and Reports.

23PHY244 PHYSICS OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

Course Outcomes:

CO1: Understand, comprehend and acquaint with the basics working principles and governing equations
ofelectronic devices like diodes, Bipolar junction transistors, Mosfet and heterojunction transistors

CO2: Analyze and Solve physics problems pertaining to various process like charge conduction across
semiconductor device.

CO3: Apply the knowledge for the development and design of new methods to determine
semiconductorparameters and devices

SyllabusUnit 1

Introduction: Unit cell, Bravais lattices, crystal systems, crystal planes and Miller indices, symmetry elements. Defects and
imperfections – point defects, line defects, surface defects and volume defects

Electrical conductivity: Classical free electron theory – assumptions, drift velocity, mobility and conductivity, drawbacks.
quantum free electron theory – Fermi energy, Fermi factor, carrier concentration. Band theory of solids –origin of energy
bands, effective mass, distinction between metals, insulators and semiconductors.

Unit 2

Theory of semiconductors: Intrinsic and extrinsic semiconductors, band structure of semiconductors, carrier
concentration in intrinsic and extrinsic semiconductors, electrical conductivity and conduction mechanism in
semiconductors, Fermi level in intrinsic and extrinsic semiconductors and its dependence on temperature and carrier
concentration. Carrier generation - recombination, mobility, drift-diffusion current. Hall effect.

Theory of p-n junctions – diode and transistor:p-n junction under thermal equilibrium, forward bias, reverse bias, carrier
density, current, electric field, barrier potential. V-I characteristics, junction capacitance and voltage breakdown.

Unit 3

Bipolar junction transistor, p-n-p and n-p-n transistors: principle and modes of operation, current relations. V-I
characteristics. Fundamentals of MOSFET, JFET. Heterojunctions – quantum wells.

Semiconducting devices: Optical devices: optical absorption in a semiconductor, e--hole generation. Solar cells – p-n junction,
conversion efficiency, heterojunction solar cells. Photo detectors – photo conductors, photodiode, p-i-n diode. Light
emitting diode (LED) – generation of light, internal and external quantum efficiency.

Modern semiconducting devices: CCD - introduction to nano devices, fundamentals of tunneling devices, design
considerations, physics of tunneling devices.

TEXTBOOKS:

1. C Kittel, “Introduction to Solid State Physics”, Wiley, 7th Edn., 1995.

2. D A Neamen, “Semiconductor Physics and Devices”, TMH, 3rd Edn., 2007.

REFERENCES:

1. S M Sze, “Physics of Semiconductor Devices”, Wiley, 1996.

2. P Bhattacharya, “Semiconductor Opto- Electronic Devices”, Prentice Hall, 1996.
3. M K Achuthan & K N Bhat, “Fundamentals of Semiconductor Devices”, TMH, 2007.
4. J Allison, “Electronic Engineering Materials and Devices”, TMH, 1990.
Evaluation Pattern

Assessment Internal End Semester

Periodical 1 (P1) 15

Periodical 2 (P2) 15

*Continuous Assessment (CA) 20

End Semester 50

*CA – Can be Quizzes, Assignment, Projects, and Reports.

23PHY245 ASTROPHYSICS L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

Course Outcomes:

After completion of the course students should be able to

CO1: Get a broad knowledge of scientific and technical methods in astronomy and
astrophysics.CO2: Apply mathematical methods to solve problems in astrophysics.

CO3: Develop critical/logical thinking, scientific reasoning and skills in the area of modern astrophysics.

CO-PO Mapping:

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 3 1

CO2 2 2

CO3 1 2

SyllabusUnit 1

Historical introduction: Old Indian and western – astronomy - Aryabhatta, Tycho Brahe, Copernicus, Galileo - Olbers
paradox - solar system – satellites, planets, comets, meteorites, asteroids.

Practical astronomy - telescopes and observations & techniques – constellations, celestial coordinates, ephemeris.

Celestial mechanics - Kepler’s laws - and derivations from Newton’s laws.

Sun: Structure and various layers, sunspots, flares, faculae, granules, limb darkening, solar wind and climate.

Unit 2

Stellar astronomy: H-R diagram, color-magnitude diagram - main sequence - stellar evolution – red giants, white dwarfs,
neutron stars, black holes - accretion disc - Schwartzchild radius - stellar masses Saha–Boltzman equation -derivation and
interpretation.

Variable stars: Cepheid, RR Lyrae and Mira type variables - Novae and Super novae. Binary and multiple star system

- measurement of relative masses and velocities. Interstellar clouds - Nebulae.

Unit 3

Galactic astronomy: Distance measurement - red shifts and Hubble’s law – age of the universe, galaxies – morphology

- Hubble’s classification - gravitational lens, active galactic nuclei (AGNs), pulsars, quasars.

Relativity: Special theory of relativity - super-luminal velocity - Minkowski space - introduction to general theory ofrelativity
– space - time metric, geodesics, space-time curvature. Advance of perihelion of Mercury, gravitational lens.

Cosmology: Comic principles, big bang and big crunch – cosmic background radiation - Nucleo-synthesis - planklength
and time, different cosmic models - inflationary, steady state. Variation of G. anthropic principle.

REFERENCES:

1. “Textbook of Astronomy and Astrophysics with elements of Cosmology”, V. B. Bhatia, Narosa publishing
2001.
2. William Marshall Smart, Robin Michael Green “On Spherical Astronomy“, (Editor) Carroll, Bradley W
Cambridge University Press ,1977
3. Bradley W. Carroll and Dale A. Ostlie. “Introduction to modern Astrophysics” Addison-Wesley, 1996.
4. Bradley W. Carroll and Dale A. Ostlie, “An Introduction to Modern Astrophysics” Addison-Wesley
Publishing Company,1996

5. ‘Stellar Astronomy’ by K. D Abhayankar.

6. ‘Solar Physics’ by K. D Abhayankar.

Evaluation Pattern

Assessment Internal End Semester

Periodical 1 (P1) 15

Periodical 2 (P2) 15

*Continuous Assessment (CA) 20

End Semester 50

*CA – Can be Quizzes, Assignment, Projects, and Reports.

MATHEMATICS

23MAT240 STATISTICAL INFERENCE L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

Syllabus

Unit 1

Introduction to Statistics: Data Collection and Descriptive Statistics, Populations and Samples, describing data sets,
summarizing data sets, Normal Data Sets, Paired Data Sets and the Sample Correlation Coefficient. Review of Random
Variables and Distributions, Distributions of Sampling Statistics, The Sample Mean, The Central Limit Theorem, The
Sample Variance, Sampling Distributions from a Normal Population, Distribution of the Sample Mean, Joint
Distribution of X̅ and 𝑆2, Sampling from a Finite Population.

Unit 2

Parameter Estimation: Introduction, Maximum Likelihood Estimators, Interval Estimates, Estimating the Difference in
Means of Two normal populations, Approximate Confidence Interval for the Mean of a Bernoulli random variable,
Confidence Interval of the Mean of the Exponential Distribution, Evaluating a Point Estimator, The Bayes Estimator.
Hypothesis Testing: Introduction, Significance Levels, Tests Concerning the Mean of a Normal Population, Testing the
Equality of Means of Two Normal Populations, Hypothesis Tests Concerning the Variance of a Normal Population, Tests
Concerning the Mean of a Poisson Distribution.

Unit 3

Regression: Introduction, Least Squares Estimators of the Regression Parameters, Distribution of the Estimators,
Statistical Inferences about the Regression Parameters, the Coefficient of Determination and the Sample Correlation
Coefficient, Analysis of Residuals, transforming to Linearity, Weighted Least Squares, Polynomial Regression, Multiple
Linear Regression, Predicting Future Responses, Logistic Regression Models for Binary Output Data.

TEXTBOOK:

1. Ross S.M., Introduction to Probability and Statistics for Engineers and Scientists, 3rd edition, Elsevier
Academic Press.

REFERENCES:

1. Douglas C. Montgomery and George C. Runger, Applied Statistics and Probability for Engineers, John
Wiley and Sons Inc., 2005
2. Ravichandran, J. Probability and Statistics for engineers, First Reprint Edition, Wiley India, 2012.
3. Ronald E. Walpole, Raymond H. Myers, Sharon L. Myers and Keying Ye, Probability and Statistics for
Engineers and Scientists, 8th Edition, Pearson Education Asia, 2007.
 4. Hogg, R.V., Tanis, E.A. and Rao J.M., Probability and Statistical Inference, Seventh Ed, Pearson
Education, New Delhi.

Evaluation Pattern

Assessment Internal End Semester

Periodical 1 (P1) 15

Periodical 2 (P2) 15

*Continuous Assessment (CA) 20

End Semester 50

*CA – Can be Quizzes, Assignment, Projects, and Reports.

23MAT241 INTRODUCTION TO GAME THEORY L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

Syllabus

Unit 1

Elements of Game theory, examples, Strategic Games, 2 Player Strategy Games, payoffs, Minimax, Weak and Strong
Domination, Saddle Points, Nash Equilibrium, Prisoner’s Dilemma, Stag Hunt, Matching pennies, BOS, Multi NE,
Cooperative and Competitive Games, Strict and Non Strict NE, Best response functions for NE.

Unit 2

Combinatorial games, Winning and losing positions, Subtraction Game, 3-Pile and K-Pile Games, Proof of Correctness,
Variations of K-Pile Games, Graph Games, Construction, Proof of finiteness, SG theorem for sum ofgames.

Unit 3

Cournot’s Oligopoly, Bertrand’s Oligopoly, Electoral Competition, Median Voter Theorem, Auctions, role of knowledge,
Decision making and Utility Theory, Mixed Strategy Equilibrium, Extensive Games with Perfect Information, Stackelberg’s
model of Duopoly, Buying Votes, Committee Decision making, Repeated Gmes, Prisoner’s Dilemma, Supermodular Game
and Potential games

TEXTBOOK:

1. Martin Osborne, An Introduction to Game Theory, Oxford University Press.

REFERENCES:

1. Thomas Ferguson, Game Theory, World Scientific, 2018.

2. Stef Tijs. Introduction to Game Theory, Hindustan Book Agency.
3. Allan MacKenzie, Game Theory for Wireless Engineers, Synthesis Lectures On Communications.

Evaluation Pattern

Assessment Internal End Semester

 Periodical 1 (P1) 15

Periodical 2 (P2) 15

*Continuous Assessment (CA) 20

End Semester 50

*CA – Can be Quizzes, Assignment, Projects, and Reports.

23MAT242 NUMERICAL METHODS AND OPTIMIZATION L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

Syllabus

09 (a) Roots finding methods:

Roots of Transcendental and Polynomial Equations: Bisection method, Iteration methods based on first degree equation,
Rate of convergence, system of nonlinear equations.

09 (b) Interpolations:

Interpolation and Approximation: Lagrange, Newton’s Divided Difference, Newton’s Forward and Backward
interpolations.

07 (b) Multivariable optimization (2 Credits)

Optimality criteria – unidirectional search – direct search methods – gradient based methods. Lagrangian and Kuhn-
Tucker conditions.

TEXTBOOK:

1. Edwin K.P. Chong, Stanislaw H. Zak, “An introduction to Optimization”, 2nd edition, Wiley, 2013.
2. M.K. Jain, S.R.K. Iyengar and R.K. Jain, Numerical methods for scientific and Engineering computation,
New Age International Publishers, 2007, 5th edition.

REFERENCES:

1. Kalyanmoy Deb, “Optimization for Engineering Design: Algorithms and Examples,

Prentice Hall, 2002.
2. S.S. Rao, “Optimization Theory and Applications”, Second Edition, New Age
International (P) Limited Publishers, 1995.

Evaluation Pattern

Assessment Internal End Semester

Periodical 1 (P1) 15

Periodical 2 (P2) 15
 *Continuous Assessment (CA) 20

End Semester 50

*CA – Can be Quizzes, Assignment, Projects, and Reports.

FREE ELECTIVES OFFERED UNDER MANAGEMENT STREAMCOMMON TO ALL PROGRAMS

23MNG331 FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

Course Objectives

 Understand the overview of financial management

 Inculcate methods and concepts on valuation
 Familiarize with working capital management, financial analysis and planning

Course Outcomes

CO1: Understand and apply time value concept of money and use this for investment criteria decisions.

CO2: Evaluate the risk and return for various alternatives of investment.

CO3: Apply the capital budgeting techniques and evaluate the investment decisions.

CO4: Understand working capital management, cash and liquidity management and financial statements. CO/PO

Mapping

CO/PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

CO1 3 3 1 1 3 3 1

CO2 3 3 2 1 3 3 1

CO3 3 2 1 1 3 3 1

CO4 3 2 1 2 1 2 3 3 1

SyllabusUnit 1

Introduction: Financial Management an overview – Financial Decisions in a firm – Goal of FM – Function of the
financial system.

Unit 2

Fundamental Valuation Concepts:Time value of money – Risk and Return. Capital Budgeting: Techniques of capital
budgeting investment criteria– NPV – Benefit Cost Ratio – IRR – Payback Period – ARR – Investment appraisal inPractice
– Estimation of Project cost flows.
Unit 3

Working Capital Management: Current Assets – Financing Ruling – Profit Criterion. Cash and Liquidity Management. Working
Capital Financing.

Financial Analysis and Planning: financial instruments, sources of long-term, intermediate term and short term finance.
Analyzing Financial Performance – Break – even analysis and Leverages – Financial Planning and Budgeting.

Mergers and Takeovers-International trade.

TEXT BOOKS

1. Chandra, P., ‘Financial Management: Theory and Practice’, 9e, TMH, 2017.
2. Denzil Watson & Antony Head, ‘Corporate Finance- Principles and Practice’, 2e, Pearson Education Asia,
2016.
3. R L Varshney& K L. Maheshwari, ‘Managerial Economics’, S Chand & Sons, 22e, 2014.
REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Stephen Blyth, ‘An Introduction to Corporate Finance ’,McGraw Hill Book Company, 2014.
2. Eugene F. Brigham & Louis C.Gapenski, ‘Financial Management – Theory and Practice’,14e, 2015.

Evaluation Pattern

Assessment Internal End Semester

Periodical 1 15

Periodical 2 15

*Continuous Assessment (CA) 20

End Semester 50

*CA – Can be Quizzes, Assignments, Projects, and Reports

23MNG332 SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

Course Objectives

 Understand the complexity and key issues in supply chain management.

 Describe logistics networks, distribution planning, routing design and scheduling models.
 Familiarize dynamics of supply chain and the role of information in supply chain.
 Understand the issues related to strategic alliances, global supply chain management, procurement
andoutsourcing strategies.

Course Outcomes

CO1: Analyze the complexity and key issues in supply chain management

CO2: Evaluate single and multiple facility location problems, logistics network configuration, vehicle routing and
scheduling models

CO3: Analyze inventory management models and dynamics of the supply chain

CO4: Develop the appropriate supply chain through distribution requirement planning and strategic alliances

CO5: Identify the issues in global supply chain management, procurement and outsourcing strategies

CO/PO Mapping

CO/PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

CO1 3 1 1 1 3

CO2 2 2 3 1 1 1 2 2

CO3 3 3 3 3 2 3 1 1 3 2

CO4 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 2

CO5 3 3 3 1 3 1 1 3 2

SyllabusUnit 1

Introduction: Introduction to SCM-the complexity and key issues in SCM – Location strategy – facility locationdecisions –
single facility and multiple location models.

Logistics: Logistics Network Configuration – data collection-model and data validation- solution techniques-network
configuration DSS – Transport strategy – Service choices: single service and inter modal services – vehicle routingand
scheduling models – traveling salesman problems – exact and heuristic methods.
Unit 2

Inventory: Inventory Management and risk pooling-managing inventory in the SC. Value of Information-bullwhipeffect-
lead time reduction.

Supply Chain Integration: Supply chain integration-distributed strategies-push versus pull systems. Distribution
Requirements Planning – DRP and demand forecasting, DRP and master production scheduling. DRP techniques –time-
phased order point – managing variations in DRP – safety stock determination-Strategic alliances-third partylogistics-
distribution integration.

Unit 3

Issues in SCM: Procurement and outsourcing strategies – framework of e-procurement. International issues in SCM-
regional differences in logistics. Coordinated product and supply chain design-customer value and SCM.

TEXT BOOK

Simchi-Levi,D.,Kaminsky,P.,Simchi-Levi,E., Shankar,R., ‘Designing and Managing the Supply Chain: Concepts, Strategies,
and Cases’, Tata McGraw Hill, 2008.
REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Christopher, M., ‘Logistics and Supply Chain Management: Strtegies for reducing Cost and Improving
Service’, PH, 1999.
2. Ballou, M., ‘Business logistics / Supply chain management’, Pearson Education, 2003.
3. Vollmann, T.E., ‘Manufacturing Planning and Control for Supply Chain Management’, 5e, McGraw Hill,
2005.

Evaluation Pattern

Assessment Internal End Semester

Periodical 1 15

Periodical 2 15

*Continuous Assessment (CA) 20

End Semester 50

*CA – Can be Quizzes, Assignments, Projects, and Reports

23MNG333 MARKETING MANAGEMENT L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

Course Objective

To educate the students to apply concepts and techniques in marketing so that they become acquainted with the duties of a
marketing manager with an emphasis to make the students exposed to the development, evaluation, and
implementation of marketing management in a variety of business environments.

Course Outcomes

On successful completion of the Course students will be able to:

CO1: Illustrate key marketing concepts, theories and techniques for analysing a variety of marketing situations

CO2: Identify and demonstrate the dynamic nature of the environment in which marketing decisions are taken
and appreciate the implication for marketing strategy determination and implementation

CO3: Develop the ability to carry out a research project that explores marketing planning and strategies for
aspecific marketing situation

CO4: Understand the need and importance of sales promotions and make use of advertising

CO5: Manage a new product development process from concept to commercialization.

CO6: Illustrate the importance of modern trends in retailing and marketing logistics

CO/PO Mapping

CO/PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

CO1 3 1 1

CO2 1 3 3 2 1 2 2 2

CO3 1 1 1 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 3

CO4 2 2 2 1 1 3 3 3
 CO5 1 1 3 2 1 1 1 2 3

CO6 1 1 3 2 1 1 1 2 3

SyllabusUnit 1

Marketing Process: Definition, Marketing process, dynamics, needs, wants and demands, value and satisfaction,
marketing concepts, environment, mix. Philosophies, selling versus marketing, organizations, industrial versus
consumer marketing, consumer goods, industrial goods, product hierarchy.

Buying Behaviour and Market Segmentation: Major factors influencing buying behaviour, buying decision process,
businessbuyingbehaviour. Segmenting consumer and business markets, market targeting.

UNIT 2

Product Pricing and Marketing Research: Objectives, pricing, decisions and pricing methods, pricing management.
Introduction, uses, process of marketing research.

UNIT 3

Developing New Products - Challenges in new-product Development - Effective organizational arrangements - Managing
the development Process: ideas - Concept to strategy - Development to commercialization – The consumer- adoption
process.

Advertising Sales Promotion and Distribution: Characteristics, impact, goals, types, and sales promotions- point of
purchase- unique selling proposition. Characteristics, wholesaling, retailing, channel design, logistics, and modern
trends in retailing.

TEXT BOOKS

1. Kolter, P.,‘Marketing Management’, Pearson Education 2001.

2. Ramasamy and Namakumari, ‘Marketing Environment: Planning, implementation and control the Indian
context’, 1990.

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Paul, G.E. and Tull, D., ‘Research for marketing decisions’, Prentice Hall of India, 1975.
2. Tull, D.S. and Hawkins, ‘Marketing Research’, Prentice Hall of Inida-1997.
3. Kotler, P. and Armstrong, G., ‘Principles of Marketing’ Prentice Hall of India, 2000.
4. Skinner, S.J., ‘Marketing’, All India Publishers and Distributes Ltd. 1998.
5. Govindarajan, M., ‘Industrial marketing management’, Vikas Publishing Pvt. Ltd, 2003.

Evaluation Pattern

Assessment Internal End Semester

Periodical 1 15

Periodical 2 15

*Continuous Assessment (CA) 20

End Semester 50

*CA – Can be Quizzes, Assignments, Projects, and Reports

23MNG334 PROJECT MANAGEMENT L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

Course Objectives

 To discuss the project life cycle and build a successful project from pre-implementation to completion.
 To introduce different project management tools and techniques

Course Outcomes

CO1: Appraise the selection and initiation of individual projects and its portfolios in an enterprise.
CO2: Analyze the project planning activities that will predict project costs, time schedule, and
quality.CO3: Develop processes for successful resource allocation, communication, and risk management.

CO4: Evaluate effective project execution and control techniques that results in successful project completion

CO/PO Mapping

CO/PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

CO1 2 3 2 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 2

CO2 2 3 3 2 2 3 3 2 2 3 3

CO3 1 2 3 2 2 2 3 2 1 2 3

CO4 1 1 2 1 2 3 1 1 1 2

SyllabusUnit 1

Overview of Project Management: Verities of project, Project Features, Project Life Cycle – S-Curve, J-C Project
Selection: Project Identification and Screening – New ideas, Vision, Long-term objectives, SWOT Analysis (Strength,
Weakness, Opportunities, Threats).

Project Appraisal – Market Appraisal, Technical Appraisal, Economic Appraisal, Ecological Appraisal, and Financial Appraisal
– Payback, Net Present Value (NPV), Internal Rate of Returns (IRR).

Project Selection – Decision Matrix, Technique for Order Preference using Similarity to Ideal Solution (TOPSIS), Simple
Additive Weighting (SAW).

Unit 2
Project Presentation: WBS, Project Network – Activity on Arrow (A-O-A), Activity on Node (A-O-N).Project
Scheduling: Gant Chart, Critical Path Method (CPM), Project Evaluation & Review Technique (PERT).(6hrs)

Linear time cost trade-offs in project - Direct cost, indirect cost, Project crashingResource
Consideration - Profiling, Allocation, Levelling.

Introduction to project management software: Primavera/ Microsoft project

Unit 3

Project Execution: Monitoring control cycle, Earned Value Analysis (EVA), Project Control – Physical control, Human
control, financial control.

Organizational and Behavioral Issues: Organizational Structure, Selection-Project Manager, Leadership Motivation,
Communication, Risk Management.

Project Termination: Extinction, Addition, Integration, Starvation.

TEXT BOOKS

1. Jack R. Meredith and Samuel J. Mantel, Jr. - ‘Project Management- A Managerial Approach’ Eighth
Edition - John Wiley & Sons Inc - 2012.
2. Arun Kanda – ‘Project Management-A Life Cycle Approach’ PHI Learning Private Limited - 2011
REFERENCE BOOKS

1. ‘A Guide to Project Management Body of Knowledge’ PMBOK GUIDE, Sixth edition, Project management
Institute – 2017
2. Ted Klastrorin - ‘Project Management, Tools, and Trade-Offs’ - John Wiley – 2011

Evaluation Pattern

Assessment Internal End Semester

Periodical 1 15

Periodical 2 15

*Continuous Assessment (CA) 20

End Semester 50

*CA – Can be Quizzes, Assignments, Projects, and Reports

23MNG335 ENTERPRISE MANAGEMENT L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

Course Objectives

 To impart knowledge on the fundamentals of costing, pricing methods and strategies.

 To give an overview of production operations planning.
 To summarize various quantitative methods of plant location, layout and lean manufacturing.
 To familiarize the concepts of e-commerce, e-purchasing, MRP and ERP in business

Course Outcomes

At the end of the course, the student will be able to:

CO1: Understand the concepts of cost and pricing of goods and appraise project proposals

CO2: Design and analyze manufacturing and service processes and to measure the work performed.

CO3: Understand and analyze the key issues of supply chain Management

CO4: Understand the application of lean manufacturing tools and six sigma concepts

CO5: Select appropriate plant location and their layout methods

CO6: Create capacity plan, aggregate plan, schedule, ERP & MRP systems

CO/PO Mapping

CO/PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

CO1 2 2 1 1 2 2

CO2 2 1 1 2 1 1

CO3 2 1 2 1 1

CO4 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 1

CO5 2 1 1 2

CO6 2 2 1 1 1 2 1 1

SyllabusUnit 1

Engineering Economics: cost concepts - types of costs - cost functions. Cost controls: reduction – tools & applications.Pricing
policies – methods – problems.Process design and improvement – process capacity – process layout – process reengineering
– job design. Work standards – work measurement – work sampling – problems.

Unit 2

Supply Chain Management – Basic Concepts, SC dynamics, push-pull boundary, integrated supply chain, logistics,
customer relationship, supplier relationship – selection, rating and development, procurement, SC metrics and
performance measurement - problems. Lean Manufacturing – concepts, wastes – tools viz., pull system, standardized work,
takt time, kanban system, JIT, kaizen, SMED, 5S, value stream mapping, benefits of lean and implementation issues.
Introduction to Six Sigma. Plant Location – globalization, factors affecting location decisions, facility location- Break-even
method, rectilinear, factor-rating and centre of gravity – problems. Plant Layout – types, process layout,product layout,
Systematic layout planning (SLP), Line Balancing problems. Capacity Planning – Aggregate Planning

– importance, planning process, methods – problems.

Unit 3

Role of IT in business performance improvement – e-commerce – e-purchasing –Master Production Schedule, inventory
lot sizing strategies, MRP basics – MRP explosion, Available to Promise(ATP) inventory – MRP calculations – MRP II –
Scheduling – Gantt chart – Introduction to ERP – ERP software – ERP modules – ERP implementation.

TEXT BOOKS
 1. L J Krajewski, L.P.RitzmanMalhotra.M and Samir K. Srivastava, ‘Operations Management: Processes and
Value chains, 11e, Pearson, 2015.
2. R L Varshney& K L. Maheshwari, ‘Managerial Economics’, S Chand & Sons, 22e, 2014.

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Richard B. Chase, Ravi Shankar, F. Robert Jacobs, ‘Operations and Supply Chain Management’ McGraw
Hill Education (India) Private Limited.14e, 2017.
2. E S Buffa and R K Sariss, ‘Modern Production/Operations Management’, Wiley India Private Limited, 8e,
2007.
3. Harrison.B, Smith.C., and Davis.B.,, ‘Introductory Economics’, 2e Pr Macmillan, 2013.

Evaluation Pattern

Assessment Internal End Semester

Periodical 1 15

Periodical 2 15

*Continuous Assessment (CA) 20

End Semester 50

*CA – Can be Quizzes, Assignments, Projects, and Reports.

23MNG336 OPERATIONS RESEARCH L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

Course Objectives

Familiarizing the students with quantitative tools and techniques, which are frequently applied in operational decisions

Course Outcomes

CO1: Formulate operations research models to optimize resources.

CO2: Solve transportation and assignment problems using suitable techniques.

CO3: Apply appropriate technique to analyze a project with an objective to optimize resources.

CO4: Solve operational problems using decision theory approaches.

CO5: Select suitable inventory model for effective utilisation of resources.

CO6: Solve Operations Research problems using software package

CO/PO Mapping

CO/PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

CO1 3 2 2 2 2 2 2

CO2 3 2 2 2 2 2 2

CO3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2

CO4 3 2 2 2 2 2 2

CO5 3 2 2 2 2 2 2

CO6 3 2 2 2 2 2 2

SyllabusUnit1

Linear Programming: Formulations - graphical solutions - Simplex Method - Duality, Dual simplex method.Transportation
model: Assignment model – Travelling Salesman Problem.

Unit 2

Decision Theory: Decision Trees. Game theory - 2 person zero sum; mixed strategies; 2 x n and m x 2 games. Network
Models- Project Networks- CPM / PERT- Project Scheduling – crashing networks and cost considerations-Resource
leveling and smoothing - shortest route problem, minimal spanning tree problem, maximal flow problem.

Unit 3

Sequencing model – 2 machines ‘n’ jobs, ‘m’ machines ‘n’ jobs – n jobs 2 machines.

Inventory models: deterministic & probabilistic models. Quantity discounts. Selective Inventory Management Queuing
models: Poisson arrival and exponential service times. Single server, multi-server. Queues -infinite and finite capacity
queues.

Simulation –Monte Carlo simulation: simple problems

Lab session: Practicing case problems with excel solver/MatLab/LINGO package

TEXT BOOK

Hillier, F .S. and Lieberman, G .J, ‘Operations Research’, 9e, McGraw Hill, 2010

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Taha,H.A., ‘Operations Research: an Introduction’, 8e, Prentice HalI, New Delhi, 2008.
2. Ravindran, A., Phillips, D.J., and Solberg, J.J., ‘Operations Research- Principles and Practice’, John Wiley&
Sons, 2005.
3. Wagner, H.M., ‘Principles of Operations Research’, Prentice Hall, New Delhi, 1998.
 4. Hardley, G.,‘Linear Programming’, Narosa Book Distributors Private Ltd 2002.

Evaluation Pattern

Assessment Internal End Semester

Periodical 1 10

Periodical 2 10

*Continuous Assessment (Theory) (CAT) 15

*Continuous Assessment(Lab) (CAL) 30

End Semester 35

*CA – Can be Quizzes, Assignments, Projects, and Reports

23MEE321 INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

Course Objectives

 To inculcate the concepts of work study and its application to industrial practice
 Impart skills to design, develop, implement, and improve manufacturing/service systems

Course Outcomes

At the end of the course, the student will be able to

CO1: Create value to organizations through the analysis, evaluation, and improvement of work systems using
work study and method study

CO2: Develop work systems through motion economy principles

CO3: Apply work measurement techniques to improve productivity, fix wages and incentives

CO4: Apply systematic layout planning techniques and work station design principles based on ergonomics
andmaterial handling.

CO/PO Mapping

CO/PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

CO1 2 1 1 1 1 3 2

CO2 2 1 2 1 1 1 3 2

CO3 1 2 1 1 1 3 2

CO4 2 2 1 2 2 3 2

SyllabusUnit 1

Work System: Elements of work, maintenance of machines, interaction, effect of working conditions and environment,
physical and mental fatigue.

Productivity: Productivity, factors affecting production, Measurement of productivity.

Work Study: Definition and scope of work study; Areas of application of work study in industry; Human aspects ofwork
study.
Method Study: Information collection, recording techniques, and processing aids; critical examination; development,
installation and maintenance of improved methods.

Unit 2

Motion Economy and Analysis: Principles of motion economy; Motion analysis; Micromotion and Memomotion study;
Therbligs and SIMO charts; Normal work area and design of work places; Basic parameters and principles ofwork design.

Work Measurement: Work measurement techniques; Calculation of standard time, work sampling and predetermined
Motion time systems.

Wages and Incentive Schemes: Introduction, wage payment of direct and indirect labour, wage payment plans and
incentives, various incentive plans, incentives for indirect labour

Unit 3

Plant Layout: Concept of plant layout, types of layout; factors affecting plant layout.

Ergonomics: Ergonomic Design of equipment and work place. work station design, factors considered in designing awork
station, ergonomic design standards - Study of development of stress in human body and their consequences. Case
Studies.Production planning and scheduling.

Material Handling: Introduction and functions of material handling equipment, selection of material handling
equipment for different requirements, safety requirements.
Recent advances in Industrial Engineering.

TEXT BOOKS

1. Barnes, R, “Motion and Time Study” - Design and Measurement of Work . NY: John Wiley and Sons, 8th
Edition, 1985.
2. “Introduction to Work Study”, 4ed, International Labor Office, Geneva, 2006.

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Martand T. Telsang, ‘Industrial Engineering and Production Management’ S Chand; 2nd Rev Edn 2006.
2. Mahajan M., “Industrial Engineering and Production Management” Dhanpat rai and Sons Publishers,
2005.

Evaluation Pattern

Assessment Internal End Semester

Periodical 1 15

Periodical 2 15

*Continues Assessment (CA) 20

End Semester 50

*CA – Can be Quizzes, Assignments, Projects, and Reports

23MEE323 MANAGERIAL STATISTICS L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

Course Objective

To impart the knowledge of basic statistical tools for analysis and interpretation of qualitative and quantitativedata for
decision making

Course Outcomes

CO1: Apply basic probability and statistics concepts for various business problems

CO2: Perform test of hypothesis

CO3: Compute and interpret the result of regression and correlation analysis for forecasting

CO4: Solve real time problems by applying different decision making methods.

CO/PO Mapping

CO/PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

CO1 3 3 2 2 2 2 3

CO2 3 3 2 2 2 2 3

CO3 3 3 2 2 2 2 3

CO4 3 3 2 2 2 2 3

SyllabusUnit 1

Quantitative methods: Basic terminology in probability, probability rules, conditions of statistical dependence and
independence, Bayes Theorem, Discrete Random Variables review of probability distributions, measure of central
tendency.

Sampling and sampling distributions: Introduction to sampling, random sampling, design of experiments, introduction
to sampling distributions

Estimation: point estimates, interval estimates and confidence intervals, calculating interval estimates of mean from large
samples, using t test, sample size estimation.

Unit 2
Testing hypothesis: Introduction, basic concepts, testing hypothesis, testing when population standard deviation is
known and not known, two sample tests.

Chi-square and analysis of variance: introduction, goodness of fit, analysis of variance, inferences about a population
variation

Unit 3

Regression and correlation: Estimation using regression line, correlation analysis, finding multiple regression equation,
modelling techniques,

Non parametric methods and time series and forecasting: Sign test for paired data, rank sum test, rank correlation,
Kolmogrov – smirnov test, variations in time series, trend analysis, cyclic variation, seasonal variation and irregular
variation. Decision theory: Decision tree analysis

TEXT BOOKS

1. Levin R. I. and Rubin D. S. - ‘Statistics for management’ - Pearson Education – 2007 - 5th Edition
2. Montgomery D. C. and Runger G. C. - ‘Applied Statistics and Probability for Engineers’ - John Wiley &
Sons - 2002 - 3rd Edition

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Bain.L. J. and Engelhardt M. - ‘Introduction to Probability and Mathematical Statistics’ - Duxbury Press -
March 2000 - 2nd Edition

2. Hinkelmann K. and Kempthorne O. - ‘Design and Analysis of Experiments : Volume I’ - John Wiley & Sons,
Inc. - December 2007 - 2nd Edition
3. Johnson R. A. and Wichern D. W. - ‘Applied Multivariate Statistical Analysis’ - Prentice-Hall, Inc. -
December 2001 - 5th Edition
4. Myers R. H. - ‘Classical and Modern Regression with Applications’ - PWS-Kent Publishing Company -
March 2000 - 2nd Edition
5. Devore J. L. - ‘Probability and Statistics for Engineering and the Sciences’ - Brooks/Cole Publishing
Company - December 1999 - 5th Edition
6. Freund J. E. and Walpole R. E. - ‘Mathematical Statistics’ - Prentice-Hall Inc. - October 1986 - 4th Edition

Evaluation Pattern

Assessment Internal End Semester

Periodical 1 15

Periodical 2 15

*Continuous Assessment (CA) 20

End Semester 50

*CA – Can be Quizzes, Assignments, Projects, and Reports

23MEE323 TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

Course Objective

To impart knowledge on quality management principles, tools, techniques and quality standards for real lifeapplications

Course Outcomes

CO1: Evaluate the principles of quality management and to explain how these principles can be applied
withinquality management systems.

CO2: Evaluate the performance measures using various quality and management tools

CO3: Apply the Quality Function Deployment, Taguchi principles, Total Productive Maintenance and Failure
Mode and Effect Analysis concepts to solve industrial problems.

CO4: Practice the various quality system in industry.

CO/PO Mapping

CO/PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

CO1 1 2 2 2

CO2 1 2 2 2

CO3 2 2 2 2 2

CO4 2 2 2 2 2 2

SyllabusUnit 1

Definition of quality - dimensions of quality. Quality planning - quality costs. Total Quality Management: historical review
and principles –leadership - quality council - quality statements - strategic planning - Deming philosophy.Barriers to
TQM implementation

Unit 2

Customer satisfaction – Customer retention - Employee involvement - Performance appraisal - Continuous process
improvement - Supplier partnership - Performance measures. Seven tools of quality.Statistical fundamentals - Control
Charts for variables and attributes - Process capability - Concept of six sigma - New seven management tools

- Benchmarking.

Unit 3
Quality function deployment (QFD) - Taguchi quality loss function - Total Productive Maintenance (TPM) - FMEA.Need
for quality systems - ISO 9000:2000 – Elements of quality systems (such as ISO 9000:2000). Implementation of quality
system – documentation - quality auditing - QS 9000-ISO 14000

TEXT BOOK

Besterfiled D. H. - ‘Total Quality Management’ - Pearson Education Asia – 2015-4th Edition

REFERENCE BOOKS

1. Evans J. R, and Lidsay W. M. - ‘The Management and Control of Quality’ - Southwestern (Thomson
Learning) - 2002 - 5th Edition
2. Feigenbaum A. V. - ‘Total Quality Management - Vol I &II ’ – McGraw Hill - 1991
Evaluation Pattern

Assessment Internal End Semester

Periodical 1 15

Periodical 2 15

*Continuous Assessment (CA) 20

End Semester 50

*CA – Can be Quizzes, Assignments, Projects, and Reports

23MEE324 LEAN MANUFACTURING L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

Course Objectives

 Understand Lean manufacturing principles and tools

 Inculcate the concepts of value stream mapping
 Familiarize lean implementation practices

Course Outcomes

CO1: Identify key requirements and concepts in lean manufacturing.

CO2: Initiate a continuous improvement change program in a manufacturing organizationCO3:

Analyze and improve a manufacturing system by applying lean manufacturing toolsCO4: Build
value stream map for improving the productivity

CO5: Improve productivity through lean practices

CO/PO Mapping

CO/PO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2 PSO3

CO1 2 2 2

CO2 2 2 2 1 2 1 1 2 1

CO3 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 2

CO4 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1

CO5 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1

SyllabusUnit 1

Introduction to Lean and Factory Simulation: History of Lean and comparison to other methods - The 7 Wastes, their
causes and the effects - An overview of Lean Principles / concepts / tools - Stockless Production.

The Tools of Lean Manufacturing: Continuous Flow – Continuous Flow Manufacturing and Standard Work Flow –5S and
Pull Systems (Kanban and ConWIP systems) – Error Proofing and Set-up Reduction – Total Productive Maintenance
(TPM) – Kaizen Event examples. Toyota production systems.

Ford production systems – FPS gear model

Unit 2

Value Stream Mapping – Current state: Preparation for building a Current State Value Stream Map – Building a Current
State Map (principles, concepts, loops, and methodology) – Application to the factory Simulation scenario.
Unit 3

Value Stream Mapping – Future State: Key issues in building the Future State Map – Process tips in building the map and
analysis of the customer loop, supplier loop, manufacturing loop and information loop – Example of completedFuture
State Maps – Application to factory simulation

Implementation of lean practices - Best Practices in Lean Manufacturing.

TEXT BOOKS

1. Womack, J.P., Jones, D.T., and Roos, D.,‘The Machine that Changed the World’, Simon & Schuster, New
York, 2007.
2. Liker, J.K., ‘Becoming Lean’, Industrial Engineering and Management Press, 1997.

REFERENCES BOOKS

1. Womack, J.P. and Jones, D.T.,‘Lean thinking’, Simon & Schuster, USA, 2003.
2. Rother, M. and Shook, J., ‘Learning to see’, The Lean Enterprise Institute, Brookline, USA, 2003.
Evaluation Pattern

Assessment Internal End Semester

Periodical 1 15

Periodical 2 15

*Continuous Assessment (CA) 20

End Semester 50

*CA – Can be Quizzes, Assignments, Projects, and Reports

23CSE321 SOFTWARE PROJECT MANAGEMENT L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

Course Objectives

● This course describes the key aspects of a software project.

● It introduces the basic principles of Engineering Software Projects. Most, if not all, students’ complete
projects as part of assignments in various courses undertaken. These projects range in size, subject and
complexity but there are basic project essentials that need to be understood and practiced for successful team
project outcomes.
● The course provides an understanding of the purpose, methods and benefits of process management by
exposing the student to the concepts, practices, processes, tools and techniques used in process
managementfor software development.

Course Outcomes

CO 1: To understand the basic concepts, terminologies and issues of software project management.

CO 2: To apply appropriate methods and models for the development of solutions.

CO 3: To analyze the cost-benefits of calculations so as to optimize the selection strategyCO 4: To

evaluate methods, models and technologies towards achieving project successCO 5: To design
and evaluate network planning models with criticality

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PSO

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO

CO1 3 1 1 1 3 2

CO2 3 2 3 3 3 2 3 2

CO3 3 2 2 3 2 2 2 2 3 3 2 2 3 2

CO4 2 2 2 1 3 2 2 2 3 3 2 3 2

CO5 3 2 3 3 3 2 2 2 3 3 2 3 2

SyllabusUnit 1

Introduction to Software Project Management- Software Projects - ways of categorizing software projects – problems with
software projects - Project Life Cycle– Management -Setting objectives –Stakeholders - Project Team- Step-wise

: An overview of project planning -project Evaluation –Selection Of Appropriate Project Objectives- Software Effort
Estimation Techniques, Function Point Analysis-Object Point-COCOMO.
Unit 2

Activity planning-- project schedules - sequencing and scheduling projects - Network planning model – AON andAOA-
identifying critical activities-Crashing And Fast Tracking-,Risk management—Categories , Risk planning, Management
and Control - Evaluating risks to the schedule. PERT- Resource Allocation, Monitoring and Tracking -Monitoring and control
- allocation - identifying resource requirements - scheduling resources - creating critical paths

- publishing schedule - cost schedules- sequence schedule.

Unit 3

Monitoring and control – Visualizing Progress, Earned value analysis, managing people and organizing teams-
organizational structures- Planning for small projects. Case Study: PMBOK , Agile Development

TEXT BOOK(S)

Mike Cotterell, Bob Hughes. Software Project Management, Fifth Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill; 2012.

REFERENCE(S)
 1. Roger S. Pressman. Software Engineering – A Practioner’s Approach, Eighth Edition, Tata McGraw-
Hill publishers; 2014.
2. Jalote P. Software Project Management in practice, Second edition, Person Education; 2003.

Evaluation Pattern

Assessment Internal External

Periodical 1 (P1) 15

Periodical 2 (P2) 15

*Continuous Assessment (CA) 20

End Semester 50

*CA – Can be Quizzes, Assignment, Projects, and Reports.

23CSE322 FINANCIAL ENGINEERING L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

Pre-Requisite(s): 19MAT112 Linear Algebra, 19MAT205 Probability and Random Processes

Course Objectives

● This course serves as an introduction to financial engineering including cash flows, financial decision making
etc
● It gives a thorough yet highly accessible mathematical coverage of standard and recent topics of introductory
investments: fixed-income securities, modern portfolio theory, optimal portfolio growth and valuation
ofmulti-period risky investments.

Course Outcomes

CO1: Apply basic concepts to understand and evaluate cash flows

CO2: Evaluate and arrive at a financial investment decision employing the underlying knowledge of stocks
andderivatives

CO3: Analyse and design Portfolio selection methods

CO4: Understand capital market theory for stock performance evaluation

CO-PO Mapping

PO/
PSO
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO

CO1 2 1 2 3 2

CO2 2 3 1 3 2

CO3 1 3 2 3 2

CO4 2 1 3 2

SyllabusUnit 1

Cash Flows and Fixed income securities: Investments and markets - Principal and interest - Present and future valuesof
streams - IRR. Fixed income securities - Market value for future cash - Bond value - Bond details – Yields – Convexity –
Duration - Immunization. Bond portfolio management - Level of market interest rates, Term structureof interest-rate
theories.
Unit 2

Stocks and Derivatives: Common stock valuation - Present value of cash dividends - Earnings approach - Value versus price -
Efficient markets theory - Technical analysis. Analysis of financial statements. Derivatives - futures and options

- Black Scholes formula - Utility functions - Applications in financial decision making.

Unit 3

Portfolio analysis and capital market theory: Covariance of returns – Correlation - Portfolio return - Portfolio standard
deviation - Two asset case - Efficient frontier - Optimum portfolio. Capital market theory - Capital market line - Sample
diversifications to reduce risk - Characteristic line - Capital asset pricing model. Arbitrage price theory - Stock performance
evaluation.

TEXT BOOK(S)

1. David Luenberger, Investment Science. Second Edition, Oxford University Press; 2013
2. Jack Clark Francis, Richard W. Taylor. Investments, Schaum’s Outlines, Tata McGraw Hill ;2006.
REFERENCE(S)

1. Lyuu YD. Financial Engineering and Computation. Cambridge University Press; 2004.
2. Perry H. Beaumont. Financial Engineering Principles. John Wiley and Sons Inc, New Jersey; 2004.

Evaluation Pattern

Assessment Internal External

Periodical 1 (P1) 15

Periodical 2 (P2) 15

*Continuous Assessment (CA) 20

End Semester 50

*CA – Can be Quizzes, Assignment, Projects, and Reports.

23CSE323 ENGINEERING ECONOMIC ANALYSIS L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

Course Objectives

● Prepare engineering students to analyze and understand the business, impact of economic environment
onbusiness decisions

Course Outcomes

CO1: Understand and evaluate the economic theories, cost concepts and pricing policies and draw inferences
forthe investment decisions for appraisal and profitability

CO2: Appraise the dynamics of the market and market structures and portray implication for profit and
revenuemaximization

CO3: Employ operations research and allied techniques in managerial economics for an enhanced analysis
anddecision making

CO-PO Mapping

PO/
PSO
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO

CO1 2 3 2 2 2 2 3 2 3 2

CO2 1 3 2 1 2 2 3 2 3 2

CO3 2 3 2 2 2 2 3 2 3 2

SyllabusUnit 1

Economics: Nature and scope of managerial economics. Economic theory and managerial economics, Cost Concepts:
Types of costs - Cost functions. Cost controls: reduction – Tools & Areas. Pricing policies- methods. Capital budgeting

- cost of capital. Appraising project profitability

Unit 2

The essentials of demand and supply: The law of demand. Market demand curve. Other determinants of market
demand. The law of supply. Determinants of market supply. The market mechanism. Price elasticity of demand, Profit and
revenue maximization: Optimal input combination. Total revenue maximization.

Unit 3
Market structure: Perfect competition and monopoly. Characteristics of monopolistic competition. Oligopoly Operations
Research techniques in managerial economics: Inventory models. Theory of games. Decision theory, Risk and Uncertainty,
Measuring risk, Consumer behavior and risk aversion, Decision making under uncertainty with complete ignorance

TEXT BOOK(S)

Webster, T.J. Managerial Economics- Theory and Practice, Elsevier; 2004.

REFERENCE(S)

1. Panneerselvam, R. Engineering Economics, Second Edition, PHI; 2013.

2. R L Varshney,K L. Maheshwari. Managerial Economics, S Chand & Sons;2014.
3. Harrison.B, Smith.C., and Davis.B. Introductory Economics, Second Edition, Pr Macmillan; 2013.
Evaluation Pattern

Assessment Internal External

Periodical 1 (P1) 15

Periodical 2 (P2) 15

*Continuous Assessment (CA) 20

End Semester 50

*CA – Can be Quizzes, Assignment, Projects, and Reports.

23CSE324 INFORMATION SYSTEMS L-T-P-C: 3-0-0-3

Course Objectives

● This course is to expose the students to the managerial issues relating to information systems and
alsounderstand the role of Business Process Reengineering technique in an organization.
● The course also focus on the management of information technology to provide efficiency and
effectiveness or strategy decision making.

Course Outcomes

CO1: Understand the fundamental concepts of Information Systems in business.

CO2: Understand and analyse the strategic role played by Information Systems in e-commerce.

CO3: Analyse management challenges in Global Businesses predominantly dependent on IS functions.

CO-PO Mapping

PO/
PSO
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO

CO1 3 3 2

CO2 2 2 2 3 2

CO3 1 3 2 2 2 1 3 2

SyllabusUnit 1

Introduction to IS -Fundamental concepts-IS in Business- Role of IS –Information system and technologies –

Components of IS –resources and acivities –Types of IS- E business Applications –Role of BI and Analytics in IS-Functional
Business Systems - Marketing Systems, Manufacturing systems, Human Resource Systems, Accounting Systems and
Financial Management Systems.-Cross-Functional Enterprise Systems Cross-Functional Enterprise Applications,
Enterprise Application Integration, Transaction Processing Systems and Enterprise Collaboration Systems. Enterprice
Business Systems CRM, ERP, SCM , Case Studies

Unit 2

Electronic Commerce Systems : Scope of e-Commerce, Essential e-Commerce Processes and Electronic Payment
Processes - E-commerce Applications & Issues -Decision Support Systems- Business and Decision Support, Decision Support
Trends, Management Information Systems, Online Analytical Processing, Decision Support Systems, Executive
Information Systems, Enterprise Portals and Decision Support - Knowledge Management Systems. Artificial Intelligence
Technologies and its application in Business- Strategic role of IT- Competing with IT, valuechain ,reengineering, virtual
organization ,knowledge creation-Organizational Planning, The Scenario Approach, Planning for Competitive
Advantage, SWOT Business Models and Planning, Business IT Planning, -Business/ ITStrategies and Business Application
Planning- Developing and Implementing Business Systems - ImplementationChallenges- barriers - change management-
: Case Studies

Unit 3

Management challenges-Security, Ethical and Societal Challenges- Ethical Responsibility of Business Professionals, Computer
Crime, Privacy Issues, Health Issues, and Societal Solutions- Security Management of IT- Tools of security Management,
Internetworked Security Defenses, other security measures –system controls and audits- Enterprise and Global Management
of IT- Managing the IS Function and Failures in IT Management - Global IT Management, Cultural, Political and Geo-
economic Challenges, Global Business/IT Strategies, Global Business/IT Applications, Global IT Platforms, Global Data
Access Issues and Global Systems Development –Case studies

TEXT BOOK(S)
 1. O'Brien JA, Marakas GM. Management information systems. McGraw-Hill Irwin; 2006.
2. Brien,Marakas G M and Behi R , MIS,9th edition, Tata McGraw Hill Special Indian Edition;2010.

REFERENCE(S)

Laudon K, Laudon JP. Management Information Systems;2010

Evaluation Pattern

Assessment Internal External

Periodical 1 (P1) 15

Periodical 2 (P2) 15

*Continuous Assessment (CA) 20

End Semester 50

*CA – Can be Quizzes, Assignment, Projects, and Reports.

FREE ELECTIVES OFFERED UNDER HUMANITIES / SOCIAL SCIENCE STREAMSCOMMON TO ALL PROGRAMS

23CUL230 ACHIEVING EXCELLENCE IN LIFE -AN INDIAN PERSPECTIVE L-T-P-C: 2-0-0-2

Course Objectives:

The course offers to explore the seminal thoughts that influenced the Indian Mind on the study of human possibilities for
manifesting excellence in life. This course presents to the students, an opportunity to study the Indian perspective of
Personality Enrichment through pragmatic approach of self analysis and application.

SyllabusUnit 1

Goals of Life – Purusharthas

What are Purusharthas (Dharma, Artha, Kama, Moksha); Their relevance to Personal life; Family life; Social life &
Professional life; Followed by a Goal setting workshop;

Yogic way of Achieving Life Goals – (Stress Free & Focused Life)

Introduction to Yoga and main schools of Yoga; Yogic style of Life & Time Management (Work Shop);Experiencing life
through its Various Stages

Ashrama Dharma; Attitude towards life through its various stages (Teachings of Amma);

Unit 2

Personality Development

What is Personality – Five Dimensions – Pancha Kosas (Physical / Energy / Mental

/ Intellectual / Bliss); Stress Management & Personality; Self Control & personality; Fundamental Indian Values &
Personality;

Learning Skills (Teachings of Amma)

Art of Relaxed Learning; Art of Listening; Developing ‘Shraddha’ – a basic qualification for obtaining Knowledge; Communication Skills -
An Indian Perspective;

Unit 3

Developing Positive Attitude & Friendliness - (Vedic Perspective);

Achieving Work Excellence (Karma Yoga by Swami Vivekananda & teachings based on Amma);
Leadership Qualities – (A few Indian Role models & Indian Philosophy of Leadership);
REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Awaken Children (Dialogues with Sri Mata Amritanandamayi) Volumes 1 to 9

2. Complete works of Swami Vivekananda (Volumes 1 to 9)
3. Mahabharata by M. N Dutt published by Parimal publications – New Delhi (Volumes 1 to 9)
4. Universal message of Bhagavad-Gita (An exposition of Gita in the light of modern thought and Modern
needs) by Swami Ranganathananda. (Vols.1 to 3)
5. Message of Upanishads, by Swami Ranaganathananda published by Bharatiya Vidya Bhavan, Bombay.
6. Personality Development – Swami Vivekananda published by Advaitha Ashram, Kolkatta.
7. Art of Man Making - Swami Chinmayananda published by Chinmaya Mission, Bombay
8. Will Power and its Development- Swami Budhananda published by Advaitha Ashram, Kolkatta
9. Ultimate Success - Swami Ramakrishnananada Puri published by Mata Amritanandamayi Math, Kollam
10. Yoga In Daily Life - Swami Sivananda – published by Divine Life Society
11. Hindu Dharma - H. H. Sri Chandrasekharandra Saraswati published by Bharatiya Vidya Bhavan, Bombay
12. All about Hinduism – Swami Sivananda - Published by Divine Life Society
13. The Mind and its Control by Swami Budhananda published by Advaitha Ashram, Kolkatta
14. Krida Yoga - Vivekananda Kendra, Publication.
15. Valmiki Ramayana – Four volumes- published by Parimal Publications, Delhi
 16. New perspectives in Stress Management - Dr H R Nagendra & Dr R Nagaratna published by Swami
Vivekananda Yoga Prakashana, Bangalore.
17. Mind Sound Resonance Technique (MSRT) Published by Swami Vivekananda Yoga Prakashana,
Bangalore.
18. Yoga & Memory - Dr H R Nagendra & Dr. Shirley Telles, published by Swami Vivekananda Yoga
Prakashana, Bangalore.

Evaluation Pattern

Assessment Internal End Semester

Periodical 1 (P1) 15

Periodical 2 (P2) 15

*Continuous Assessment (CA) 20

End Semester 50

*CA – Can be Quizzes, Assignment, Projects, and Reports.

23CUL231 EXCELLENCE IN DAILY LIFE L-T-P-C: 2-0-0-2

Syllabus

Unit 1

1. The anatomy of ‘Excellence’. What is ‘excellence’? Is it judged by external factors like wealth?
2. The Great Flaw. The subject-object relationship between individual and world. Promote subject
enhanceexcellence.
3. To work towards excellence, one must know where he is. Our present state... An introspective
analysis.Our faculties within.

Unit 2

4. The play of the mind. Emotions – convert weakness into strength.

5. The indispensible role of the intellect. How to achieve and apply clear thinking?
6. The quagmire of thought.The doctrine of Karma – Law of Deservance.
7. Increase Productivity, reduce stress.. work patterning.

Unit 3

8. The art of right contact with the world. assessment, expectations.

9. Myths and Realities on key issues like richness, wisdom, spirituality.
10. Collect yourself, there is no time to waste. The blue-print of perfect action.

REFERENCES:

The Bhaja Govindam and the Bhagavad Gita.

Evaluation Pattern

Assessment Internal End Semester

Periodical 1 (P1) 15

Periodical 2 (P2) 15

*Continuous Assessment (CA) 20

End Semester 50

*CA – Can be Quizzes, Assignment, Projects, and Reports.

23CUL232 EXPLORING SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY IN ANCIENT INDIA L-T-P-C: 2-0-0-2

OBJECTIVES:

This course offers a journey of exploration through the early developments in India of astronomy, mathematics,
technologies and perspectives of the physical world. With the help of many case studies, the students will be equipped
to understand concepts as well as well as actual techniques.

SyllabusUnit 1

1. General introduction: principles followed and sources;

2. Astronomy & mathematics from the Neolithic to the Indus civilization;
3. Astronomy & mathematics in Vedic literature;
4. Vedanga Jyotisha and the first Indian calendars;
5. Shulba Sutras and the foundations of Indian geometry;

Unit 2

1. Astronomy & mathematics in Jain and Buddhist literature;

2. The transition to the Siddhantic period; Aryabhata and his time;
3. The Aryabhatiya: concepts, content, commentaries;
4. Brahmagupta and his advances;
5. Other great Siddhantic savants;
6. Bhaskara II and his advances;

Unit 3

1. The Kerala school of mathematics;

2. The Kerala school of astronomy;
3. Did Indian science die out?;
4. Overview of recent Indian scientists, from S. Ramanujan onward;
5. Conclusion: assessment and discussion;

TEXTBOOK:

Indian Mathematics and Astronomy: Some Landmarks, by S. Balachandra Rao

REFERENCE:

IFIH’s interactive multimedia DVD on Science & Technology in Ancient India.

Evaluation Pattern

Assessment Internal End Semester

 Periodical 1 (P1) 15

Periodical 2 (P2) 15

*Continuous Assessment (CA) 20

End Semester 50

*CA – Can be Quizzes, Assignment, Projects, and Reports.

23CUL233 YOGA PSYCHOLOGY L-T-P-C: 2-0-0-2

OBJECTIVES:

This course offers the foundation necessary to understand Eastern approaches to psychology and spirituality. The
course includes experiential components centering on meditation and spiritual practice.

SyllabusUnit 1

Introduction

Introduction to Modern Psychology

A short history of Modern Psychology - Major Schools of Modern Psychology - The three major forces in Western
Psychology - Freudian Psychoanalysis; Behaviourism; Humanistic Psychology.

Introduction to Indian Psychology

What is Yoga? - Rise of Yoga Psychology tradition - Various schools of Yoga Psychology - Universal Goal of allYoga-
schools.

Patanjali Yoga Sutra – 1

Introduction to Rishi Patanjali - Bird view of Yoga-Sutra - Definition of Yoga – Vrittis.

Patanjali Yoga Sutra – 2

Five Kinds of Vrittis - Pramanam - sources of right knowledge - Viparyayah – unfolded belief - Vikalpah – Unfoldedbelief -
Smriti – Memory.

Unit 2

Patanjali Yoga Sutra – 3

Two formulae - Necessity of Abhyasah and Vairagyah - Foundation of Abhyasah - Foundation of Vairagyah.

Patanjali Yoga Sutra – 4

Introduction to Samadhi - Samprajnata-Samadhi - Reasoning in Samprajnata-Samadhi - Reflection in Samprajnata-

Samadhi - Bliss in Samprajnata-Samadhi - Sense of Individuality in Samprajnata-Samadhi.
Patanjali Yoga Sutra – 5

Main obstacles in the path of Yoga - other obstructions - removal of obstacles by one – pointedness; by controlling Prana -
by observing sense experience - by inner illumination - by detachment from matter - by knowledge of dream and sleep
- by meditation as desired.

Patanjali Yoga Sutra – 6

How to make mind peaceful? - Cultivating opposite virtues: happiness – friendliness - misery – compassion - virtue

– gladness - vice – indifference.

Patanjali Yoga Sutra – 7

Five causes of Pain - avidya – ignorance (Root Cause) - asmita – ‘I-Feeling’ – raga – attraction - dwesha – repulsion

- abhinivesha – clinging to life.

Unit 3

Patanjali Yoga Sutra – 8

Necessity of Yoga practice - eight parts of Yoga practice - five Yamas: ahimsa – satya – asteya – brahmacharyam

– aparigraha.

Patanjali Yoga Sutra – 9

Five Niyamas: Soucha – Santhosha – Tapas – Swadyah – Ishwara - Pranidhanam.

Patanjali Yoga Sutra – 10

Asanam – Pranayamah - various kinds of Pranayamah - Pratyaharah - Mastery over the senses.Report
review Conclusion

REFERENCES:

1. The course book will be “The four chapters of Freedom” written by Swami Satyananda Saraswati of Bihar
School of Yoga, Munger, India.
2. “The message of Upanishads” written by Swami Ranganathananda. Published by Bharathiya Vidya
Bhavan.
3. Eight Upanishads with the commentary of Sankaracharya, Translated by Swami Gambhirananda,
Published by Advaita Ashram, Uttaranjal.
4. ‘Hatha Yoga Pradipika’ Swami Muktibodhananda, Yoga Publications Trust, Munger, Bihar, India

Evaluation Pattern

Assessment Internal End Semester

Periodical 1 (P1) 15

Periodical 2 (P2) 15

*Continuous Assessment (CA) 20

End Semester 50

*CA – Can be Quizzes, Assignment, Projects, and Reports.

23ENG230 BUSINESS COMMUNICATION L-T-P-C: 1-0-3-2

OBJECTIVES:

To introduce business vocabulary; to introduce business style in writing and speaking; to expose students to the cross-
cultural aspects in a globalised world; to introduce the students to the art of persuasion and negotiation in business
contexts.

Course Outcomes

CO1: Familiarize and use appropriate business vocabulary and etiquettes in verbal communication in
theprofessional context

CO2: Understand organizational structures, pay structures and performance assessments

CO3: Apply language skills in drafting various business documents and other necessary communications in
thebusiness context

CO4: Understand and address cross cultural differences in the corporate

environmentCO5: Participate in planned and extempore enactments of various business
situations

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PSO

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12

CO1 3 2

CO2 1 1

CO3 3

CO4 2

CO5 2

SyllabusUnit 1

Business Vocabulary - Writing: Drafting Notices, Agenda, and Minutes - Reading: Business news, Business articles.
Unit 2

Writing: Style and vocabulary - Business Memorandum, letters, Press Releases, reports – proposals – Speaking:Conversational
practice, telephonic conversations, addressing a gathering, conducting meetings.

Unit 3

Active Listening: Pronunciation – information gathering and reporting - Speaking: Cross-Cultural Issues, Group
Dynamics, negotiation& persuasion techniques.

Activities

Case studies & role-plays.

BOOKS RECOMMENDED:

1. Jones, Leo & Richard Alexander. New International Business English. CUP. 2003.
2. Horner, David & Peter Strutt. Words at Work. CUP. 1996.
3. Levi, Daniel. Group Dynamics for Teams. 3 ed. Sage Publications India Pvt. Ltd. New Delhi, 2011.
4. Owen, Roger. BBC Business English. BBC. 1996.
 5. Henderson, Greta Lafollette & Price R Voiles. Business English Essentials. 7th Edition. Glencoe / McGraw
Hill.
6. Sweeney, Simon. Communicating in Business. CUP. 2000.

Evaluation Pattern

Assessment Internal End Semester

Periodical 1 (P1) 15

Periodical 2 (P2) 15

*Continuous Assessment (CA) 20

End Semester 50

*CA – Can be Quizzes, Assignment, Projects, and Reports.

23ENG231 INDIAN THOUGHT THROUGH ENGLISH L-T-P-C: 2-0-0-2

OBJECTIVES:

To expose the students to the greatness of Indian Thought in English; to develop a sense of appreciation for the lofty Indian
Thought; to develop an understanding of the eclectic Indian psyche; to develop an understanding about thesocietal
changes in the recent past.

SyllabusUnit 1

Poems

Rabindranath Tagore’s Gitanjali (1-10); Nizzim Ezekiel’s Enterprise; A.K. Ramanujam’s Small-Scale Reflections

on a Great House.

Unit 2Prose

Khushwant Singh’s The Portrait of a Lady; Jhumpa Lahiri’s Short Story - Interpreter of Maladies.

Unit 3

Drama and Speech

Vijay Tendulkar’s Silence, the Court is in Session; Motivational speeches by Jawaharlal Nehru/ S. Radhakrishnan

/ A. P. J. Abdul Kalam’s My Vision for India etc. (any speech).

REFERENCES:

1. Lahiri, Jhumpa. Interpreter of Maladies, Harper Collins Publications, 2000.

2. Ramanujan A. K. ed. K. M. George, Modern Indian Literature: An Anthology, Vol. I, Sahitya Akademi,
1992.
3. Singh, Khushwant. The Portrait of a Lady: Collected Stories, Penguin, 2009.
4. Tagore, Rabindranath. Gitanjali, Penguin Books India Pvt. Ltd, 2011.
5. Tendulkar, Vijay. Five Plays, Oxford University Press, 1996.

Evaluation Pattern

Assessment Internal End Semester

 Periodical 1 (P1) 15

Periodical 2 (P2) 15

*Continuous Assessment (CA) 20

End Semester 50

*CA – Can be Quizzes, Assignment, Projects, and Reports.

23ENG232 INSIGHTS INTO LIFE THROUGH ENGLISH LITERATURE L-T-P-C: 2-0-0-2

OBJECTIVES:

To expose the students to different genres of Literature; to hone reading skills; to provide deeper critical and literary
insights; to enhance creative thinking; to promote aesthetic sense.

SyllabusUnit 1

Poems

1. W. H. Auden: Refugee Blues; 2. A. K. Ramanujan: Obituary; 3. William Blake: The LittleBlack Boy; 4. Gieve

Patel: Grandparents at a Family Get–together.

Unit 2

Short Stories

1. Chinua Achebe: Marriage is a Private Affair; 2. Ruskin Bond: The Thief; 3. Isai Tobolsky: Not Just Oranges; 4.K A Abbas:
The Refugee

Unit 3Prose

1. A G Gardiner: On The Philosophy of Hats; 2. Robert Lynd: Mispronunciation

Practicals:

Role plays: The Proposal, Chekov / Remember Ceaser, Gordon Daviot / Final Solutions, Mahesh Dattani, Bookreviews,
Movie reviews.

SUGGESTED READING:

The Old Man and the Sea, Hemingway / Any one of the novels of R.K. Narayan, etc.

Evaluation Pattern

Assessment Internal End Semester

Periodical 1 (P1) 15
 Periodical 2 (P2) 15

*Continuous Assessment (CA) 20

End Semester 50

*CA – Can be Quizzes, Assignment, Projects, and Reports.

23ENG233 TECHNICAL COMMUNICATION L-T-P-C: 2-0-0-2

OBJECTIVES:

To introduce the students to the elements of technical style; to introduce the basic elements of formal
correspondence; to introduce technical paper writing skills and methods of documentation; to improve oral
presentation skills in formal contexts.

Course Outcomes:

After the completion of the course the student will be able to:

CO1: Understand and use the basic elements of formal correspondence and methods of
documentationCO2: Learn to edit technical content for grammatical accuracy and appropriate tone and
style

CO3: Use the library and internet recourses for research purposes

CO4: Demonstrate the ability to communicate effectively through group mock-technical presentations and
other activities

Mapping of course outcomes with program outcomes:

PO/PSO
PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2
CO

CO1 3

CO2 3

CO3 1

CO4 3 3

Syllabus:
Unit 1

Mechanics of writing: Grammar rules – punctuation - spelling rules - tone and style - graphical Representation.

Unit 2

Different kinds of written documents: Definitions – descriptions – instructions – recommendations - manuals -reports
– proposals; Formal Correspondence: Letter Writing including job applications with Resume.

Unit 3

Technical paper writing: Library research skills - documentation style - document editing – proof reading –
formatting.

Practice in oral communication and Technical presentations

REFERENCES:

1. Hirsh, Herbert. L “Essential Communication Strategies for Scientists, Engineers and Technology
Professionals”. II Edition. New York: IEEE press, 2002
2. Anderson, Paul. V. “Technical Communication: A Reader-Centred Approach”. V Edition. Harcourt Brace
College Publication, 2003
3. Strunk, William Jr. and White. E B. “The Elements of Style” New York. Alliyan & Bacon, 1999.
4. Riordan, G. Daniel and Pauley E. Steven. “Technical Report Writing Today” VIII Edition (Indian
Adaptation). New Delhi: Biztantra, 2004.
Evaluation Pattern

Assessment Internal End Semester

Periodical 1 (P1) 15

Periodical 2 (P2) 15

*Continuous Assessment (CA) 20

End Semester 50

*CA – Can be Quizzes, Assignment, Projects, and Reports.

23ENG234 INDIAN SHORT STORIES IN ENGLISH L-T-P-C: 2-0-0-2

OBJECTIVES:

To help the students learn the fine art of story writing; to help them learn the techniques of story telling; to help them
study fiction relating it to the socio- cultural aspects of the age; to familiarize them with different strategies of reading short
stories; to make them familiar with the morals and values held in high esteem by the ideals of Indianness.

SyllabusUnit 1

Introduction: Differences between novel and short stories – origin and development of short stories - Rabindranath

Tagore: Kabuliwallah; Mulk Raj Anand: The Gold Watch.

Unit 2

R. K. Narayan: Sweets for Angels; K. A. Abbas: The Refugee; Khushwant Singh: The Mark of Vishnu.

Unit 3

Masti Venkatesha Iyengar: The Curds-Seller; Manohar Malgonkar: Upper Division Love; Romila Thapar: The Spell;
Premchand: The Voice of God.

TEXT:

M. G. Narasimha Murthy (ed), Famous Indian Stories. Hyderabad: Orient Black Swan, 2014

REFERENCE:

Mohan Ramanan (Ed), English and the Indian Short Story: Essays in Criticism, Hyderabad, Orient Black Swan,2000.

Evaluation Pattern

Assessment Internal End Semester

Periodical 1 (P1) 15

Periodical 2 (P2) 15
 *Continuous Assessment (CA) 20

End Semester 50

*CA – Can be Quizzes, Assignment, Projects, and Reports.

23FRE230 PROFICIENCY IN FRENCH LANGUAGE (LOWER) L-T-P-C: 2-0-0-2

SyllabusUnit 1

Population - Identity

How to introduce yourself (name, age, address, profession, nationality); Numbers; How to ask questions; Grammar –
Pronouns - subjects; Regular verbs of 1st group (er) in the present; Être (to be) and avoir (to have) inthe present;
Interrogative sentence; Gender of adjectives.

Unit 2

The suburbs - At the train station

Introduce someone; Buy a train ticket or a cinema ticket; Ask for information; Official time; Ask for a price; Thecity
(church, town hall, post office…)

Grammar – Pronouns - subjects (continuation); Gender of adjectives (continuation); Plural of nouns and adjectives;
Definite and indefinite articles; Interrogative adjectives; I would like (Je voudrais).

Unit 3

Paris and the districts - Looking for a room

Locate a room and indicate the way; Make an appointment; Give a price; Ordinal numbers; Usual time; Ask for thetime.

Grammar - Imperative mode; Contracted articles (au, du, des); negation.

TEXTBOOK:

Metro St Michel - Publisher: CLE international

Evaluation Pattern

Assessment Internal End Semester

Periodical 1 (P1) 15

Periodical 2 (P2) 15
 *Continuous Assessment (CA) 20

End Semester 50

*CA – Can be Quizzes, Assignment, Projects, and Reports.

23FRE231 PROFICIENCY IN FRENCH LANGUAGE (HIGHER) L-T-P-C: 2-0-0-2

SyllabusUnit 1

The first room of a student

A party to celebrate the 1st room; Description of a room; furniture; Locate objects: prepositions (devant, derrière,
dans…), Read advertisement; Appreciation (I like, I prefer,).

Grammar - Perfect past tense with avoir; Possessive adjectives (mon, ton, son…); Demonstrative adjectives (ce, cet, cette);
Yes (oui, si).

Unit 2 Small jobs

Conversation on the phone; Give Time indications; Answer a job offer; Describe a job; Suggest a meeting time.
Grammar - Perfect past tense with être and avoir (continuation); Possessive adjectives (notre, votre, leur);
Prepositions (à, pour, avec …); Pronoun as direct object (le, la, l’, les).

Unit 3

University Restaurant

Inquiry; Express an opinion; Ask questions (continuation); Food, meals, taste, preferences; Nutrition, diet, choosea
menu or diet, Expression of quantities (beaucoup, peu).

Grammar - Partitif (expressing quantity) (du, de la, pas de….); Comparison (plus...que, moins….que, autant …que);
Interrogation (continuation), inversion, Est-ce que, qu’est-ce que?.

TEXTBOOK:

Metro St Michel - Publisher: CLE International

Evaluation Pattern

Assessment Internal End Semester

Periodical 1 (P1) 15
 Periodical 2 (P2) 15

*Continuous Assessment (CA) 20

End Semester 50

*CA – Can be Quizzes, Assignment, Projects, and Reports.

23GER230 GERMAN FOR BEGINNERS I L-T-P-C: 2-0-0-2

Syllabus

Unit 1

Greetings; Introducing one-self (formal and informal context), saying their name, origin, living place, occupation.
Numbers 1-100; Saying the telephone number. Countries and Languages.

Grammar: Structure – W - Questions and Yes/No questions and statements, personal pronouns, verb conjugations.
Articles.

Vocabulary: Professions.

Unit 2

Giving the personal details. Name, age, marital status, year of birth, place of birth, etc.Numbers
till 1000. Saying a year. Alphabets – spelling a word.

Filling up an application form; In the restaurant – making an order.

Grammar: Definite, indefinite and negative article in nominative. Accusative: indefinite and negative Article Vocabulary:
Food items

Unit 3

Numbers above 1000. Orientation in Shopping plazas: asking the price, where do I find what, saying the opinion.Grammar:
Accusative – definite article. Adjectives and plural forms. Vocabulary: Furniture and currencies.

Evaluation Pattern

Assessment Internal End Semester

Periodical 1 (P1) 15

Periodical 2 (P2) 15

*Continuous Assessment (CA) 20

End Semester 50
*CA – Can be Quizzes, Assignment, Projects, and Reports.
23GER231 GERMAN FOR BEGINNERS II L-T-P-C: 2-0-0-2

Syllabus

Unit 1

Shopping and orientation in supermarket; Conversation between the customer and salesman; Where one finds what in
supermarket; Asking for requests and suggestions.

Grammar: Dative of personal pronouns. Imperative form. Vocabulary: Consumables and measurements;

Unit 2

Appointments; Work and leisure time activities; Time, weekdays, months and seasons; saying the date; fixing upan
appointment.

Grammar: Model verbs; Prepositions with time and place; Ordinal numbers. Vocabulary: Leisure activities,
weekdays, months and seasons.

Unit 3

Family and household; Family and relations; household and daily routine. Grammar: Possessive articles; Divisibleand
indivisible verbs.

Vocabulary: Family circle; Household articles.

Evaluation Pattern

Assessment Internal End Semester

Periodical 1 (P1) 15

Periodical 2 (P2) 15

*Continuous Assessment (CA) 20

End Semester 50
*CA – Can be Quizzes, Assignment, Projects, and Reports.
23GER232 PROFICIENCY IN GERMANLANGUAGE (LOWER) L-T-P-C: 2-0-0-2

Syllabus

To have an elementary exposure to German language; specifically

1. to have some ability to understand simple spoken German, and to be able to speak it so as to be able
tocarry on life in Germany without much difficulty (to be able to do shopping, etc.);
2. to be able to understand simple texts, and simple forms of written communication;
3. to have a basic knowledge of German grammar;
4. to acquire a basic vocabulary of 500 words;
5. to be able to translate simple letters with the use of a dictionary; and
6. to have some familiarity with the German life and culture.

(This will not be covered as part of the regular classroom teaching; this is to be acquired by self-study.)Some

useful websites will be given.

Evaluation Pattern

Assessment Internal End Semester

Periodical 1 (P1) 15

Periodical 2 (P2) 15

*Continuous Assessment (CA) 20

End Semester 50

*CA – Can be Quizzes, Assignment, Projects, and Reports.

23GER233 PROFICIENCY IN GERMAN LANGUAGE (HIGHER) L-T-P-C: 2-0-0-2

Syllabus

The basic vocabulary and grammar learned in the earlier course is mostly still passive knowledge. The endeavourof this
course is to activate this knowledge and develop the skill of communication.

Topics are: Airport, railway station, travelling; shopping; invitations, meals, meeting people; around the house; the
human body; colours; professions.

Past and future tenses will be introduced. Applying genitive, dative and accusative. Some German culture. Films.

Evaluation Pattern

Assessment Internal End Semester

Periodical 1 (P1) 15

Periodical 2 (P2) 15

*Continuous Assessment (CA) 20

End Semester 50

*CA – Can be Quizzes, Assignment, Projects, and Reports.

23HIN230 HINDI I L-T-P-C: 2-0-0-2

OBJECTIVES:

To teach Hindi for effective communication in different spheres of life - Social context, Education, governance,Media,
Business, Profession and Mass communication.

Course Outcomes:

After the completion of the course the student will be able to:

CO1: Gain knowledge about the nature and culture of Hindi

languageCO2: Understand the structural aspects of Hindi language

CO3: Apply the knowledge of the grammatical structures to communicate in

HindiCO4: Analyse the social significance of modern literature.

CO5: Develop the ability to translate a given text to Hindi

CO-PO Mapping:

PO/PSO

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 2 3

CO2 2 3

CO3 2 3

CO4 3

CO5 2

SyllabusUnit 1

Introduction to Hindi Language, National Language, Official Language, link Language etc. Introduction to Hindilanguage,
Devanagari script and Hindi alphabet.

Shabda Bhed, Roopanthar ki Drishti se- Bhasha – Paribhasha aur Bhed – Sangya - Paribhasha Aur Bhed - Sangyake
Roopanthar - kriya.

Unit 2

Common errors and error corrections in Parts of Speech with emphasis on use of pronouns, Adjective and verb in
different tenses – Special usage of adverbs, changing voice and conjunctions in sentences, gender& number - General
vocabulary for conversations in given context –understanding proper pronunciation - Conversations, Interviews, Short
speeches.

Unit 3

Poems – Kabir 1st 8 Dohas, Surdas 1st 1 Pada; Tulsidas 1st 1 Pada; Meera 1st 1 Pada

Unit 4

Letter writing – personal and Formal – Translation from English to Hindi.

Unit 5

Kahani – Premchand: Kafan, Abhilasha, Vidroh, Poos ki rath, Juloos.

BOOKS:

1. Prem Chand Ki Srvashrestha Kahaniyam: Prem Chand; Diamond Pub Ltd. New Delhi
2. Vyavaharik Hindi Vyakaran ,Anuvad thaha Rachana : Dr. H. Parameswaran, Radhakrishna publishing
House, New Delhi
3. Kamtha Prasad Guru : Hindi Vyakaran, Best Book pub House, New Delhi
4. Poetry : Kavya Ras - Ed: T.V. Basker - Pachouri Press; Mathura

Evaluation Pattern

Assessment Internal End Semester

Periodical 1 (P1) 15

Periodical 2 (P2) 15

*Continuous Assessment (CA) 20

End Semester 50

*CA – Can be Quizzes, Assignment, Projects, and Reports.

23HIN231 HINDI II L-T-P-C: 2-0-0-2

OBJECTIVES:

Appreciation and assimilation of Hindi Literature both drisya & shravya using the best specimens provided as
anthology.

Course Outcomes:

After the completion of the course the student will be able to:

CO1: Understand the grammatical structures of Hindi CO2:

Understand the post modern trends of literature CO3:
Enhance critical thinking and writing skills

CO4: Identify and analyse different literary and audio-visual material

CO5: Apply fundamental knowledge of Hindi in formal and informal writing

CO-PO Mapping:

PO/PSO

CO PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12 PSO1 PSO2

CO1 1 2

CO2 1 2

CO3 1 2

CO4 3

CO5 1 2
Syllabus:

Unit 1

Kavya Tarang; Dhumil ke Anthim Kavitha [Poet-Dhumil]; Dhabba [Poet-Kedarnath Singh]; Proxy [Poet-
Venugopal]; Vakth [Poet-Arun Kamal]; Maachis [Poet-Suneeta Jain].

Unit 2

Communicative Hindi - Moukhik Abhivyakthi

Unit 3

Audio-Visual Media in Hindi – Movies like Tare Zameen par, Paa, Black etc., appreciation and evaluation. Newsreading
and presentations in Radio and TV channels in Hindi.

Unit 4

Gadya Manjusha – Budhapa, Kheesa, Sadachar ka Thavis

Unit 5

Translation: Theory and Practice - Letter writing: Formal and Personal – Introduction to Hindi Software.

BOOKS:

1. Kavay Tarang: Dr. Niranjan, Jawahar Pusthakalay, Mathura.

 2. Gadya Manjusha: Editor: Govind, Jawahar Pusthakalay, Mathura

Evaluation Pattern

Assessment Internal End Semester

Periodical 1 (P1) 15

Periodical 2 (P2) 15

*Continuous Assessment (CA) 20

End Semester 50

*CA – Can be Quizzes, Assignment, Projects, and Reports.

23HUM230 EMOTIONAL INTELLIGENCE L-T-P-C: 2-0-0-2

Syllabus

Unit 1

Emotional Intelligence: Concept of Emotional Intelligence, Understanding the history and origin of Emotional
Intelligence, Contributors to Emotional Intelligence, Science of Emotional Intelligence, EQ and IQ, Scope of Emotional
Intelligence.

Unit 2

Components of Emotional Intelligence: Self-awareness, Self-regulation, Motivation, Empathy, Social skills. Emotional
Intelligence Competencies, Elements of Emotional Intelligence, Models of Emotional Intelligence: The Ability-based Model,
The Trait Model of Emotional Intelligence, Mixed Models of Emotional Intelligence.

Unit 3

Emotional Intelligence at Work place: Importance of Emotional Intelligence at Work place? Cost–savings of Emotional
Intelligence, Emotionally Intelligent Leaders, Case Studies Measuring Emotional Intelligence: Emotionally Intelligence
Tests, Research on Emotional Intelligence, Developing Emotional Intelligence.

REFERENCES:

1. Daniel Goleman (1996). Emotional Intelligence- Why it can Matter More than IQ. Bantam Doubleday Dell
Publishing Group
2. Daniel Goleman (2000). Working with Emotional Intelligence. Bantam Doubleday Dell Publishing Group
3. Liz Wilson, Stephen Neale & Lisa Spencer-Arnell (2012). Emotional Intelligence Coaching. Kogan Page
India Private Limited

Evaluation Pattern

Assessment Internal End Semester

Periodical 1 (P1) 15

Periodical 2 (P2) 15

*Continuous Assessment (CA) 20

End Semester 50

*CA – Can be Quizzes, Assignment, Projects, and Reports.

23HUM231 GLIMPSES INTO THE INDAN MIND -THE GROWTH OF MODERN INDIA L-T-P-C: 2-0-0-2

Syllabus Unit 1
Introduction

General Introduction; ‘His + Story’ or ‘History’ ?; The concepts of ‘nation’, ‘national identity’ and ‘nationalism’;Texts and
Textualities: Comparative Perspectives.

Unit 2

Selected writings / selections from the complete works of the following authors will be taken up for study in a
chronological order:

Raja Ram Mohan Roy; Dayananda Saraswati; Bal Gangadhar Tilak; Rabindranath Tagore;

Unit 3

Selected writings / selections from the complete works of the following authors will be taken up for study in a
chronological order:

Swami Vivekananda; Sri Aurobindo; Ananda K. Coomaraswamy; Sister Nivedita; Mahatma Gandhi; JawaharlalNehru;
B.R. Ambedkar; Sri Chandrasekharendra Saraswati, the Paramacharya of Kanchi; Dharampal; Raja Rao;

V.S. Naipaul.

Conclusion.

REFERENCES:

1. Tilak, Bal Gangadhar. The Orion / Arctic Home in the Vedas.

2. Tagore, Rabindranath. The History of Bharatavarsha / On Nationalism / Greater India.
3. Vivekananda, Swami. “Address at the Parliament of Religions”/“The Future of India”/“In Defence of
Hinduism” from Selections from the Complete Works of Swami Vivekananda.
4. Aurobindo, Sri. The Renaissance in India / On Nationalism.
5. Coomaraswamy, Ananda K. Essays in Indian Idealism (any one essay) / Dance of Shiva.
6. Nivedita, Sister. “Noblesse Oblige: A Study of Indian Caste” / “The Eastern Mother” from The Web of
Indian Life.
7. Gandhi, Mahatma. Hind Swaraj.
8. Nehru, Jawaharlal. “The Quest” from Discovery of India.
9. Ambedkar, B. R. “Buddha and His Dhamma” from Collected Works.
10. Saraswati, Chandrasekharendra. “The Sastras and Modern Life” from The Hindu Dharma.
11. Dharampal. Bharatiya Chitta, Manas and Kala / Understanding Gandhi.
 12. Naipaul, V. S. India: A Wounded Civilization / India: A Million Mutinies Now.

Evaluation Pattern

Assessment Internal End Semester

Periodical 1 (P1) 15

Periodical 2 (P2) 15

*Continuous Assessment (CA) 20

End Semester 50

*CA – Can be Quizzes, Assignment, Projects, and Reports.

23HUM232 GLIMPSES OF ETERNAL INDIA L-T-P-C: 2-0-0-2

Syllabus

Unit 1

Introduction

A peep into India’s glorious past

Ancient India – the vedas, the vedic society and the Sanatana Dharma – rajamandala and the Cakravartins – Ramarajya
– Yudhisthira’s ramarajya; Sarasvati - Sindhu Civilization and the myth of the Aryan Invasion; Classical India – Dharma as the
bedrock of Indian society – Vaidika Brahmanya Dharma and the rise of Jainism and Buddhism

– the sixteen Mahajanapadas and the beginning of Magadhan paramountcy - Kautilya and his Arthasastra –
Chandragupta Maurya and the rise of the Mauryan empire – Gupta dynasty Indian art and architecture – classical
sanskrit literature – Harsavardhana; Trade and commerce in classical and medieval India and the story of Indian
supremacy in the Indian ocean region; The coming of Islam – dismantling of the traditional Indian polity – the Mughal
empire – Vijayanagara samrajya and days of Maratha supremacy.

Unit 2

India’s contribution to the world: spirituality, philosophy and sciences

Indian Philosophy – the orthodox (Vaidika) and the heterodox (atheistic) schools; Ramayana and Mahabharata;
Bhagavad Gita; Saints and sages of India; Ancient Indian medicine: towards an unbiased perspective; Ancient Indian
mathematics; Ancient Indian astronomy; Ancient Indian science and technology.

The arrival of Europeans, British paramountcy and colonization

What attracted the rest of the world to India?; India on the eve of the arrival of European merchants; The story of
colonization and the havoc it wrecked on Indian culture and civilization; Macaulay and the start of the distortion ofIndian
education and history; Indian economy – before and after colonization: a brief survey; The emergence ofmodern India.

Unit 3

Women in Indian society

The role and position of women in Hindu civilization; Gleanings from the Vedas, Brihadarnyaka Upanishad, Saptasati
Devi Mahatmyam, Ramayana, Mahabharata, Manusmriti, Kautilya’s Arthasastra and Mrichchhakatikamof Sudraka; The
role and position of Indian women vis-a-vis Islam and European cultures; The great women of India.

Modern India

The national movement for freedom and social emancipation; Swami Vivekananda, Sri Aurobindo, RabindranathTagore;
Understanding Mahatma Gandhi; A new nation is born as a republic – the pangs of birth and growth; India since
Independence – the saga of socio-political movements; Problems facing the nation today; Globalization and Indian
Economy; Bharatavarsha today and the way ahead: Regeneration of Indian National Resources.

Conclusion

The Wonder that was India; The ‘politics’ and ‘purpose’ of studying India.

REFERENCES:

1. Parameswaran, S. The Golden Age of Indian Mathematics. Kochi: Swadeshi Science Movement.
2. Somayaji, D. A. A Critical Study of Ancient Hindu Astronomy. Dharwar: 1972.
3. Sen, S. N. & K. V. Sarma eds. A History of Indian Astronomy. New Delhi, 1985.
4. Rao, S. Balachandra. Indian Astronomy: An Introduction. Hyderabad: Universities Press, 2000.
5. Bose, D. M. et. al. A Concise History of Science in India. New Delhi: 1971.
6. Bajaj, Jitendra & M. D. Srinivas. Indian Economy and Polity. Chennai: Centre for Policy Studies.
7. Bajaj, Jitendra & M. D. Srinivas.Timeless India, Resurgent India. Chennai: Centre for Policy Studies.
8. Joshi, Murli Manohar. Science, Sustainability and Indian National Resurgence. Chennai: Centre for
Policy Studies, 2008.
9. The Cultural Heritage of India. Kolkata: Ramakrishna Mission Institute of Culture.
 10. Vivekananda, Swami. Selections from the Complete Works of Swami Vivekananda. Kolkata: Advaita
Ashrama.
11. Mahadevan, T. M. P. Invitations to Indian Philosophy. Madras: University of Madras.
12. Hiriyanna, M. Outlines of Indian Philosophy. Motilal Banarsidass.
13. Tagore, Rabindranath. The History of Bharatavarsha / On Nationalism / Greater India.
14. Majumdar, R. C. et. al. An Advanced History of India. Macmillan.
15. Mahajan, V. D. India Since 1526. New Delhi: S. Chand & Company.
16. Durant, Will. The Case for India. Bangalore: Strand Book Stall, 2008.
17. Aurobindo, Sri. The Indian Renaissance / India’s Rebirth / On Nationalism.
18. Nivedita, Sister. The Web of Indian Life. Kolkata: Advaita Ashrama.
19. Durant, Will. The Story of Civilization. Volume 1 – Our Oriental Heritage. New York: Simon & Schuster.
20. Ranganathananda, Swami. Eternal Values for A Changing Society. Bombay: Bharatiya Vidya Bhavan.
21. Ranganathananda, Swami. Universal Message of the Bhagavad Gita. Kolkata: Advaita Ashrama.
22. Seturaman, V. S. Indian Aesthetics. Macmillan.
23. Coomaraswamy, Ananda K. The Dance of Shiva. New Delhi: Sagar Publications.
24. Coomaraswamy, Ananda K. Essays on Indian Idealism. New Delhi: Munshiram Manoharlal.
25. Danino, Michel. The Invasion That Never Was.
26. Kautilya. Arthasastra.
27. Altekar, A. S. State and Government in Ancient India. New Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass.
28. Altekar, A. S. The Position of Women in Hindu Civilization. New Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass.
29. Sircar, D. C. Studies in the Religious Life of Ancient and Medieval India. New Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass.
30. Sircar, D. C. Studies in the Political and Administrative Systems in Ancient and Medieval Times.New
Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass.
31. Madhavananda, Swami & R. C. Majumdar eds. The Great Women of India. Kolkata: Advaita Ashrama.
32. Dutt, R. C. The Economic History of India. London, 1902.
33. Dharampal. Collected Works.
34. Dharampal. Archival Compilations (unpublished)

Evaluation Pattern

Assessment Internal End Semester

Periodical 1 (P1) 15

Periodical 2 (P2) 15

*Continuous Assessment (CA) 20

End Semester 50

*CA – Can be Quizzes, Assignment, Projects, and Reports.

23HUM233 GLIMPSES OF INDIAN ECONOMY AND POLITY L-T-P-C: 2-0-0-2

Syllabus

Unit 1

Introduction

General Introduction; Primitive man and his modes of exchange – barter system; Prehistoric and proto-historicpolity
and social organization.

Ancient India – up to 600 B.C.

Early India – the vedic society – the varnashramadharma – socio-political structure of the various institutions based on the
four purusarthas; The structure of ancient Indian polity – Rajamandala and Cakravartins – Prajamandala; Socio-
economic elements from the two great Epics – Ramayana and Mahabharata – the concept of the ideal King(Sri Rama)
and the ideal state (Ramarajya) – Yudhisthira’s ramarajya; Sarasvati - Sindhu civilization and India’strade links with other
ancient civilizations; Towards chiefdoms and kingdoms – transformation of the polity: kingship – from gopati to
bhupati; The mahajanapadas and the emergence of the srenis – states and cities of theIndo-Gangetic plain.

Unit 2

Classical India: 600B.C. – 1200 A.D.

The rise of Magadha, emergence of new religions – Buddhism and Jainism – and the resultant socio-economic impact;
The emergence of the empire – the Mauryan Economy and Kautilya’s Arthasastra; of Politics and trade –the rise of the
Mercantile Community; Elements from the age of the Kushanas and the Great Guptas; India’s maritime trade; Dharma
at the bedrock of Indian polity – the concept of Digvijaya: dharma-vijaya, lobha-vijaya and asura-vijaya; Glimpses into the
south Indian economies: political economies of the peninsula – Chalukyas, Rashtrakutas and Cholas

Medieval India: 1200 A.D. – 1720 A.D.

Advent of Islam – changes in the social institutions; Medieval India – agrarian economy, non-agricultural productionand
urban economy, currency system; Vijayanagara samrajya and maritime trade – the story of Indian supremacyin the
Indian Ocean region; Aspects of Mughal administration and economy; The Maratha and other provincial economies.

Unit 3

Modern India: 1720 - 1947

the Indian market and economy before the arrival of the European traders; Colonisation and British supremacy
(dismantling of everything that was ‘traditional’ or ‘Indian’) – British attitude towards Indian trade, commerce and economy
and the resultant ruining of Indian economy and business – man-made famines – the signs of renaissance:banking and other
business undertakings by the natives (the members of the early Tagore family, the merchants ofSurat and Porbander,
businessmen of Bombay, etc. may be referred to here) – the evolution of the modern bankingsystem; Glimpses into
British administration of India and administrative models; The National movement and nationalist undertakings in
business and industry: the Tatas and the Birlas; Modern India: the growth of large- scale industry – irrigation and railways –
money and credit – foreign trade; Towards partition – birth of two new nations

– division of property; The writing of the Indian Constitution – India becomes a democratic republic – a new polity is in
place.

Independent India – from 1947

India since Independence – the saga of socio-political movements; Indian economy since Independence – the fiscal system
– the five year plans – liberalisation – the GATT and after; Globalisation and Indian economy; Impact ofscience and (new/
emerging) technology on Indian economy; Histories of select Indian business houses and business entrepreneurship.

Conclusion

REFERENCES:

1. The Cultural Heritage of India. Kolkata: Ramakrishna Mission Institute of Culture.

Kautilya. Arthasastra.
 2. Altekar, A. S. State and Government in Ancient India. New Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass.
3. Sircar, D. C. Studies in the Political and Administrative Systems in Ancient and Medieval Times. New
Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass.
4. Dutt, R. C. The Economic History of India. London, 1902.
5. Dharampal. Collected Works (Volumes IV & V).
6. Dharampal. Archival Compilations (unpublished).
7. Bajaj, Jitendra & M. D. Srinivas. Indian Economy and Polity. Chennai: Centre for Policy Studies.
8. Bajaj, Jitendra & M. D. Srinivas. Timeless India, Resurgent India. Chennai: Centre for Policy Studies.
9. Joshi, Murli Manohar. Science, Sustainability and Indian National Resurgence. Chennai: Centre for
Policy Studies, 2008.
10. Tripathi, Dwijendra. The Oxford History of Indian Business. New Delhi: Oxford University Press, 2004.
11. McGuire, John, et al, eds. Evolution of World Economy, Precious Metals and India. New Delhi: Oxford
University Press, 2001.
12. Tripathi, Dwijendra and Jyoti Jumani. The Concise Oxford History of Indian Business. New Delhi: Oxford
University Press, 2007.
13. Kudaisya, Medha M. The Life and Times of G. D. Birla. New Delhi: Oxford University Press, 2003.
14. Raychaudhuri, Tapan and Irfan Haib, eds. The Cambridge Economic History of India. Volume
15. New Delhi: Orient Longman, 2004.
16. Kumar, Dharma, ed. The Cambridge Economic History of India. Volume 2. New Delhi: Orient Longman,
2005.
17. Sabavala, S. A. and R. M. Lala, eds. J. R. D. Tata: Keynote. New Delhi: Rupa & Co., 2004.
18. Mambro, Arvind ed. J. R. D. Tata: Letters. New Delhi: Rupa & Co., 2004.
19. Lala, R. M., For the Love of India: The Life and Times of Jamsetji Tata. New Delhi: Penguin, 2006.
20. Thapar, Romila. The Penguin History of Early India: From the Origins to AD 1300. New Delhi Penguin,
2002.
21. Majumdar, R. C., et. al. An Advanced History of India. Macmillan.

Evaluation Pattern

Assessment Internal End Semester

Periodical 1 (P1) 15

Periodical 2 (P2) 15

*Continuous Assessment (CA) 20

End Semester 50

*CA – Can be Quizzes, Assignment, Projects, and Reports.

23HUM234 HEALTH AND LIFESTYLE L-T-P-C: 2-0-0-2

SyllabusUnit 1

Introduction to Health

Health is wealth; Role of lifestyle habits on health; Importance of adolescence; Stages, Characteristics and changes during
adolescence; Nutritional needs during adolescence why healthy lifestyle is important for adolescence. Eating Habits - eating
disorders, skipping breakfast, junk food consumption.

Practicals - Therapeutic Diets

Unit 2

Food and Nutritional Requirements during Adolescence

Fluid intake; nutrition related problems; lifestyle related problems, Role of physical activity; resting pattern and
postures, Personal habits – alcoholism, and other tobacco products, electronic addiction etc

Practicals - Ethnic Foods

Unit 3

Need for a Positive Life Style Change

Peer pressure & procrastination, Stress, depression, suicidal tendency, Mini project review and viva, Whole portions
revision.

Practical - Cooking without Fire or Wire-healthy Snacks

TEXTBOOKS:

1. B. Srilakshmi, “Dietetics”, New age international (P) ltd, publishers, 2010.

2. “Nutrient requirement and Recommended Dietary Allowances for Indians”, published by Indian Council
of Medical Research, ICMR, 2010.
REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. K Park “Textbook of preventive and social medicine”, 2010.

2. WHO Report on Adolescent Health: 2010

Evaluation Pattern

Assessment Internal End Semester

Periodical 1 (P1) 15

Periodical 2 (P2) 15

*Continuous Assessment (CA) 20

End Semester 50

*CA – Can be Quizzes, Assignment, Projects, and Reports.

23HUM235 INDIAN CLASSICS FOR THE TWENTY-FIRST CENTURY L-T-P-C: 2-0-0-2

Syllabus

Unit 1

Introductory study of the Bhagavad Gita and the Upanishads.

Unit 2

The relevance of these classics in a modern age.

Unit 3

Goals of human life - existential problems and their solutions in the light of these classics etc.

REFERENCE:

The Bhagavad Gita, Commentary by Swami Chinmayananda

Evaluation Pattern

Assessment Internal End Semester

Periodical 1 (P1) 15

Periodical 2 (P2) 15

*Continuous Assessment (CA) 20

End Semester 50

*CA – Can be Quizzes, Assignment, Projects, and Reports.

23HUM236 INTRODUCTION TO INDIA STUDIES L-T-P-C: 2-0-0-2

PREAMBLE:

This paper will introduce the students to the multiple dimensions of the contribution of India to the fields of
philosophy, art, literature, physical and social sciences. The paper intends to give an insight to the students aboutthe
far-reaching contributions of India to world culture and thought during the course of its long journey from thehoary
antiquity to the present times. Every nation takes pride in its achievements and it is this sense of pride andreverence
towards the achievements that lays the foundation for its all-round progress.

SyllabusUnit 1

A brief outline of Indian history from prehistoric times to the present times.

Contributions of India to world culture and civilization: Indian Philosophy and Religion; Art and Literature; Physical and
Social Sciences.

Unit 2

Modern India: Challenges and Possibilities.

Scientific and technological progress in post-independence era; Socio-cultural and political movements after
independence; Challenges before the nation today - unemployment – corruption – degradation of cultural and moral values
- creation of a new system of education; Creation of a modern and vibrant society rooted in traditional values.

Unit 3

Modern Indian Writing in English: Trends in Contemporary Indian Literature in English.

TEXTBOOK:

Material given by the Faculty

BACKGROUND LITERATURE:

1. Selections from The Cultural Heritage of India, 6 volumes, Ramakrishna Mission Institute of Culture
(Kolkata) publication.
2. Selections from the Complete Works of Swami Vivekananda, Advaita Ashrama publication.
3. Invitations to Indian Philosophy, T. M. P. Mahadevan, University of Madras, Chennai.
4. Outlines of Indian Philosophy, M. Hiriyanna, MLBD.
5. An Advanced History of India, R. C. Majumdar et al, Macmillan.
6. India Since 1526, V. D. Mahajan, S. Chand & Company
7. The Indian Renaissance, Sri Aurobindo.
8. India’s Rebirth, Sri Aurobindo.
9. On Nationalism, Sri Aurobindo.
10. The Story of Civilization, Volume I: Our Oriental Heritage, Will Durant, Simonand Schuster, New York.
11. Eternal Values for a Changing Society, Swami Ranganathananda, Bharatiya Vidya Bhavan.
12. Universal Message of the Bhagavad Gita, Swami Ranganathananda, Advaita Ashrama.
13. Awaken Children: Conversations with Mata Amritanandamayi
14. Indian Aesthetics, V. S. Seturaman, Macmillan.
15. Indian Philosophy of Beauty, T. P. Ramachandran, University of Madras, Chennai.
16. Web of Indian Thought, Sister Nivedita
17. Essays on Indian Nationalism, Anand Kumaraswamy
18. Comparative Aesthetics, Volume 2, Kanti Chandra Pandey, Chowkhamba, Varanasi
19. The Invasion That Never Was, Michel Danino
20. Samskara, U. R. Ananthamurthy, OUP.
21. Hayavadana, Girish Karnard, OUP.
 22. Naga-Mandala, Girish Karnard, OUP.

Evaluation Pattern

Assessment Internal End Semester

Periodical 1 (P1) 15

Periodical 2 (P2) 15

*Continuous Assessment (CA) 20

End Semester 50

*CA – Can be Quizzes, Assignment, Projects, and Reports.

23HUM237 INTRODUCTION TO SANSKRIT LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE L-T-P-C: 2-0-0-2

OBJECTIVES:

To familiarize students with Sanskrit language; to introduce students to various knowledge traditions in Sanskrit;to help
students appreciate and imbibe India’s ancient culture and values.

SyllabusUnit 1

Sanskrit Language – Vakya Vyavahara - Introduction to Sanskrit language - Devanagari script and

Sanskrit alphabet - Vowels and Consonants – Pronunciation - Classification of Consonants – Samyukthakshara Words –
Nouns and Verbs - Cases – Introduction to Numbers and Time – Verbs: Singular, Dual and Plural – SarvaNamas: First
Person, Second Person, Third Person – Tenses: Past, Present and Future -Words for Communication – Selected Slokas
– MoralStories – Subhashithas – Riddles.

Unit 2

Language Studies - Role of Sanskrit in Indian & World Languages.

Unit 3

Introduction to Sanskrit Classical Literature – KavyaTradition – Drama Tradition - Stotra Tradition – Panchatantra
Stories.

Unit 4

Introduction to Sanskrit Technical Literature – Astronomy – Physics – Chemistry – Botany – Engineering – Aeronautics
– Ayurveda – Mathematics – Medicine – Architecture - Tradition of Indian Art – Administration –Agriculture.

Unit 5

Indology Studies – Perspectives and Innovations.

TEXTBOOKS AND REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Vakya Vyavahara- Prof. Vempaty Kutumba Sastri, Rashtriya Sanskrit Sansthan, New Delhi
2. The Wonder that is Sanskrit - Dr.Sampadananda Mishra, New Delhi
3. Science in Sanskrit – Samskritha Bharathi, NewDelhi

Evaluation Pattern
 Assessment Internal End Semester

Periodical 1 (P1) 15

Periodical 2 (P2) 15

*Continuous Assessment (CA) 20

End Semester 50

*CA – Can be Quizzes, Assignment, Projects, and Reports.

23HUM238 NATIONAL SERVICE SCHEME L-T-P-C: 2-0-0-2

Syllabus

Unit 1

Introduction to Basic Concepts of NSS: History, philosophy, aims and objectives of NSS, Emblem, flag, motto,song,
badge etc., Organisational structure, roles and responsibilities of various NSS functionaries.

NSS Programmes and Activities: Concept of regular activities, special campaigning, Day Camps, Basis of adoption of
village / slums, methodology of conducting survey, financial pattern of the scheme, other youth
programme/schemes of GOI, Coordination with different agencies, Maintenance of the Diary.

Unit 2

Volunteerism and Shramdan: Indian Tradition of volunteerism, Needs and importance of volunteerism, Motivation
and Constraints of volunteerism, Shramdan as part of volunteerism, Amalabharatam Campaign, Swatch Bharath.

Unit 3

Understanding youth: Definition, profile and categories of youth, Issues, challenges and opportunities for youth, Youth as
an agent of social change.

Youth and Yoga: History, philosophy and concept of Yoga, Myths and misconceptions about Yoga, Different Yoga
traditions and their impacts, Yoga as a preventive and curative method, Yoga as a tool for healthy life style

Unit 4

Youth Development Programmes in India: National Youth Policy, Youth development programmes at the national level,
state level and voluntary sector, youth-focused and youth-led organizations.

Youth and Crime: Sociological and psychological factors influencing youth crime, Peer mentoring in preventing crimes,
Awareness about Anti-Ragging, Cyber Crime and its prevention, Juvenile Justice.

Unit 5

Environmental Issues: Environment conservation, enrichment and sustainability, climate change, waste management,
rain water harvesting, energy conservation, waste land development.

Project Work / Practical

Evaluation Pattern

Assessment Internal End Semester

Periodical 1 (P1) 15

Periodical 2 (P2) 15

*Continuous Assessment (CA) 20

End Semester 50

*CA – Can be Quizzes, Assignment, Projects, and Reports.

23HUM239 PSYCHOLOGY FOR EFFECTIVE LIVING L-T-P-C: 2-0-0-2

Course Objectives

1. To help students acquire the basic knowledge of behavior and effective living
2. To create an awareness of the hazards of health compromising behaviours
3. To develop and strengthen the tools required to handle the adversities of life

Course Outcome

CO 1: Understand the basic concepts of Behavioral PsychologyCO 2:

Demonstrate self reflective skills through activities

CO 3: Apply the knowledge of psychology to relieve stress

CO 4: Analyse the adverse effects of health compromising behaviours.

CO 5: Evaluate and use guided techniques to overcome and cope with stress related problems.

CO-PO Mapping

PO

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO

CO1 1 1

CO2 2 3 3 3

CO3 3 3 2 1 3 2

CO4 2 2 3 1

CO5 1 2 1 1

SyllabusUnit 1

Self-Awareness & Self-Motivation

Self analysis through SWOT, Johari Window, Maslow’s hierarchy of motivation, importance of self esteem and
enhancement of self esteem.

Unit 2

The Nature and Coping of Stress

Conflict, Relationship issues, PTSD. Stress – stressors – eustress - distress, coping with stress, stress management
techniques.

Unit 3

Application of Health Psychology

Health compromising behaviours, substance abuse and addiction.

TEXTBOOKS:

1. V. D. Swaminathan & K. V. Kaliappan “Psychology for effective living - An introduction to Health

2. Psychology. 2nd edition Robert J. Gatchel, Andrew Baum & David S. Krantz, McGraw Hill.
REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. S. Sunder, ‘Textbook of Rehabilitation’, 2nd edition, Jaypee Brothers, New Delhi. 2002.
2. Weiben & Lloyd, ‘Psychology applied to Modern Life’, Thompson Learning, Asia Ltd.2004.

Evaluation Pattern

Assessment Internal End Semester

Periodical 1 (P1) 15

Periodical 2 (P2) 15

*Continuous Assessment (CA) 20

End Semester 50

*CA – Can be Quizzes, Assignment, Projects, and Reports.

23HUM240 PSYCHOLOGY FOR ENGINEERS L-T-P-C: 2-0-0-2

Course Objectives:

1. To strengthen the fundamental knowledge of human behavior

2. To strengthen the ability to understand the basic nature and behavior of humans in organizations
as awhole
3. To connect the concepts of psychology to personal and professional life

Course Outcome

CO 1: Understand the fundamental processes underlying human behavior such as learning,

motivation,individual differences, intelligence and personality.

CO 2: Apply the principles of psychology in day- to- day life for a better understanding of oneself and
others.CO 3: Apply the knowledge of Psychology to improve study skills and learning methods

CO 4: Apply the concepts of defense mechanisms to safeguard against abusive relationships and to
nurturehealthy relationships.

CO-PO Mapping

PO

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO

CO1 3 3 3 2 1

CO2 3 3 2 3 3 1 2

CO3 2 1

CO4 3 2 2 2

SyllabusUnit 1

Psychology of Adolescents: Adolescence and its characteristics.

Unit 2

Learning, Memory & Study Skills: Definitions, types, principles of reinforcement, techniques for improving study skills,
Mnemonics.

Unit 3

Attention & Perception: Definition, types of attention, perception.

TEXTBOOKS:

1. S. K. Mangal, ”General Psychology”, Sterling Publishers Pvt. Ltd.2007

2. Baron A. Robert, ”Psychology”, Prentice Hall of India. New Delhi 2001

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. Elizabeth B. Hurlock, Developmental Psychology - A life span approach, 6th edition.

2. Feldman, Understanding Psychology, McGraw Hill, 2000.
3. Clifford Morgan, Richard King, John Scholper, ”Introduction to Psychology”, Tata Mcgraw Hill, PvtLtd
2004.
Evaluation Pattern

Assessment Internal End Semester

Periodical 1 (P1) 15

Periodical 2 (P2) 15

*Continuous Assessment (CA) 20

End Semester 50

*CA – Can be Quizzes, Assignment, Projects, and Reports.

23HUM241 SCIENCE AND SOCIETY - AN INDIAN PERSPECTIVE L-T-P-C: 2-0-0-2

Syllabus

Unit 1

Introduction

Western and Indian views of science and technology

Introduction; Francis Bacon: the first philosopher of modern science; The Indian tradition in science andtechnology: an
overview.

Unit 2

Indian sciences

Introduction; Ancient Indian medicine: towards an unbiased perspective; Indian approach to logic; The methodology
of Indian mathematics; Revision of the traditional Indian planetary model by Nilakantha Somasutvan in circa 1500
AD

Science and technology under the British rule

Introduction; Indian agriculture before modernization; The story of modern forestry in India; The building ofNew
Delhi

Unit 3

Science and technology in Independent India

Introduction; An assessment of traditional and modern energy resources; Green revolution: a historical perspective;
Impact of modernisation on milk and oilseeds economy; Planning without the spirit and thedetermination.

Building upon the Indian tradition

Introduction; Regeneration of Indian national resources; Annamahatmyam and Annam Bahu Kurvita: recollecting the
classical Indian discipline of growing and sharing food in plenty and regeneration of Indian agriculture to ensure food
for all in plenty.

Conclusion
REFERENCES:

1. Joseph, George Gheverghese. The Crest of the Peacock: Non-European Roots of Mathematics. London:
Penguin (UK), 2003.
2. Iyengar, C. N. Srinivasa. History of Hindu Mathematics. Lahore: 1935, 1938 (2 Parts).
3. Amma, T. A. Saraswati. Geometry in Ancient and Medieval India. Varanasi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1979.
4. Bag, A. K. Mathematics in Ancient and Medieval India. Varanasi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1979.
5. Sarma K. V. & B. V. Subbarayappa. Indian Astronomy: A Source-Book. Bombay: Nehru Centre, 1985.
6. Sriram, M. S. et. al. eds. 500 Years of Tantrasangraha: A Landmark in the History of Astronomy. Shimla:
Indian Institute of Advanced Study, 2002.
7. Bajaj, Jitendra & M. D. Srinivas. Restoring the Abundance: Regeneration of Indian Agriculture to
Ensure Food for All in Plenty.Shimla: Indian Institute of Advanced Study, 2001.
8. Bajaj, Jitendra ed. Report of the Seminar on Food for All: The Classical Indian Discipline of Growingand
Sharing Food in Plenty. Chennai: Centre for Policy Studies, 2001.
9. Bajaj, Jitendra & M. D. Srinivas. Annam Bahu Kurvita: Recollecting the Indian Discipline of Growingand
Sharing Food in Plenty. Madras: Centre for Policy Studies, 1996.
10. Parameswaran, S. The Golden Age of Indian Mathematics. Kochi: Swadeshi Science Movement.
11. Somayaji, D. A. A Critical Study of Ancient Hindu Astronomy. Dharwar: 1972.
12. Sen, S. N. & K. V. Sarma eds. A History of Indian Astronomy. New Delhi, 1985.
13. Rao, S. Balachandra. Indian Astronomy: An Introduction. Hyderabad: Universities Press, 2000.
14. Bose, D. M. et. al. A Concise History of Science in India. New Delhi: 1971.
15. Bajaj, Jitendra & M. D. Srinivas. Indian Economy and Polity. Chennai: Centre for Policy Studies.
 16. Bajaj, Jitendra & M. D. Srinivas. Timeless India, Resurgent India. Chennai: Centre for Policy Studies.
17. Joshi, Murli Manohar. Science, Sustainability and Indian National Resurgence. Chennai: Centre for
Policy Studies, 2008.
18. The Cultural Heritage of India. Kolkata: Ramakrishna Mission Institute of Culture.

* The syllabus and the study material in use herein has been developed out of a ‘summer programme’ offered by
the Centre for Policy Studies (CPS), Chennai at the Indian Institute of Advanced Study (IIAS), Rashtrapati Nivas,
Shimla, sometime ago. The same has been very kindly made available to us by Professors Dr M.D. Srinivas
(Chairman) and Dr J.K. Bajaj (Director) of the CPS.

Evaluation Pattern

Assessment Internal End Semester

Periodical 1 (P1) 15

Periodical 2 (P2) 15

*Continuous Assessment (CA) 20

End Semester 50

*CA – Can be Quizzes, Assignment, Projects, and Reports.

23HUM242 THE MESSAGE OF BHAGWAD GITA L-T-P-C: 2-0-0-2

Syllabus

Unit 1

Introduction: Relevance of Bhagavad Gita today – Background of Mahabharatha. ArjunaVishada

Yoga: Arjuna’s Anguish and Confusion – Symbolism of Arjuna’s Chariot.

Sankhya Yoga: Importance of Self-knowledge – Deathlessness: Indestructibility of Consciousness – Being Established in

Wisdom – Qualities of a Sthita-prajna.

Unit 2

Karma Yoga: Yoga of Action – Living in the Present – Dedicated Action without Anxiety over Results - Conceptof
Swadharma.

Dhyana Yoga: Tuning the Mind – Quantity, Quality and Direction of Thoughts – Reaching Inner Silence.

Unit 3

Bhakti Yoga: Yoga of Devotion – Form and Formless Aspects of the Divine – Inner Qualities of a True Devotee.

GunatrayaVibhaga Yoga: Dynamics of the Three Gunas: Tamas, Rajas, Sattva – Going Beyond the Three Gunas –
Description of a Gunatheetha.

TEXTBOOKS / REFERENCES:

1. Swami Chinmayananda, “The Holy Geeta”, Central Chinmaya Mission Trust, 2002.
2. Swami Chinmayananda, “A Manual of Self Unfoldment”, Central Chinmaya Mission Trust, 2001.

Evaluation Pattern

Assessment Internal End Semester

Periodical 1 (P1) 15
 Periodical 2 (P2) 15

*Continuous Assessment (CA) 20

End Semester 50

*CA – Can be Quizzes, Assignment, Projects, and Reports.

23HUM243 THE MESSAGE OF THE UPANISHADS L-T-P-C: 2-0-0-2

OBJECTIVES:

To give students an introduction to the basic ideas contained in the Upanishads; and explores how their messagecan be
applied in daily life for achieving excellence.

SyllabusUnit 1

An Introduction to the Principal Upanishads and the Bhagavad Gita - Inquiry into the mystery of nature - Sruti

versus Smrti - Sanatana Dharma: its uniqueness - The Upanishads and Indian Culture - Upanishads and ModernScience.

Unit 2

The challenge of human experience & problems discussed in the Upanishads – the True nature of Man – theMoving
power of the Spirit – The Message of Fearlessness – Universal Man - The central problems of theUpanishads –
Ultimate reality – the nature of Atman - the different manifestations of consciousness.

Unit 3

Upanishad Personalities - episodes from their lives and essential teachings: Yajnavalkya, Aruni, Uddalaka,
Pippalada,Satyakama Jabala, Svetaketu, Nachiketas, Upakosala, Chakrayana Ushasti, Raikva, Kapila and Janaka. Important
verses from Upanishads - Discussion of Sage Pippalada’s answers to the six questions in Prasnopanishad.

REFERENCES:

1. The Message of the Upanishads by Swami Ranganathananda, Bharatiya Vidya Bhavan

2. Eight Upanishads with the commentary of Sankaracharya, Advaita Ashrama
3. Indian Philosophy by Dr. S. Radhakrishnan, Oxford University Press
4. Essentials of Upanishads by R L Kashyap, SAKSI, Bangalore
5. Upanishads in Daily Life, Sri Ramakrishna Math, Mylapore.
6. Eternal stories of the Upanishads by Thomas Egenes and Kumuda Reddy
7. Upanishad Ganga series – Chinmaya Creations

Evaluation Pattern

Assessment Internal End Semester

Periodical 1 (P1) 15

Periodical 2 (P2) 15

*Continuous Assessment (CA) 20

 End Semester 50

*CA – Can be Quizzes, Assignment, Projects, and Reports.

23HUM244 UNDERSTANDING SCIENCE OF FOOD AND NUTRITION L-T-P-C: 2-0-0-2

Course Objectives:

 To introduce the significance of food, nutrients, locally available food resources, synergic food
combinations, good cooking methods and importance of diversity in foods
 To understand nutritional imbalances and chronic diseases associated with the quality of food.
 To gain awareness about the quality of food - Organic food, genetically modified food, adulterated
food,allergic food, , food poisoning and food safety.
 To understand food preservation processing, packaging and the use of additives.

Course Outcome:

CO1: Acquire knowledge about the various food and food groups

CO2: Understand nutritional imbalances and chronic diseases prevailing among different age groups.CO3:
Understand the significance of safe food and apply the food safety standards

CO4: Demonstrate skills of food processing, preservation and packaging methods with or without additives CO5:
Evaluate the quality of food based on the theoretical knowledge of Food and Nutrition

CO-PO Mapping:

PO

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO

CO 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 3

CO 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3

CO 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3

CO 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3

CO 5 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 3

SyllabusUnit 1

Food and Food Groups

Introduction to foods, food groups, locally available foods, Nutrients, Cooking methods, Synergy between foods, Science
behind foods, Food allergies, food poisoning, food safety standards.
Cookery Practicals - Balanced Diet

Unit 2

Nutrients and Nutrition

Nutrition through life cycle, RDA, Nutrition in disease, Adulteration of foods & Food additives, Packaging and labeling of
foods.

Practicals - Traditional Foods

Unit 3

Introduction to Food Biotechnology

Future foods - Organic foods and genetically modified foods, Fortification of foodsvalue addition of foods, functional
foods, Nutraceuticals, supplementary foods, Processing and preservation of foods, applications of food
technology in daily life, and your prospects associated with food industry – Nanoparticles, biosensors, advancedresearch.

Practicals - Value added foods

TEXTBOOKS:

1. N. Shakuntalamanay, M. Shadaksharaswamy, “Food Facts and principles”, New age international (P)
ltd, publishers, 2005.
2. B. Srilakshmi, “Dietetics”, New age international (P) ltd, publishers, 2010.

REFERENCE BOOKS:

1. B. Srilakshmi, “Food Science”, New age international (P) ltd, publishers, 2008.
2. “Nutrient requirement and Recommended Dietary Allowances for Indians”, published by Indian Council
of Medical Research, ICMR, 2010.

Evaluation Pattern

Assessment Internal End Semester

Periodical 1 (P1) 15

Periodical 2 (P2) 15

*Continuous Assessment (CA) 20

End Semester 50

*CA – Can be Quizzes, Assignment, Projects, and Reports.

23JAP230 PROFICIENCY IN JAPANESE LANGUAGE (LOWER) L-T-P-C: 2-0-0-2

Syllabus

This paper will introduce the basics of Japanese language. Students will be taught the language through various
activities like writing, reading, singing songs, showing Japanese movies etc. Moreover this paper intends to givea
thorough knowledge on Japanese scripts that is Hiragana and Katakana. Classes will be conducted throughoutin
Japanese class only. Students will be able to make conversations with each other in Japanese. Students can make
self-introduction and will be able to write letters in Japanese. All the students will be given a text on Japanese verbs
and tenses.

Students can know about the Japanese culture and the lifestyle. Calligraphy is also a part of this paper. Informal
sessions will be conducted occasionally, in which students can sing Japanese songs, watch Japanese movies, do
Origami – pattern making using paper.

Evaluation Pattern

Assessment Internal End Semester

Periodical 1 (P1) 15

Periodical 2 (P2) 15

*Continuous Assessment (CA) 20

End Semester 50

*CA – Can be Quizzes, Assignment, Projects, and Reports.

23JAP231 PROFICIENCY IN JAPANESE LANGUAGE (HIGHER) L-T-P-C: 2-0-0-2

Syllabus

Students will be taught the third and the most commonly used Japanese script, Kanji. Students will be taught towrite as
well as speak.

Students will be given detailed lectures on Calligraphy.

This version of the course includes a new project where the students should make a short movie in Japaneselanguage
selecting their own topics.

By the end of the semester they the students will master the subject in all means. They will be able to speak Japanese
as fluently as they speak English. Students will be encouraged to write stories and songs in Japaneselanguage
themselves.

Evaluation Pattern

Assessment Internal End Semester

Periodical 1 (P1) 15

Periodical 2 (P2) 15

*Continuous Assessment (CA) 20

End Semester 50

*CA – Can be Quizzes, Assignment, Projects, and Reports.

23KAN230 KANNADA I L-T-P-C: 2-0-0-2

OBJECTIVES:

To enable the students to acquire basic skills in functional language; to develop independent reading skills andreading
for appreciating literary works; to analyse language in context to gain an understanding of vocabulary, spelling,
punctuation and speech.

SyllabusUnit 1

Adalitha Kannada: bhashe, swaroopa, belavanigeya kiru parichaya Paaribhaashika padagalu

Vocabulary Building

Unit 2

Prabhandha – Vyaaghra Geethe - A. N. Murthy Rao

Prabhandha – Baredidi…baredidi, Baduku mugiyuvudilla allige…- Nemi Chandra Paragraph writing –Development:
comparison, definition, cause & effect Essay – Descriptive & Narrative

Unit 3

Mochi – Bharateepriya

Mosarina Mangamma – Maasti Venkatesh Iyengar Kamalaapurada Hotelnalli – Panje Mangesh Rao Kaanike – B.

M. Shree

Geleyanobbanige bareda Kaagada – Dr. G. S. Shivarudrappa Moodala Mane – Da. Ra. Bendre
Swathantryada Hanate – K. S. Nissaar Ahmed

Unit 4

Letter W riting - Personal: Congratulation, thanks giving, invitation, condolence

Unit 5

Reading Comprehension; nudigattu, gaadegalu Speaking Skills: Prepared speech, pick and speak
REFERENCES:

1. H. S. Krishna Swami Iyangar – Adalitha Kannada – Chetana Publication, Mysuru

2. N. Murthy Rao – Aleyuva Mana – Kuvempu Kannada Adyayana Samste
3. Nemi Chandra – Badhuku Badalisabahudu – Navakarnataka Publication
4. Sanna Kathegalu - Prasaranga, Mysuru University , Mysuru
5. B. M. Shree – Kannadada Bavuta – Kannada Sahitya Parishattu
6. K. S. Nissar Ahmed – 75 Bhaavageetegalu – Sapna Book House (P) Ltd.
7. Dr. G. S. Shivarudrappa – Samagra Kavya – Kamadhenu Pustaka Bhavana

Evaluation Pattern

Assessment Internal End Semester

Periodical 1 (P1) 15

Periodical 2 (P2) 15

*Continuous Assessment (CA) 20

End Semester 50

*CA – Can be Quizzes, Assignment, Projects, and Reports.

23KAN231 KANNADA II L-T-P-C: 2-0-0-2

OBJECTIVES:

To enable the students to acquire basic skills in functional language; to develop independent reading skills andreading for
appreciating literary works; to develop functional and creative skills in language; to enable the students to plan, draft,
edit & present a piece of writing.

SyllabusUnit 1

Official Correspondence: Adhikrutha patra, prakatane, manavi patra, vanijya patra

Unit 2

Nanna Hanate - Dr. G. S. Shivarudrappa

Mankuthimmana Kaggada Ayda bhagagalu – D. V. Gundappa (Padya Sankhye 5, 20, 22, 23, 25, 44, 344, 345,

346, 601)

Ella Marethiruvaga - K. S. Nissaar Ahmed Saviraru Nadigalu – S Siddalingayya

Unit 3

Sayo Aata – Da. Ra. Bendre

Unit 4

Sarva Sollegala turtu Maha Samelana - Beechi Swarthakkaagi Tyaga - Beechi

Unit 5

Essay writing: Argumentative & Analytical Précis writing

REFERENCES:

1. H. S. Krishnaswami Iyangar – Adalitha Kannada – Chetan Publication, Mysuru

2. Dr. G. S. Shivarudrappa – Samagra Kavya. - Kamadhenu Pustaka Bhavana
3. Shrikanth - Mankuthimmana Kagga – Taatparya – Sri Ranga Printers & Binders
 4. K. S. Nissar Ahmed – 75 Bhaavageetegalu – Sapna book house
5. Dr. Da. Ra. Bendre – Saayo Aata – Shri Maata Publication
6. Beechi – Sahukara Subbamma – Sahitya Prakashana

Evaluation Pattern

Assessment Internal End Semester

Periodical 1 (P1) 15

Periodical 2 (P2) 15

*Continuous Assessment (CA) 20

End Semester 50

*CA – Can be Quizzes, Assignment, Projects, and Reports.

23MAL230 MALAYALAM I L-T-P-C: 2-0-0-2

Course Objectives:

To appreciate the aesthetics & cultural implications; to enhance creative thinking in mother0-tongue; to learn ourculture
& values; to equip students read & write correct Malayalam; to correct the mistakes in pronunciation; to create
awareness that good language is the sign of complete personality

Course Outcome:

After the completion of the course the student will be able to:

CO1: Understand and inculcate philosophical thoughts and

practices CO2: Understand and appreciate the post modern trends of
literature.

CO3: Analyse the literary texts and comprehend the cultural diversity of
KeralaCO4: Distinguish the different genres in Malayalam literature

CO5: Demonstrate the ability to effectively communicate in Malayalam

CO-PO Mapping:

PO

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO

CO1 - - - - - - - - 2 3 - -

CO2 - - - - - - - - 2 3 - -

CO3 - - - - - - - - 2 3 - -

CO4 - - - - - - - - - 3 - -

CO5 - - - - - - - - 1 1 - -

SyllabusUnit 1
Ancient poet trio: Adhyatmaramayanam,

Lakshmana Swanthanam (valsa soumitre… mungikidakayal), Ezhuthachan - Medieval period classics –Jnanappana
(kalaminnu… vilasangalingane), Poonthanam

Unit 2

Modern Poet trio: Ente Gurunathan, Vallathol Narayana Menon - Critical analysis of the poem.

Unit 3

Short stories from period 1/2/3, Poovanpazham - Vaikaom Muhammed Basheer - Literary & Cultural figures ofKerala and
about their literary contributions.

Unit 4

Literary Criticism: Ithihasa studies - Bharatha Paryadanam - Vyasante Chiri - Kuttikrishna Mararu - Outline of literary
Criticism in Malayalam Literature - Introduction to Kutti Krishna Mararu & his outlook towards literature & life.

Unit 5

Error-free Malayalam: 1. Language; 2. Clarity of expression; 3. Punctuation – Thettillatha Malayalam

Writing - a. Expansion of ideas; b .Precis Writing; c. Essay Writing; d. Letter writing; e. Radio Speech; f. Script /Feature /
Script Writing; g. News Editing; h. Advertising; i. Editing; j. Editorial Writing; k. Critical appreciation of literary works
(Any one or two as an assignment).

REFERENCES:

1. P. K. Balakrishnanan, Thunjan padhanangal, D. C. Books, 2007.

2. G. Balakrishnan Nair, Jnanappanayum Harinama Keerthanavum, N. B. S, 2005.
3. M. N. Karasseri, Basheerinte Poonkavanam, D. C. Books, 2008.
4. 4 M. N. Vijayan, Marubhoomikal Pookkumbol, D. C. Books, 2010.
5. M. Thomas Mathew, Lavanyanubhavathinte Yukthisasthram, National Book Stall, 2009.
6. M. Leelavathy, Kavitha Sahityacharitram, National Book Stall, 1998.
7. Thayattu Sankaran, Vallathol Kavithapadhanam, D. C. Books, 2004.

Evaluation Pattern

Assessment Internal End Semester

Periodical 1 (P1) 15

Periodical 2 (P2) 15

*Continuous Assessment (CA) 20

End Semester 50

*CA – Can be Quizzes, Assignment, Projects, and Reports.

23MAL231 MALAYALAM II L-T-P-C: 2-0-0-2

OBJECTIVES:

To appreciate the aesthetics & cultural implications; to enhance creative thinking in mother-tongue; to learn our
culture & values; to equip students read & write correct Malayalam; to correct the mistakes in pronunciation; tocreate
awareness that good language is the sign of complete personality.

Course Outcome:

After the completion of the course the student will be able to:

CO1: Understand the different cultural influences in linguistic translation CO2:

Identify and appreciate the Romantic elements of modern literatureCO3: Analyze
the genre of autobiographical writing

CO4: Critically evaluate the significance of historical, political and socio cultural aspects in literature CO5:
Demonstrate good writing skills in Malayalam

CO-PO Mapping:

PO

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO

CO1 - - - - - - - - 2 3 - -

CO2 - - - - - - - - 2 3 - -

CO3 - - - - - - - - 2 3 - -

CO4 - - - - - - - - - 3 - -

CO5 - - - - - - - - 1 1 - -

SyllabusUnit 1

Ancient poet trio: Kalayanasougandhikam, (kallum marangalun… namukkennarika vrikodara) Kunjan Nambiar - Critical
analysis of his poetry - Ancient Drama: Kerala Sakunthalam (Act 1), Kalidasan (Translated by Attor Krishna Pisharody).
Unit 2

Modern / romantic / contemporary poetry: Manaswini, Changampuzha Krishna Pillai – Romanticism – modernism.

Unit 3

Anthology of short stories from period 3/4/5: Ninte Ormmayku, M. T. Vasudevan Nair - literary contributions of his time

Unit 4

Part of an autobiography / travelogue: Kannerum Kinavum, V. T. Bhattathirippadu - Socio-cultural literature - historical

importance.

Unit 5

Error-free Malayalam - 1. Language; 2. Clarity of expression; 3. Punctuation - Thettillatha Malayalam

W riting - a. Expansion of ideas; b. Précis Writing ; c. Essay Writing; d. Letter writing; e. Radio Speech; f. Script /Feature /
Script Writing; g. News Editing; h. Advertising; i. Editing; j. Editorial Writing; k. Critical appreciationof literary works
(Any one or two as an assignment).

REFERENCES:

1. Narayana Pillai. P. K, Sahitya Panchanan. Vimarsanathrayam, Kerala Sahitya Academy, 2000

2. Sankunni Nair. M. P, Chathravum Chamaravum, D. C. Books, 2010.
3. Gupthan Nair. S, Asthiyude Pookkal, D. C Books. 2005
4. Panmana Ramachandran Nair, Thettillatha Malayalam, Sariyum thettum etc., D. C. Book, 2006.
5. M. Achuthan, Cherukatha-Innale, innu, National Book Stall, 1998.
6. N. Krishna Pillai, Kairaliyude Katha, National Book Stall, 2001.

Evaluation Pattern

Assessment Internal End Semester

Periodical 1 (P1) 15

Periodical 2 (P2) 15

*Continuous Assessment (CA) 20

End Semester 50

*CA – Can be Quizzes, Assignment, Projects, and Reports.

23SAN230 SANSKRIT I L-T-P-C: 2-0-0-2

OBJECTIVES:

To familiarize students with Sanskrit language and literature; to enable them to read and understand Sanskritverses
and sentences; to help them acquire expertise for self- study of Sanskrit texts and communication in Sanskrit; to
help the students imbibe values of life and Indian culture as propounded in scriptures.

SyllabusUnit 1

Introduction to Sanskrit language, Devanagari script - Vowels and consonants, pronunciation, classification of

consonants, conjunct consonants, words – nouns and verbs, cases – introduction, numbers, Pronouns,communicating
time in Sanskrit. Practical classes in spoken Sanskrit

Unit 2

Verbs- Singular, Dual and plural – First person, Second person, Third person. Tenses – Past, Present and Future –
Atmanepadi and Parasmaipadi-karthariprayoga

Unit 3

Words for communication, slokas, moral stories, subhashithas, riddles (from the books prescribed)

Unit 4

Selected slokas from Valmiki Ramayana, Kalidasa’s works and Bhagavad Gita. Ramayana – chapter VIII - verse5,
Mahabharata - chapter 174, verse -16, Bhagavad Gita – chapter - IV verse 8, Kalidasa’s Sakuntalam Act IV – verse 4

Unit 5

Translation of simple sentences from Sanskrit to English and vice versa.

ESSENTIAL READING:

1. Praveshaha; Publisher: Samskrita bharati, Aksharam, 8th cross, 2nd phase, girinagar, Bangalore - 560
085
2. Sanskrit Reader I, II and III, R. S. Vadhyar and Sons, Kalpathi, Palakkad
3. Prakriya Bhashyam written and published by Fr. John Kunnappally
4. Sanskrit Primer by Edward Delavan Perry, published by Ginn and Company Boston
5. Sabdamanjari, R. S. Vadyar and Sons, Kalpathi, Palakkad
 6. Namalinganusasanam by Amarasimha published by Travancore Sanskrit series
7. Subhashita Ratna Bhandakara by Kashinath Sharma, published by Nirnayasagar press

Evaluation Pattern

Assessment Internal End Semester

Periodical 1 (P1) 15

Periodical 2 (P2) 15

*Continuous Assessment (CA) 20

End Semester 50

*CA – Can be Quizzes, Assignment, Projects, and Reports.

23SAN231 SANSKRIT II L-T-P-C: 2-0-0-2

OBJECTIVES:

To familiarize students with Sanskrit language and literature; to enable them to read and understand Sanskritverses
and sentences; to help them acquire expertise for self- study of Sanskrit texts and communication in Sanskrit; to
help the students imbibe values of life and Indian culture as propounded in scriptures.

SyllabusUnit 1

Seven cases, indeclinables, sentence making with indeclinables, Saptha karakas.

Unit 2

Ktavatu Pratyaya, Upasargas, Ktvanta, Tumunnanta, Lyabanta. Three Lakaras – brief introduction, Lot lakara.

Unit 3

W ords and sentences for advanced communication. Slokas, moral stories (Pancatantra) Subhashitas, riddles.

Unit 4

Introduction to classical literature, classification of Kavyas, classification of Dramas - The five Mahakavyas, selected
slokas from devotional kavyas- Bhagavad Gita – chapter - II verse 47, chapter - IV verse 7, chapter -VI verse 5,
chapter - VIII verse 6, chapter - XVI verse 21, Kalidasa’s Sakuntala act IV – verse 4, Isavasyopanishat 1st Mantra,
Mahabharata chapter 149 verses 14 - 120, Neetisara chapter - III

Unit 5

Translation of paragraphs from Sanskrit to English and vice versa.

ESSENTIAL READING:

1. Praveshaha; Publisher: Samskrita bharati, Aksharam, 8th cross, 2nd phase, girinagar, Bangalore -560
085
2. Sanskrit Reader I, II and III, R.S. Vadhyar and Sons, Kalpathi, Palakkad
3. Prakriya Bhashyam written and published by Fr. John Kunnappally
4. Sanskrit Primer by Edward Delavan Perry, published by Ginn and Company Boston
5. Sabdamanjari, R. S. Vadyar and Sons, Kalpathi, Palakkad
6. Namalinganusasanam by Amarasimha published by Travancore Sanskrit series
7. Subhashita Ratna Bhandakara by Kashinath Sharma, published by Nirnayasagar Press.
Evaluation Pattern

Assessment Internal End Semester

Periodical 1 (P1) 15

Periodical 2 (P2) 15

*Continuous Assessment (CA) 20

End Semester 50

*CA – Can be Quizzes, Assignment, Projects, and Reports.

23SWK230 CORPORATE SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITY L-T-P-C: 2-0-0-2

Syllabus

Unit 1

Understanding CSR - Evolution, importance, relevance and justification. CSR in the Indian context, corporate strategy. CSR
and Indian corporate. Structure of CSR - In the Companies Act 2013 (Section 135); Rules underSection 13; CSR activities,
CSR committees, CSR policy, CSR expenditure CSR reporting.

Unit 2

CSR Practices & Policies - CSR practices in domestic and international area; Role and contributions of voluntary
organizations to CSR initiatives. Policies; Preparation of CSR policy and process of policy formulation; Government
expectations, roles and responsibilities. Role of implementation agency in Section 135 of the Companies Act, 2013.
Effective CSR implementation.

Unit 3

Project Management in CSR initiatives - Project and programme; Monitoring and evaluation of CSR Interventions.
Reporting - CSR Documentation and report writing. Reporting framework, format and procedure.

REFERENCES:

1. Corporate Governance, Ethics and Social Responsibility, V Bala Chandran and V Chandrasekaran, PHI
learning Private Limited, New Delhi 2011.
2. White H. (2005) Challenges in evaluating development effectiveness: Working paper 242, Institute of
Development Studies, Brighton.
3. UNDP (nd) Governance indicators: A users guide. Oslo: UNDP
4. Rao, Subbha (1996) Essentials of Human Resource Management and Industrial Relations, Mumbai,
Himalaya
5. Rao, V. S. L. (2009) Human Resource Management, New Delhi, Excel Books,
Evaluation Pattern

Assessment Internal End Semester

Periodical 1 (P1) 15

Periodical 2 (P2) 15

*Continuous Assessment (CA) 20

End Semester 50
*CA – Can be Quizzes, Assignment, Projects, and Reports.
23SWK231 WORKPLACE MENTAL HEALTH L-T-P-C: 2-0-0-2

Syllabus

Unit 1

Mental Health – concepts, definition, Bio-psycho-social model of mental health. Mental health and mental illness,
characteristics of a mentally healthy individual, Signs and symptoms of mental health issues, presentation of a
mentally ill person. Work place – definition, concept, prevalence of mental health issues in the work place, why invest
in workplace mental health, relationship between mental health and productivity, organizational culture and mental
health. Case Study, Activity.

Unit 2

Mental Health Issues in the Workplace: Emotions, Common emotions at the workplace, Mental Health issues - Anger,
Anxiety, Stress & Burnout, Depression, Addictions – Substance and Behavioural, Psychotic Disorders - Schizophrenia,
Bipolar Disorder, Personality disorders. Crisis Situations - Suicidal behavior, panic attacks, reactions to traumatic
events. Stigma and exclusion of affected employees. Other issues –work-life balance, Presenteeism, Harassment,
Bullying, Mobbing. Mental Health First Aid - Meaning. Case Study, Activity.

Unit 3

Strategies of Help and Care: Positive impact of work on health, Characteristics of mentally healthy workplace, Employee
and employer obligations, Promoting mental health and well being- corporate social responsibility (CSR), an inclusive
work environment, Training and awareness raising, managing performance, inclusive recruitment, Supporting
individuals-talking about mental health, making reasonable adjustments, Resources and support for employees -
Employee Assistance Programme / Provider (EAP), in house counsellor, medical practitioners, online resources and
telephone support, 24 hour crisis support, assistance for colleagues and care givers, Legislations. Case Study, Activity.

REFERENCES:

1. American Psychiatric Association. “Diagnostic and statistical manual of mental disorders: DSM-IV 4th
ed.” www.terapiacognitiva.eu/dwl/dsm5/DSM-IV.pdf
2. American Psychiatric Association. (2000) www.ccsa.ca/Eng/KnowledgeCentre/OurDatabases/
Glossary/Pages/index.aspx.
 3. Canadian Mental Health Association, Ontario “Workplace mental health promotion, A how to
guide”wmhp.cmhaontario.ca/
4. Alberta Health Services Mental Health Promotion. (2012). Minding the Workplace: Tips for employees
and managers together. Calgary: Alberta Health Services.http://
www.mentalhealthpromotion.net/resources/minding-the-workplace-tips-for-employees-and- managers-
together.pdf
5. Government of Western Australia, Mental Health Commission. (2014) “Supporting good mental health
in the work place.” http://www.mentalhealth.wa.gov.au/Libraries/pdf_docs/
supporting_good_mental_health_in_the_workplace_1.sflb.ashx
6. Mental Health Act 1987 (India) www.tnhealth.org/mha.htm
7. Persons with disabilities Act 1995 (India) socialjustice.nic.in
8. The Factories Act 1948 (India) www.caaa.in/Image/19ulabourlawshb.pdf

Evaluation Pattern

Assessment Internal End Semester

Periodical 1 (P1) 15

Periodical 2 (P2) 15

*Continuous Assessment (CA) 20

End Semester 50

*CA – Can be Quizzes, Assignment, Projects, and Reports.

23TAM230 TAMIL I L-T-P-C: 2-0-0-2

Course Objectives:

 To introduce the students to different literature- Sangam literature, Epics, Bhakthi

literatureandmodern literature.
 To improve their ability tocommunicate with creative concepts, and also to introduce them to
theusefulness of basicgrammaticalcomponents in Tamil.

Course Outcomes

CO 1: To understand the Sangam literatureCO 2:

To understand the creative literature

CO 3: To understand the literary work on religious scripturesCO 4:

To improve the communication and memory skills

CO 5: To understand the basic grammar components of Tamil language and their usage and applications.CO 6:
Understand creative writing aspects and apply them.

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PSO

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO

CO1 - - - - - - 2 2 - -

CO2 - - - - - - 2 2 - -

CO3 - - - - - - 2 2 - -

CO4 - - - - - - 2 2 - -

CO5 - - - - - - 2 2 - -

CO6 - - - - - - 2 2 - -

SyllabusUnit1

The history ofTamilliterature: Nāṭṭupuṟap pāṭalkaḷ, kataikkaḷ, paḻamoḻikaḷ - ciṟukataikaḷ tōṟṟamum vaḷarcciyum,
ciṟṟilakkiyaṅkaḷ: Kaliṅkattup paraṇi (pōrpāṭiyatu) - mukkūṭaṟ paḷḷu 35.

Kāppiyaṅkaḷ: Cilappatikāram – maṇimēkalai naṭaiyiyal āyvu maṟṟum aimperum – aiñciṟuṅ kāppiyaṅkaḷ toṭarpāṉa
ceytikaḷ.

Unit 2
tiṇai ilakkiyamum nītiyilakkiyamum - patiṉeṇkīḻkkaṇakku nūlkaḷ toṭarpāṉa piṟa ceytikaḷ - tirukkuṟaḷ (aṉpu, paṇpu, kalvi,
oḻukkam, naṭpu, vāymai, kēḷvi, ceynaṉṟi, periyāraittuṇakkōṭal, viḻippuṇarvu pēṉṟa atikārattil uḷḷa ceytikaḷ.

Aṟanūlkaḷ: Ulakanīti (1-5) – ēlāti (1,3,6). - Cittarkaḷ: Kaṭuveḷi cittar pāṭalkaḷ (āṉantak kaḷippu –1, 4, 6, 7,

8) , maṟṟum akappēy cittar pāṭalkaḷ (1-5).

Unit 3

tamiḻ ilakkaṇam: Vākkiya vakaikaḷ – taṉviṉai piṟaviṉai – nērkkūṟṟu ayaṟkūṟṟu

Unit 4

tamiḻaka aṟiñarkaḷiṉ tamiḻ toṇṭum camutāya toṇṭum: Pāratiyār, pāratitācaṉ, paṭṭukkōṭṭai kalyāṇacuntaram, curatā, cujātā, ciṟpi, mēttā,
aptul rakumāṉ, na.Piccaimūrtti, akilaṉ, kalki, jī.Yū.Pōp, vīramāmuṉivar, aṇṇā, paritimāṟ kalaiñar, maṟaimalaiyaṭikaḷ.

Unit 5

tamiḻ moḻi āyvil kaṇiṉi payaṉpāṭu. - Karuttu parimāṟṟam - viḷampara moḻiyamaippu – pēccu - nāṭakam paṭaippu -ciṟukatai,
katai, putiṉam paṭaippu.

Textbooks:

1. http:/Www.tamilvu.trg/libirary/libindex.htm.
2. http:/Www.tunathamizh.tom/2013/07/blog0post_24.html
3. Mu.Varatarācaṉ “tamiḻ ilakkiya varalāṟu” cāhitya akaṭemi papḷikēṣaṉs, 2012
4. nā.Vāṉamāmalai “paḻaṅkataikaḷum, paḻamoḻikaḷum” niyū ceñcuri puttaka veḷiyīṭṭakam,
5. 1980,2008
6. nā.Vāṉamāmalai, “tamiḻar nāṭṭuppāṭalkaḷ” niyū ceñcuri puttaka veḷiyīṭṭakam 1964,2006
7. poṉ maṇimāṟaṉ “aṭōṉ tamiḻ ilakkaṇam “aṭōṉ papḷiṣiṅ kurūp, vañciyūr,
8. tiruvaṉantapuram, 2007.

Evaluation Pattern

Assessment Internal End Semester

Periodical 1 (P1) 15

Periodical 2 (P2) 15

*Continuous Assessment (CA) 20

End Semester 50

*CA – Can be Quizzes, Assignment, Projects, and Reports.

23TAM231 TAMIL II L-T-P-C: 2-0-0-2

Course Objectives

 To learn the history of Tamil literature.

 To analyze different styles of Tamil Language.
 To strengthen the creativity in communication, Tamil basic grammar and use of computer on
TamilLanguage.

Course Outcomes

CO 1: Understand the history of Tamil literature.

CO 2: Apply practical and comparative analyses on literature.

CO 3: Understand thinai literature, literature on justice, Pathinenkeelkanaku literature.CO 4:

Understand the tamil scholars’ service to Tamil language and society.

CO 5: Understand components of Tamil grammar and its usageCO 6:

Understand creative writing aspects and apply them

CO-PO Mapping

PO/PSO

PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5 PO6 PO7 PO8 PO9 PO10 PO11 PO12
CO

CO1 - - - - - - 2 2 - -

CO2 - - - - - - 2 2 - -

CO3 - - - - - - 2 2 - -

CO4 - - - - - - 2 2 - -

CO5 - - - - - - 2 2 - -

CO6 - - - - - - 2 2 - -

SyllabusUnit 1

The history ofTamilliterature: Nāṭṭupuṟap pāṭalkaḷ, kataikkaḷ, paḻamoḻikaḷ - ciṟukataikaḷ tōṟṟamum vaḷarcciyum,
ciṟṟilakkiyaṅkaḷ: Kaliṅkattup paraṇi (pōrpāṭiyatu) - mukkūṭaṟ paḷḷu 35.

Kāppiyaṅkaḷ: Cilappatikāram – maṇimēkalai naṭaiyiyal āyvu maṟṟum aimperum – aiñciṟuṅ kāppiyaṅkaḷ toṭarpāṉa
ceytikaḷ.
Unit 2

tiṇai ilakkiyamum nītiyilakkiyamum - patiṉeṇkīḻkkaṇakku nūlkaḷ toṭarpāṉa piṟa ceytikaḷ - tirukkuṟaḷ (aṉpu, paṇpu, kalvi,
oḻukkam, naṭpu, vāymai, kēḷvi, ceynaṉṟi, periyāraittuṇakkōṭal, viḻippuṇarvu pēṉṟa atikārattil uḷḷa ceytikaḷ.

Aṟanūlkaḷ: Ulakanīti (1-5) – ēlāti (1,3,6). - Cittarkaḷ: Kaṭuveḷi cittar pāṭalkaḷ (āṉantak kaḷippu –1, 4, 6, 7,

8), maṟṟum akappēy cittar pāṭalkaḷ (1-5).

Unit 3

tamiḻ ilakkaṇam: Vākkiya vakaikaḷ – taṉviṉai piṟaviṉai – nērkkūṟṟu ayaṟkūṟṟu

Unit 4

tamiḻaka aṟiñarkaḷiṉ tamiḻ toṇṭum camutāya toṇṭum: Pāratiyār, pāratitācaṉ, paṭṭukkōṭṭai kalyāṇacuntaram, curatā, cujātā,
ciṟpi, mēttā, aptul rakumāṉ, na.Piccaimūrtti, akilaṉ, kalki, jī.Yū.Pōp, vīramāmuṉivar, aṇṇā, paritimāṟ kalaiñar,
maṟaimalaiyaṭikaḷ.
Unit 5

tamiḻ moḻi āyvil kaṇiṉi payaṉpāṭu. - Karuttu parimāṟṟam - viḷampara moḻiyamaippu – pēccu - nāṭakam
paṭaippu -ciṟukatai, katai, putiṉam paṭaippu.

Text Books / References

http:/Www.tamilvu.trg/libirary/libindex.htm. http:/Www.tunathamizh.tom/2013/07/blog0post_24.html
Mu.Varatarācaṉ “tamiḻ ilakkiya varalāṟu” cāhitya akaṭemi papḷikēṣaṉs, 2012

nā.Vāṉamāmalai “paḻaṅkataikaḷum, paḻamoḻikaḷum” niyū ceñcuri puttaka veḷiyīṭṭakam, 1980,2008

nā.Vāṉamāmalai, “tamiḻar nāṭṭuppāṭalkaḷ” niyū ceñcuri puttaka veḷiyīṭṭakam 1964,2006 poṉ
maṇimāṟaṉ “aṭōṉ tamiḻ ilakkaṇam “aṭōṉ papḷiṣiṅ kurūp, vañciyū

Evaluation Pattern

Assessment Internal End Semester

Periodical 1 (P1) 15

Periodical 2 (P2) 15

*Continuous Assessment (CA) 20

End Semester 50

*CA – Can be Quizzes, Assignment, Projects, and Reports.

339